Eiesyllabus

B.E.
(ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

ENGINEERING)
2011 Regulations (Revision 2013), Curriculum & Syllabi
BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

(An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai
Approved by AICTE-Accredited by NBA New Delhi, NACC with =A
08 Certified)
Grade and ISO 9001:20
SATHYAMANGALAM-638401 Erode District Tamilnadu

Phone: 04295 226000 Fax: 04295 226666
Web: www.bitsathy.ac.in E-mail:bitsathy@bannari.com
BIT__2008-09_2
CONTENTS
Page No
Regulations
i
PEOs
x
POs
xi
Mapping of PEOs and POs
xii
Connectivity Chart
xiii
Curriculum 2011
xiv
Syllabi (I-VIII Semester)
1
Electives
201
Programme Educational Objective(s)
After quite-a-few years of graduation, the EIE graduates would

PEO I
work in core Instrumentation, allied industries and software
companies and /or become successful entrepreneurs
PEO II
pursue their higher studies at the reputed institutions in
India/abroad and work in educational institutions, research
organizations and engineering consultancy companies
PEO III
have the social responsibility, team work skill, leadership
capabilities and lifelong learning in their professional field
Program Outcome(s)
PO1. Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an
instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex
engineering problems.
PO2. Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first
principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3. Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop
Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified
needs with appropriate consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societ
al
and environmental issues.
PO4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge a
nd
research methods, including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation o
f
data and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5. Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources
and
modern engineering and computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6. Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health
,
safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant t
o
professional engineering practice.
PO7. Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts and demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable
development.
PO8. Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibili
ties
and norms of engineering practice.
PO9. Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
multidisciplinary teams.
PO10. Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the enginee
ring
community and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations and giv
e
and receive clear instructions.
PO11. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management
principles and apply these to one s own work, as a member and leader in a team,
to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12. Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and lifelong learning.
Mapping of PEOs and POs
POs
PEOs
Programme Outcomes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PEO I
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PEO II
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
PEO III
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

(Minimum credits to be earned: 192)
First Semester
Code No.
Course
Objective(s) & Outcomes
L
T
P
C
PEOs
POs
11O101
Engineering Mathematics I*
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11O102
Engineering Physics*
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
3
0
0
3.0
11O103
Engineering Chemistry*
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3
3
0
0
3.0
Language Elective I
3
0
0
3.0
11O105
Basics of Civil and Mechanical
Engineering**
I, II, III
PO1, PO2
4
0
0
4.0
11N106
=C Programming
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO12
2
0
2
3.0
11N107
Electric Circuit Analysis
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11O108
Engineering Physics Laboratory#
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO4
0
0
2
1.0
11O109
Engineering Chemistry Laboratory#
I, II, III
PO1, PO2
0
0
2
1.0
Total
21
2
6
25.0
Second Semester
Code No.
Course
L
T
P
C
PEOs
Pos
11O201
Engineering Mathematics II*
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3
3
1
0
3.5
11O202
Environmental Science*
I, II, III
PO1, PO3, PO7
3
0
0
3.0
Language Elective II
3
1
0
3.5
11N204
Materials Science.
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO7,
PO8
3
0
0
3.0
11N205
Electron Devices and Circuits
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11N206
Object Oriented Programming
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO12
3
0
0
3.0
11N207
Object Oriented Programming Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
0
0
3
1.5
11O208
Engineering Graphics$
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
2
0
2
3.0
11N209
Workshop Practice
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO7,
PO8, PO11
0
0
2
1.0
Total
20
3
7
25.0
* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech

Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. (Continuous Assessment)
** Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech ECE, EIE, ME, BT (I Semester);CSE, EEE
, FT, IT & TT (II
Semester),
except AE & CE
# Common for AE, CE, CSE, ECE & EIE (I Semester); EEE, ME, BT, FT, IT & TT (II S
emester)
$ Common for EEE, ME, BT, FT, IT & TT (I Semester); AE, CE, CSE, ECE & EIE (II S
emester)
. Common to CSE, EEE, ECE, EIE and IT
Third Semester
Code No.
Course
L
T
P
C
PEOs
Pos
11O301
Engineering Mathematics III.
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11N302
Digital Logic Circuits$
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3
3
1
0
3.5
11N303
Measurements and Instrumentation
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO12
3
1
0
3.5
11N304
Fluid and Solid Mechanics
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3
3
1
0
3.5
11N305
Applied Thermodynamics
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11N306
Electrical Machines
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO4,
PO12
3
0
0
3.0
11N307
Electric Circuits and Machines Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
0
0
3
1.5
11N308
Electron Devices and Circuits Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO3, PO4
0
0
3
1.5
11N309
Fluid Controller and Applied
Thermodynamics Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO6, PO7
0
0
3
1.5
Total
18
5
9
25.0
Fourth Semester
Code No.
Course
L
T
P
C
PEOs
Pos
11N401
Numerical Methods and Linear
Programming
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11N402
Control Engineering
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO6
3
1
0
3.5
11N403
Transducers Engineering
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO5, PO8
3
0
0
3.0
11N404
Communication Engineering
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO12
3
1
0
3.5
11N405
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
I, II, III
PO1 to PO5
3
1
0
3.5
11N406
Linear Integrated Circuits
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11N407
Sensors and Transducers Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO4, PO5,
PO6
0
0
3
1.5
11N408
Control Systems Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO5,
PO6,PO12
0
0
3
1.5
11N409
Linear and Digital IC Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO12
0
0
3
1.5
Total
18
5
9
25.0
. Common for all branches of B.E/B.Tech except CSE and BT

$ Common to EEE and EIE
Fifth Semester
Code No.
Course
L
T
P
C
PEOs
POs
11N501
Industrial Instrumentation I
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO7,
PO8, PO12
3
0
0
3.0
11N502
Digital Signal Processing
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
3
1
0
3.5
11N503
Virtual Instrumentation
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,

PO4, PO5, PO12
2
0
2
3.0
11N504
Process Control
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO6, PO8,
PO12
3
0
0
3.0
11N505
Creativity & Innovation and Total Quality
Management
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO6, PO7,
PO8, PO9
3
0
0
3.0
Elective I
3.0
11N507
Process Control Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO5, PO6,
PO7, PO8, PO12
0
0
3
1.5
11N508
Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO5, PO12
0
0
3
1.5
11N509
Communication Engineering and Digital
Signal Processing Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO5, PO12
0
0
3
1.5
11N510
Technical Seminar I
I, II, III
PO6, PO9,
PO10, PO12
1.0
Total
14
1
11
24.0.
Sixth Semester
Code No.
Course
L
T
P
C
PEOs
Pos
11N601
Industrial Instrumentation II
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO7,
PO8, PO12
3
0
0
3.0
11N602
Analytical Instruments
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO7,
PO8
3
0
0
3.0
11N603
VLSI Design
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3
3
1
0
3.5
11N604
Embedded System
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3
3
1
0
3.5
11N605
Power Plant Instrumentation
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO6, PO8,
PO12
3
0
0
3.0
Elective II
3.0
11N607
VLSI and Embedded System Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1 to PO4
0
0
3
1.5
11N608
Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO7
0
0
3
1.5
11N609
Technical Seminar II
I, II, III
PO6, PO9,
PO10, PO12
1.0
Total
15
2
6
23.0.
. Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the tot
al number of L T P
hours may vary depending upon the electives courses offered.
Seventh Semester
Code
No.
Course
L
T
P
C
PEOs
Pos
11O701
Engineering Economics*
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO6, PO7
3
0
0
3.0
11N702
Industrial Automation
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO12
3
1
0
3.5
11N703
Advanced Process Control
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO6, PO7,
PO8, PO12
3
1
0
3.5
11N704
Bio Medical Instrumentation
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4
3
0
0
3.0
Elective III
3.0
Elective IV
3.0
11N707
Design Project Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO6, PO7
0
0
3
1.5
11N708
Advanced Process Control Laboratory
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4, PO5, PO6,
PO7, PO8, PO11,
PO12
0
0
3
1.5
11N709
Project Work Phase I
I, II, III
PO1 to PO12
3.0
Total
12
2
6
25.0
.
Eighth Semester
Code
No.
Course
L
T
P
C
PEOs
POs
11O801
Professional Ethics*
I, II, III
PO1, PO2, PO6,
PO8, PO10
2
0
0
2.0
Elective V
3.0
Elective VI
3.0
11N804
Project Work Phase II
I, II, III
PO1 to PO12
12.0
Total
2
0
0
20.0
.
* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech

. Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the tot
al number of L T P
hours may vary depending upon the electives courses chosen.
ELECTIVES
LANGUAGE ELECTIVES
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE-I
L
T
P
C
11O10B
Basic English I
3
0
0
3.0
11O10C
Communicative English
3
0
0
3.0
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE-II
11O20B
Basic English II
3
1
0
3.5
11O20C
Advanced Communicative English
3
1
0
3.5
11O20G
German
3
1
0
3.5
11O20J
Japanese
3
1
0
3.5
11O20F
French
3
1
0
3.5
11O20H
Hindi
3
1
0
3.5
DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES
11N001
Fiber Optics and Laser Instruments
3
0
0
3.0
11N002
Advanced Control Engineering
3
0
0
3.0
11N003
Operating Systems
3
0
0
3.0
11N004
Electromagnetic Theory
3
0
0
3.0
11N005
Mechatronics
3
0
0
3.0
11N006
Hydraulics and Pneumatics
3
0
0
3.0
11N007
Microprocessor based System Design
3
0
0
3.0
11N008
Digital Control System
3
0
0
3.0
11N009
Data Communication and Networks
3
0
0
3.0
11N010
Power Electronics and Drives
3
0
0
3.0
11N011
Instrumentation in Petrochemical Industries
3
0
0
3.0
11N012
Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic
3
0
0
3.0
11N013
Robotics and Automation
3
0
0
3.0
11N014
Adaptive Control
3
0
0
3.0
11N015
Micro Electro Mechanical System
3
0
0
3.0
11N016
Renewable Energy Sources
3
0
0
3.0
11N017
Optimal Control
3
0
0
3.0
11N018
Digital Image Processing
3
0
0
3.0
11O008
Organizational Behaviour and Management
3
0
0
3.0
PHYSICS ELECTIVES
11O0PA
Nano Science and Technology
3
0
0
3.0
11O0PB
Laser Technology
3
0
0
3.0
11O0PC
Electro-Optic Materials
3
0
0
3.0
11O0PD
Vacuum Science and Deposition Techniques

3
0
0
3.0
11O0PE
Semiconducting materials and Devices
3
0
0
3.0
CHEMISTRY ELECTIVES
11O0YA
Polymer Chemistry and Processing
3
0
0
3.0
11O0YB
Energy Storing Devices and Fuel Cells
3
0
0
3.0
11O0YC
Chemistry of Nanomaterials
3
0
0
3.0
11O0YD
Corrosion Science and Engineering
3
0
0
3.0
ENTREPRENEURSHIP ELECTIVES$
11O001
Entrepreneurship Development I
3
3.0
11O002
Entrepreneurship Development II
3
3.0
ONE CREDIT COURSES1.
11N0XA
Commissioning of Control Systems
1.0
11N0XB
Hook-up diagram
-
1.0
11N0XC
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence
1.0
11N0XD
Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Systems
1.0
11N0XE
Communication Protocol for Control and Automation
1.0
11N0XF
Industrial safety standards for instrumentation products
11N0XG
Embedded system development using PIC microcontrollers
11N0XH
Detailed Instrumentation Engineering
11N0XI
Valve design and Engineering
11N0XJ
Embedded Systems in Instrumentation and Control
11N0XK
Design of low cost automation for industries
11N0XL
Energy management systems in industries
PHYSICS ONE CREDIT COURSE

11O0PF
Solar Cells
1.0
CHEMISTRY ONE CREDIT COURSE
11O0YE
Polymer Electronics
-
1.0
SPECIAL COURSE
11N0RA
Reliability and Safety Engineering
3.0
11N0RB
Piping and Instrumentation
3.0
11N0RC
Nanosensors
3.0
11N0RD
Automotive Electronics
3.0
CERTIFICATE COURSES
Core JAVA
LabVIEW graphical system design software
Distributed Control System

VALUE ADDED COURSES
Advance in industrial automation
PLC and SCADA
Instrumentation System Design
Modeling and Simulation of Non-Linear Systems
. Classes to be conducted for 15 hours duration

$ Entrepreneurship electives will be offered fifth and sixth semester only
Prerequisite for this course is 11O001- Entrepreneurship Development I
11O101 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I

(Common to all Branches)
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. Acquire knowledge in matrix theory a part of linear algebra which has wider ap
plication in
. To make the student knowledgeable in the area of infinite series and their con
vergence so that the
students will be familiar with infinite series approximations for solutions aris
ing in mathematical
modelling and to solve first and higher order differential equations and to use
Laplace transform
to solve differential equations using only algebraic operations.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1
Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrum
entation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2
Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first princip
les of
mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3
Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrument
ation and
related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriat
e
consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental is
sues.
PO4
Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and re
search
methods, including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data an
d synthesis of
information to provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to

1. Solve matrices, Series and Differential Calculus problems
2. Find the solution for the first order and higher order differential equations
.
3. Solve problems using Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Mathematics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of T

amilnadu or
equivalent subject
Assessment Pattern
S. No
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I*2
Test II*1
Model
Examination*1
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze/ Evaluate
10
10
10
10
5
Create
00
00
00
00
Total
100
100
100
100
2* The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examinat
ion will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly,
internal assessment will
be calculated for 50 marks.
Remember
1 State Cayley Hamilton theorem.
2 Define Eigen value and Eigen vectors of the matrix.
3. Write the definition of Convergence & Divergence of the sequence.
4. State the necessary & sufficient condition for the differential equation to b
e exact.
5. Write the Radius of curvature in Cartesian coordinates.
6. Define Evolute,Centre of curvature & Circle of curvature.
7. Write the Leibneitz s form of linear equation in y and in x.
8. Write the general form of Euler s & Legendre linear differential equation.
9. Define Convolution of two functions.
10. State the existence conditions for Laplace transforms.
Understand
1. Find the Eigen values and Eigen vectors of A =
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
318153022
2. Find the radius of Curvature at (a, 0) on the curve xy2 = a3
x3
3. Find the Circle of Curvature of the parabola Y2 = 12x at the point (3.6)
4. Solve cos2 x + y = tanx
dxdy
5. Solve y (2xy + ex ) dx = ex dy.
6. Find evolute of the parabola x2 =4ay
7. Solve (D2 + .4) y = x2
8. Solve ( D 3 )2 y = x e-2x
9. Find the Laplace transform of e2t sin3t
10. Find the laplace transform of e2t cos4t
Apply
1. Diagonalise the matrix A= by means of an orthogonal transformation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
311131113
2. Use Cayley Hamilton theorem find inverse of A =.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
121324731
3. Test the convergence of the series + + + .....
43
6.44.3
8.6.45.4.3
4. Use Convolution theorem find inverse Laplace transform of
)2)(1(
1
..ss
5. Use method of variation of parameters ,solve (D2+4)y = tan 2x
6. Use Laplace transform solve ( D2 + 4D + 13) = e-t sint Y = 0 and DY = 0 at t
= 0
7. Test for convergence of the series ..xx1
8. Use Bernoulli1 s equation solve xy ( 1 + xy2 ) = 1
dxdy
9. Use Leibnitz s linear equation
22)1()1(....xeydxdyxx
10. Use Laplace Transform to evaluate, dtttet

.
..
0)3(sin
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Reduce the quadratic form 8x+7x+3x-12xx-8xx+4xx to canonical form by orthogon
al
transformation and find the rank, signature, index and the nature.
21
22
23122331
2. Reduce 3x+5y+3z-2yz+2zx-2xy to its canonical form through an orthogononal tra
nsformation
and find the rank, signature, index and the nature
222
3. Find the evolute of the cycloid : x = a(+sin) ; y = a(1 - cos) ...
4. Find the circle of curvature of at xy...,44aa..

..
..
5. Discuss the convergence of the series 1 / 3.4.5 + 2 / 4.5.6 + 3 / 5.6.7 + ...
6. Verify Cayley-Hamilton theorem for A=. Hence find its inverse.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
211121112
7. Using the method of variation of parameters, solve (D2 + a 2)y = tan ax.
8. Solve [x2D2 + 4xD + 2]y = x2 + .
21x
9. Find the envelope of the straight line , here a and b are connected by the re
lation a2 + b2 = c2
1..
byax
10. Find the Laplace transform of the following functions
a. (1). (t + 2t2)2 (2) sin2 2t (3). sin 3t cos 2t (4). Cos (at+b)
Unit I
Matrices
Characteristic equation - eigen values and eigen vectors of a real matrix - prop
erties of eigen values Cayley Hamilton theorem- Reduction of a real matrix to a diagonal form- Orthogonal
matrices- Quadratic
form -Reduction of a quadratic form to a canonical form by orthogonal transforma
tion-application to
9 Hours
Unit II
Series and Differential Calculus
Series- Convergences and divergence- Comparison test Ratio test - Curvature in Ca
rtesian CoordinatesCentre and radius of curvature - Circle of curvature Evolutes Envelopes applicati
on to engineering
problems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Differential Equation of First Order
Linear differential equation of first order-exact-integrating factor- Euler s equa
tion-Bernoulli s-modelingapplication to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Differential Equations of Higher Order
Linear differential equations of second and higher order with constant and varia
ble coefficients - Cauchy s
and Legendre s linear differential equations - method of variation of parameters ap
plication of engineering
problems.
9 Hours
Unit V
Laplace Transforms : Laplace Transform- conditions for existence(statement only)
-Transforms of
standard functions
properties(statement only) - Transforms of derivatives and in
tegrals - Initial and Final
value theorems(statement only) - Periodic functions - Inverse transforms - Convo
lution theorems(statement
only) - Applications of Laplace transforms for solving the ordinary differential
equations up to second
order with constant coefficients-application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15=60 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B S Grewal ., Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delh
i 2000 .
2. K A Lakshminarayanan ,K.Megalai, P.Geetha and D.Jayanthi ,Mathematics for Eng
ineers,
Volume I, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.
Reference(s)
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volu
me I, S.
Chand Co., New Delhi-2009.
2. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New De
lhi 2008.
3. E. Kreyszig, .Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Son
s, Inc,
Singapore 2008.
4. C. RayWylie and C. Louis. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McG
raw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd, 2003.
11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

(Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of acoustics, crystallography and
new engineering
materials.
. To apply fundamental knowledge in the area of LASERS and fiber optics
. To use the principles of quantum physics in the respective fields
. At the end of the course the students are familiar with the basic principles a
nd applications of
physics in various fields.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to

1. Summarize the concepts of acoustics, ultrasonic and crystal physics.
2. Explain the theory/applications of Interference, fiber optics and laser
3. Interpret the perception of quantum physics, X-rays and engineering materials
.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Physics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tamil

nadu or
equivalent subject
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model Examination.
Semester
End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
. The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examinati
on will be converted to
20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly
Remember
1. Give the classifications of sound.
2. Write a note on loudness.
3. Define decibel.
4. What is meant by reverberation time?
5. Define magnetostriction effect.
6. Give the classification of crystals.
7. Define Miller indices.
8. Define lattice and unit cells.
9. Mention the applications of X-ray diffraction.
10. Write a short note on air wedge.
11. List the applications of air wedge method.
12. Give the applications of LASER.
13. Give the classification of laser based on refractive index.
14. Write a note on holography.
15. Draw the block diagram of fiber optic communication system.
16. Define the term Compton effect.
17. What is the physical significance of wave function?
18. What are metallic glasses?
19. Write a note on shape memory alloys.
20. Mention the merits of nano materials.
21. List the advantages of ceramic materials.
Understand
1. How Weber-Fechner law is formulated?
2. Explain the characteristics of loudness.
3. Elucidate the significance of timber.
4. How the magnetostriction effect is utilized in the production of ultrasonic w
aves?
5. What is the importance of reverberation time in the construction of building?
6. Give the importance of lattice and lattice planes in a crystal.
7. How do you measure the d-spacing?
8. How do you calculate the packing factor of BCC structure?
9. How air wedge is used in determining the flatness of a thin plate?
10. Give the importance of optical pumping in the production of LASER.
11. What are the various steps involved in holography?
12. How can you derive the acceptance angle in fiber?
13. Why the wave function is called as probability density?
14. Why the wave function is finite inside the potential well?
15. Why the particle is not escaping through the walls of the well?
16. How ceramic materials are prepared by slip casting technique?
17. What are the advantages of nano materials?
Apply
1. Discuss the factors affecting the acoustics of buildings.
2. Ultrasonic waves are electromagnetic waves. Justify.
3. Sketch the circuit diagram for piezo electric oscillator.
4. How can you determine the velocity of ultrasonic by acoustic grating?
5. Explain how Miller indices are used in crystal structures?
6. How do you calculate the packing factor for FCC structure?
7. Draw the crystal lattice for (110) plane.
8. Why does air wedge occur only in the flat glass plates?
9. Explain the various steps involved in holography techniques.
10. Discuss the particle in a one dimensional box by considering infinite length
of well.
11. Explain how shape memory alloy change its shape?
12. How can you prepare the nano materials synthesized by sol gel technique?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare magnetostriction and piezo-electric method in the production of ultra
sonic waves.
2. Differentiate musical sound and noises.
3. Compare the packing factor of BCC, FCC and HCP structures.
4. Distinguish between photography and holography.
5. Compare slip casting and isostatic pressing.
Unit I
Acoustics and Ultrasonics

Acoustics: Classification of sound
characteristics of musical sound
loudness Web
er Fechner law
decibel
absorption coefficient reverberation
reverberation time
Sabine s formula (
growth & decay).
Factors affecting acoustics of buildings and their remedies. Ultrasonics: Ultras
onic production
magnetostriction - piezo electric methods. Applications: Determination of veloci
ty of ultrasonic waves
(acoustic grating) - SONAR.
The phenomenon of cavitation
9 Hours
Unit II
Crystallography
Crystal Physics: Lattice
unit cell
Bravais lattices
lattice planes Miller indice
s =d spacing in cubic
lattice calculation of number of atoms per unit cell atomic radius
coordination
number packing
factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures - X-ray Diffraction: Laue s method
powd
er crystal method.
Crystal defects. 9 Hours
Unit III
Waveoptics
Interference: Air wedge theory uses
testing of flat surfaces thickness of a thin
wire. LASER: Types
of lasers
Nd YAG laser
CO2 laser
semiconductor laser (homojunction). Application
s: Holography
construction reconstruction
uses. Fiber Optics: Principle of light transmission
through fiber expression for acceptance angle and numerical aperture - types of optical fibers
(refractive Index profile,
mode) fiber optic communication system (block diagram only)
Laser gas sensors . 9 Hours
Unit IV
Modern Physics
Quantum Physics: Development of quantum theory de Broglie wavelength
Schrdinger s w
ave
equation time dependent
time independent wave equations
physical significance
ap
plications
particle in a box (1d). X-rays: Scattering of X-rays
Compton Effect
theory and e
xperimental
verification.
Degenerate and non-degenerate. 9 Hours
Unit V
New Engineering Materials
Metallic glasses: Manufacturing properties uses. Shape Memory Alloys: Working pr
inciple
shape
memory effect
applications. Nanomaterials: Preparation method
sol gel technique
mechanical
magnetic characteristics
uses. Ceramics: Manufacturing methods
slip casting
isos
tatic pressing
thermal and electrical properties - uses.
Carbon nano tubes and applications. 9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
2. P. K. Palanisami, Physics for Engineers, Vol. 1, Scitech Pub. (India) Pvt. Lt
d., Chennai, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. M. N. Avadhanulu and P. G. Kshirsagar, A Textbook(s) of Engineering Physics,
S. Chand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publication, New Del
hi, 2006.
3. V. Rajendran and A. Marikani, Physics I, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics, TMH, 2008.
5. R. K. Gaur and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New
Delhi, 2006
11O103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. Imparting knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment met
hods and industrial
applications.
. Understanding the principles and application of electrochemistry and corrosion
science.
. Basic information and application of polymer chemistry, nanotechnology and ana
lytical
techniques.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Explain the water and material processing.
2. Interpret the notion of corrosion, polymer and Nanotechnology..
3. Identify the instruments for chemical analysis.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Chemistry of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tam

ilnadu or
equivalent subject
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I.
Test II.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
. The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Exami
nation will be converted
to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. According
ly internal assessment
will be calculated for 50 marks
Remember
1. Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness.
2. What is meant by priming? How it is prevented?
3. What is meant by caustic embrittlement?
4. What is the role of calgon conditioning in water treatment?
5. What is break point chlorination?
6. Write the significances of EMF series.
7. Define single electrode potential of an electrode.
8. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
9. What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell?
10. What are reference electrodes?
11. Mention the various factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
12. State Pilling-Bedworth rule.
13. What are the constituents of water repellant paints?
14. What is pitting corrosion?
15. Write any four applications of galvanic series.
16. Differentiate between nanocluster and nanocrystal.
17. List the monomers of nylon -6 and nylon-11.
18. Define functionality of a monomer.
19. What are the monomers of epoxy resin?
20. Differentiate between addition and condensation polymers.
21. What are auxochromes? Give examples.
22. Give any two applications of IR spectroscopy.
23. State Beer-Lambert s law.
24. Write any two applications of flame photometry.
25. What are the limitations of Beer-Lambert s law?
Understand
1. Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is soft wat
er- Justify.
2. Why sodium carbonate conditioning is not advisable for high pressure boilers?
3. Boiling cannot give protection to water for all time
Reason out.
4. What are the significances of RO method of water treatment?
5. Compare reversible and irreversible cells?
6. Reason out why do the properties of materials change at nanoscale?
7. Why calomel electrode is called as secondary reference electrode?
8. A steel screw in a brass marine hardware corrodes. Why?
9. What is the action of brine solution on iron rod?
10. Why magnesium element is coupled with underground pipe line?
11. Which is the easier way to control corrosion?
12. Lithium battery is the cell of future- Justify.
13. Iron corrodes at a faster rate than aluminium- Give reason.
14. Differentiate between electro and elctroless platting.
15. How thermoplastics differ from thermosetting plastics?
16. TEFLON is superior to other addition polymers-Justify.
17. Write any two advantages of free radical polymerization.
18. Calculate the degree of freedom of water molecule.
19. Differentiate between AAS and flame photometry.
20. What is the role of thiocyanide solution in the estimation of iron by colori
metry?
Apply
1. A water sample contains 204 mgs of CaSO4 and 73 mgs of Mg(HCO3)2 per litre. C
alculate the
total hardness in terms of CaCO3 equivalence.
2. 100 ml of sample water has hardness equivalent to 12.5ml of 0.08N MgSO4. Calc
ulate hardness in
ppm.
3. What is the single electrode potential of a half cell of zinc electrode dippe
d in a 0.01M ZnSO4
solution at 250C? E0Zn/Zn2+
= 0.763 V, R=8.314 JK-1Mol-1, F= 96500 Coulombs.
4. Calculate the reduction potential of Cu2+/Cu=0.5M at 250C. E0Cu2+
/ Cu= +0.337V.
5. Mention the type of corrosion that takes place when a metal area is covered w
ith water.
6. Bolt and nut made of the same metal is preferred in practice. Why?
7. Caustic embrittlement is stress corrosion- Justify.
8. Metals which are nearer in electrochemical series is preferred in practice. W
hy?
9. What are the disadvantages of NICAD battery?
10. What are the requirements of a good paint?
11. What information can you get from DP?
12. What is degree of polymerization? Calculate the degree of polymerization of
polypropylene
having molecular weight of 25200.
13. How the functionality of monomer influences the structure of polymer?
14. Mention the commercial applications of epoxy resins.
15. On what basis polyamide is named as NYLON?
16. Why UV spectroscopy is called as electronic spectra?
17. IR spectrum is called as vibrational spectrum- Justify.
18. How absorption spectrum is differing from emission spectrum?
Analyze/Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Distinguish between hardness and alkalinity.

Distinguish between battery and cell.
Corrosion phenomenon is known as thousand dollar thief - reason out.
What is the basic difference between polymers and oligomers?
How do you identify an organic molecule using IR spectrum?
Unit I
Chemistry of Water and its Industrial Applications
Hardness of water: Equivalents of calcium carbonate - Units of hardness - Degree
of hardness and its
estimation (EDTA method) - Numerical problems on degree of hardness - pH value o
f water. Use of water
for industrial purposes: Boiler feed water-scale-sludge - caustic embrittlement.
Softening of hard water:
External conditioning
zeolite - ion exchange methods - internal conditioning cal
gon - phosphate
methods. Desalination: Reverse osmosis - electrodialysis. Use of water for domes
tic purposes: Domestic
water treatment - Disinfection of water - break point chlorination.
Characterization of your campus water.

9 Hours
Unit II
Electrochemistry for Materials Processing
Introduction
emf - Single electrode potential - Hydrogen electrode - Calomel ele
ctrode - Glass electrode
- pH measurement using glass electrode - Electrochemical series. Cells: Electroc
hemical cells
Cell
reactions- Daniel cell Reversible cells and irreversible cells - Difference betw
een electrolytic cells and
electrochemical cells. Concept of electroplating: Electroplating of gold - elect
roless plating (Nickel).
Batteries: Secondary batteries - lead acid, nickel - cadmium and lithium batteri
es. Fuel cell: Hydrogen oxygen fuel cell.
Electricity assisted painting.
9 Hours
Unit III
Chemistry of Corrosion and its Control
Corrosion: Mechanism of corrosionChemical and electrochemical - Pilling-Bedwor
th rule - Oxygen
absorption Hydrogen evolution - Galvanic series. Types of corrosion: Galvanic co
rrosion - Differential
aeration corrosion - Examples - Factors influencing corrosion. Methods of corros
ion control: Sacrificial
anodic protection - Impressed current method. Protective coatings: Paints - Cons
tituents and Functions.
Special paints: Fire retardant - Water repellant paints.
Applications of vapour phase inhibitors.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Polymer and Nanotechnology
Polymers: Monomer - functionality - Degree of polymerization - Classification ba
sed on source applications. Types of polymerization: Addition, condensation and copolymerizati
on. Mechanism of free
radical polymerization. Thermoplastic and thermosetting plastics - Preparation,
properties and applications:
Epoxy resins, TEFLON, nylon and bakelite. Compounding of plastics. Moulding meth
ods: Injection and
extrusion. Nanomaterials: Introduction
Nanoelectrodes - Carbon nanotubes - Nanop
olymers Application.
A detailed survey on application of polymer in day to day life.
9 Hours
Unit V
Instrumental Techniques of Chemical Analysis
Beer Lambert s law - Problems. UV visible and IR spectroscopy: Principle- Instrume
ntation (block
diagram only) - Applications. Colorimetry: Principle Instrumentation (block diag
ram only) - Estimation
of iron by colorimetry. Flame photometry: Principle - Instrumentation (block dia
gram only) - Estimation of
sodium by flame photometry. Atomic absorption spectroscopy: Principle - Instrume
ntation (block diagram
only) - Estimation of nickel by atomic absorption spectroscopy.
Applications of analytical instruments in medical field.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. P. C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications., New

Delhi, 2009.
2. R. Sivakumar and N. Sivakumar, Engineering Chemistry, TMH, New Delhi, 2009.
3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemis
try, Shoban Lal
Nagin Chand & Co., 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, N
ew Delhi, 2003.
2. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Ch
and & Company,
2008.
3. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1
&2, TMH, 2009.
4. C. P. Poole Jr., J. F. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley India Pri
vate Limited, 2007.
5. Andre Arsenault and Geoffrey A. Ozin, Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to
Nanomaterials, Royal Society of Chemistry, London, 2005.
6. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. James Holler &S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of Analy
tical
Chemistry, Wiley, 2004.
11O105 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

4
0
0
4.0
Objective(s)
. To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering focusing building
materials,
surveying, foundation and transportation Engineering
. To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing on g
eneration of
power from various natural resources and to know about various types of Boilers
and Turbines
used for power generation and to understand the working of IC engines and basic
manufacturing
processes
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Explain the general concepts of basic civil engineering..
2. Classify the transportation engineering Realize the perception of IC engines,
refrigeration,
engineering materials and manufacturing process.
3. Interpret the perception of IC engines, refrigeration, engineering materials
and manufacturing
process
4. Compare the alternate energy sources, power plants and Boilers.
Prerequisite(s)
nadu
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
40
40
40
40
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
5
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination wi
ll be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks
will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated by giving equal weightage (50%) for
both Civil and Mechanical Engineering
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
What are the classifications of stones?

What is the frog in a brick?
What is quarrying?
What do you mean by dressing of stones?
What are the systems of bearing?
How the surveying is classified based on purpose?
Define Benchmark and state its effects.
What are the accessories used in chain surveying?
9. Define bearing of a line.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
Define leveling & state its Objective(s).

State the Objective(s) and requirement of good foundation.
Mention the site improvement techniques.
Define bearing capacity of soil.
How stone masonry is classified?
Define Beam, Column and Lintel.
What are the basic forms of roof?
How floors are classified based on floor finish?
List the materials used for damp proofing.
How roads are classified?
What do you mean by W.B. M. road?
Define Gauge.
What is a permanent way?
How bridges are classified?
What are the advantages of railways?
What are docks?
Classify sleepers.
What are the requirements of a sleeper?
What are the types of traffic signs?
What are the advantages of road signs?
What are the prohibitory signs?
What is the main function of hangars?
What are the sources of Energy Generation?
What are the accessories used in a boiler?
Define Turbine.
Compare and contrast fire tube and water tube boiler?
List the types of steam Turbines?
Classify the I.C engine.
List out the Part of the I.C. Engine.
Define the terms: Top Dead Center, Bottom Dead Center.
Define the term: Compression Ratio.
What are the different sources of energy?
Name four non-renewable sources of energy.
Name some renewable sources of energy.
Name four solid/liquid/gaseous/ fuels.
Name two nuclear fuels.
What are the advantages of wind energy?
State some of the applications of steam boilers.
Classify different steam boilers.
What do you understand by Scavenging
What do you understand by the term IC engine?
What are the operations performed on a Lathe?
What is impulse turbine? Give example.
What is Reaction turbine? Give example.
Define Boiler.
Classify Boilers.
List out the Boiler Mountings and Accessories.
Define Refrigeration.
Define refrigerant. Give some examples of refrigerant.
Define C.O.P.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
What are the qualities of good building stone?

What are the various stages of manufacturing brick?
What is mean by concrete?
State the properties of cement concrete.
What is curing of concrete?
6. What is water
cement ratio?
7. What is the difference between a plan and a map?

8. Differentiate between plane surveying and geodetic surveying.
9. State the principles of surveying.
10. What is the use of cross
staff?
11. What are the functions of foundation?
12. Differentiate between shallow foundation & deep foundation
13. What are the causes of failure of foundation?
14. Compare stone masonry and brick masonry.
15. Why bonding in brick wall is necessary?
16. State the special features of English and Flemish bond.
17. Define super elevation.
18. What are the uses of fish plates?
19. What are the necessities of highway drainage?
20. What are the three stages of construction of a new railway track?
21. Define the term visibility.
22. Define passenger flow.
23. Differentiate between wharf and jetty.
24. What are the requirements of a good harbour?
25. What are the requirements of a good naval port?
26. How Solar Energy is generated?
27. How Energy is Generated using steam Turbines?
28. How power plants are classified?
29. Compare and contrast reaction and impulse turbines.
30. How energy is generated from Diesel Power Plants?
31. What is the difference between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy
?
32. Mention the applications of solar energy.
33. What is the function of a hydraulic turbine?
34. What is the function of a surge tank?
35. What is the function of a moderator?
36. What are the functions of a control rod?
37. Name of the important components of diesel power plant.
38. Name the important parts of gas turbine.
39. State the function of condenser in steam power plant.
40. What are the requirements of a good boiler?
41. What are the specific advantages of water-tube boilers?
42. What are the aims of pre-heating of air in a boiler?
43. State the function of economizer.
44. How does a fusible plug function as a safety device?
45. What is the function of a steam nozzle?
46. What is the function of flywheel?
47. What is the function of a spark plug?
48. What is the function of a fuel injector in diesel engine?
49. Why is cooling necessary in an IC engine?
50. Define compression ratio of an IC engine.
51. List the ports used in a 2-stroke engine
52. What are the requirements of a good boiler?
53. What is the difference between impulse and reaction turbine?
54. How energy is generated from Nuclear Power Plants?
55. How energy is generated from Hydro Power Plants?
Apply/Evaluate
1. What is Hardness?
2. What are the operations to be performed while setting up a plane table at a s
tation?
3. Explain the steps involved in measuring vertical angle of an object using the
odolite.
4. Explain the methods to improve bearing capacity of soil.
5. What are the points to be observed in the construction of brick masonry?
6. Explain the method of construction of cement concrete flooring.

7. What are the methods of applying surface dressing in bituminous roads?
8. Explain the construction steps in bituminous macadam road.
9. How can you express the hardness number of stones?
10. Apply the concept of power generation and saving from other energy sources.
11. Apply the concept of Refrigeration in Heat removal and Heat addition.
Unit I
Introduction to Civil Engineering
History, development and scope of Civil Engineering - Functions of Civil Enginee
rs. Construction
Materials: Characteristics of good building materials such as stones - Bricks, A
.C. sheets - G.I. sheets and
Ceramic tiles - Timber, cement - Aggregates and concrete. Surveying: Definition
and purpose
Classification Basic principles
Measurement of length by chains and tapes
Calcul
ation of area of a
plot Measurement of bearings and angles using a prismatic compass
Leveling Conto
urs
Application of contours
10 Hours
Unit II
General Concepts Relating to Buildings
Selection of site
Basic functions of buildings Major components of buildings. Fo
undations: Purpose of
foundation Bearing capacity of soils
Types of foundations. Proper methods of con
struction of: Brick
masonry
Stone masonry
Hollow Block masonry. Beams
Lintels
Columns
Flooring
and
windows
Roofing
Damp proof course
Surface finishes
10 Hours
Unit III
Transportation Engineering
Classification of Highways Cross sections of water bound macadam - Bituminous an
d cement concrete
roads
Traffic signs and signals. Importance of railways - Gauges Components of a
permanent way
Classification of bridges
Components of Airport
Examples of Marvelous Structures
10 Hours
Doors
Unit IV
Engineering Materials and Manufacturing Processes
Classification of Engineering materials, Mechanical properties and uses of cast
iron, steel, and High Speed
Steel. Introduction to casting process, Green sand moulding - Pattern, Melting f
urnaces - Cupola and
Electric Furnace. Metal Forming - Forging Process. Introduction to Arc and Gas W
elding. Centre Lathe Specifications - Principal parts - Operations - Straight turning, Step turning,
Taper turning methods,
Knurling, Thread cutting methods, Facing, Boring, and Chamfering - Lathe tools a
nd Materials. Drilling
Radial drilling machine - Specification and Operation.
Milling operation
10 Hours
Unit V
Internal Combustion Engines and Refrigeration
Classification of IC engines, Main components of IC engines, working of a 4 stro
ke & 2 stroke petrol &
diesel engine, differences between 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine, Lubrication and
Cooling systems in IC
Engines. Refrigeration: Working Principle of Vapour Compression & Vapour Absorpt
ion System,
Domestic refrigerator
Domestic air conditioning
10 Hours
Unit VI
Alternate Sources of Energy, Power Plants and Boilers
Solar, Wind, Tidal, Geothermal and Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC). Power
Plant:
Classification of Power Plants- Steam - Nuclear, Diesel, and Hydro Power Plants.
Types of Boilers
Simple Vertical, Babcock and Wilcox and La-Mont Boiler, Differences between fire
tube and water tube
boiler. Types of steam turbines- working of a single stage impulse and reaction
turbines
Biomass and Biofuels in power generation
10 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Compa
ny Limited, New
Delhi, 2009
2. G. Shanmugam & S Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Pu
blishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2010
Reference(s)
1. N. Arunachalam, Bascis of Civil Engineering, Pratheeba Publishers, 2000
2. B. K. Sarkar, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limite
d, New Delhi,
2008
3. P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding, Tata McGra
w-Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003.
4. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, M
ayiladuthurai, 2000
5. http://www.tutorvista.co.in/content/science/science-ii/sources-energy/sources
-energyindex.php
11N106
C PROGRAMMING
2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
. To develop the basic programming skills
. To understand the basic concepts of arrays and pointers
. To implement file concepts and operations
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO12
Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in indepen
dent and lifelong learning.
Course Outcomes
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Summarize the basic terminology used in computer programming.

Write, compile and debug the programs in C language
Design programs involving structures, loops, functions, and pointers.
Create/update basic data files using different data structures.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic Knowledge in Computer Science.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 3
Test II
Model
Examination
End Semester
Examination
1
Remember
20
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
3 The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examin
ation will be converted
Remember
1. List the five programming languages commonly used.
2. Define Algorithm and Flowchart
3. Define structured programming.
4. Describe the general structure of a C program.

5. List the rules for defining a variable.
6. Name the I/O functions in C?
7. Describe a header file.
8. State the associatively property of an operator.
9. Define a ternary operator.
10. Define an array and a pointer.
11. Mention the significance of function.
Understand
1. Distinguish while loop with do
while Loop.
2. Defend the advantages of using Macro?

3. Explain how recursive functions affect the run time efficiency.
4. Differentiate between Structure and Union in C.
5. Estimate memory management in C.
6. Explain garbage collection done in C.
Apply
1. Write a recursive function to calculate the factorial of number.
2. Write a C program to check whether the given number is palindrome or not.
3. Write a program to check whether the given number is prime or not.
4. Write a C program to find the roots of quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0.
5. Write a C program to find average of =n
numbers.
6. Write a program to generate the pay slip of an employee using Structure.

7. Write a C program to search for a specified element in an array.
8. Write a program to compute Matrix Multiplication.
9. Write a program to perform swapping of two numbers using pointers.
10. Write a program to read the content of the file and copy it to another file.
Analyze
1.
2.
3.
4.
.
Distinguish while loop and for loop.

Why are pointers so powerful? Analyze their efficiency.
Point out the advantage of using recursion over looping control structures.
dentify the limitation of array of pointers to strings using a sample example
Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compare the keywords

Justify the need for
Compare and contrast
Appraise the various
=break and =continue .

Type Casting over Type Conversion.
I/O mapped I/O with Memory mapped I/O.
built-in String functions.
Create
1. Create a structure to store the following details: Rollno, Name, Mark1, Mark2
, Mark3, Total,
Average, Result and Class. Write a program to read Rollno, name and 3 subject ma
rks. Find out
the total, result and class as follow:
a) Total is the addition of 3 subject marks.
b) Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "F
ail".
c) Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects
i.Class "Distinction" if average >=75
ii.Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive)
iii.Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive)
d) Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the stru
ctures as per rank
obtained by them.
Unit I
Introduction
Computer languages - Creating and Running Programs-System Development - Flowchar
t Introduction to C language background - C Programs: Identifiers
Types -Variables
- Constants Input/output - Structure of C Program-Expressions- Operator Precedence and Assoc
iatively -Type
Conversion.
Flowchart
6 Hours
Unit II
Control Structures
Selection - Making Decisions - Logical data and Operators - Two Way Selection Multiway Selection More Standard Functions - Incremental Development
Repetition Concept of Loop - P
re-test and Post
Test loops- Initialization and Updating.
Binary Operators
6 Hours
Unit III
Arrays and Strings
Arrays-Concepts-Using arrays in C -array Applications-Sorting- selection sort
bu
bble sort - Searching of
Arrays- Two Dimensional Arrays-Strings: String Concepts -String Input/output Fun
ctions- Arrays of
Strings-String Manipulation Functions.
Multi dimensional array
6 Hours
Unit IV
Functions and Pointers
Functions-Designing structured Programs- Functions in C- User Defined FunctionsStandard Functions
Storage classes and Type Qualifier- Introduction to Pointers- Arrays with pointe
rs- Function with pointersPointers to Pointers
Storage classes
6 Hours
Unit V
Structures, Union and Files
Structure and Union - Programming Application -Text Input/Output: Files-StreamsStandard Library
Input/Output Functions- Formatting Input/Output functions- Character Input/Outpu
t functions.
Programming Application
6 Hours
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Behrouz A.Forouzan and Richard F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structure prog
ram approach
using C, Cengage learning, 2008
Reference(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
D.M.Ritchie and B.W.Kernighan, C Programming Language, PHI, 2007

Deitel & Deitel, C How to program, PHI, 2010
Herbert Schildt, C- The complete Reference, McGraw Hill, 2010
Gary J Bronson, First book of ANSI C, Thomson Learning, 2001
Byron S. Gottfried, Schaum's, Outline of Programming with C, McGraw Hill, 200
Lab components
1. Write a program to demonstrate the characteristics of different data types in
C program.
2. Write a program to demonstrate the operator precedence.
3. Write a program to implement a calculator.
4. Write a program to implement Fibonacci series.
5. Write a program to implement sorting.
6. Write a program to reverse an input string.
7. Write a program to find multiplication of two matrices.
8. Write a program to swap two integers using pointers.
9. Write a program to read and write structures into a file.
10. Write a program to append a string into a file.
Total: 30 hours
Total: 30 +30 hours
11N107 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To understand the concepts of DC circuit elements, circuit laws and network re

duction and to
solve the electrical network using mesh and nodal analysis.
. To understand the concepts of AC circuit elements, waveforms, circuit laws, ne
twork reduction,
active, reactive and apparent powers, power factor.
. To solve the electrical network using network theorems.
. To understand the model of resonance in series and parallel circuits and to kn
ow the basic
concepts of coupled circuits.
. To analyze the transient response of series and parallel RLC circuits and to s
olve problems in time
domain using Laplace Transform.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO12
Course outcome(s)
At the end of this subject, students should be able to:
1. Analyze simple DC and AC circuits.
2. Apply and examine network theorems for simple circuits.
3. Interpret the circuit resonance, coupled circuits and transients..
Prerequisite(s)
nadu or
equivalent subject
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define electric circuit.
2. List the classifications of electric circuit components.
3. Describe the V-I relationships between the R, L and C.
4. State dependent and independent sources.
5. Define form factor.
6. Define Peak factor.
7. List the different type of power in single phase a.c. circuits and write thei
r formulae.
8. Define power factor.
9. Describe about impedance and admittance.
10. State superposition theorem.
11. State thevenin s theorem.
12. State norton s theorem.
13. State reciprocity theorem.
14. Define resonance.
15. Recall resonant frequency expression for series resonance circuit.
16. State Q factor.
17. Define bandwidth.
18. Draw the series resonance and parallel curves.
19. List the applications of resonance.
20. Define coupled circuits.
21. Describe self inductance.
22. Describe mutual inductance.
23. Define time constant.
24. Define coefficient of coupling.
25. Describe transient response.
Understand
1. Explain the algorithm for mesh loop current analysis method.
2. Explain the algorithm for node voltage method.
3. Show the V-I relationships between the R, L and C.
4. Discuss the concepts of current division and voltage division techniques.
5. Derive the expressions for current, resonant frequency, quality factor of the
circuit, bandwidth and
draw the resonance curve for a series resonance circuit.
6. Derive the expressions for current, resonant frequency, quality factor of the
circuit, bandwidth and
draw the resonance curve for a parallel resonance circuit.
7. Explain in detail the concept of implementing any two types of forcing functi
on on assumed RLC
circuit, and obtain its transient response.
8. Show the peak factor value for sinusoidal waveform.
9. Explain the sinusoidal response of the following single phase ac circuits.
a. Pure resistive circuit
b. Pure inductive circuit
c. Pure capacitive circuit.
10. Compute the relation between line and phase values of voltage and current in
(i) star connection
(ii) Delta
connection.
11. Discuss the advantages of three phase circuits when compared with single pha
se circuits?
12. Explain the applications of network theorems.
13. Express the formulae for star to delta conversion technique.
14. Express the formulae for delta to star conversion technique.
15. Represent the expression for coefficient of coupling.
16. Distinguish the difference between parallel RL, RC and RLC transient circuit
s?
17. Represent the fall time characteristics.
Apply
1. Four resistors of 2 O, 3 O, 4 O, 5 O respectively are connected in parallel.

What voltage must be
applied to the group in order that power of 100watts may be absorbed also find c
urrent flowing
through the circuit.
2. A resistance R is connected in series with a parallel circuit comprising two

resistors 12 O
and 8 O respectively. The total power dissipated in the circuit is 70watts when
the
applied voltage is 220Volts.Calculate the value of R. In a RLC series circuit co
nsists of
resistance 15 O, Inductive reactance 7.5 O and capacitive reactance 12 O are con
nected with 230
O, 50Hz supply. Calculate i) current ii) Power factor iii) Apparent, active & re
active powers iv)
Capacitance & Inductance v) Impedance. Also draw the phasor diagram.
3. An inductive coil takes 10A and dissipates 1000 Watts, when connected to supp
ly at 250V,
25Hz.Calculate the resistance, the inductance the impedance and power factor.
4. For the given circuit (Figure 1) discover the branch currents using mesh loop
current analysis
method.
Figure 1
5. Calculate current through 20O resistance (Figure 2) by using Thevenin s theorem

.
Figure 2
6. Discover current through 10O resistance (Figure 3) by Norton s theorem.
Figure 3
7. Judge the superposition theorem to calculate the current through 5 O resistan

ces for the network
shown below (Figure 4).
Figure 4
8. Three resistors 25 O, 50 O and 75 O are connected in star. Examine the equiva

lent delta resistors?
9. In the circuit shown below (Figure 5) switch is closed at t=0. Produce the ex
pression for the
current in circuit and find I at t=0.25 sec.
Figure 5
Analyze / Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Design a V-I relationships between the R, L and C.

Compare series and parallel circuits.
Illustrate the three phase and single phase ac circuits.
Justify LC combinations are not used in electric circuit?
Compare rise time and fall time.
6. When the switch is closed at t=0, find the current I(t) and the voltage acros
s R, L & C and analyze
it completely.
7. Outline maximum power transfer theorem.
8. Point out the formulae for star to delta transformation.
9. Point out the formulae for delta to star transformation.
10. Illustrate the transient response of series and parallel RL, RC and RLC circ
uits.
Create
1. Do the following operations and write the result in polar form.
i) (5+j4) X (-4-j6)
ii) (-2-j5) / (5+j7)
2. Two impedances 14+j5 ohms and 18+j10 ohms are connected in parallel across a
200V, 50 Hz
supply.
Construte i) the admittance of each branch and of entire circuit, ii) the total
current, power and
power factor.
3. Produce the advantages of time domain analysis of circuits.
4. Propose the transient response expression for series and parallel RL circuits
.
5. Reconstruct the phasor diagram for pure resistive circuit.
6. Tell about Peak factor?
7. Construct the different type of power in single phase a.c. circuits and write
their formulae.
8. Explain power factor.
9. Propose the formulae for star to delta conversion technique.
10. Propose the node voltages at all points using nodal analysis method for the
network (Figure 6)
shown below.
Figure 6
Unit I
DC Circuit Concepts
Electric circuit components
and C
Independent sources
Ohms law - Kirchhoff s Laws
V-I relationships of R, L
dependent sources
Series and parallel circuits voltage division
- Mesh and nodal
analysis - Nodal conductance matrix and mesh resistance matrix.
current division
Kirchhoff s current Law

9 Hours
Unit II
Alternating Voltages and Currents
Generation of AC voltages
Average Value
RMS Value
Form factor and Peak factor-Ph
ase relation in
pure resistor, inductor and capacitor Power and power factor concepts of impedan
ce and admittance
analysis of simple circuits - Generation of Three phase voltages - Phase sequenc
e.
Energy stored in Inductive circuit
9 Hours
Unit III
Network Theorems and it s Applications
Star Delta Transformation
Super position theorem
Reciprocity theorem - Substitution theorem

Maximum power transfer theorem
9 Hours
Thevenin s theorem
Norton s theorem
Maximum power transfer theorem.
Unit IV
Resonance & Coupled Circuits
Series resonant circuits
n bandwidth - Parallel
resonance -
Bandwidth of an RLC circuit - Q factor and its effect o
Coupled circuits Self and mutual inductance

utual and leakage
flux Coefficient of Coupling.
Inductances in series and parallel
Inductances in series and parallel

9 Hours
Unit V
Transients
Time domain analysis of circuits
Linear differential equations for series and pa
rallel RL, RC and RLC
Circuits Transient response
Time Constant
Rise and fall times.
Natural frequency
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book
1. A. Sudhakar and S. P. Shyam Mohan, Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesi
s, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2010
Reference(s)
1. Charles K.Alexander, Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill Publ
ishing Co Ltd,
New Delhi, 2010
2. William H. Hayt, Jack E. Kemmerly, and Steven M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit
Analysis, Tata
McGraw
3. Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2010
4. Ravish R Singh, Electrical Networks, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New
Delhi, 2008
11O108 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY

0 0 2 1.0
Objective(s)
. To know how to execute experiments properly, presentation of observations and
arrival of
conclusions.
. It is an integral part of any science and technology program.
. To view and realize the theoretical knowledge acquired by the students through
experiments
. At the end of the course, the students able to realize the theoretical knowled
ge acquired
through experiments.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO4
search
methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, student will able to

1. Determine moment of inertia, Young s moduli, refractive index and frequency of
vibration.
2. Obtain conductance, thermal conductivity, viscosity and thickness of a liquid
/solid
3. Find out the wave length of mercury spectrum and laser
Prerequisite(s)
nadu or
equivalent subject
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester
End Examination
Preparation
10
15
Execution
10
15
Observation & Results
10
15
Record
5
Model Examination
10
Viva Voce
5
5
Total
50
50
List of Experiments
1. Determination of moment of inertia and rigidity modulus of wire using torsion
pendulum
(symmetrical masses method).
2. Comparison of Young s moduli of two different materials subjected to non-unifor
m bending.
3. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee s disc.
4. Determination of frequency of a vibrating rod subjected to a.c voltage by lon
gitudinal and
transverse modes of vibration.
5. Determination of viscosity of a liquid - Poiseulle s method.
6. Determination of thickness of a thin wire - air wedge method.
7. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum grating.
8. Determination of refractive index of a liquid and solid using traveling micro
scope.
9. Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor diode.
10. Determination of wavelength of LASER and particle size of a given powder.
Total: 30 Hours
11O109 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

0 0 2 1.0
Objective(s)
. Imparting knowledge on basic concepts and its applications of chemical analysi
s.
. Training in chemical and instrumental methods.
. Develop skills in estimation of a given sample by chemical and instrumental me
thods.
PO1
entation
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will able to
1. Analysis of water and alkaline.
2. Determine the rate of corrosion, molecular weight and strength of iron.
3. Estimate the acid quality.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic Knowledge of Volumetric and Gravimetric analysis.
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester
End Examination
Preparation
10
15
Execution
10
15
Observation & Results
10
15
Record
5
Model Examination
10
Viva Voce
5
5
Total
50
50
List of Experiments
1. Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances
oxalic
acid, sodium
carbonate, sodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid.
2. Water quality of BIT campus
River/Bore well water with respect to Hardness, T
DS and pH.
3. Comparison of alkalinities of the given water samples.
4. Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.
5. Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using potassium di
chromate.
6. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method.
7. Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophoto
metric method.
8. Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide using pH m
eter.
9. Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometr
ic method.
10. Determination of corrosion rate and inhibition efficiency by weight loss mea
surements.
Total: 30 Hours
11O201 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. Acquire knowledge to use multiple integrals to find area and volume of surface
and solids
respectively
. Have a good grasp of analytic functions, complex integration and their interes
ting properties and
its applications
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Solve problems using function of several variables.
2. Resolve problems with multiple and complex integration.
3. Solve problems using vector calculus and analytic functions.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Mathematics of Higher secondary and Engineering Mathematics I
Assessment pattern
S. No
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 4
Test II 1
Model
Examination 1
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
20
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze/ Evaluate
10
10
10
20
5
Create
00
00
00
00
Total
100
100
100
100
4 The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examinati
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Define Jacobian in two dimensions.

State Green s theorem.
Define directional derivative of a vector point function.
Define analytic function.
What is the formula for finding the residue of a double pole?
State Cauchy s integral formula.
Write the necessary condition for a function f (z) to be analytic.
Write the formula for unit normal vector?
9. Write all the types of singularities.

10. State the sufficient conditions for a function of two variables to have an e
xtremum at a point.
Understand
1. If .
22(,)
2,,cos,sin(,)
uvuxyvxyxryrcomputexy
..
.
.....
.
2. If .
222(,)0yxzxuuuufshowthatxyzxyxzxyz
.....
....
...
3. Transform the integral to polar coordinates. ..
.
00),(
ydxdyyxf
4. Change the order of integration in . ....
200,
xdydxyxf
5. Find a, such that (3x-2y+z)i+(4x+ay-z)j+(x-y+2z)k is solenoidal.
6. What is the greatest rate of increase of at (1,0,3)?
2xyz..
7. Test the analyticity of the function w = sin z.
8. Find given w = tan z.
dzdw
9. Evaluate where c is the circle ..czdz2)3(
1.z
10. Find the residues of the function at its simple pole.
)2(
4)(3.
.
zzzf
Apply
1. Examine the function for extreme values.

2244242yxyxyxu.....
2. Check if are functionally dependent. If so find the relationship between
them.
..2,
yxxyvyxyxu
.
.
.
.
.
3. By transforming into cylindrical polar coordinates evaluate taken over

the region of space defined by and .
..dxdydzzyx.....222
122..yx10..x
4. Using Gauss divergence theorem evaluate and S is the
surface of the cube bounded by x=0,y=0,z=0,x=1,y=1,z=1.
......
skyzjyixzFwheredsnF
.....
24
5. When the function f(z) = u + iv is analytic, show that U = constant and V = c
onstant are orthogonal.
6. Determine the image of 1<x<2 under the mapping .
zw1
.
7. Find the area of the cardiod r = 4 ( 1+ cos .) using double integral.
8. Apply Green s theorem in the plane to evaluate dyxyydxyxc)64()83(22....
a. Where c is the boundary of the region defined by x=0, y=0 and x+y=1.
9. If , find v and f (z) such that f (z) =u+iv is analytic. )log(22yxu..
10. Using Cauchy s integral formula evaluate where C is the Circle. ...Czzzdze2)1(
)2(
3.z
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Prove that are functionally dependent.
,,
uvwxyzvwwuuv
...
...
2. If where prove that
.
),(),(vuyxg..xyvyxu2,22...
..
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
2222222222)(4vuyxygxg..
3. Evaluate the integration taken throughout the volume for which and
.
...xyzdxdydz0,,.zyx
2229xyz...
4. Evaluate the following integral by changing to spherical coordinates
2221112220001xyxdxdydzxyz
...
...
...
5. Verify Gauss divergence theorem for where S is the surface of the
cuboid formed by the planes x=0, x=a, y=0, y=b, z=0 and z=c.
222Fxiyjzk...
6. Determine the bilinear transformation that maps the points -1, 0, 1 in the zplane onto the points 0, i, 3i
in the w-plane.
7. Evaluate . .
.
..
d..
20cos452cos
8. Using contour integration, evaluate ....dxxxx
.
.
..022249
9. Expand as Laurent s series valid in the regions: and
....31)(
..
.
zzzzf31..z
210...z
10. Show that is irrotational vector and find the scalar
potential function such that
kyxzjzxizxyF)3()3()6(223......
....F
Unit I
Functions of Several Variables
Functions of two variables - Partial derivatives - Total differential - Derivati
ve of implicit functions Maxima and minima - Constrained Maxima and Minima by Lagrangian Multiplier metho
d Jacobians
application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Multiple Integrals
Double integration in cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of inte
gration - change of
variables- Area and volume by multiple integral- application to engineering prob
lems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Vector Calculus
Gradient - divergence - curl- line - surface and volume integrals - Green s - Gaus
s divergence and Stokes
theorems (statement only) - applications to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Analytic Functions
Analytic functions- Necessary condition of analytic function-Sufficient conditio
n of analytic
function(statement only)- properties - Determination of analytic function using
Milne Thomson s method,
conformal mappings - Mappings of w= z + a, az, 1/z, ez- bilinear transformation
-- application to
9 Hours
Unit V
Complex Integration
Cauchy s fundamental theorem (statement only)- and application of Cauchy s integral
formula(statement
only) Taylor s and Laurent s series- classification of singularities Cauchy s residue
theorem (statement
only)- Contour integration - circular and semi-circular contours ( excluding pol
es on the real axis )application to engineering problems
9 Hours
Total:45+15=60
Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B. S. Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Del
hi, 2000.
2. K .A . Lakshminarayanan ,K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics
for
Engineers, Volume II, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.
Reference(s)
me II, S.
Chand &
Co., New Delhi, 2009.
2. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New De
lhi, 2008.
3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singap
ore, 2008.
4. C. RayWylie and Louis .C. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McG
raw Hill
Publications, 2003.
11O202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. Imparting knowledge on principles of environmental science and engineering.
. Understanding the concepts of ecosystem, biodiversity and impact of environmen
tal pollution.
. Awareness on value education, population and social issues.
PO1
entation
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO7
Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and envi
ronmental
contexts and demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
1. Compare the importance of environment, natural resources, ecosystems and biod
iversity.
2. Understand the fundamental physical and biological principles for protecting
the environment
from degradation.
3. Summarize the environment and human pollution.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Environmental Science taught in High school
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I.
Test II.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
. The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination
will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly inte
rnal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks.
Remember
1. Give the scope and importance of environmental studies.
2. Distinguish between renewable and non- renewable resources.
3. Explain the impacts of mining on forests.
4. Explain why fresh water is a precious resource and classification of differen
t water pollutants?
5. What are the Impacts of modern agriculture?
6. State the two energy laws and give examples that demonstrate each law.
7. List the physical, chemical, and biological factors responsible for soil form
ation.
8. Give examples of point and nonpoint sources of pollution.
9. Draw a food web that includes ten or more aquatic organisms.
10. Distinguish between primary and secondary pollutants.
11. Identify the four parts of the atmosphere.
12. Describe secondary and primary succession with suitable examples.
13. Define the term extinction.
14. Relate the concept of food web and food chain to trophic levels.
15. Describe energy flow in a ecosystem.
16. Define the roles of producers, herbivore, carnivore, omnivore, scavenger, pa
rasite and
decomposer.
17. List some of the components of an ecosystem.
18. Distinguish between the biotic and abiotic factors in an ecosystem.
19. Give some impacts of water pollution.
20. Explain the source and effects of e waste.
21. What is the loudest sound possible?
22. What are the laws regarding noise pollution?
23. What is rainwater harvesting?
24. Discuss the concept and reactions of acid rain.
25. Describe the salient features of Wildlife (protection) Act, 1972.
26. What is 3R approach?
27.
28.
29.
30.
Give the effects of nuclear fallout.

Differentiate between mortality and natality.
What is exponential growth and zero population growth?
What are the Objective(s) and elements of value education?
Understand
1. Explain why providing adequate food for all of the world's people is so diffi
cult?
2. Rank the five major sources of energy used to produce electricity and classif
y the energy sources
as renewable or nonrenewable.
3. Describe the causes of desertification and its preventive measures.
4. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of the green revolution.
5. Explain the relationship between technology and global warming.
6. Describe any three health effects of air pollution.
7. Identify "greenhouse gases" and explain how they cause the "greenhouse effect
".
8. Identify a few plants and animals with the various biomes.
9. Explain the importance of primary species.
10. Explain the five major types of species interactions and give examples of ea
ch.
11. Environmental problems involve social, political, and economic issues Justify.
12. What problems does noise pollution cause to animals?
13. What type of pollution threatens wetlands?
14. What are the major measures to attain sustainability?
15. Why is urban energy requirement more than rural requirement?
16. What are the major limitations to successful implementation of our environme
ntal legislation?
17. Explain the concept of Malthusian theory.
Apply
1. Compare the energy efficiencies of any two inventions.
2. Name some alternatives to pesticides.
3. Identify four different habitats found in bodies of water and give examples o
f organisms that live
in each habitat.
4. Explain how we could reduce air pollution?
5. What are the measures to be taken to reduce your own noise pollution?
6. List the top ten polluted countries in the world?
7. Identify the grants available for rain water harvesting in buildings?
8. What are the major implications of enhanced global warming?
9. Discuss the methods implemented by government to control HIV/AIDS.
10. What is the role of an individual in prevention of pollution?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. List reasons why it is important that we seek alternatives to fossil fuels.
2. Explain why fresh water is often in short supply?
3. Give examples of human-made sources of radiation and explain how human-made s
ources differ
from natural sources of radiation.
Unit I
Introduction to Environmental Studies and Natural Resources
Environment: Definition- scope - importance
need for public awareness. Forest re
sources: Use over
exploitation- deforestation - case studies- mining - effects on forests and trib
al people. Water resources:
Use over utilization of surface and ground water- floods
drought - conflicts ove
r water. Mineral
resources: Use exploitation - environmental effects of extracting and using mine
ral resources - case
studies. Food resources: World food problems - changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing - effects of
modern agriculture- fertilizer-pesticide problems - water logging - salinity -ca
se studies. Energy resources:
Growing energy needs - renewable and non renewable energy sources. Land resource
s: Land as a resource land degradation - soil erosion. Role of an individual in conservation of natura
l resources.
Documentation of the effect of degradation of forest resource.
9 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystems and Biodiversity
Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem
producers - cons
umers -decomposers
energy flow in the ecosystem
ecological succession
food chains - food webs and e
cological pyramids.
Types of ecosystem: Introduction - characteristic features - forest ecosystem grassland ecosystem - desert
ecosystem - aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries
). Biodiversity:
Introduction definition (genetic - species ecosystem) diversity. Value of biodiver
sity: Consumptive use productive use social values
ethical values - aesthetic values. Biodiversity lev
el: Global - national local levels- India as a mega diversity nation- hotspots of biodiversity. Threat
s to biodiversity: Habitat loss
- poaching of wildlife man wildlife conflicts
endangered and endemic species of
India. Conservation of
biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity - field study.
Documentation of the endangered flora and fauna in your native place.
9 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Pollution
Pollution: Definition air pollution - water pollution - soil pollution - marine p
ollution - noise pollution thermal pollution - nuclear hazards. Solid waste management: Causes - effects control measures of urban
and industrial wastes. Role of an individual in prevention of pollution - pollut
ion case studies. Disaster
management: Floods earthquake - cyclone - landslides. Electronic wastes.
Investigation on the pollution status of Bhavani river.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Social Issues and Environment
Sustainable development : Unsustainable to sustainable development
urban problem
s related to energy.
Water conservation - rain water harvesting - watershed management. Resettlement
and rehabilitation of
people. Environmental ethics: Issues - possible solutions
climate change - globa
l warming and its effects
on flora and fauna - acid rain - ozone layer depletion - nuclear accidents - nuc
lear holocaust - wasteland
reclamation - consumerism and waste products. Environment protection act: Air (P
revention and Control
of Pollution) act water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act
wildlife prote
ction act forest
conservation act issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation.
Analyze the recent steps taken by government of India to prevent pollution.

9 Hours
Unit V
Human Population and Environment
Human population: Population growth - variation among nations
population explosi
on family welfare
programme and family planning
environment and human health Human rights
value ed
ucation HIV
/ AIDS, Swine flu
women and child welfare . Role of information technology in en
vironment and human
health.
Population explosion in India, China
the present and future scenario.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. T. G. Jr. Miller, Environmental Science, Wadsworth Publishing Co., 2004.
2. Anubha Kaushik, C.P. Kaushik, Environmental Science and Engineering , New Age
International
Publishers, 4th Multi Colour Edtion, 2014.
Reference(s)
1. Bharucha Erach, The Biodiversity of India, Mapin Publishing Pvt. Ltd., Ahmeda
bad India, 2010 .
2. S. Divan, Environmental Law and Policy in India, Oxford University Press, New
Delhi, 2001.
3. K. D. Wager, Environmental Management, W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, USA,
1998.
4. W. P. Cunningham, Environmental Encyclopedia, Jaico Publising House, Mumbai,
2004.
5. S. K. Garg, R. Garg, R. Garg, Ecological & Environmental Studies, Khanna Publ
ishers, Delhi,
2006.
6. http://www.ipcc.ch/index.html
7. http://unfccc.int/2860.php
11Z204, 11E204, 11L204, 11N204 & 11I204 MATERIALS SCIENCE

(Common to CSE, EEE, ECE, EIE and IT)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materia
ls.
. To impart fundamental knowledge in optical materials.
. To enable the students to understand the magnetic materials.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO7
ronmental
PO8
Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities
and norms of
engineering practice.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Select the suitable conducting materials for engineering design
2. Distinguish between semiconductors and dielectric materials.
3. Summarize concepts of optical and magnetic materials.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Engineering Physics taught in I Semester
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define relaxation time and collision time.
2. Give the postulates of free electron theory.
3. Give the drawbacks of classical free electron theory.
4. Define drift velocity.

5. State Drude-Lorentz theory.
6. What is the probability function f(E) of an electron occupying an energy leve
l E?
7. What are intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors?
8. Give the broad classification of semiconductors based on carriers.
9. State Hall effect.
10. Define photovoltaic effect.
11. Mention the applications of pin photo diode.
12. Write a short note on dipole and dipole moment.
13. List the properties of dielectrics.
14. Write the expressions for electronic and ionic polarization.
15. What is meant by local field in solid dielectrics?
16. Write the Clausius-Mosotti equation for a solid dielectric.
17. Define dielectric breakdown.
18. Define the term fluorescence.
19. What is the sufficient condition for the phosphorescence?
20. What is the principle of LED?
21. Define plastic encapsulation.
22. Write a note on liquid crystal state.
23. Write the drawbacks of LCD.
24. List the advantages of CD-ROM.
25. What is meant by magnetic flux density?
26. Write notes on (i) retentivity (ii) coercivity
27. What is meant by domain?
28. Mention the applications of soft magnetic materials.
29. Mention some materials used for magnetic recording.
Understand
1. How the free electron theory proved to be wrong in terms of thermal conductiv
ity by WiedemannFranz law?
2. Explain the variation of Fermi-Dirac distribution function with temperature.
3. Elucidate the significance of probability function when (i) f(E)=1 (ii) f(E)=
0 (ii)f(E)=0.5
4. Calculate the density of electron at 0K.
5. What are the importances of Fermi energy?
6. Why the extrinsic semiconductors are preferred over intrinsic semiconductors?
7. Prove that the Fermi level lies at the middle of the energy gap in intrinsic
semiconductor.
8. Give the importance of band gap energy.
9. What are the differences between donor ad acceptor energy level?
10. Is it possible to measure the magnetic field using Hall Effect? Explain.
11. How the photo voltaic effect is utilized in solar cells?
12. All the dielectrics are insulators, but why all the insulators are not diele
ctrics?
13. Why the orientation polarization occurs only in polar molecules?
14. Prove that the internal field of the atoms is larger than the applied field.
15. Why the chemical and electrochemical breakdowns have close relationship with
thermal
breakdown?
16. What are the changes observed in BaTiO3 with change in temperature?
17. How can you increase the emission time in luminescence?
18. How the electroluminescence is used in LED?

19. Why the wavelength of the emitted photons in LED depends on energy gap in th
e semiconductor?
20. Why LCD comes under passive display device?
21. How the data in CD-ROM is read out?
22. What are the advantages of CD-ROM?
23. Give the origin of magnetic moment in magnetic materials.
24. Why the susceptibility of diamagnetic material is negative?
25. What is the reason for the magnetic lines of forces are highly attracted tow
ards the centre of the
ferromagnetic material?
Apply
1. Discuss the reasons for the failure of classical free electron theory.
2. What is the reason for low contribution of electrons to the heat capacity of
metals?
3. Sketch the variation of Fermi level with temperature.
4. Explain how phosphorous atoms donate electrons to the conduction band?
5. Where are the donor and acceptor levels located in an impurity semiconductor?
Why?
6. Explain how photo pin diodes are used in fiber optical communication?
7. Graphically explain frequency dependence of dielectrics.
8. Why at low temperature the total polarization is maximum?
9. Deduce Clausius-Mosotti relation and explain its use in predicting the dielec
tric constant of the
solids.
10. Why phosphorescence is called delayed fluorescence?
11. Explain the reason for the formation of domain in ferromagnetism and how the
hysteresis curve is
explained on the basis of the domain theory?
12. Discuss the bearing of domain theory in soft and hard magnetic materials.
13. Give an account of the origin of atomic magnetization and which source is im
portant in the
ferromagnetic materials?
14. Explain the spontaneous magnetization possessed by ferromagnetic material be
low Curie point.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Compare intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.

Differentiate p-type and n-type semiconductors.
Compare dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.
Differentiate soft and hard magnetic materials.
Compare LED and LCD.
Unit I
Electrical properties of Metals
Introduction - Derivation of microscopic form of Ohm s law- postulates of classica
l free electron theoryderivation of electrical conductivity of metals (Drude- Lorentz theory)- merits
and demerits. Derivation of
thermal conductivity Wiedemann-Franz law- verification. Electron energies in met
al and Fermi energyFermi-Dirac distribution function and its variation with temperature- density of
energy states- calculation of
density of electron and fermi energy at 0K- average energy of free electron at 0
K- Importance of fermi
energy- problems.
Quantum free electron theory and Band theory of solid.
9 Hours
Unit II
Semiconducting Materials & Devices
Introduction - elemental and compound semiconductors - Intrinsic semiconductors:
density of electrons density of holes- determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi e
nergy- band gap energy
determination (quantitative treatment). Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concen
tration in p-type and n-type
semiconductors. Hall effect- theory of Hall effect- experimental determination o
f Hall voltageapplications. Semi conducting devices: solar cells (Photovoltaic effect)
uses. P
hoto detectors: pin photo
diodes applications.
Variation of Fermi level with temperature and doping concentration in extrinsic
semiconductors.
9 Hours
Unit III
Dielectrics
Introduction- fundamental definitions in dielectrics- expressions for electronic
, ionic and orientation
polarization mechanisms- space charge polarization- Langevin- Debye equation- fr
equency and
temperature effects on polarization- dielectric loss- internal field- expression
for internal field (cubic
structure)- derivation of Clausius-Mosotti equation
importance. Dielectric break
down- various
breakdown mechanisms with characteristics- applications of dielectric materials
and insulating materialsproblems.
Charging and discharging of capacitors.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Optical Materials
Introduction-fluorescence and phosphorescence- technique of increasing the emiss
ion time. Light Emitting
Diode: principle, construction and working-applications. Liquid crystal display:
general propertiesdynamic scattering display- twisted nematic display- applications- comparison be
tween LED and LCD.
Disk data storage recording and read out of data in CD-ROM- principle - magneto
optic disk.
Various data storage and retrieval techniques.
9 Hours
Unit V
Magnetic Materials
Introduction-orbital magnetic moment and spin magnetic moment-Bohr magneton-basi
c definitions
properties of dia, para and ferro magnetic materials-domain theory of ferro magn
etism-process of domain
magnetization-reversible and irreversible domains-explanation of hysteresis curv
e based on domain theoryhard and soft magnetic materials-recording and read out process in floppy disk a
nd magnetic bubble
memory-comparison between floppy disk and bubble memory-problems.
Magnetic shift register.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V. Rajendran, Materials Science, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers Company Ltd, Ne
w Delhi, 2011.
2. M. Arumugam, Physics II, Anuradha Publications, Kumbakonam, 2005.
Reference(s)
1. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New De
lhi, 2006.
2. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. C
hand &
Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
3. P.K. Palanisami, Physics For Engineers, Scitech Publications (India) Pvt. Ltd
, Chennai, 200
4. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New D
elhi, 2009.
5. M. R. Srinivasan, Physics for Engineers, Reprint, New Age International Publi

cations, New
Delhi, 2002.
11N205 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To expose the students to study the semiconductor devices and diodes character
istics
. To study the characteristics different biasing and configurations of the BJT a
nd FET
. To acquire knowledge about various amplifier circuits
. To equip and verify the various rectifier circuits and oscillator circuits
. To learn the differential and tuned amplifiers
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO12
Course Outcome(s)
1. Explain the working principles of various semiconductor devices.
2. Analyze the various amplifier and oscillator circuits
3. Construct rectifier and filter circuits.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Engineering Physics taught in I Semester and Knowledge of Physics
of Higher
secondary and State board of Government of Tamilnadu
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 5
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination
will be converted to
be calculated for 50 marks
Remember
1. Define law of mass of action.
2. What is meant by minority carrier diffusion length?
3. State drift current.
4. What is diffusion current?
5. What is forward and reverse resistance of a diode?
6. Define cut in voltage of a diode.
7. Draw the switching characteristics of diode?
8. Give the expression for transition capacitance of a diode.
9. List out the applications for zener diode?
10. What is tunnel diode?
11. What is valley voltage of tunnel diode?
12. Draw the characteristics curve for transistor.
13. Define current amplification factor in CC transistor.
14. Mention the values of input resistance in CB, CE & CC configuration?
15. Why voltage divider bias is commonly used in amplifier circuits?
16. How FET is known as voltage variable resistor?
17. How self-bias circuit is used as constant current source?
18. Why self-bias technique is not used in enhancement type MOSFET?
19. Mention the types of IC voltage regulator.
20. State conversion efficiency.
21. Which of the transistor circuit is stable? Why?
22. Mention the conditions of proper transistor biasing?
23. In which region the JFET act as a simple resistor and why?
24. What are the types of biasing methods used for BJT biasing?
25. CMRR for the differential amplifier should be high. Comment.
Understand
1. Describe the theory of PN junction and explain how it acts as diode.
2. Draw and explain the I-V Characteristics P-n Junction diode.
3. Compare the temperature dependent characteristics of various diodes.
4. Draw and explain the junction diode switching times.
5. Discuss the operation of single and double tuned amplifiers.
6. Discuss the biasing circuits of BJT and its operating point.
7. Distinguish bias stability and stability parameter.
8. Mention in detail about the biasing method of FET.
9. Derive the current components and Eber moll model?
10. Draw low frequency hybrid model in CE configuration. Give typical values of
=h parameters.
11. Write comparisons of CC, CE, and CB configuration.
12. Demonstrate the working of transistor as a switch.
13. Derive the expression for CMRR.
14. Give real-time applications for single and double tuned amplifiers.
15. List out the difference between class =A , class B and class =C power amplifiers
in terms of
collector efficiency and distortion.
16. Compare the temperature dependent characteristics of various diodes
17. Prove that the maximum efficiency of a class B amplifier in 78.5%.
18. Derive the equation for efficiency of a class B amplifier.
19. Write down Barhausen criterion for oscillations.
20. Draw and analyze the output response graph for centre tapped full wave recti
fier.
21. Illustrate Hartley oscillator and derive the equation for oscillation.
22. Illustrate crystal oscillator and derive the equation for oscillation.
23. What is the necessity of constant source in differential amplifier?
24. Derive the equation for differential gain and CMRR.
25. How the amplifiers are classified based on the bias conditions?
26. Draw the transfer characteristics of differential amplifier circuits.
27. Draw typical circuit of transformer coupled multistage amplifier and explain
its working.
Draw its frequency response.
28. Draw the circuit diagram differential amplifier using constant current sourc
e.
29. Draw the circuit of emitter coupled differential amplifier and explain.
Apply
1. A germanium diode carries a current of 10mA when a forward bias of 0.2V is ap
plied.
a) Estimate the reverse saturation current (Is),
b) Calculate bias voltages needed for diode currents of 1mA and 100mA. Comment o
n the range
of these two voltages.
2. A silicon diode rated 1mA displays a forward voltage of 0.7 volt at a current
of 1 mA. Evaluate the
reverse saturation current.
3. Draw the circuit diagram of common source amplifier and derive expressions fo
r voltage gain and

output resistance.
4. Explain with an example, how the zener diode acts as a voltage regulator.
5. Draw the circuit diagram of small signal CE amplifier circuit and give its eq
uivalent hybrid model.
What is the role of CC and CE?
6. Derive the expression for varactor diode.
7. Draw and explain the graphical method of determining Q- point for n-channel M
OSFET.
8. Obtain frequency response of CE amplifier circuit and find out its band width
. What is the impact
of CC and CE on the band width?
9. How even harmonics is eliminated using push-pull circuit, derive the expressi
on?
10. Derive an expression for frequency of oscillation of transistorized Colpitt s
oscillator.
11. Explain how to stabilize the amplitude against variation due to fluctuations
occasioned in Wien
bridge oscillator.
12. A full-wave rectifier with a centre- tapped transformer supplies a dc curren
t of 100mA to a load
resistance of R = 20 ohm. The secondary resistance of the transformer is 1 ohm.
Each diode has a
forward resistance of 0.5 ohm. Determine the following :
a) RMS value of the signal voltage across each half of the secondary.
b) DC power supplied to the load. c) AC power input to the rectifier. d) Convers

ion
efficiency.
e) Voltage regulation
13. Show that the gain of Wien bridge oscillator using BJT amplifier must be at
least three for the
oscillations to occur.
14. Draw the circuit diagram of a RC phases shift oscillator using BJT. Derive t
he expression for
frequency of oscillators.
15. What is the drawback of class B amplifier? How it is going to overcome using
class AB amplifier
with neat diagram.
16. Classify various oscillators based on output waveforms, circuit components,
operating frequencies
and feedback used.
17. Classify different type of oscillators based on frequency range.
18. Prove that oscillations will not be sustained if, at the oscillator frequenc
y, the magnitude of the
product of the transfer gain and feedback factor is less than unity.
19. A differential amplifier has a differential gain Ad of 100. The input voltag
es applied areV1=1mv
and V2=0.9mv. Calculate the output voltage for a) CMRR=100 b) CMRR=1000 and c)
CMRR=10,000.
20. A differential amplifier has a differential gain Ad of 120. The input voltag
es applied are V1=1mv
and V2=0.9mv. Calculate the output voltage for a) CMRR=100 b) CMRR=1000 and c)
CMRR=10, 00
21. Derive the expression for single and double tuned amplifiers.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Analyze the below two statements.
a) A p-n junction is a robust device and is a good choice for a diode required i
n power
electronics.
b) Due to the nonlinear, exponential nature of the current, the p-n junction can
be used as a
Varistor.
2. Recognize the performance of diode in terms of doping of ions.
3. Distinguish the diode and transistor switching characteristics.
4. Illustrate the effect of single and double tuned amplifiers when it is subjec
ted to different range of
signals
5. Characterize low and high power applications.
6. Differentiate FET and UJT from BJT.
7. Differentiate the various biasing method of BJT.
8. Differentiate Cascade and Darlington connections of transistor.
Create
1. Design a circuit for electronic PID controller using operational amplifiers.

2. Design a radio transmitter and receiver in PCB board using a various types of
oscillators.
Construct an audio amplifier and function generator using electronic components.
Unit I
Semiconductor Devices
Theory of P-N junction
P-N junction as diode
P-N diode currents
Volt-Amp charact
eristics Diode
resistance Temperature effect on P-N junction
Transition and diffusion capacitan
ce of P-N diode
Diode switching times
Zener diode
UJT characteristics.
P-N diode applications
9 Hours
Unit II
Bi-Polar and Field Effect Transistors
Junction transistor Transistor current components
Input and output characteristi
cs of CE, CB and CC
configurations Transistor switching time
Junction Field Effect Transistor
Pinch
off voltage JFET
Volt- Ampere characteristics MOSFETs and their characteristics
FET as a variable
resistor.
Relation between transistor parameters
9 Hours
Unit III
Small-Signal and Large Signal Amplifiers
Transistor as an amplifier
Fixed and self-biasing of BJT
Determination of h para
meters from
characteristics
Analysis of a transistor amplifier circuit using h parameters Simplified hybrid model for
CE and CB Cascade and Darlington connections, Transformer coupled class A, B amp
lifiers and
class B Push-pull amplifiers Common source amplifiers
Common drain amplifiers
Fe
edback
amplifiers Power amplifiers.
Negative feedback
9 Hours
Unit IV
Rectifiers and Oscillators
Half wave and full wave rectifier analysis - Theory of sinusoidal oscillators
ase shift and Wien bridge
oscillators Colpitt s, Hartley and crystal oscillators- Filters
Ph
Application of oscillators
9 Hours
Unit V
Differential and Tuned Amplifiers
Differential amplifiers
Common mode and differential mode analysis DC and AC ana
lysis
Characteristics of tuned amplifiers
Single and double tuned amplifiers.
Application of amplifiers 9 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Jacob. Millman, Christos C. Halkias and Sathyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices a
nd Circuits, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, 2010
2. Jacob Millman, Christos C. Halkias and K. L. Chetan Pari, Integrated Electron
ics: Analog and
Digital Circuits and System, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009
Reference(s)
1. Robert L. Boylestad & Lo Nashelsky, Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory, Pear
son Education,
Third Indian Reprint, 2006 / PHI.
2. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Prentice Hall of India Privat
e Limited, New Delhi,
2008
3. Theodre F. Boghert, Electronic Devices & Circuits, Pearson Education, 2009
4. Allen Mottershead, Electronic Devices and Circuits
An Introduction, Prentice
Hall of India
Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008
Web Resource
1. Solid State Circuits, NPTEL
es.php
IIT, Chennai, Link: http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/cours
11N206 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To understand the concepts of Object Oriented Programming.

. To gain thorough knowledge in programming with C++.
. To understand the concepts of file operation.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO12
Course Outcome(s)
1. Differentiate between a procedure oriented language and object oriented langu
age
2. Write programs for simple applications using the features of object oriented
programming..
3. Write simple programs for file operations and error handling mechanism.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge in Basics of =C
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 6
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Programming taught in 1st Semester
Remember
20
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define object.
2. Define Encapsulation.
3. State the features of object-oriented programming.
4. Define Algorithm.
5. Define Recursion.
6. List the class members.
7. List the categories of static data members.
8. Recall the constructor declaration and definition.
9. State parameterized constructors.
10. Recall the advantages of dynamic initialization.
11. State abstract class.
12. Recall operator overloading.
13. Define virtual function.
14. Reproduce the functionalities of file pointers.
15. Define friend function.
16. Define this pointer.
17. Define templates.
18. Define exceptions.
19. Mention the purpose of exception handling.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
Demonstrate the determination of errors while dealing with files.

Give examples for dynamic initialization of variables.
Indicate the objects usage in function argument.
Explain function overloading.
5. Demonstrate the usage of bool data type.

6. Discuss this pointer.
7. Interrelate overloading and constructor.
8. Illustrate dynamic object initialization.
9. Give examples for the operators that cannot be overloaded.
10. Demonstrate casting operator.
11. Interpolate multi-argument templates.
12. Summarize the behavior of the static data members of a class template differ
from the behavior of
static data members of a normal class.
13. Explain rules for Virtual Functions.
14. Compute manipulators.
15. Discuss dynamic polymorphism.
Apply
1. Explain the message passing in C++.
2. Examine pseudo code.
3. How does C++apply the operators in the arithmetic expression?
4. Generalize class declaration.
5. Show the format for calling a member function.
6. Organize constructor declaration.
7. Discover the creation of an array using new operator.
8. Organize a class specifier that creates a class called leverage with one priv
ate data member
Crowbar, of type int and one public function whose declaration is void proxy().
9. Data items in a class must be private. Explain.
10. Compute runtime polymorphism in C++.
11. Show the difference between constructors from an ordinary function.
12. While copying the objects if you say a = b and assume that '=' operator is o
verloaded then what it
will call, a copy constructor or operator overloading function.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Critique about static data is accessed by static member function.
2. Define a supplier class. Assume that the items supplied by any given supplier
are different and
varying in number. Use dynamic memory allocation in the constructor function to
achieve the
solution.
3. Develop selection sort as a generic function.
Create
1. Define an examiner class. Provide all necessary data and function members to
provide the
following: The examiner must access answer sheets of at least one subject; He ma
y examine
answer sheets of multiple subjects; The examiner represents a college and also a
university; Most
of the examiners are local and represent local university; and have more than on
e constructor
including one default and one with default argument. Provide a meaningful copy c
onstructor.
2. For a supermarket, define a bill class. All the bill objects will contain bil
l number, name of clerk
preparing the bill, each item with quantity and price and total amount to be pai
d. Total items in the
bill are varying. Define dynamic memory allocation constructor for bill class su
ch that any number
of items from 1 to 50 can be accommodated in a single bill. There is an array de
scribing each item
with a price. The price is to be picked up from that array. Now overload = opera
tor and provide
reason for the need of such operator.
Unit I
Introduction
Need for object oriented programming
Procedural Languages vs. Object oriented ap
proach Characteristics Object oriented programming - C++ Programming Basics: Basic Prog
ram Construction Output Using cout - Input with cin - Data types-Variables and Constants
Operator
s - Control StatementsManipulators-Type conversion.
Binary operators
9 Hours
Unit II
Objects and Classes
Simple Class - C++ Objects as Physical Objects
C++ Object as Data types- Constru
ctors and DestructorsObject as Function Arguments - Returning Objects from Functions - Structures and
Classes - Arrays and
Strings.
Multidimensional array
9 Hours
Unit III
Operator Overloading and Inheritance
Need of operator overloading- Overloading Unary Operators- Overloading binary Op
erators-Overloading
Special Operators-Data Conversion-Inheritance: Derived Class and Base Class-Deri
ved Class
Constructors-Overriding Member Functions-Class Hierarchies-Public and Private In
heritance-Levels of
Inheritance-Multiple Inheritance.
Single Inheritance
9 Hours
Unit IV
Polymorphism and File Streams
Virtual Function Friend Function
Static Function-Assignment and Copy Initializat
ion- Streams String
I/O Character I/O
Object I/O I/O with Multiple Objects
File Pointers
Disk I/O wi
th Member
Functions- Error Handling in File I/O.
Friend Function
9 Hours
Unit V
Templates and Exception Handling
Templates: Introduction - Function Templates - Overloading Function Templates Class Templates
Exception Handling Syntax, multiple exceptions, exceptions with arguments.
Function Templates
9 Hours
Total: 45 hours
Textbook(s)
1. Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming in-C++, Galgotia Publication, 2009
Reference(s)
1. Deitel & Deitel, C++ How to program, Prentice Hall, 2006
2. D.S.Malik, C++ Programming, Thomson, 2007
3. K.R. Venugopal, Rajkumar and T.Ravishankar, Mastering C++, Tata McGraw Hill P
ublishing
Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006
11N207 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To develop the basic programming skill
. To understand the basic concepts of arrays and pointers
. To write a program that uses the concepts of inheritance and operator overload
ing
. To make the students to learn object oriented way for solving problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Create class and object for an application.
2. Apply the features of object oriented programming for various applications.
3. Apply the file operation and error handling mechanism for simple applications
.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basics in Object Oriented Programming
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
10
Conduct of Experiment
10
15
Observation and Analysis of Results
15
20
Record
05
Model Examination
10
Viva-Voce
05
05
Total
50
50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Write a program to define a class to represent a BANKACCOUNT. Including the f
ollowing
members: Date members: Name of the depositor, Account Number, Type of account, B
alance
Amount in the account.
Member functions:
To assign initial values (Use constructors to initialize the data) To deposit an
amount
To withdraw an account after checking the balance
To display the name and the balance
Note: Try to use all types of constructors
2. Write a program to computer tax using default arguments. A tax compute functi
on takes two
arguments amount and tax percentage. Default tax percent is 15% of income.
3. Write functions to add 2 or 3 numbers of different data types.
4. Implement the above class with dynamic objects and use constructors and destr
uctors.
5. Implement the class STUDENT with necessary data members and member function t
o print the
mark sheet of a student using array of object.
6. Design three classes student exam and result the student class has data membe
rs such as
those representing roll number name etc. Create a class exam by inheriting the s
tudent class. The
exams add a subject marks as the data member. Derive the class result from the e
xam class and it
has its data member as a total mark. Write an interactive program to implement t
his.
7. Implement the concept of operator overloading.
8. Write a program to keep track of number of instances created and alive for th
e class using static
data member and static member functions.
9. Write a program to add the private data member of two different classes using
friend function and
friend class.
10. Program of book shop which sells and books and video tapes. These two class
books and tapes are
inherited from the base class called media. The media class has data members for
storing title and
publication the book class has data members such as number of pages in a book an
d tape class has
the playing time of a tape each class will have member function read () and show
(). In the base
class these members have to be defined as virtual functions. Write a program whi
ch models the
class hierarchy for book shop and processing objects for these classes using poi
nters to the base
class.
11. Program to sort a set of numbers of generic data type using template functio
n.
12. Program to copy the content of one file to a new file by removing unnecessar
y spaces between
words.
Design experiment
Application oriented experiments
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
S.No
Experiment
Hours
1
Define a class to represent a bank account to include the following members.
Data Members: Name of the depositors, Account number, Type of account, Balance a
mount in
the account.
Member functions: To initialize values to data members, To deposit an amount, To
withdraw an
account after checking the balance, To display the name and the balance.
6
2
Implement function overloading (eg. Write functions to add 2 or 3 numbers of dif
ferent data
types.)
3
3
Implement the concept of default argument function.
3
4
Implement the concept of array of objects.
3
5
Implement a class with dynamic objects and use constructors and destructors.
3
6
Implement the concept of Inheritance.
6
7
Implement the concept of operator overloading.
3
8
Illustrate the use of static data member and static member functions by keeping
track of number
of instances of object that are created and alive.
3
9
Implement friend functions and friend classes to add the private data member of
two different
classes.
3
10
Implement the concept of virtual function.
3
11
Program to sort a set of numbers of generic data type using template function
6
12
Program to copy the content of one file to a new file by removing unnecessary sp
aces between
words.
3
11O208 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS

(Common for CE,EEE,ME,MXE,BT,IT & TT (I Semester); AE,CSE,ECE,EIE & FT (II Semes
ter)
2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
. Upon Successful completion of this course, the student should be able to:
. Understand and appreciate the importance of Engineering Graphics in Engineerin
g
. Understand the basic principles of Technical/Engineering Drawing
. Understand the different steps in producing drawings according to BIS conventi
ons
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Interpret the pictorial representation of objects.
2. Recognize the different views of orthographic projection
3. Draw the three dimensional object from the given orthographic views
Prerequisite(s)
Baisc knowledge of geometry taught in High Schools.
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
10
15
Observation and Results
15
25
Record
10
Mini-Project/Model Examination /
Viva-voce
15
10
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define Graphic communication or Drawing.
2. List the different drawing instruments.
3. What is blueprint?
4. What are the applications of engineering graphics?
5. What are the two types of drawings?
6. What are the different types of projections?
7. Define Orthographic projection.
8. What do you mean by I angle projection?
9. What is III angle projection?
10. Define Plan.
11. What is Elevation?
12. List the various types of lines.
13. What do you mean by a Plane?
14. Name the five standard sizes of drawing sheets that are specified by BIS.
15. Give the BIS codes for Lettering, Dimensioning and lines.
16. State few important dimensioning rules.
17. What are the two types of Solids?
18. What is Representative Fraction (RF)?
19. What is a Frustum?
20. Define Truncation.
21. Define Section Plane and give its types.
22. What do you mean by development of surfaces?
23. State the principle of Isometric projection.
24. What is Isometric View?
25. Define Isometric scale.
Understand
1. When an object is said to be in III quadrant?
2. Why are the projectors perpendicular to the Projection Plane in the Orthograp
hic projection?
3. What is the Shape of the section obtained when a cone is cut by a plane passi
ng through the apex and
center of the base of the cone?
4. Why II and IV angle projections are not used in industries?

5. What are the differences between I angle and III angle projections?
6. Which method is suitable for developing a truncated prism?
7. Why is a hexagonal headed bolt and nut more common in use as compared to squa
re headed bolt and
nut?
8. Which is the most suitable method for drawing the Perspective Projection?
9. What are the prerequisites for Free hand sketching?
10. What are the two methods used to obtain the Isometric view of a circle?
11. Why CAD is preferred over Conventional drafting?
Apply/Evaluate
1. How will you project a point which is above HP and in front of VP?
2. How will you project a point which is below HP and behind VP?
3. What is the method used to determine the True length and inclination of a lin
e inclined to both the
planes?
4. How will you project a prism whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP
by Change of Position
method?
5. How will you project a cylinder when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel
to HP by change of
position method?
6. How will you project a pyramid whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to V
P by Change of Position
method?
7. How will you project a cone when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to H
P by change of position
method?
8. How will you obtain the Sectional view of solids in simple vertical position
cut by planes inclined to
any one reference plane?
9. How will you develop the lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids?
10. How will you develop the complete surfaces of Frustums?
11. Construct an isometric scale.
12. A cricket ball thrown from the ground level reaches the wicket keeper s gloves
. Maximum height
reached by the ball is 5m. The ball travels a horizontal distance of 11m from th
e point of projection.
Trace the path of the ball.
13. The Pictorial view of an object is shown below. Draw the following views to
full size scale.
a) Elevation in the direction of arrow
b) Left end elevation
c) Plan
14. Read the dimensioned drawing shown below. Redraw the figure to full size and
dimension it as per
Indian Standards.
Q. No. 13 Q. No. 14
Unit I
Concepts and Conventions
Use of drafting instruments
BIS conventions and specifications Size, layout and
folding of drawing
sheets Lettering and dimensioning. General principles of orthographic projection
First angle projection
Layout of views
Projection of points, located in all quadrant and straight lines
located in the first
quadrant Determination of true lengths and true inclinations.
6 Hours
Unit II
Projection of Solids
Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the ax
is is inclined to one
reference plane by change of position method.
6 Hours
Unit III
Section of Solids and Development of Surfaces
Sectioning of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical
position by cutting planes
inclined to one Reference: plane
Obtaining the true shape of section. Developmen
t of lateral surfaces of
simple solids
prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones.
6 Hours
Unit IV
Isometric Projection and Perspective Projection
Principles of isometric projection isometric scale
isometric projections of simp
le solids, pyramids,
cylinders and cones. Orthographic projection - Systems of orthographic projectio
n - First angle
orthographic projection - Conversion of pictorial to orthographic views (Free ha
nd).
6 Hours
Unit V
Introduction to AutoCAD and 2D Modeling
Starting AutoCAD
Interfaces
Menus
Tool bars
Coordinates
Limits
Units
Drawing Commands - Creating a Point, Construction of Lines, Polyline, Multiline,

Circles, Arcs,
Rectangle, Polygon, Ellipse, Hatch, Text, Mtext, Linetypes
Edit and Modify comma
nds - Copy, Move,
2D command
Erase, Mirror, Zoom, Pan, Arrays, Trim, Break, Fillet, Chamfer, Redraw, Regen, D
imensioning, Colors,
Layers
Exercises
6 Hours
Total: 30+30 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. K. V. Natarajan, A Textbook(s): of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publish
ers, Chennai, 2006
Reference(s)
1. S. Julyes Jaisingh, Engineering Graphics, Tri Sea Publishers, 2010
2. V. Rameshbabu, Engineering Graphics, VRB Publishers Pvt Ltd., 2009
3. K. Venugopal, Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002
4. N. D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing, Charotar publishing House 2003
5. K. L. Narayana and P. Kannaiah, Engineering Graphics, Scitech Publications (P
vt) Limited-2002
List of Experiments
1. Projection of points located in all quadrants.
2. Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both t
he planes.
3. Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines.
4. Projection of Solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis i
s inclined to one
reference plane by change of position method.
5. Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined t
o one reference plane
and obtaining true shape of section.
6. Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids like prisms, p
yramids cylinder and
cone.
7. Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders.
8. Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views.
9. Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD
.
10. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD.
Total: 30 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No
Experiment
Hours
1
Projection of points located in all quadrants
3
2
Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the
planes.
3
3
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines
3
4
Projection of Solids when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by change
of
position method.
3
5
Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to o
ne
reference plane and obtaining true shape of section
3
6
Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids.
3
7
Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders.
3
8
Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views.

3
9
Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD.
3
10
Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD.
3
11N209 WORKSHOP PRACTICE

0 0 2 1.0
Objective(s)
. To learn the use of basic hand tools and

. To know the need for safety in work place
. To gain hands on experience on Carpentry, Fitting, Sheet metal, Plumbing, Arc
welding, Foundry
and Basic electrical circuits
. To have the basic knowledge on working of domestic appliances
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO11
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles
and
apply these to one s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage project
s and in
multidisciplinary environments.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Prepare simple models/objects and joints.
2. Involve in plumbing, moulding, wiring and soldering activities.
3. Rectify faults in the electrical and electronic devices used in home applianc
es.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basics of Civil and Mechanical Engineering taught in 1st semester

. Basics in Engineering Physics taught in 1st semester
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal Assessment
Semester End Examination
Preparation
10
20
10
10
Record
10
Mini-Project/
Model Examination /
Viva-Voce
20
20
Total
50
50
Remember
1. What are the tools used in sheet metal work?
2. What are the types of joints in sheet metal work?

3. What is moulding?
4. What is green sand mould?
5. What is gas welding?
6. List out the types of flames in welding.
7. What is meant by carpentry?
8. What is the use of Saw?
9. What are the types of joints in pipe connection?
10. What is staircase wiring?
11. What is the working principle of centrifugal pump?
12. What are the types of valves in plumbing and where it is used?
13. List out the cutting tools used in carpentry with specification.
14. What are the necessary equipments used in Arc Welding?
15. What are the methods used in sheet metal work?
16. List out the types and components of Air- Conditioner.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Compare the Refrigeration system with air Condition system.

How the refrigeration system works?
How will you select the suitable welding process for various materials?
How will make a V joint in the given MS flat?
How will you make a green sand mould using solid pattern?
How gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints?
7. How metals are manufactured by using casting process?

8. How cavity is formed by using pattern?
9. How the wires are joined by soldering?
Apply / Evaluate
1. Sketch the wiring diagram for a room consist of two fans ,three tubelights, a
nd one plug point.
2. Sketch the line diagram of the plumbing work carried out in your house.
3. Sketch all the wooden furniture present in your house in three dimensional vi
ew.
4. How will make a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that include
s valves and taps?
5. How will form Staircase and Godown wiring?
6. Prepare a hexagonal shape pen stand by using power tools.
7. Prepare a cover with handle by using sheet metal to cover a motor.
8. Prepare a small trolley to carry wastage by using welding work.
List of Experiments
1. Forming of simple objects using sheet metal.
2. Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat.
3. Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump.
4. Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using weldi
ng joints.
5. Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using pow
er tools.
6. Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valve
s and taps.
7. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/ Refrigerato
r and Window
Air-Conditioner.
8. Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat.
9. Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern.
10. Staircase and Godown wiring.
11. Soldering practice.
12. Assembly and Disassembly of Computer System /Television.
13. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron/ Heate
r.
14.
Total: 30 Hours
Practical Schedule
SI.
No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Forming of simple objects using sheet metal.
3
2
Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat.
3
3
Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump.
2
4
Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding
joints.
3
5
Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power
tools.
2
6
Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves a
nd taps.
2
7
Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/ Refrigerator a
nd
Window Air-Conditioner.
2
8
Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat.
3
9
Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern.
3
10
Staircase and Godown wiring.
2
11
Soldering practice.
2
12
Assembly and Disassembly of Computer System /Television.
2
13
Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron/ Heater.
11O301 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS III

(Common to all branches Except CSE and Bio-Tech)
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To obtain the knowledge of expressing periodic functions as Fourier series, Fo
urier transform and
Z transform which is used to analyze signals in signal processing.
. Ability to solve boundary value problems in heat and wave equations using part
ial differential
equations.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Solve problems using Fourier series and Fourier transform.
2. Find the solutions for the basic problems with Z-transform, difference and pa
rtial differential
equation.
3. Apply the skills to solve boundary value problems.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Engineering Mathematics I & II
Assessment Pattern
S. No
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I7
Test II1
Model Examination1
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
20
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze/ Evaluate
10
10
10
20
5
Create
00
00
00
00
Total
100
100
100
100
7 The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examinati
on will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, int

ernal assessment will be
Remember
1. State the Dirichlet s Conditions
2. Define even and odd functions graphically
3. Write down the complex Fourier transform pair
4. State convolution theorem in Fourier transforms
5. Define unilateral and bilateral Z-transform of {f(n)}
6. State initial value theorem in Z-transforms
7. Define complete solution of a partial differential equation
8. Write the complementary function of non-homogeneous second order equations of
distinct and repeated
roots
9. What does a2 represent in the equation ytt = a2yxx ?
10. Write any two solutions of the Laplace equation obtained by the method of s
eparation of variables
Understand
1. Find the general solution of .......xyzqzxypyzx222222.....
2. Solve
..yxeyxzDDDD.......2222
3. Find the half-range cosine series for the function and hence deduce the sum o
f
the series
......x0,xxf
...
.
..04121nn
4. Find the Fourier series of period 2 for the function
.....
...
..
.
21210)(
xxxxxf
.
.
Deduce the sum of .

.
.,..5,3,121nn
5. Find the Fourier transform of . ..
...
.
..
.
1|x|for01xforx1xf
Hence evaluate and .
.
..
.
..
.
02sindxxx
.
.
..
.
..
.
04.dxxxsin
6. Solve the integral equation = dxxxf.
.
0cos)(...e
7. Find inverse transform .
....112423
..zzz
8. Find Z
....2132
..
.
nnn
transform of .
9. Use convolution theorem to find the inverse Z transform of

....141282
..zzz
10. Give a function which is self-reciprocal under Fourier sine and cosine trans
form
Apply
1. Find the PDE of all planes having, equal intercepts on the x and y axis.
2. Form the PDE of all planes passing through the origin
3. Expand the function as a Fourier series of periodicity 2.. ),(cos)(....inxxf
4. A function y=f(x) is given by the following table of values. Make the harmoni
c analysis of the function
in (0,T) up to the second harmonic.
x
0
T/6
T/3
T/2
2T/3
5T/6
T
y
0
9.2
14.4
17.8
17.3
11.7
0
5. Obtain the constant term and the first harmonic in the Fourier series expansi
on in (0,12) for the function
y = f(x) defined by the table below
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
f (x)
1.8
1.1
0.3
0.16
0.5
1.5
2.16
1.88
1.25
1.30
1.76
2.00
6. A
g is
then
any
taut string of length L is fastened at both ends. The midpoint of the strin
taken to a height of b and
released from rest in this position. Find the displacement of the string at
time t.
7. A string is stretched between two fixed points at a distance 2L apart and the
points of the string are given
initial velocities v where v = cx /L 0 < x <L
= c ( 2L - x) /L L < x < 2L
x being the distance from an end point. Find the displacement of the string at
any subsequent time.
8. A rod 30 cm long, has its ends A and B at 20C and 80C respectively, until stead
y state conditions
prevail. The temperature at the end B is then suddenly reduced to 60 C and at the
end A is raised to 40 C
and maintained so. Find the resulting temperature u (x,t).
9. A rectangular plate with insulated surface is 10 cm wide so long compared to

its width that it may be
considered infinite length .If the temperature along the short edge y=0 is given
by , while the )
10sin(8x.
two long edges x=0 and x=10 as well as the other short edge are kept at 00c . Fi
nd the steady state
temperature.
10. Solve the equation. 0,21271012.......yythatgivenyyynnnn
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Solve (D2-5DD +6D 2) z= y sinx
2. Solve (4D2-4DD +D 2)z = 16 log(x+2y)
3. Solve z = p x + q y + p2 q2
4. Evaluate using transform method
.....
.
..02222bxaxdx
5. Evaluate and
...
.
.0222axdx
...
.
.02222.
axdxx
6. Find Fourier sine transform of , a >0
xeax.
7. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of e-ax , a > 0 and hence find Fourie
r sine and cosine transform of
x e-ax
8. Find Fourier transform of , a > 0 and hence find Fourier transform of
22xae.22xe
.
9. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of X n-1

10 Find inverse transform.
Unit I
Fourier Series
Dirichlet s conditions
General Fourier series
Odd and even functions Half range co
sine and sine series
Parseval s Identity - Harmonic Analysis- Application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Fourier Transform
Fourier transform pair
Sine and Cosine transforms
Properties Transforms of simpl
e functions
Convolution theorem - Parseval s Identity-Finite Fourier Transform- Application to
9 Hours
Unit III
Z -Transform and Difference Equations
Z - transform - Elementary properties
Inverse Z- transform Convolution theorem Formation of difference
equations
Solution of difference equations using Z- transform - Application to e
ngineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Partial Differential Equations
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constant
s and arbitrary functions
Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations (exclud
ing reducible to standard forms)
Lagrange s linear equation Linear partial differential equations of second and hig
her order with constant
coefficients.
9 Hours
Unit V
Boundary Value Problems
Classification of second order quasi linear partial differential equations
Fouri
er series solutions of one
dimensional wave equation
One dimensional heat equation (Insulated ends excluded
) Steady state
solution of two dimensional heat equation (Insulated edges excluded )
Fourier se
ries solutions in Cartesian
coordinates .
9 Hours
Textbook(s)
1 B. S .Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delh
i ,2000.
2 K.Megalai, P.Geetha and D.Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume III, Vi
kas Publishing
House, New Delhi, 2008.

Reference(s)
me III, S. Chand
& Co., New Delhi, 2008.
2. E. Kreyszig. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons
, Inc, Singapore
(2008)
3. T. Veerarajan , Engineering Mathematics ,Tata McGraw Hill Publications , New
Delhi, 2008.
11N302 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To study various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions u
sing Boolean
functions
. To study the implementation of combinational circuits
. To study the design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits
. To expose the students to various memory devices
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Synthesis simple combinational circuit using K-map/Quine McCluskey method.
2. Analyze/Design simple synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits.
3. Compare logic families and memory devices.
Prerequisite(s):
. Basics in Electron Devices and Circuits
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 8
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define Binary Logic.
2. What is meant by weighted and non-weighted coding?
3. State Demorgan s theorem.
4. What are combinational circuits?
5. Give an example of a switching function that contains only cyclic prime impli
cant.
6. What is prime implicant?
7. What are =minterms and =maxterms ?
8. List out the characteristics of digital logic family.
9. List out the various types of flip-flop.
10. What is the difference between a latch and a flip-flop?
11. How to eliminate the hazard?
12. What are the types of counter?
13. What are the two models in synchronous sequential circuits?
14. What is meant by race condition in digital circuit?
15. List out the basic types of programmable logic devices.
16. How PLA differs from ROM?
17. What is mask programmable gate array?
Understand
1. Compute the hexadecimal equivalent of the decimal number 256.
2. Compute the octal equivalent of the decimal number 64.
3. Express x+yz as the sum of minterms.
4. Compute the value of X = A B C (A+D) if A=0; B=1; C=1 and D=1.
5. Compute the complement of x+yz.
6. How will you use a 4 input NAND gate as a 2 input NAND gate?
7. Show the NAND gate using AND gate and OR gate.
8. List out the truth table of the function: F = x y + x y + y z
9. Interpret the switching function Y= BC + A B + D
10. Illustrate the truth table of a full adder.
11. Illustrate the truth table of a half subtractor.
12. Draw the circuit of half adder.
13. Draw the wave forms showing static 1 hazard.
14. Distinguish between a decoder and a demultiplexer.
15. Draw the logic diagram of 8 to 1 line multiplexer.
16. How many parity bits are required to form Hamming code if message bits are 6
?
17. Generate the even parity hamming codes for the following binary data 1101, 1
001
18. How will you convert a JK flip flop into a D flip flop?
Apply
1. Why the NAND and NOR gates are known as Universal gates?
2. Simplify using K-map to obtain a minimum POS expression (A + B +C+D) (A+B +C+D)
(A+B+C+D ) (A+B+C +D ) (A +B+C +D ) (A+B+C +D)
3. Find the Minterm expansion of f (a, b, c, d) = a (b +d) + acd
4. Show that if all the gates in a two level AND-OR gate networks are replaced b
y NAND gates the

output function does not change.
5. Implement Y = (A+C) (A+D ) (A+B+C ) using NOR gates only.
6. Using a single 7483, Draw the logic diagram of a 4 bit adder/sub tractor
7. Realize a BCD to Excess 3 code conversion circuit starting from its truth tab
le.
8. Implement the switching function F= Sm (0, 1, 3, 4, 7) using a 4 input MUX.
9. Using SR flip flops, design a parallel counter which counts in the sequence
000,111,101,110,001,010,000
.
10. How will you minimize the number of rows in the primitive state table of an
incompletely
specified sequential machine?
11. Implement the switching functions:

Z1 = ab d e + a b c e
Using a 5*8*4 PLA
+ bc + de Z2 = a c e, Z3 = bc +de+c d e +bd and Z4 = a c e +ce
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Give the comparison between combinational circuits and sequential circuits.
2. Derive the characteristic equation of a T flip flop.
3. Derive the characteristic equation of a SR flip flop.
4. Derive the characteristic equation of a JK flip flop.
5. Illustrate PAL Structure.
6. Illustrate PLA Structure.
7. Compare SPLD and CPLD.
8. What is the difference between factory and field programmable logic device?
9. Distinguish between PAL and PLA.
10. Give the classification of memory.
Create
1. Develop the state diagram and primitive flow table for a logic system that ha
s 2 inputs x and y and
an output z. And reduce primitive flow table. The behavior of the circuit is sta
ted as follows.
Initially x=y=0 whenever x=1 and y = 0 then z=1, whenever x = 0 and y = 1 then z
= 0.When x = y
= 0 or x = y = 1 no change in z it remains in the previous state. The logic syst
em has edge
triggered inputs without having a clock 1 .The logic system changes state on the
rising edges of
the 2 inputs. Static input values are not to have any effect in changing the Z o
utput.
2. Design the combinational circuit with 3 inputs and 1 output. The output is 1
when the binary value
of the inputs is less than 3.The output is 0 otherwise.
3. Design a switching circuit that converts a 4 bit binary code into a 4 bit Gra
y code using ROM
array
4. Design a synchronous counter with states 0, 1, 2,3,0,1
. Using JK FF.
5. Construct the state diagram and primitive flow table for an asynchronous netw
ork that has two
inputs and one output. The input sequence X 1 X2 = 00, 01, 11 causes an output t
o become 1.The
next input change then causes an output to return to 0.No other inputs will prod
uce a 1 output.
6. Design an asynchronous sequential circuit with two inputs X and Y and with on
e output Z.
Whenever Y is 1, input X is transferred to Z. When Y is 0, the output does not c
hange for any
change in X.
Unit I
Number System & Boolean Algebra
Review of number system; Types and conversion codes
Boolean algebra: De-Morgan s t
heorem
switching functions and simplification using K-maps & Quine McCluskey method.
Binary codes, Gray code, Excess-3 code
9 Hours
Unit II
Combinational Circuits
Design using logic gates
Design of adders, subtractors, comparators, code conver
ters, encoders, decoders,
Multiplexers and demultiplexers
Function realization using multiplexers.
Full subtractor, Code converters

9 Hours
Unit III
Synchronous Sequential Circuits
Flip flops - SR, JK - MSJK and D and T Analysis of synchronous sequential circui
ts; Design of
synchronous sequential circuits
Counters, state diagram; state reduction; state
assignment.
T flip-flop
9 Hours
Unit IV
Asynchronous Sequential Circuits
Analysis of asynchronous sequential machines
State assignment
Asynchronous desig
n problem
Difference between Synchronous and Asynchronous Sequential Circuits.
Asynchronous Sequential Circuits

9 Hours
Unit V
Logic Families and Memory Devices
Logic Families: TTL, ECL, CMOS
ntrol
signals and their programming
.
Memories: ROM, PROM, EPROM
Study of memory ICs
Programmable Logic Devices: PLA, PAL, PLD and FPGA
Comparison between SPLD, CPLD and FPGA

9 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education, 2008
2. M. Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice Hall of India, 20
08
Reference(s)
1. John M. Yarbrough, Digital Logic, Application & Design, Thomson, 2010
2. Charles H. Roth, Fundamentals Logic Design, Jaico Publishing, 2009
3. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practice, Pearson Education, 2
009
11N303 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To make the students to gain a clear knowledge of the basic laws governing the
operation of
electrical instruments and the measurement techniques.
Co
. Emphasis is laid on the meters used to measure current & voltage.

. To have an adequate knowledge in the measurement techniques for power and ener
gy meters are
included.
. Elaborate discussion about potentiometer and instrument transformers.
. Detailed study of resistance, inductance and capacitance measuring methods.
. Study of display devices.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Explain the construction and working principle of various types of measuring
instruments..
2. Apply the skills to convert electrical quantity into readable form.
3. Design a circuit to convert changes in resistance or impendence into a change
in voltage
Prerequisite(s)
. Basics in Electron Devices and Circuits taught in 2nd semster
. Basics in Electron Devices and Circuits Laboratory taught in 2nd semester
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 9
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100

internal assessment
Remember
1. Recall the operating forces present in an analog instrument.
2. Name the four different types of instrument used for making ammeter and voltm
eter.
3. Define deflecting torque.
4. Define controlling torque.
5. State the basic principle of PMMC instrument.
6. State the basic principle of moving iron instrument.
7. List the two types of moving iron instrument.
8. State the basic principle of dynamometer type instrument.
9. State the basic principle of rectifier type instrument.
10. Identify two different methods for wattmeter calibration.
11. State the criteria to balance a Wheatstone bridge.
12. State the criteria to balance a Kelvin bridge.
13. Define the term NULL as it applies to bridge balance.
14. List two methods used for the measurement of capacitance.
15. State the number of balance equations and variable elements required for AC
bridges.(R)
16. Define the term working current in potentiometer circuits.(R)
17. Define the term standardization of a potentiometer.
18. Recall the demerits of shunts and multipliers.
19. Name two applications of AC potentiometer.
20. List two methods for testing current transformers.
21. Name four errors caused in potential transformer.
22. List the three different ways to express the accuracy.
23. Draw a basic AC bridge network.
24. State the burden of a current transformer.
25. Define chassis ground.
26. List the main source of errors in PMMC instruments.
27. State the Blondel s theorem.
28. Name two application of Wien s bridge.
29. Recall four merits of digital oscilloscope.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Define transfer instrument.

State the benefits of fictitious loading.
List the four application of DC potentiometer.
Name four materials that are used to fabricate light emitting diode.
Quote two methods for measurement of inductance.
Understand
1. Indicate the ammeter and voltmeter connection in a circuit.
2. Estimate the unknown frequency using a Wien s bridge.
3. Tell about Megger.
4. Infer the conditions that must be satisfied to balance an AC bridge.
5. Discuss about volt-ratio box.
6. Explain the procedure to measure unknown voltage using polar type AC potentio
meter.
7. Illustrate the process to measure unknown voltage using coordinate type AC po
tentiometer.
8. Express the current and voltage measurement process with the help of instrume
nt transformers.
9. Predict role of ratio and phase angle errors in case of a C.T.
10. Estimate the operation of vertical amplifier used in CRO.
11. Predict the operation of vertical amplifier used in CRO.
12. Tell about astigmatism control.
13. Indicate the specialties of a storage Oscilloscope.
14. Discuss about bistable persistence storage.
15. Predict the special features incorporated in an electrodynamometer wattmeter
to make it as a LPF
wattmeter.
16. Discuss the necessity to make the potential coil circuit purely resistive.
17. Tell about creeping of a meter.
18. Indicate the need for LPF wattmeter in power measurement.
19. Discuss about phantom loading.
20. Predict the current coil and voltage coil connection in induction type energ
y meter.
21. Illustrate the construction and working of moving coil instrument
22. Explain the construction and working of moving iron instrument
23. Illustrate the construction and working of dynamometer type instrument
24. Discuss about the construction and working of rectifier type instrument
25. Express the construction and working of dynamometer wattmeter.
26. Summarize the construction and working principle of the three-phase energy m
eter.
27. Illustrate the principle of an induction type energy meter and obtain an exp
ression for its deflecting
torque.
28. Discuss the power measurement scheme using instrument transformer.
29. Explain the operation of an oscilloscope with its functional block.
Apply
1. Produce the steps to obtain an expression for steady state deflection of a mo
ving coil instrument.
2. Generalize the steps to obtain the expression for steady state deflection of
a moving iron
instrument.
3. Organize the procedure to get an expression for steady state deflection of a
dynamometer type
instrument.
4. Prepare an expression for deflecting torque of a dynamometer wattmeter.
5. Sketch the circuit of a Kelvin double bridge used for measurement resistances
and examine the
condition for balance.
6. Produce steps to get the expression for Wien s Bridge in terms of bridge parame
ters.
7. Prepare an equation for balancing an Anderson bridge and sketch its phasor di
agram..
8. Generalize the procedure to get balance equation of a Schering and sketch its
phasor diagram.
9. A moving coil instrument has the following data: number of turns=100, width o
f coil=20mm,
depth of coil=30mm, flux density in the gap=0.1Wb/m2.Calculate the deflecting to
rque when
carrying a current of 10mA also calculate the deflection if the control spring c
onstant is 2x106Nm/degree.
10. In a dynamometer wattmeter the moving coil has 500 turns of mean diameter 30
mm. Calculate the
torque if the axes of the field and the moving coil s are at(a)600 (b) 900.When
the flux density
produced by field coils is 15 X 10-3Wb/m2,the current in moving coil is 0.05 A a

nd the power
factor is 0.866.
11. The pressure coil of an electrodynamometer wattmeter has a resistance of 660
0 O. When the
voltage applied to the pressure coil is 120V and a current of 20 A flows in the
series coil, the
deflection is 160. Calculate the additional resistance that must be connected in
the pressure coil
circuit to make the constant of meter equal to 20W per degree.
12. A 3 phase 500 V motor load has a power factor of 0.4 .Two wattmeters connect
ed to measure the
input.
13. They show the input to be 30kW. Calculate the reading of each instrument.
14. A Kelvin bridge is balanced with following constants: outer ratio arm 100O a
nd 1000O; Inner
arms ratio 99.92O and 1000.6O; Resistance of link, 0.1O; standard resistance, 0.
00377O.Calculate
the value of Unknown resistance.
15. A capacitor bushing forms arm ab of a Schering bridge and a standard capacit
or of 500pF
capacitance and negligible loss, forms arm ad. Arm bc consists of a non-inductiv
e resistance of
300.when the bridge is balanced arm cd has a resistance of 72.6O in parallel wit
h a capacitance of
0.148F. The supply frequency is 50Hz.Calculte the capacitance and dielectric loss
angle of
capacitor.
16. Calculate the insulation resistance of a cable in which the voltage falls fr
om 100 to 80 V in
20s.The capacitance is 300pF.
17. A CRO with a sensitivity of 5v/cm is used .An AC voltage is applied to the Y
-input. A 10cm long
straight line is observed. Determine the AC voltage.
18. The lissajous pattern on a CRO is stationary and has five input horizontal a
nd two vertical
tangencies. The frequency of the horizontal input is 1000Hz.Determine the freque
ncy of vertical
input.
19. A CRO is set to a time base of 0.1ms/cm with a 10cm amplitude .Sketch the di
splay of the pulse
signal waveform with pulse repetition rate of 2000Hz and a duty cycle of 25%.
20. A sampling oscilloscope is being used to observe a 400MHz sine wave. A sampl
ing pulse occurs
every 3 ns. Draw five cycles of the 400 MHz signal and place a dot at the sample
d point on each
of the cycle.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare Moving coil and Moving Iron Instrument.
2. Classify the measuring instruments based on their operating principle and app
lications.
3. Compare repulsion type and attractive type instrument.
4. Point out the importance of earth s resistance value.
5. Differentiate between current transformer and potential transformer.
6. Develop a procedure to calibrate a wattmeter using potentiometer.

7. Analyze the role of delayed sweep in waveform measurements.
8. Compare analog and digital storage oscilloscopes.
9. Develop the technique to protect the instrument from overloading and short ci
rcuit conditions.
10. Infer the major conclusions about AC bridges by analyzing the balance equati
on of Inductance
Comparison Bridge
11. Outline the steps to eliminate the mutual effects between the two elements o
f the wattmeter.
12. Point out the role sampling CRO to increase apparent frequency of an oscillo
scope.
13. Analyze different instruments used for measuring voltage and current.
14. Investigate different instruments used for measuring power and energy.
15. Point out the reasons to get large errors when the power factor is low in po
wer measurement.
16. Infer the conditions to be satisfied by the device for emitting visible ligh
t.
17. Compare the operation of different types of bridge circuits.
Create
1. In an Anderson Bridge for the measurement of inductance the arm AB consists o
f an unknown
impedance with inductance L and R, a known variable resistance in arm BC, fixed
resistance or
600O each in arms CD an DA, a known variable resistance in arm DE, and a capacit
or with fixed
capacitance of 1 microfarad in the arm CE. The a.c. supply of 100Hz is connected
across A and C,
and the detector is connected between B and E. If the balance is obtained with a
resistance of
400O in the arm DE and a resistance of 800O in the arm BC, Formulate the value o
f unknown R
and L.
2. Design a bridge circuit to employ in a harmonic distortion analyzer for discr

iminating 1 kHz
frequency. Assume R1 = 1 kO, R2 = 2 kO, and C1 = 0.1 F.
3. Make proper connection diagram in the secondary of current transformer to saf
ely measure the
high current using low range ammeters.
4. Construct a circuit to measure current using CRO and explain its operation.
5. Devise a potentiometer circuit to measure an unknown voltage (between 0 and 1
V). Use a
1.0186V standard emf cell and assume suitable dial resistances. Explain the volt
age measurement
process using the circuit.
Unit I
Measurement of Voltage and Current
Types of ammeters and voltmeters - PMMC Instruments - Moving iron Instruments- D
ynamometer type
Instruments - Rectifier type Instruments.
Comparison of different Instruments
9 Hours
Unit II
Measurement of Power and Energy
Theory & its errors
Methods of correction
LPF wattm
Electrodynamometer wattmeter
eter Phantom
loading
Measurement of power in three phase circuits - three phase wattmeters Induction type KWH
meter Calibration of wattmeter, energy meter.
Phantom loading
9 Hours
Unit III
Measurement of Resistance and Impedance
DC Bridges- Wheatstone bridge, Kelvin double bridge and Direct deflection method
s-AC bridgesMaxwell, Wien s bridge, Hay s bridge and Anderson s bridge- Capacitance Measurement- M
axwell s
inductance Capacitance bridge, Schering bridge-Megger- Earth measurement
Application of Wheatstone bridge
9 Hours
Unit IV
Potentiometers and Instrument Transformers
Student type potentiometer-Precision potentiometer- A.C. potentiometer-polar and

Co-ordinate typesApplications- Instruments Transformer-Construction and theory of Current transfo
rmers and Potential
Transformers and Phasor diagrams.
Application of potentiometer
9 Hours
Unit V
Display and Recording Devices
Cathode ray oscilloscsope
Classification - Sampling and storage scopes Seven segm
ent and dot matrix
displays Protection circuits
Grounding circuits.
Grounding circuits
9 Hours
Total: 45 +15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. A. K. Sawhney, Puneet Sawhney, A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurem
ents and
Instrumentation, Dhanpath Rai & Co (P) Ltd, 2012
2. Ernest O.Doebelin, Dhanesh N Manik, Measurement systems, McGraw Hill educatio
n (P) Ltd,
New Delhi, 2011
Reference(s)
1. J. B. Gupta, A Course in Electronic and Electrical Measurements and Instrumen
tation, S.K.
Kataria & Sons, Delhi, 2012
2. S. K. Singh, Industrial Instrumentation and control, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008
3. H. S. Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill company, New Delhi,
2012
4. Martin U. Reissland, Electrical Measurement, New Age International (P) Ltd.,
2010
5. E. W. Golding and F. C. Widdis, Electrical Measurements & Measuring Instrumen

ts, Reem
Publications (P) Ltd, 2011
11N304 FLUID AND SOLID MECHANICS

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on simple stresses, strains and elastic constants
. To enhance the student s knowledge on fluid statics, kinematics and dynamics
. To impart knowledge on the fluid properties and application to real situations
of fluid flow
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Distinguish between Stresses and Strains..

Compare rate of loading, shear force and bending moment.
Interpret the fundamentals of fluid systems.
Classify the pumps, fluid flow and fluid flow measuring devices.
Prerequisite(s)
. Knowledgw in basic of Cvil amd Mechanical Engineering
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1 10
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
50
50
50
50
4
Analyze
5
Evaluate
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define stress.
2. Define strain.
3. State Hooke s law.
4. Define Elasticity.
5. Give the relationship between bulk modulus, young s modulus and poisson s ratio.
6. What is the necessity of calculating the values of thermal stresses in struct
ural members?
7. What are the types of beams?
8. What are the different types of end conditions in a beam?
9. What are the different types of loads?

10. Define shear force and bending moment
11. What do you mean by point of contraflexure
12. Define fluids.
13. Enumerate the important fluid properties with their units of measurement.
14. List the various pressure measuring instruments.
15. What is an incompressible fluid flow?
16. List the forces present in fluid flow.
17. What is Euler s equation of motion?
18. State Bernoulli s theorem.
19. What is specific speed of the turbine?
20. How pumps are classified?
Understand
1. Draw the stress strain curve of a ductile material.
2. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a simply supported beam s
ubjected to a
couple
3. How are fluids classified?
4. Explain the importance of viscosity in fluid flow.
5. What do you understand by Continuity Equation?
6. Under what conditions one can treat real fluid flow as irrotational.
7. List the properties of stream function
8. State the assumptions used in deriving Bernoulli s equation.
9. Mention the applications of Bernoulli s equation.
10. Compare venture meter with orifice meter and mention the advantages of ventu
re meter.
11. Discuss in brief how and when separation of flow takes place in a reciprocat
ing pump.
12. Differentiate between the volute casing and vortex casing for the centrifuga
l pump.
Apply
1. How will you calculate yield stress?
2. How will you calculate ultimate stress?
3. Why does the viscosity of a gas increases with the increase in temperature wh
ile that of a liquid
decreases with increase in temperature?
4. Sketch the velocity distribution for uniform irrotational flow.
5. Derive the continuity equation for three dimensional flow.
6. Describe the use and limitations of the flow nets.
7. Drive Bernoulli s equation for the flow of an incompressible fluid.
8. Explain the principle of venturimeter with a neat sketch. Derive the expressi
on for the rate of flow
of fluid through it.
9. What would happen if cavitations occur in centrifugal pump?
Unit I
Simple Stresses and Strains
Tension, compression and shear stresses

Hooke s law
stress strain diagram for mild
steel ultimate
stress and working stress
Elastic constants and relationships between them compo
site bars
Temperature stresses - Relationship between stress and strain
Relationship between stress and strain
9 Hours
Unit II
Beams and Bending
Types of beams Types of supports
shear force and bending moment of beams. Sketch
ing of shear force
and bending moment diagrams for cantilever, simply supported and over hanging be
ams for any type of
loading
Relationship between rate of loading, shear force and bending moment.
Types of beam supports
9 Hours
Unit III
Fluid Properties and Kinematics
Fundamental units
mass density specific weight
viscosity
surface tension- capill
arity
compressibility. Streamline
streak line
path line
continuity equation
Types of fluids
9 Hours
Unit IV
Fluid Dynamics and Flow through Pipes
Stream and potential functions Laminar flow, Turbulent flow-Bernoulli s equation
D
arcy s equation
Pipes in series and parallel major and minor losses
hydraulic grade line venturi
meter orifice meter
manometer.
Moody diagram
9 Hours
Unit V
Hydraulic Pumps
Classification of pumps - Centrifugal pumps - Multistage pumps - Minimum speed t
o start the pump
Specific speed and characteristic curves - Reciprocating pumps - Negative slip Indicator diagram
Functions of air vessels
9 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. S. Ramamrutham, Strength of Materials, Dhanpat Rai and Publication, 2004
2. R.K. Bansal, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Laxmi Publications, 2005
Reference(s)
1. R. K. Rajput, A Text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, S. Chand
and Co. Ltd.,
2006
2. B. C. Punmia, Ashok K. Jain and Arun K. Jain, Mechanics of Materials, Laxmi P
ublications, 2010
11N305 APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To expose the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to be able to use it in accou
nting for the bulk
behavior of the physical systems.
. To integrate the basic concepts into various thermal applications like IC engi
nes, Gas turbines,
steam boiler, steam turbine, compressors, refrigeration and air conditioning.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Explain the concepts of thermodynamics and IC engines..
2. Summarize the boiler handling process and Compare the steam turbines.
3. Compare Refrigeration and Air Conditioning and explain about the compressor.
Prerequisite(s)
. Baisc knowledge of physics taught in High Schools and basic knowledge of Engin
eering Physics
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 11
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
Define Intensive and Extensive property with examples.

Define path, process, and cycle.
State Kelvin-plank statement of second law of thermodynamics.
Define refrigerator.
5. Define heat engine.

6. What are the differences between Petrol and Diesel engine?
7. What are the advantages of Multi- stage compressor over the single stage air
Compressor?
8. Define volumetric efficiency of a compressor.
9. Define ton of refrigeration and COP.
Understand
1. What is meant by steady flow system?
2. What is the effect of Cut-off ratio in the efficiency of a Diesel cycle?
3. What are the limitations of first law of thermodynamics?
4. Sketch the P-V diagram of dual cycle and mark the processes.
5. Find out the specific volume of at a temperature of 200 C and 0.7 dry.
6. Differentiate 2-stroke and 4-stroke engines.
7. What are the disadvantages of a single stage reciprocating air compressor?
8. What is the similarity between Diesel and Dual cycle?
9. What is meant by COP?
10. Write the difference between Refrigerator and Air Conditioner.
Apply / Evaluate
1. How will you classify the Internal Combustion engines?
2. How the ignition takes place in C.I. Engine?
4. For the same compression ratio and heat rejection, which is most efficient: O
tto, Diesel or Dual?
Explain with PV and TS diagrams.
5. How the use of multistage compression improves the volumetric efficiency of a
ir compressor?
6. Compare steady state and unsteady state heat transfer.
7. Find the enthalpy and entropy of the dry steam at a pressure of 30 bar.
8. Determine the molecular volume of any perfect gas at 600 N/m2 and 30C. Univers
al gas constant
K.
may be taken as 8314 J / kg mole
9. Differentiate impulse and reaction turbines.
10. How will you increase the Cooling Effect in Refrigerator?
Create
1. Design the efficiency and mean pressure for petrol engine working with the co
mpression ratio of
5.5. The pressure and temperature at the beginning of the compression are 1bar a
nd 300k
respectively. The peak pressure is 30bar. Assume ratio of specific heats to be 1
.4 for air. (Use of
standard steam tables and refrigeration tables are permitted)
Unit I
Basic Concepts and Laws of Thermodynamics
Classical approach: Thermodynamic systems
Boundary - Control volume - System and
surroundings
Universe Properties - State-process
Cycle
Equilibrium - Work and heat transfer
oint and path
functions - First law of thermodynamics for open and closed systems - steady flo
w energy equations Second law of thermodynamics - Heat engines - Refrigerators and heat pumps - Car
not cycle - Clausius
inequality Entropy.
Steam Turbine, Pressure Cooker, Steam Nozzles
9 Hours
Unit II
IC Engines and Air Standard Cycles
Working Principle of four stroke and two stroke - spark ignition and compressio
n ignition engines Applications of IC engines. Air standard cycles: Otto, diesel and dual cycles an
d comparison of efficiency.
Gas Turbines - Brayton cycle -Open and closed cycle Ideal and actual cycles. Petr
ol Engine, Diesel
Engine
Applications of IC engines
9 Hours
Unit III
Steam Boilers and Turbines
Formation of steam - Properties of steam Steam power cycle (Rankine)
problems High-pressure
boilers
Mountings and accessories
Testing of boilers. Layout diagram and working
principle of a steam
power plants. Steam turbines: Impulse and reaction turbines: working principle a
nd comparisons .
Cogeneration Steam power plant
9 Hours
Unit IV
Compressors
Positive displacement compressors
Reciprocating compressors
Indicated power
Clea
rance volume
Various efficiencies
Clearance ratio - Conditions for perfect and imperfect inte
rcooling - Multi stage with
intercooling.
Screw Compressor, Centrifugal & Axial Flow Compressors
9 Hours
Unit V
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning
Unit of refrigeration Basic functional difference between refrigeration and air c
onditioning - refrigerants
Vapour compression cycle and P-H and T-S diagram - Saturation cycles - Effect of
sub cooling and super
heating - Vapour absorption: (qualitative treatment only) Air-conditioning syste
ms Basic psychrometry Simple psychometric processes
summer, winter, window and central air conditionin
g.
Domestic Refrigerator, Automobile Air Conditioning Systems

9 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Mahesh M Rathore , Thermal Engineering ,Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2011
2. Nag P.K., Basic and Applied Engineering Thermodynamics, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2002
Reference(s)
1. Rogers and Mayhew, Engineering Thermodynamics Work and Heat Transfer, Addisio
n Wesley,
New Delhi, 1999
2. Eastop and McConkey, Applied Thermodynamics, Addison Wesley, New Delhi. 1999
3. Mathur M.L. and Metha F.S., Thermal Engineering, Jain Brothers, New Delhi, 19
97
4. Sankaar B.K., Thermal Enginerring, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1998
5. Stephen R. Turns, Thermodynamics Concepts and Applications, Cambridge Univers
ity Press,
2006
Web Resources
1. http://www.freestudy.co.uk/
2. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/IIT-MADRAS/Applied Thermodynamics /index.php
11N306 ELECTRICAL MACHINES

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, starters and test

ing of D.C machines
. Constructional details, principle of operation, equivalent circuit and perform
ance of transformers
. Constructional details, types, principle of operation and performance of three
phase and single
phase induction motors
. Constructional details and principle of operation of synchronous machines
. Constructional details and principle of operation of special machines
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Explain the construction and working of transformers, AC machines and DC mach

ines.
2. Analyze the operation and characteristics of transformers, AC machines and DC
machines
3. Summarize the principle of operation of different kinds of special machines .
Prerequisite(s)
. Baisc knowledge of physics taught in High Schools
. Basic knowledge of Electric Circuit Analysis
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 12
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define Intensive and Extensive property with examples.
2. Define path, process, and cycle.
3. State Kelvin-plank statement of second law of thermodynamics.
4. Define refrigerator.
5. Define heat engine.
6. What are the differences between Petrol and Diesel engine?
7. What are the advantages of Multi- stage compressor over the single stage air
Compressor?
8. Define volumetric efficiency of a compressor.
9. Define ton of refrigeration and COP.
Understand
1. What is meant by steady flow system?
2. What is the effect of Cut-off ratio in the efficiency of a Diesel cycle?
3. What are the limitations of first law of thermodynamics?
4. Sketch the P-V diagram of dual cycle and mark the processes.
6. Differentiate 2-stroke and 4-stroke engines.
7. What are the disadvantages of a single stage reciprocating air compressor?
8. What is the similarity between Diesel and Dual cycle?
9. What is meant by COP?
10. Write the difference between Refrigerator and Air Conditioner.
Apply / Evaluate
1. How will you classify the Internal Combustion engines?
2. How the ignition takes place in C.I. Engine?
4. For the same compression ratio and heat rejection, which is most efficient: O
tto, Diesel or Dual?
Explain with PV and TS diagrams.
5. How the use of multistage compression improves the volumetric efficiency of a
ir compressor?
6. Compare steady state and unsteady state heat transfer.
7. Find the enthalpy and entropy of the dry steam at a pressure of 30 bar.
8. Determine the molecular volume of any perfect gas at 600 N/m2 and 30C. Univers
al gas constant
may be taken as 8314 J / kg mole
K.
9. Differentiate impulse and reaction turbines.
10. How will you increase the Cooling Effect in Refrigerator?
Create
1. Design the efficiency and mean pressure for petrol engine working with the co
mpression ratio of
5.5. The pressure and temperature at the beginning of the compression are 1bar a
nd 300k
respectively. The peak pressure is 30bar. Assume ratio of specific heats to be 1
.4 for air. (Use of
standard steam tables and refrigeration tables are permitted)
Unit I
D.C. Machines
Constructional details
Principle of operation of D.C. generator - EMF equation
M
ethods of excitation
Self and separately excited generators
Characteristics of series, shunt and comp
ound generators
Principle of operation of D.C. motor Back EMF and torque equation
Characteristic
s of series, shunt and
compound motors Starting of DC motors
Types of starters
Speed control of DC shun
t motors.
Applications of DC motors
9 Hours
Unit II
Transformers
Constructional details Principle of operation
emf equation Transformation ratio
Transformer on no
load Parameters referred to HV/LV windings
Equivalent circuit
Transformer on loa
d Regulation Testing
Load test, open circuit and short circuit tests.
Transformation ratio
9 Hours
Unit III
Induction Motors
Construction
Types
Principle of operation of three phase induction motors
lent circuit
Torque equation - Torque-Slip Characteristics
Starting of Induction motors
of starters Singlephase induction motors (only qualitative treatment).
Equiva
Types
Equivalent circuit
9 Hours
Unit IV
Synchronous Machines
Construction of synchronous machines
Types of synchronous machines
EMF equation
Voltage
regulation; EMF and MMF methods Principle of operation of Synchronous motor- Syn
chronous
condenser- Synchronous Motor V curves and Inverted V curves - Applications of Sy
nchronous Motors
Comparison of Synchronous and Induction Motors.
Voltage regulation of synchronous machine
9 Hours
Unit V
Special Motors
Brushless DC motor Reluctance motor
Hysteresis motor
motor
Permanent magnet stepper motor
Universal motor.
Variable reluctance Stepper
Application of Permanent magnet stepper motor

9 Hours
Total: 45Hours
Textbook(s)
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Electric Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishi
ng Company Ltd,
2010.
Reference(s)
1. S. K. Bhattacharya, Electrical Machines, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company
Ltd, 2010.
2. A.E.Fitzgerald and Stephen Umans, Electric Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill publis
hing company
Ltd, 2005.
3. B.L.Theraja, Textbook(s) of Electrical Technology, S.Chand publications, 2007
4. Siskind, Electrical Machines, 2011
11N307 ELECTRICALCIRCUITS&MACHINES LABORATORY

0
0
3
1.5
Objective(s)
. To study and determine the characteristics of various electric circuit compone
nts
. To study and simulate Ohm s Law and Kirchhoff s Laws used in electric circuit anal
ysis
. To verify various network theorems used in electric circuit analysis
. To study and simulate mesh loop current method used in electric circuit analys
is
. To equip the students to do the basic operations and characteristics of DC mot
or and AC motor
and help them to develop innovative ideas in engineering
. To study and determine the characteristics of single phase transformers and In
duction motor to
develop student experimental skills
. To design a simple measurement system for the specified configuration.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO12
Course Outcomes
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Use the standard methods to determine the characteristics for various electri
cal machines and
transformers.
2. Measure resistance and impedance using bridges.
3. Determine the parameters of simple electric circuit using network laws/theore
ms
Prerequisite(s)
. Basics knowledge of Electric Circuits and Machines
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define current, voltage and power.
2. Define resistance, inductance and capacitance.
3. List the uses of ammeter, voltmeter and wattmeter.
4. State Ohm s law.
5. State Kirchhoff s laws.
6. Define mesh and node.
7. State Superposition and Milliman s theorem.
8. State Thevenin s and Norton s theorem.
9. Describe the regulation of a transformer.
10. State the principle of motor.
11. List out the types of motor.
12. Define back emf. Give its significance
13. Describe about mutual inductance.
14. Name the types of transformer.
15. Describe the terms Open circuit and short circuit.
16. Define the term transformation ratio.
17. Define power factor.
18. List out the concepts of double field revolving theory and cross field theor
y.
19. Define the slip of an induction motor.
20. Outline the criteria for balance of a Wheatstone bridge.
Understand
1. Indicate how the ammeters and voltmeters connected in any circuit. State reas
on.
2. Explain why the voltmeters have high resistance and ammeters have low resista
nce.
3. Demonstrate the methods available to measure three phase power.
4. Distinguish self excited and separately excited machines.
5. Summarize the methods of speed control of DC motors.
6. Infer the loading arrangement used in a DC motor.
7. Infer the mechanical and electrical characteristics of a DC shunt motor.
8. Indicate the importance of speed control of DC motor in industrial applicatio

ns.
9. Judge the better of the two methods of speed control is better and justify.
10. Demonstrate why the speed of DC shunts motor practically constant under norm
al load condition.
11. Summarize the factors affecting the speed of a DC shunt motor.
12. Show the purpose of OC and SC tests.
13. Discuss the disadvantages of low power factor.
14. Give the conditions that must be satisfied to make an AC bridge balance.
Apply / Analyze / Evaluate
1. Difference analog voltmeter and digital voltmeter.
2. Compare the resistance of the armature and field winding.
3. Compare balanced and unbalanced circuits.
4. Outline the method measure the single phase power.
5. Differentiate line voltage from phase voltage.
6. Detect the formula for the resonant frequency in a series RLC circuit.
7. Point out the expression for single phase AC power.
8. Show the relation between the line and phase value of voltage and current in
a balanced star
connected load.
9. Show the relation between the line and phase voltage of voltage current in a
balanced delta
connected
10. Show the relation between the power factor and wattmeter readings in two-wat
tmeter method
of power measurement.
11. Explain the methods to reverse t the direction of rotation of a DC shunt mot
or.
12. Analyze why the field rheostat is kept in the position of minimum resistance
.
13. Illustrate how the speed of a DC shunt motor vary with armature voltage and
field current.
14. Examine why the capacity of a transformer specified as KVA and not as KW.
15. Compare the efficiencies of a transformers and motors.
16. Analyze the importance of transformer core lamination.
17. Detect why the single phase induction motors are not self starting. Classify
them according to the
starting methods.
18. Compare LPF, UPF and ZPF.
Create
1. Develop the equivalent circuit of the given single phase transformer by condu
cting a suitable test
2. Devise a suitable test and determine the fraction of load at which maximum ef
ficiency occurs in
the given single phase transformer.
3. Compile the regulation of single phase transformer at zero pf.
4. Derive the expression for Wien s bridge in terms of bridge parameters.
5. Derive the equation of balance for an Anderson bridge. Draw the phasor diagra
m for condition
under balance.
6. Devise the problems associated with measurement of high resistance.
7. Devise the problems encountered in measurement of high resistance.
List of Experiments
1.
Verification of Network Theorems. (Superposition and Thevenin s).
2.
Verification of Ohm s Law and Kirchhoff s Laws.
3.
Circuit analysis using Mesh Current and Nodal Voltage Method.
4.
Three Phase Power Measurement by Two Wattmeter Method.
5.
Load test on DC shunt motor.
6.
Load test on single phase transformer.
7.
Open circuit and short circuit test on single phase transformer.
8.
Load test on single-phase induction motor.
9.
Measurement of inductance & capacitance using AC Bridge.
10.
Measurement of resistance using Wheat stone s bridge and Kelvin's double bridge.
. Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Verification of Network Theorems(Superposition and Thevenin s)
6
2
Verification of Ohm s Law and Kirchhoff s Laws
6
3
Circuit analysis using Mesh Current and Nodal Voltage Method
6
4
Three Phase Power Measurement by Two Wattmeter Method
3
5
Load test on DC shunt motor
3
6
Load test on single phase transformer
3
7
Open circuit and short circuit test on single phase transformer
3
8
Load test on single-phase induction motor
3
9
Measurement of inductance & capacitance using AC Bridge
6
10
Measurement of resistance using Wheat stone s bridge and Kelvin's double bridge
6
11
Mini project
---
11N308 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
. To acquire knowledge about the functionality of the solid state devices
. To learn how to apply the solid state devices for an specified application
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Determine the VI characteristics solid state devices.
2. Obtain frequency responses of amplifiers.
3. Design a rectifier, simple amplifier and oscillator circuits.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Electron devices and circuits
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Define transistor.
What are the different types of transistor?
List out the various hybrid parameters of transistor.
Define JFET.
Define UJT.
6. What is meant by rectifiers?

7. List out the types of rectifiers.
8. State amplification factor.
9. Define mutual conductance.
10. Give the circuit diagram of an inverter using enhancement MOSFET.
11. Mention the uses of MOSFET.
12. What is SCR?
13. Define oscillator.
14. List out the types of oscillator
15. What is differential amplifier?
16. Mention its two modes of operation of differential amplifier.
Understand
1. What are the differences between input and output waveforms of rectifiers?
2. Why a low power FET is called as a square law device?
3. Why is a minimum hFE value required for the circuit to function as an oscilla
tor?
4. Why do we need three RC networks for phase shift oscillator?
5. Are drain and source interchangeable in MOSFETs?
6. Find an approximate expression for the frequency of oscillation of Hartley Os
cillator.
7. What factors are to be considered for selecting the operating point Q for an
amplifier?
8. What is the need for biasing a transistor?
9. What do you understand the dc analysis and ac analysis of differential amplif
iers?

1. How will you calculate base current?
2. How will you calculate amplification factor?
3. How the transconductance of a JFET varies with drain current and gate voltage
?
4. How does one RC section generate a phase difference of 60o?
5. What is depletion MOSFET? Analyze the basic structure of N-channel depletion
MOSFET.
6. Analyze the important physical difference between an enhancement and depletio
n MOSFET.
7. Write down the expression for frequency of oscillation in wein bridge oscilla
tors.
8. Write the equation for volt-ampere characteristics of photodiode.
9. Determine the h-parameters from the characteristics of CB configuration?
10. How will you determine the h-parameters from the characteristics of CE confi
guration?
Create
1. Design a UJT relaxation oscillator to generate a saw tooth waveform at a freq
uency of 600Hz.
Assume the supply voltage VBB=18V, VP=2.9V, VV=1.118V.
2. For an n-channel D-MOSFET IDSS = 10 mA and VGS (off) =-6V. If it operates wit
h VGS = 0V, a load
RD = 500 ohm and a power supply VDD = 10 V connected to the drain, find the valu
e of VDS.
List of Experiments
1.
Characteristics of transistor under CE, CC and determination of hybrid parameter
s.
2.
V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and Zener diode.
3.
Static characteristics and parameter determination of JFET.
4.
Static characteristics of UJT and its application as a relaxation oscillator.
5.
Characteristics of SCR & MOSFET.
6.
Characteristics of single phase half wave and full wave rectifiers with and with
out filters.
7.
Design of Phase shift oscillator and Hartley oscillator.
8.
Frequency response of feedback amplifier.
9.
Power amplifier.
10.
Frequency response of Differential Amplifier.
. Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Characteristics of transistor under CE, CC and determination of hybrid parameter
s
6
2
V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and Zener diode
3
3
Static characteristics and parameter determination of JFET
6
4
Static characteristics of UJT and its application as a relaxation oscillator
6
5
Characteristics of SCR & MOSFET
3
6
Characteristics of single phase half wave and full wave rectifiers with and with
out filters
3
7
Design of Phase shift oscillator and Hartley oscillator
6
8
Frequency response of feedback amplifier
3
9
Power amplifier
6
10
Frequency response of Differential Amplifier
3
11
Mini project
---
11N309 FLUID CONTROLLER AND APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
. Expertise in the various thermodynamic concepts and principles.
. To reinforce and enhance the understanding the fundamentals of Fluid mechanics
and Hydraulic
machines.
. To provide practice in making engineering judgments, estimates and assessing t
he reliability of
your measurements, skills which are very important in all engineering discipline
s
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of

PO6
Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, saf
ety, legal and
cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional eng
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome(s)
1. Understand the thermodynamics concepts and principles to implement in the rea
l Engineering
field.
2. Measure viscosity, flow rate and discharge level of pumps.
3. Design simple fluid power circuits, Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits.
Prerequisite(s)
. Baisc knowledge of Fluid and Solid Mechanics and Applied Thermodynamics
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal Assessment
Semester end Examination
Preparation
10
15
25
25
Record
5
Mini-project/Model
Examination / Viva-voce
10
10
Total
50
50
Remember
1. What is valve timing and port timing?
2. Define cetane number and octane number?
3. List some factors that affect performance of the engine?
4. Is the heat balancing is necessary
5. Give the firing order based on number of cylinder?
6. What is Frictional power?
7. Define Specific Fuel Consumption?
8. What is Brake power?
9. What roll the viscosity of oil plays in engine?
10. Define fluid statics.
11. What is fluid mechanics?
12. What is fluid kinetics?
13. Define Viscosity.
14. What are Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids?
15. Define Surface Tension
16. What is meant by transition state
17. Define Pascal s law
18. What is meant by energy lines.
Understand
1. Real-time application of various cycles.

2. Thermodynamic Laws and application..
3. Concepts of various thermal applications.

4. Efficiency of different type engines.
5. Energy balancing of thermal power.

6. When will you select a reciprocating pump?
7. Compare the viscosity of the different fluid.
8. Difference between the laminar and turbulent flow.
9. How can Apply of Continuity equations?
10. How to apply Bernoulli s equation for incompressible fluid.?
11. Difference between Fluid forces and momentum principle
12. Why fluid flow losses in designing fluid circuits ?
Apply/Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
How to tune up the engine performance?

How to avoid the heat loss in engine?
How to differentiate diesel and petrol engine?
How to best suit the right engine for the various application?
Find various properties of given fluid.
Create various types of flow using given fluid and pump.
Designing manometers for various applications.
Applying Bernoulli s equation and finding flow of given fluid flow
Create
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
er
6.
Can perform testing of blended oil performance.

Spirit for advancement of engine components.
May try for non-fossil fuels
Design and make a simple model to verify P=.gh.
Make a own measuring device to measure the velocity of flowing fluid in a wat
tap.
To perform the calibration of various fluid measurement device.
List of Experiments
1. Valve Timing and Port Timing

2. Performance Test on 4-stroke
3. Find out the Viscosity value
eter
4. Find out the Flash Point and
Diagrams
Diesel Engine by varying the load condition
of the given oil sample by using
Red Wood Viscom
Fire Point Temperature of the given fuel samples
5. Performance test on Multistage Reciprocating Air Compressor by varying the de

livery pressure
6. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter & Ventur
imeter
7. Analyze the performance of centrifugal pump by varying the discharge level of
the water
8. Performance test on Submergible pump by varying the discharge level of the wa
ter
9. Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control

i. velocity
ii. direction and
iii. force of single and double acting
10. Design of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using simulation software
. Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams
3
2
Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine by varying the load condition
3
3
Find out the Viscosity value of the given oil sample by using
Red
Wood Viscometer
6
4
Find out the Flash Point and Fire Point Temperature of the given fuel samples
6
5
Performance test on Multistage Reciprocating Air Compressor by varying the deliv
ery pressure
3
6
Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter
& Venturimeter
6
7
Analyze the performance of centrifugal pump by varying the discharge level of th
e water
3
8
Performance test on Submergible pump by varying the discharge

level of the water
3
9
Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control
i)velocity
ii)direction and
iii) force of single and double acting
6
10
Design of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using simulation software
6
11
Mini project
Total
45
11N401, 11E401 NUMERICAL METHODS AND LINEAR PROGRAMMING

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. Acquire the knowledge of finding approximate solutions of algebraic, transcend
ental, differential
and integral equations by numerical methods and interpolating the values of a fu
nction using
Lagrange s and Newton s polynomial approximations.
. Ability to find solution of initial and boundary value problems using multi st
ep approximations
and obtain an optimum solutions of Linear Programming Problems.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Attain solutions to algebraic and transcendental equations..
2. Solve problems using numerical differentiation, integration and interpolation
.
3. Find solutions for an ordinary differential equation with initial conditions.
.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Mathematics I,II and III
Assessment Pattern
S. No
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test
I13
Test II1
Model
Examination1
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze/ Evaluate
10
10
10
10
5
Create
00
00
00
00
Total
100
100
100
100
13 The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examinat
ion will be converted to
Remember
1. Define Algebraic and Transcendental equations.
2. Write the formula for Regula False method & Newton s method.
3. What do you mean by Interpolation?
4. State Newton s Divided difference formula.
5. State the derivatives of Newton s Forward and Backward Interpolation formula.
6. Write the conditions for applying Trapezoidal & Simpson s rule.

7. What do you mean by Single step and Multi step method?
8. Write the formula for Euler s and Modified Euler s method.
9. What are the limitations of Graphical method?
10. Define Slack and Surplus variables.
Understand
1. What do you meant by Numerical methods?
2. What is the condition of convergence of Regula False position method?
3. State the order and condition of convergence of Newton s method
4. What are the methods for solving simultaneous algebraic equations?
5. Write the differences between Direct and Iterative methods.
6. State the sufficient condition for solving Gauss seidel method.
7. What do you mean by Power method?
8. Write Milne s and Adam s Predictor, Corrector formula.
9. What is feasible region?
10. Define Optimum basic feasible solution.
Apply
1. Obtain by power method, the numerically largest eigen value of the matrix
with the starting vector .Perform only 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
.
2420612103415A
.
.
.
.
.
.
iterations.
.
.
.
.
.
111)0(x
2. Find, where N is a real number, by Newton s method. N
3. Find the parabola of the form y=ax2+bx+c passing through the points (0,0) ,
(1,1) & (2,20).
4. A third degree polynomial passes through (0,-1), (1,1),(2,1) & (3,-2) find i
ts value at x=4.
5. Find the value of from the table given below )8('f
158.2908.1690.1556.1:)(
12976:
xfx
6. The table given below reveals the velocity V of a body during the time=t
fied. Find its acceleration
at t = 1.1
8.604.561.527.471.43:
4.13.12.11.10.1:
vt
speci
7. Solve dy/dx=y2 -x2 / y2+x2 with y(0)=1 at x=0.2 find y .
8. Using Eulers s method, find y(0.01) from dy/dx= -x, y(0)=1.
9. Solve the following LPP: Maximize 12410Zxx..

Subject to the constraints 2x1+x2 ; 2x1+5x2 ; 2x1+3x2 ; x1, x2 0 50.100.90..
10. Write down the four steps to be adopted in solving LPP.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Using Newton s method, find the positive root of cos x = 3x - 1.
2. Solve by Gauss-Elimination method: 6x + 3y +12z = 36; 8x -3y +2z = 20; 4x +11

y z =33.
3. Use Lagrange s interpolation formula to find the value of x when y = 20 for the
following data.
X : 1 2 3 4
Y : 1 8 27 64
4. By Newton s divided difference formula find f(301).
x
300
304
305
307
y
2.4771
2.4829
2.4843
2.4871
5. A rod is rotating in a plane. The following table gives the angle through whi
ch the rod has turned
for various values of the time t secs
.
20.302.212.149.012.00:
18.06.04.02.00:
.
t
6. Evaluate using Trapezoidal formula.
2.22.62221dydxxy...
7. Given 5 x y
+ y 2
2 = 0 ; y(4 )= 1; y(4.1) = 1.0049 find
i)y ( 4.2 ) by Euler s method ii) y(4.3) by Runge-kutta method

iii) y ( 4.4 ) by Adam s method. iv) y(4.5) by Milne s method.
8. Using Taylor series method, find the value of y(0.1) , given dy /dx = x + y a
nd y(0)=1 and correct to 3
decimal places .
9. Solve the following LPP

Maximize z = 20 x + 80 x subject to the constraints 12
4 x + 6 x 90; 8 x + 6 x 100; ..
5 x + 4 x 80; x, x 0 .
10. Solve the following LPP graphically:

Maximize z = 100 x + 40 x subject to the constraints
x + 2 x 1000; 3 x + 2 x 900;
x + 2 x 500; x, x 0
Unit I
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
Newton Raphson method, Method of false position, Graffe s root squaring method, Ba
irstow s method.
Solution of system of linear equations: Gauss elimination method, crout s method a
nd Gauss-seidel
method, Eigen value of a matrix by power method.
9 hours
Unit II
Finite Differences and Interpolation
Interpolation: Difference table, Newton s forward and backward interpolation, Newt
on s divided difference
interpolation formula, Lagrange s interpolation formula.
9 hours
Unit III
Numerical Differentiation and Integration
Numerical differentiation using Newton s forward and backward interpolation. Numer
ical integration- Two
and Three point Gaussian quadrature formulae , Trapezoidal rule and Simpson s 1/3
and 3/8 rules- Double
integrals using Trapezoidal rule and Simpson s rules.
9 hours
Unit IV
Initial Value Problems for Ordinary Differential Equations
Single step Methods: Taylor s series method for solving first and second order equ
ations, Euler s and
Modified Euler s method ,Fourth order Runge- Kutta method for solving first order
equations-Multistep
Methods: Milne s and Adams- Bashforth predictor and corrector methods.
9 hours
Unit V
Linear Programming
Modelling, Graphical method, Definitions, statement of basic theorems and proper
ties, Simplex method.
9 hours
MAT LAB: Invited Lectures on Mat lab and its applications on Numerical methods.
Textbook(s)
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Numerical Methods, S.Chand an
d Co. New
Delhi, 2009.
2. Kanti swarup, Gupta, Manmohan, Operations Research, Sultan Chard & Sons, New
Delhi, 1995.
Reference(s)
1. Gupta and Hira, Problems in Operations Research, S.Chand & Co, New Delhi, 199
1.
2. M.K.Jain, S.R.K. Iyangar, R.K.Jain ; Numerical Methods For Scientific & Engin
eering
Computation New Age International ( P ) Ltd , New Delhi , 2005.
3. T.Veerarajan, Numerical Methods with programs in C, Second Edition, Tata McGr
aw- Hill
Publication Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
11N402 CONTROL ENGINEERING

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To understand the different methods of system representation and obtain the tr
ansfer function
model for various types of systems
. To impart necessary knowledge in the time domain response and steady state err
or analysis
. To give basic knowledge in obtaining the open loop and closed loop frequency res
ponses
. To understand the concept of stability and methods of stability analysis
. To study the various methods of designing compensators for a control system
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
Course outcome(s)
1. Obtain mathematical model of a simple system
2. Determine the time and frequency response of mathematical model
3. Analyze the stability of simple systems and design the compensator to improve
the system
performance.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Mathematics I, II and III
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 14
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Define control system.

Draw the open loop and closed loop control system.
Recall the transfer function.
Define block diagram.
State signal flow graph.
Quote Masons Gain formula.
Memorize PI controller.
State PD controller.
Define PID controller.
10. List the merits and demerits of P, I and D controllers.

11. Outline time response.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Name the different types of test signals.

Define step signal.
Define ramp signal.
Define parabolic signal.
Describe an impulse signal.
Identify the order of a system.
State damping ratio.
List out the time domain specifications.
Define delay time.
Define rise time.
Define peak time.
Define peak overshoot.
Select the correct formula for settling time.
Memorize the steady state error.
Name the generalized error coefficients.
Match the time and frequency response.
List the frequency domain specifications.
Define gain margin.
Define phase margin.
Describe the Nichols chart.
Draw the M and N circles.
Recall Nichols plot.
Draw the polar plot for the given transfer function, G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2).
Quote dominant pole.
Match the breakaway and breaking point.
Describe Nyquist stability criterion.
Memorize the Routh stability condition.
Define compensation.
List the different types of compensators.
Draw the feedback compensation.
Draw the bode plot of lag-lead compensator.
Understand
1. Distinguish between open loop and closed loop system.
2. Discuss why negative feedback is invariably preferred in closed loop system.
3. Select the analogous electrical elements in force voltage analogy for the ele
ments of mechanical
translational system.
4. Indicate the analogous electrical elements in force current analogy for the e
lements of mechanical
5. Infer servomechanism.
6. Illustrate the two major types of control system.
7. Discuss the importance of test signals.
8. Judge when a P, PI and PID controller is preferred in process.
9. Distinguish between transient and steady state responses.
10. Tell how the system is classified depending on the value of damping?
11. Show the response of a second order under damped system and mention the time
domination
specification.
12. Distinguish between type and order of a system.
13. Compute relation between static and generalized error coefficients.
14. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of static error and generalized err
or coefficients.
15. Summarize the time and frequency response analysis.
16. Express the resonant peak and resonant frequency.

17. Illustrate Bode Plot.
18. Represent the advantages of Nichols chart.
19. Match the correlation between the time and frequency response.
20. Infer how the closed loop frequency response is determined from the open loo
p frequency
response using Nichols chart.
21. Tell how closed loop frequency response is determined from open loop frequen
cy response using
M and N circles.
22. Express the necessary condition for stability.
23. Show the relation between stability and coefficient of characteristic polyno
mial.
24. Tell how the roots of characteristic equation are related to stability.
25. Predict how you will find root locus on real axis.
26. Explain asymptotes.
27. Compute the angle of asymptotes.
28. Infer centroid, how it is calculated.
29. Summarize the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback
compensation.
30. Predict the way to find the crossing point of root locus in imaginary axis.
31. Discuss the time domain specifications needed to design a control system.
32. Judge when lag / lead / lag-lead compensation is employed.
33. Indicate why compensation is necessary in feedback control system.
34. Discuss the effect of adding a pole to open loop transfer function of a syst
em.
35. Compute the transfer function of lag-lead compensator and draw its pole-zero
plots.
36. Discuss the characteristics of lag-lead compensation.
37. Match the lag, lead and lag-lead compensator.
Apply
1. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =10/(s+1)
(s+2). Calculate the
steady state error for unit step input.
2. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =25(s+4)/s
(s+0.5) (s+2).
Compute the steady state error for unit ramp input.
3. The closed loop transfer function of second order system is C(s)/R(s)= 10/s2+
6s+10. Examine the
type of damping in the system.
4. The closed loop transfer function of a second order system is given by 200/s2
+20s+200. Solve the
damping ratio and natural frequency of oscillation.
5. A second order system has a damping ratio of 0.6 and natural frequency of osc
illation is 10
rad/second. Calculate the damping frequency
6. The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback system is G(s)=20/s(s+10)
. Examine the
nature of response of the closed loop system for unit step input?
7. The damping ratio of a system is 0.75 and the natural frequency of oscillatio
n is 12 rad/sec.
Compute the peak overshoot and the peak time.
8. The damping ratio of a system is 0.6 and the natural frequency of oscillation
is 8 rad/sec. Solve the
rise time. The damping ratio and natural frequency of oscillation of a second or
der system is 0.5
and 8 rad/sec respectively. Calculate the resonant peak and resonant frequency.
9. Use the transfer function G(s)= K/sn to draw the bode plot.
10. Sketch the bode plot for G(s) = 1/(1+sT)
11. Use the transfer function G(s)= 1/(1+sT) to draw the polar plot.
12. Sketch the polar plot of G(s) = 1/[ s2(1+sT1) (1+sT2) (1+sT3)]
13. For the system represented by the following characteristic equation s4+3s3+4
s2+5s+10=0.
Examine whether the

14. Show necessary condition for stability is satisfied or not.
Analyze and Evaluate

1. Determine the transfer function of mechanical system.
2. Develop the transfer function of electrical and electromechanical systems.
3. Determine the transfer function of thermal system.
4. Analyze the transfer function of hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
5. For a given system G(s) = 10(s+1) / (s2+13s+10), how to detect steady state e
rror and error
constants?
6. Analyze the stability of the system using routh hurwitz criterion, root locus
technique or nyquist
stability criterion.
7. For a given transfer function G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2), Design the lag, lead and
lag lead networks.
Create
1. Construct Routh array and determine the stability of the system whose charact
eristics equation is
Also determine the number of roots lying on
right half of s-plane, left half of s-plane and imaginary axis.
.0161620128223456.......ssssss
2. Create the mathematical model of PI, PD and PID controllers.
3. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function, G(s) = K / s (1+2
s). Design a suitable
lag compensator so that phase margin is 40. and the steady state error for ramp
input is less than
or equal to 0.2.
Unit I
Mathematical Model of Physical Systems
Open loop and closed loop systems with examples
Elements of control system Mathe
matical
representation of systems
Transfer function of simple mechanical, electrical and
thermal systems Transfer function of
overall systems using block diagram reduction technique
Signal flow graph.
Comparison between open loop and closed loop system

9 Hours
Unit II
Time Domain Analysis
Standard test signals - Transient response of first and second order systems
Ti
me domain specifications
Steady state errors and error constants
Generalized error series Dominant poles
of transfer functions
P, I, PD, PI and PID models of feedback control systems.
Ramp response of first and second order system
9 Hours
Unit III
Frequency Domain Analysis
Frequency response of systems - Frequency domain specifications - Polar plot
de plot Constant M
and N
circles
Nichols chart - Nichols plot.
Advantages of frequency response
Bo
9 Hours
Unit IV
Stability of Control Systems
Concepts of stability
Characteristic equation
s technique Nyquist stability criterion.
Routh-Hurwitz criterion
Root-Locu
Relationship between system parameter and pole location

9 Hours
Unit V
Compensator Design
Design Specifications
Lag, lead and lag-lead networks
using time domain
and frequency domain analysis.
Cascade compensator design
Selection for compensator

9 Hours
Text book(s)
1. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International Pu
blisher, 2010
Reference(s)
1. K. Ogatta, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010
2. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
2012
3. M. Gopal, Control System Principles and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012
4. M. N. Bandyopadhyay, Control Engineering Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall o
f India, 2009
11N403 TRANSDUCERS ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
.
.
.
.
.
r
To impart knowledge about the principles and analysis of sensors.

Discussion of errors and error analysis.
Emphasis on characteristics and response of transducers.
To have an adequate knowledge in resistance transducers.
Basic knowledge in inductance and capacitance transducers and exposure to othe
transducers.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO5
Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and
modern
engineering and computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO8
and norms of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Analyze the characteristics of transducers..

2. Classify the transducers and identify their applications.
3. Select the appropriate transducer for a simple application
Prerequisite(s)
. Basics knowledge of Engineering Physics and basic knowledge of Physics taught

in higher
secondary
. Basic knowledge of Electronics devices and circuits
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 15
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define units.
2. Give the classification of units.
3. Define Standards.
4. Define Instrumental error.
5. State the principle of primary transducer.
6. What is active transducer?
7. Name any one analog transducer.
8. List the different static characteristics of a transducer.
9. Define dynamic characteristic.
10. Mention the different type s dynamic characteristics.
11. Define mathematical model.
12. What is potentiometer?
13. List out the advantages and disadvantages of potentiometer?
14. Recall the different types of strain gauge?
15. Mention the applications of strain gauge.
16. Define resistance thermometer.
17. What is self-heating error of thermometer?
18. Recall the principle of hotwire anemometer.
19. Identify the applications of thermistors.
20. State the principle of operation of piezo resistive sensor.
21. Define inductance transducer.
22. Mention the three principles of inductance transducer.
23. Recall the principle of variable reluctance accelerometer.
24. Point out the need for demodulator in variable reluctance accelerometer.
25. What is the principle of Induction Potentiometer?
26. Define LVDT.
27. State the applications of LVDT.
28. List the advantages and disadvantages of LVDT.
29. Memorize the principle of the electro-magnetic transducer.
30. Why transducers need a signal conditioning unit?
31. What is digital transducer?
32. State the principle of change of capacitance.
33. Describe the principle of capacitive transducer.
34. List the uses of capacitive transducer.
35. Define magnetostrictive transducer.
36. Name the different magnetostrictive transducers.
37. What are the errors in magnetostrictive transducer?
38. Select the suitable materials for piezo electric transducer.
39. Define fiber optic transducer.
Understand
1. Distinguish between accuracy and precision.
2. What are the different types of static errors? Explain each of them.
3. What are instrumental and environmental errors? How can they be avoided?
4. What is the difference between a primary and a secondary standard?
5. How self-heating error is corrected for in resistance thermometry?
6. For what application, thermistor is preferred as temperature sensor?
7. Distinguish between a resistance strain gauge and a semiconductor strain gaug
e.
8. Why piezoelectric transducers are useful only for dynamic measurement?
9. How frequency of supply changes the sensitivity of an LVDT?
10. Express how .true zero. is obtained in an Induction potentiometer?
11. Give examples of capacitive transducer applications.
12. Demonstrate how a capacitive transducer used for measuring the displacement?
13. How capacitive transducer used to measure the sound signal?
14. Illustrate the principle of capacitive pressure transducer.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Show how slew rate affects

How to choose the specific
Compare digital transducer
Indicate the uses of fiber
the operation of analog to digital converter?

type of A/D for the given application?
with analog.
optic transducers.
19. Express the special features of magnetostrictive transducer.

20. In what way MEMS technology improves the efficiency of sensor?
Apply
1. A temperature transducer with a time constant of 0.4 sec and a static sensiti
vity of 0.05mV/ c is
used to measure the temperature of a hot liquid medium which changes from 25C to
65C. The
transducer is adjusted to read 0 and 25C.Determine the time taken to read 80% of
the final
voltage value if the temperature changes as a step.
2. Calculate the reading of the transducer at the end of 4 sec if the temperatur
e changes at a constant
rate of 10 per sec from 25C to 65C.Ten measurements of pressure made by an instrume
nt at
different time intervals give the following readings in kg / cm2: 7.29, 8.03, 8.
10, 7.95, 8.01, 7.98,
7.95, 8.07, 7.94 and 7.97.Find arithmetic mean, standard deviation, and most pro
bable error.
3. A variable potential divider has a total resistance of 2kO and is fed from a
10V d.c. supply. The
output is connected to a load resistance of 5kO. Determine the loading errors fo
r the wiper
positions corresponding to K=xi /xt =0, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0. Use the result
to plot a rough
graph of error versus xi /xt.
4. The output of an LVDT is connected to a 5V voltmeter through an amplifier who
se amplification
factor is 250. An output of 2 mV appears across the terminals across the termina
ls of LVDT when
the core moves through a distance of 0.5 mm. calculate the sensitivity of the LV
DT and that of the
whole set up. The milli-voltmeter scale has 100 divisions. The scale can be read
to 1/5 of a
division. Calculate the resolution of the instrument in mm.
5. A Hall effect transducer is used for the measurement of a magnitude field of
0.5 Wb/m2. The 2
mm thick slab is made of Bismuth for which the Hall s co-efficient is -1x10-6 V m/
(A Wb m-2)
and the current is 3A.
6. A parallel plate capacitive transducer has plates 600 mm2 area which is separ
ated by air by a
distance of 0.2mm. The resistance of the transducer is 20 X 106 O. Calculate the
time constant of
the transducer and find the attenuation of the output 1000 Hz. The permittivity
of the air is 8.85 X
10-12 F/m.
7. A quartz crystal has the dimensions of 2 mm X 2 mm X 2 mm. Quartz has the fol
lowing properties
charge sensitivity = 21 C/N. Young s modulus = 8.6 X 1010 N/m2. Permittivity = 40.
6 X 10-12
F/m. Calculate the value of force, charge, and voltage if the crystal is subject
ed to a strain of 10 X
10-6 m/m.
8. A thermistor has a resistance of 10KO at 25C. The resistance temperature co-e
fficient is -0.05/C.
A Wien s bridge oscillator uses two identical thermistors in the frequency determi
ning part of the
bridge. The value of capacitance used in the bridge is 500 pF. Calculate the val
ue of frequency of
oscillations for (i) 20C (ii) 25C (iii) 30C. The frequency of oscillation is f=1/2p
RC Hz where R
and C are resistance and capacitance respectively.
9. Determine the acceptance angle for a single fiber with a numerical aperture o
f 0.096.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare Zero order, First order and second order transducer.
2. Compare RTD, Thermocouple and Thermistor.
3. Compare different types of Analog to digital converter.
Create
1. Design a signal conditioning circuit for LVDT. The output current from the si
gnal conditioning
circuit should be in the range 4 20 mA.
Unit I
Characteristics of Transducers
Units and Standards - Calibration methods - Classification of errors - Error ana
lysis - Limiting error Probable error - Static characteristics - Mathematical model of transducers - ze
ro, first and second order
transducers Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test
inputs.
Ramp response of first and second order system
9 Hours
Unit II
Variable Resistance Transducers
Principles of operation - Construction details - Characteristics of resistance t
ransducers - Resistance
potentiometers - Strain gauges - Resistance thermometers - Thermistors - Hotwire
anemometer Piezoresistive sensors and humidity sensors.
Applications of piezoresistive sensors
9 Hours
Unit III
Variable Inductance Transducers
Induction potentiometer - Variable reluctance transducers - LVDT- Eddy current t
ransducers, synchros
and resolvers - Electro-magnetic sensors - associated signal conditioning circui
ts for above transducers.
Signal conditioning circuit for electro-magnetic sensor
9 Hours
Unit IV
Variable Capacitive Transducers
Variable air gap type -Variable area type - Variable permittivity type - Capacit
or micro phone - Signal
conditioning circuits for above transducer.
Signal conditioning circuit for capacitor microphone
9 Hours
Unit V
Other Transducers
Piezoelectric transducer
Magnetostrictive transducer
Semiconductor sensor
Digita
l transducers
Smart sensors Fiber optic transducers - Hall effect transducers - Photoelectric
transducers Introduction
to MEMS and Nano sensors - Bio Sensor
Application of Bio sensor
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. J.
, UK,
2. E.
Book
2008
3. S.
P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, Addison Wesley Longman Ltd.

2010
O. Doeblin, Measurement Systems: Applications and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill
Co.,
Renganathan, Transducer Engineering, Allied Publishers, 2007
Reference(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, 2007
2. D. V. S. Murthy, Transducers and Instrumentation, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi,
2009
3. H. K. P. Neubert, Instrument Transducers
An Introduction to their Performance
and Design,
Oxford University Press, Cambridge, 2009
11N404 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To understand the basic model of the communication process
. To understand the guided and unguided transmission medium
. To have an introduction on different analog and digital communication techniqu
es
. To familiarize the basic concept of wireless cellular telephone system, Satell
ite and Optical Fiber
Communications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of

PO12
Course Outcome(s)
1. Interpret the concepts of transmission lines and radio wave propagation
2. Compare the analog and digital communications
3. Summarize the basics of satellite and fiber optic communication .
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Engineering Physics and Basic knowledge of Physics taught i
n higher
secondary school
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 16
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define Standing Wave Ratio.
2. Define critical frequency
3. Define propagation constant of a transmission line.
4. Name the applications of the quarter-wave line?
5. Define the cut-off frequency of a guide.
6. State the demerits of Square-law Modulator.
7. Identify the primary constants of a transmission line.
8. Identify the purpose of modulation in communication.
9. Define reflection loss and insertion loss in a transmission line
10. State the condition for distortion less line.
11. List the elements of communication system.
12. Write the need for Modulation.
13. Draw the circuit diagram of Balanced Modulator for generating AM with carrie
r.
14. Define critical Modulation.
15. Define coefficient of modulation and percentage modulation for an AM system.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Draw the envelope of AM.

State Carson s rule of FM bandwidth.
Define narrowband and wideband FM.
Define modulation index of FM and PM.
List out the four most common methods of pulse modulation?
Define droop. What causes it?
Define slope overload and granular noise.
Define multiplexing.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
List out the vocoding techniques.

Define the dynamic range.
State Quantization range and Quantization error?
Point the advantages of digital transmission.
Draw a BPSK waveform for the data stream 10110.
Quote =Protocol Data Unit .
Define Bit Error Rate (BER).
Mention any two topologies used in data communication.
Give the difference between macro cells, mini cells and microcells.
Define frequency reuse factor.
What is meant by first generation cellular telephone system?
Outline the AMPS frequency allocation.
What is meant by a microcellular system?
List out the classification of AMPS cellular telephones.
Define Intersymbol interference.
Define Companding.
Define TDM.
Define aliasing.
Understand
1. Show the equivalent circuit for a metallic two wire transmission line and der
ive the expression for
the characteristic impedance.
2. Tell any two methods of generating DSB-SC
3.
4. Discuss in detail the various ways in which a signal propagates through space
.
5. Compute the expression for voltage and current at any point on a transmission
line in terms of
receiving end voltage and current
6. Mention the transmission line techniques used to match the load impedance and
the characteristic
impedance.
7. Explain the collector modulation method for generating AM wave with a neat ci
rcuit diagram and
waveforms.
8. Explain the high level AM transmitter with neat diagram.
9. Explain the Super-heterodyne receiver with neat diagram.
10. Explain the need for suppressing the carrier in AM wave. Write the expressio
ns of the DSB-SC
wave in time and frequency domain.
11. Explain Narrow band FM in detail.
12. With a neat diagram explain ratio detector.
13. Explain Slope detector with a neat diagram.
14. Explain FM transmitter using direct method.
15. Explain the working principle of Frequency Shift Keying demodulator circuits
.
16. Discuss briefly about Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communication Equipme
nt.
17. Write in detail about the satellite link system model with suitable equation
s.
18. Explain the working principle of the Digital T carrier system.
19. With block diagram, explain the primary blocks of modem.
20. Write briefly about the functions of ISO-OSI seven layer architecture.
Apply
1. Explain how error is detected and corrected using Hamming codes

nication?
2. Explain near-far effect?
3. An 80 MHz carrier is having an amplitude of 50v is modulated by
ignal is having an
amplitude of 20v. Draw the frequency spectrum of AM wave.
4. Explain the block diagram Binary Phase Shift Keying transmitter
and describe the
operation.
5. For the sample and hold circuit determine the minimum number of
in a PCM code for
a dynamic range of 80dB. What is the coding efficiency?
6. Explain how will you calculate over modulation of AM?
7. Explain how the ultimate modulation index of FM is estimated?
8. Explain how the ultimate modulation index of FM is estimated?
9. Examine the purpose of sample and hold circuit?
in data commu
3 KHz audio s
and receiver
bits required
10. Show the use of Numerical Aperture?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Differentiate Radian & Steradian.
2. Determine the transmit power for a CDMA mobile unit that is receiving a signa
l from the base
station at 100dBm.
3. Compare different AM methods.
4. Determine the number of cells in clusters for the following values: j=4 and i
=2 and j=3 and i=3.
5. Determine the number of channels per cluster and the total channel capacity f
or a cellular
telephone area comprised of 12 clusters with seven cell in each cluster and 16 c
hannels in each
cell.
6. A PCM-TDM system multiplexes 32 voice-band channels each with a bandwidth of
0 kHz to 4
kHz. Each sample is encoded with an 8-bit PCM code. UPNRZ encoding is used. Dete
rmine
Minimum sample rate, Line speed in bits per second and Minimum Nyquist bandwidth
.
7. Determine the dynamic range in dB for the following n-bit linear sign-magnitu
de PCM codes:
n=7, 8, 12, and 14.
8. Determine the Nyquist sampling rate for the following maximum analog input fr
equencies: 2 kHz,
5 kHz, and 20 kHz.
9. Determine the characteristic impedance for a coaxial cable with the following
specifications: d =
0.025 inches, D = 0.15 inches, Relative dielectric constant = 2.23.
10. A transmitter has a power of 50 mW to a 50 O transmission line. The transmis
sion line
impedance is not equal to the characteristic impedance of the transmission line.
The coefficient of
reflection is 0.5. Determine the reflected power and dissipated power.
11. Contrast the advantage and disadvantages of digital transmission.
12. Differentiate bit rate and baud rate.
13. Compare PCM and DM.
Create
1. Design of Transistor based Amplitude modulator using BC147, envelope detector
and to calculate
the modulation index for various modulating voltage whose transistor gain is 300
.
2. One input to a conventional AM modulator is a 500 kHz carrier with amplitude
of 20 V. The
second input is a 10kHz modulating signal with amplitude of 7.5 V. Design a modu
lator and Find,
(i) Frequency limits for the upper and lower side bands, (ii) Bandwidth, (iii) U
pper and lower
side frequencies, (iv)Modulation coefficient and percent modulation.
3. Develop a procedure to find the AM & FM spectrum by using spectrum analyzer?

4. Derive an expression for signal to noise ratio in angle modulated system.
5. Derive Campbell s equation.
Unit I
Transmission Lines and Radio wave Propagation
Introduction, Electrical model of Transmission line, Step and Pulse Response of
Lines, Wave propagation
on lines,Transmission line losses, Impedance Matching, Transmission line Measure
ments; Radio
propagation- Introduction, Electromagnetic waves, Free space propagation, Reflec
tion, Refraction,
and Diffraction, Ground wave propagation, Ionospheric propagation and Line of si
ght propagation,
Propagation in a Mobile/Portable Environment, Repeater and cellular systems.
Reflection and Refraction of Electromagnetic waves

9 Hours
Unit II
Analog Communication
Elements of communication systems, Time and frequency domain, Noise and communic
ations, Amplitude
modulation, introduction, full carrier AM in time domain and frequency domain, Q
uadrature AM and AM
stereo, suppressed-carrier AM, Angle modulation, Phase modulation, Angle modulat
ion spectrum, FM and
Noise, FM stereo, FM measurements, Receivers, Receivers topologies, Demodulators
, Receivers variants,
Communication receivers and receiver measurements.
Duplex, Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex communication system
9 Hours
Unit III
Digital Communication
Introduction, Pulse Modulation, Pulse code modulation, Delta Modulation, Line co
des, Time
division multiplexing, vocoders and Data Compression, Digital modulation-Introdu
ction, Frequency and
phase shift keying, Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, Telephone Modems, Modem to
computer
connections, Cable Modems and Digital subscriber Lines.
Operation of Modem
9 Hours
Unit IV
Cellular Radio
Introduction, The advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS), AMPS control system, Cell
ular
Telephone Specification and Operation, Cell site equipment, Fax and Data Communi
cation Using Cellular
Phones, Digital Cellular Systems, GSM, IS-95 CDMA PCS, Third Generation PCS.
Fundamental concepts of Cellular Telephone
9Hours
Unit V
Satellite and Optical Fiber Communications
Orbital satellites, geostationary satellites, look angles, satellite system link
models, satellite system link
equations; advantages of optical fiber communication - Light propagation through
fiber, fiber loss, light
sources and detectors
Light propagation through optical fiber
9 Hours
Text Book
1. Roy Blake, Electronic Communication Systems, Thomson Delmar Ltd, New York, 20
09
Reference(s)
1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communication Systems, Pearson Education Asia Ltd, N
ew Delhi,
2012
2. William Schweber, Electronic Communication System, Prentice Hall of India Ltd
, India, New
York, 2007
3. G. Kennedy, Electronic Communication Systems, McGraw Hill book Co, New York,
2005
4. Miller, Modern Electronic Communication, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2
007
11N405 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLERS

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To study the Architecture of 8085, 8086 & 8051

. To study the addressing modes & instruction set of 8085, 8086 & 8051
. To introduce the need & use of Interrupt structure
. To develop the skill of simple program writing
. To introduce the commonly used peripherals / interfacing ICs
To study simple a
pplications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO5
modern
Course Outcome(s)

1. Explain the fundamental features and operation of microprocessor and microcon
troller
2. Analyze the concept of peripheral interfaces used in microcontroller
3. Write program to control simple devices.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basics knowledge of Digital logic circuits

Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 17
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define processor.
2. Define I/O ports.
3. State the timing diagram of 8085.
4. Define interrupt.
5. How many addressing modes are there in 8085?
6. Define pipeline processing.
7. Define a bus.
8. What do you mean by multiplexed address and data bus?
9. What is the purpose of program counter?
10. What is the significance of stack pointer?
11. List out the general purpose registers in 8085
12. State three important features of M68000 processor.
13. What is NMI?
14. What do you mean by looping, counting and indexing?
15. What is the use of ready signal in 8085?
16. What is the use of CLKOUT and RESET OUT signals of 8085 processor?
17. What is the use of ALE signal?
18. What are the different interrupts available in 8085?
19. What is the significance of DMA?
20. Compare and contrast the 8085 and 8086 microprocessor.
21. List out all the addressing modes used in 8085 & 8086 processors.
22. What do you mean by assembly language?

23. State how the data and address buses are multiplexed in an 8086 microprocess
or.
24. Compare serial and parallel data communication.
25. Mention two methods of DMA data transfer.
26. What is RAM refreshing?
27. List two advantages of memory mapped I/O.
28. What do you mean by volatile and non-volatile memory?
29. Distinguish between microprocessor and microcontroller.
30. How external memory devices can interface with 8051?
31. What is the function of DPTR register?
32. What is the significance of SFRs in 8051 microcontroller?
33. List out the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
34. List out all the addressing modes of 8051.
35. Classify the instruction set of 8051.
36. What is the significance of interrupt priority control register in 8051 micr
ocontroller?
37. List out the special function registers of 8051 microcontroller.
38. List out the various modes available for timer in 8051 microcontroller.
39. Compare the 8051, 8031, and 8751 microcontrollers.
40. What are the alternate functions of port 3 in 8051 microcontroller?
41. What is handshake port?
42. List the hardware requirement to interface an LCD using 8255.
43. What do you mean by solenoid?
44. What are the modes of operation supported by 8255?
45. Compare synchronous and asynchronous communication.
46. What is meant by memory mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O?
47. Define resolution and conversion time in ADC.
48. List out the functions performed by 8279.
49. List out the features of ADC 0804.
50. What is key bounce? How it is achieved?
51. How a keyboard matrix is formed in keyboard interface using 8279?
52. What is the voltage levels used in RS-232?
53. What is the job of TMOD register?
54. What is program?
55. Define the instruction and instruction set.
56. What is meant by data manipulation?
57. How to develop program logic?
58. How to tell the program to the processor?
59. How to code the program?
60. How to test the program?
61. What are all the control and I/O instructions used in 8051?
62. What do you mean by servo motor?
Understand
1. Draw the architecture of 8085.
2. Draw the register structure of 8085.
3. Write the pin definitions of 8085.
4. Derive the equation for LC tuned circuit.
5. Explain the generation of control signals.
6. Draw the format of flag register in 8085.
7. Explain the operation of each instruction in the instruction set of 8085.
8. Draw the flowchart to represent the various actions which are to be performed
in 8085, 8086 and
8051.
9. Write the two ways to initialize stack pointer at FFFFh.
10. Explain the various steps involved while executing CALL instruction with an
example.
11. Explain the contents of accumulator to run SIM instruction.
12. Explain the operational difference between the following pairs of instructio
ns.
13. i. SPHL and XTHL ii. CALL addr and JMP addr iii LHLD and SHLD addriv. XRA
and MVI A, 00H v. INR A and ADI 01H vi. DAD RP and DAA.
14. Write the equation for one T state.

15. Explain the need of software timers.
16. Draw the interrupt structure of 8085 and 8051.
18. Write the summary of 8085 hardware interrupts in table format.
19. What are all the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?
20. Draw the I/O port diagram.
21. Explain I/O mapped and memory mapped I/O interfacing technique.
22. Draw the pin diagram and block diagram of IC 1408 DAC.
23. What are the conditions should be considered in the circuit operation of int
erfacing DAC to 8051?
24. Draw the pin diagram of 0808/0809.
25. Draw the full step and half step excitation sequence of stepper motor.
Apply
1. To compute the 16-bit sum of N elements of a table. The starting address of t
able is 4150 whose
first entry is the number of elements N. The result is stored at memory location
4140 and 4141.
2. To convert two BCD numbers in memory to the equivalent hex number. The BCD di
gits are at
locations 4150 and 4151 and the result will be stored at 4152.
3. To find the smallest of N numbers using 8085.
4. Write a program to perform the digital to analog conversion with square wavef
orm using 8085
and8051.
5. Generate a square wave to perform timer operation using 8051.
6. Write a program for performing block transfer operation.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. How will you perform the operations like arithmetic, logical, rotate and stac
k using 8085 and
8051?
2. How will you transfer the data from one place to another?
3. How will you interface a microprocessor and microcontroller to a given periph
eral?
Create
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design
Design
Design
Design
the real time clock using 8253.

the hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system.
microcontroller system to control traffic signals.
a 4 seven segment LED display using 8051.
Unit I
INTEL 8085 Microprocessor
Functional block diagram
Registers, ALU, Bus systems, Addressing modes. Basic in
terfacing concepts Memory Interfacing, I/O Interfacing - Timing constraints - Memory control signal
s - Read and write cycles

Interrupt - Types of Interrupts, Methods of servicing Interrupts - Need for dire
ct memory access - DMA
transfer types.
Types of Interrupts
9 Hours
Unit II
INTEL 8086 Microprocessor
Register organization of 8086
Architecture, Modes of Operation - Physical Memory
organization I/Oaddressing capability - Special Processor activities, 8086 Instruction set an
d assembler directives:
Addressing modes of 8086 - Instruction set of 8086 - Assembler directives and op
erators.
Assembler directives and operators
9 Hours
Unit III
Microcontroller
Introduction to 8051 microcontroller, 8051 Architecture, Microcontroller hardwar
e, Input /Output ports
andcircuits, External memory, counters and Timers, Serial input/output, Interrup
ts- Introduction to the S12
and S12X Microcontroller, S12 Assembly Programming, Interrupts, Clock Generation
, Resets, and
Operation Modes, Parallel Ports, Serial Communication Interface (SCI), Serial Pe
ripheral Interface (SPI),
Analog-to- Digital Converter, Hardware and Software Development Tools, C Languag
e Programming.
Serial Communication Interface and Serial Peripheral Interface
9 Hours
Unit IV
Peripheral Interfacing with 8051
Study of Architecture and Programming of ICs: 8255 PPI, 8259 PIC, 8251 USART, 82
79 Key board
display controller and 8253 Timer/ Counter
A/D and D/A converter interfacing.
A/D and D/A converter interfacing
9 Hours
Unit V
Programming and Applications
Data Transfer, Manipulation, Control & I/O instructions
ntrol of servo motor
Stepper motor control.
Interface
Closed loop co
Stepper motor control

9 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Ramesh Goankar, Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications wit
h 8085,
PenramInternational, 2009
2. Kenneth J Ayala, 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming and Applicat
ions,
Delmar
Learning, 2007
Reference(s)
1. MunirBannoura, Rudan Bettelheim and Richard Soja,ColdFireMicroprocessors &
Microcontrollers, , AMT Publishing, 2007
2. John B Peatman, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, Perason Education Asia, Low
price edition
2012
3. V.Douglas Hall, Microprocessors and Interfacing Programming and Hardware, Tat
a McGraw
Hill,2010
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi& Janice GilliMazidi, The 8051 Micro Controller and Embedd
ed Systems,
Pearson Education, 5th Indian Reprint, New Delhi, 2012
11N406 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To study the IC fabrication procedure
. To study the characteristics; realize circuits; design for signal analysis usi
ng Op-amp ICs
. To study the applications of Op-amp
. To study internal functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like T
imers, PLL circuits,
regulator circuits, ADCs
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Explain the various steps involved in IC fabrication and analyze the characte
ristics of op-amp.
2. Design circuit for simple applications using op-amps, 555 Timer, 566-voltage
controller oscillator
and 565- phase locked loop.
3. Apply the linear ICs to simple applications.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Digital logic circuits
. Basic knowledge of Electronic devices and circuits
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 18
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define an operational amplifier.
2. List the characteristics of an ideal op-amp.
3. Recall the advantages of integrated circuits.
4. List the popular IC packages available today.
5. Define input offset voltage.
6. Define input offset current.
7. State the reasons for the offset currents at the input of the op-amp.
8. Define CMRR of an op-amp.
9. Name some of the applications of current sources.
10. Define sensitivity.
11. Identify the limitations in a temperature compensated zenar-reference source
.
12. Define band-gap referenced biasing circuit.
13. Outline the need for frequency compensation in practical op-amps.
14. List the frequency compensation methods.
15. Outline the merits and demerits of Dominant-pole compensation.
16. Define slew rate.
17. List some of the linear and non
linear applications of op-amps.
18. List out the features of instrumentation amplifier.
19. Point out the applications of V-I converter.
20. State precision diode.
21. Identify the applications of precision diode.
22. List out the applications of Log amplifiers.
23. Point out the limitations of the basic differentiator circuit.
24. Define comparator.
25. Recall the applications of comparator
26. State Schmitt trigger.
27. Define multivibrator.

28. Outline the requirements for producing sustained oscillations in feedback ci
rcuits.
29. Name any two audio frequency oscillators.
30. What are the characteristics of a comparator?
31. Define filter.
32. Recall the merits and demerits of both active and passive filters?
33. List some commonly used active filters.
34. Locate some areas where PLL is widely used.
35. List out the basic building blocks of PLL.
36. Define lock-in range of a PLL.
37. Define capture range of PLL.
38. Define Pull-in time.
39. Define delta modulation.
40. State the expression for the VCO free running frequency.
41. Define Voltage to Frequency conversion factor.
42. List out the applications of OTA.
43. Point out the purpose of having a low pass filter in PLL.
44. Identify some typical applications of PLL.
45. List the merits of companding.
46. List out the applications of 555 timers in monostable and astable mode of op
erations.
47. List out some integrating type converters.
48. Outline the main advantages of integrating type ADCs.
49. Define resolution of a data converter.
50. State the main drawback of a dual-slop ADC?
51. List out the direct type ADCs.
52. State the advantages of dual slope ADC.
53. Define conversion time.
54. Define accuracy of converter.
55. Define settling time.
56. State linearity.
57. Draw the pin configuration of IC741.
58. Define sample period and hold period.
Understand
1. Give some examples of monolithic IC voltage regulators.
2. Extrapolate the causes of slew rate?
3. Discuss the uses of successive approximation type ADC s.
4. Discuss the effect of having large capture range.
5. Show the internal block diagram of typical op-amp circuit.
6. Tell the classification of tuned amplifier.
7. Show the functional block diagram of a 723 regulator.
8. Represent the various processes used to fabricate IC s using silicon planar tec
hnology.
9. Indicate the purpose of oxidation.
10. Give the drawbacks of linear regulators.
11. Demonstrate the working principle of phase locked loop.
12. Indicate the requirements for producing sustained oscillations in feedback c
ircuits.
13. Discuss any two audio frequency oscillators.
14. Illustrate the block diagram of PLL and derive the expression for Lock range
and capture range.
15. Explain in detail about demodulation of FM signal using PLL.
16. Discover the reason how the gain is stabilized by negative feedback
17.
18.
e?
19.
20.
What happens when the common terminal of V+ and V- sources is not grounded?
In practical op-amps, what is the effect of high frequency on its performanc
Discover why IC 741 is not used for high frequency applications.
Summarize the condition for good differentiation.
Apply
1. Explain the operation of dual slope ADC.
2. With a neat functional diagram, explain the operation of VCO. Also derive an
expression for fo.
3. Sketch the process steps used in the fabrication of ICs using silicon planar
technology?
4. Use which parameter does the free running frequency of VCO depends on.
5. Explain the need for an instrumentation amplifier? Give a detailed analysis f
or the same.
6. Examine the principle of operation of successive Approximation ADC.
7. Classify and Explain the types of ADCs
8. Classify and Explain the types of DACs
9. Classify the different types of phase detector.
10. Discover the classification of voltage regulators.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Justify the reasons for using current sources in integrated circuits.
2. Analyze the Gilbert s four quadrant multiplier cell with a neat circuit diagram
. Discuss its
applications.
3. Differentiate Schmitt trigger and comparator.
4. Distinguish between dry etching & wet etching.
5. Point out the difference between the open loop and closed loop gain of op-amp
?
6. Design the monostable multivibrator using 555 timer to produce a pulse width
of 100ms.Verify
the values of R and C from the graph.
7. Determine the frequency response of an open-loop op-amp and discuss about the
methods of
frequency compensation.
8. Determine the expression for voltage to frequency conversion factor.
9. Compare and contrast negative and positive feedback
10. Differentiate astable and monostable multivibrator.
Create
1. Construct an adder circuit using op-amp to get the output expression as V 0 =
-(0.1V1 +V2 +10V3
) where V1 , V2 and V3 are the inputs.
2. A 741C op-amp is used as an inverting amplifier with q gain of 50. The voltag
e gain vs. frequency
Curve of 741C is flat upto 20 KHz. What maximum peak to peak input signal can be
applied
without distorting the output?
3. Design an active load for an emitter-coupled pair (differential amplifier) an
d perform a detailed
analysis to find its differential mode gain and the output resistance.
4. Design a temperature compensated zener-reference source.
5. Design a square waveform generator of frequency 100Hz and duty cycle of 75%.
6. Design a wideband pass filter having fl =400Hz, fh =2 KHz and pass band gain
of 4. Find the
value of Q of the filter.
7. Design a second order Butterworth high pass filter having lower cut-off frequ
ency 1 KHz.
8. Design inverting amplifier with a gain of -5 and an input resistance of 10Koh
m.
9. Design non inverting amplifier with a gain of 10.
10. Design a current source for generating I 0 =25A. Assume: Vcc =15V, =100.
11. Design a Widlar current source and obtain the expression for output current.
Also prove that
widlar current source has better sensitivity than constant current source.
12. Derive an expression for its frequency of oscillation.
Unit I
IC Fabrication
IC classification, fundamentals of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, m
asking and etching,
Diffusion of impurities, Realization of monolithic ICs and packaging.
Types of packages
9 Hours
Unit II
Characteristics of Op-Amp
Ideal Op-Amp characteristics, DC characteristics, AC characteristics, offset vol
tage and current - voltage
series feedback and shunt feedback amplifiers, Differential Amplifier, frequency
response of Op-Amp.
External frequency compensation
9 Hours
Unit III
Applications of Op-Amp
Instrumentation amplifier, first and second order active filters, V/I & I/V conv
erters, comparators, summer,
differentiator and integrator
multivibrators, Schmitt trigger, waveform generato
rs, clippers, clampers,
peak detector, S/H circuit, D/A converter (R-2R ladder and weighted resistor typ
es), A/D converter, Dual
slope, successive approximation and flash types.
Flash type A/D converter
9 Hours
Unit IV
Special ICs
555 Timer circuit Functional block, characteristics & applications; 566-voltage
controlled oscillator
circuit; 565- phase locked loop circuit functioning and applications, Analog Mul
tiplier ICs.
Applications of analog Multiplier ICs
9 Hours
Unit V
Application ICs
IC voltage regulators
LM317, LM723 regulators, switching regulator, MA 7840, LM
380 power
amplifier, ICL 8038 function generator IC, Isolation Amplifiers, Opto coupler, O
pto electronic ICs.
Isolation Amplifiers
Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Robert F. Coughlin, Fredrick F. Driscoll, Op-amp and Linear ICs, Pearson Educ
ation, 2002.
2. Ramakant A. Gayakward, Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson Educat
ion, Asia Ltd,
2003.
Reference(s)
1. Roy Choudhary and Sheil B. Jani, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age Publishi
ng Co, 4 Edition,
2011
2. Jacob Millman and Christos C.Halkias, Integrated Electronics - Analog and Dig
ital Circuits
System, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003
3. David A. Bell, Op-amp & Linear ICs, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2editio
n, 2007.
11N407 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY

0
0
3
1.5
Objective(s)
. By training the students in different aspects of transducers, like magnetic, e
lectrical, mechanical
and optical, she/he can select the transducer for specified applications.
. To train the students in handling different kind of transducers like LVDT, Hal
l effect,
Thermocouple, etc, which will helps them to understand the working principle of
the transducers
and install the transducers for measurement of various types of physical quantit
ies
. To design a simple measurement system for the specified configuration.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Measure temperature/resistance, linear displacement, angular velocity or magn
etic fields using
sensors/transducers.
2. Analyze the characteristics of strain gauge, encoder or thermocouple.
3. Measure light intensity and level using transducers.
Prerequisit e(s)
. Basic knowledge of Sensors and Transducer
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define an instrument
2. List out the three sources of possible errors in instruments.
3. Define Instrumental error.
4. Define limiting error.
5. Define probable error.
6. Define Environmental error.
7. Define units.
8. Define Standards.
9. Mention the purpose of the measurement.
10. List the methods of measurement.
11. Classify Standards.
12. Define transducer and give an example.
13. Name the different types of transducer.
14. Recall the uses of primary transducer.
15. Define secondary transducer
16. What is passive transducer?
17. State the principle of active transducer?
18. Define analog transducer?
19. Give the classification of units.
20. Define Primary fundamental and auxiliary fundamental units.
21. Define the unit of mass preserved at International Bureau of weights and mea
sures at Severes,
Paris.
22. Give one property of piezo-electric crystal.
23. Define an Inverse transducer. Give an example.
24. List out the factors responsible in selection of a transducer.
25. Define static characteristics.
26. Mention different types of static characteristics.
27. What is a dynamic characteristic?
28. Mention different type s dynamic characteristics.
29. What are the test inputs of the transducer?
30. Define- zero order transducer.

31. What is Threshold?
32. Define resolution.
33. What is range and span?
34. State the principle of potentiometer.
35. Define gauge factor.
36. What is strain?
37. What is zero error of the transducer?
38. List the input characteristics of the transducer.
39. What is the value of capacitance for measurement of level of a non-conductin
g liquid?
40. Identify the uses of capacitive transducer.
41. What are the different practical capacitance pickups?
42. Describe the principle of capacitive transducer.
43. Mention the three principles of inductance transducer.
44. Name the materials used for thermistors.
45. Mention the features of thermistors.
46. List out the applications of thermistor.
47. Memorize the principle of resistance thermometer.
48. Define self-heating error of thermometer
49. Point out the different approximation methods of resistance thermometer.
Understand
1. How will you achieve high resolution in digital transducer?
2. Compare accuracy and precision.
3. Demonstrate the procedure to measure liquid level using capacitive transducer
s.
4. Draw the functional block diagram of a measurement system.
5. How is linearity of a transducer specified?
6. Show how to minimize null voltage in LVDT?
7. Why is periodical calibration of measuring instrument necessary?
8. Discuss about the three ways of specifying the non linearity of an instrument?
9. Summarize the concept of piezo electric accelerometer for vibration measureme
nt.

1. Add 826 5 to 628 3.
2. Subtract 628 3 from 826 5.
3. A thermometer has a time constant of 3.5 s. it is quickly taken from a temper
ature 00C to a water
bath having temperature 1000 C. what temperature will be indicated after 1.5 s ?
4. A temperature-sensitive transducer is subjected to a sudden temperature chang
e. It takes 10 s for
the transducer to reach equilibrium condition (5 times constant). How long will
it take for the
transducer to read half of the temperature difference?
5. A rotary variable differential transformer has a specification which includes
the following
information
Ranges:
300, linearity error 0.5% full range
600, linearity error 2.0% full range

Sensitivity:
1.1 (mV/V input)/degree
Impedance:
Primary 750 O, Secondary 2000 O.
a)What will be the error in a reading of 400 due to non-linearity when the RVDT
is used on the 600
range
What could be the change in output voltage/degree if there is an input voltage o
f 3V?
6. A temperature transducer with a time constant of 0.4 s and a static sensitivi

ty of 0.05mV/ c is
used to measure the temperature of a hot liquid medium which changes from 25C to
65C. The
transducer is adjusted to read 0 and 25C.
(a) Determine the time taken to read 80% of the final voltage value if the tempe
rature
changes as a step.
(b) Calculate the reading of the transducer at the end of 4 sec if the temperatu
re changes at a
constant rate of 10 per sec from 25C to 65C.
Create
1. Design and implementation of a measurement system for temperature, level, pre
ssure, magnetic
and light intensity measurements
List of Experiments
1. Measurement of linear displacement using inductive transducer.
2. Design of RTD Bridge.
3. Measurement of angular velocity and magnetic field using proximity sensor/Hal
l Effect
transducer.
4. Liquid level measurement using capacitive transducers.
5. Measurement of light intensity using optical transducers.
6. Linearization of thermistor.
7. Piezo Electric accelerometer for vibration measurement.
8. Characteristic of strain gauge for force measurement.
9. Design of linear and angular displacement using resistive transducers.
10. Digital transducer Shaft angle encoder.
. Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Measurement of linear displacement using inductive transducer
3
2
Design of RTD Bridge
6
3
Measurement of angular velocity and magnetic field using proximity sensor/Hall
Effect transducer
6
4
Liquid level measurement using capacitive transducers
3
5
Measurement of light intensity using optical transducers
6
6
Linearization of thermistor
6
7
Piezo Electric accelerometer for vibration measurement
3
8
Characteristic of strain gauge for force measurement
3
9
Design of linear and angular displacement using resistive transducers
3
10
Digital transducer
6
11
Mini project
---
Shaft angle encoder
11N408 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY

0
0
3
1.5
Objective(s)
To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control
To inculcate the controller design concepts
To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modelling
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern

PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Develop the mathematical model of a system
2. Analyze the response and stability of simple systems using modern engineering
tools
3. Design and simulate the response of nonlinear/compensator systems
Prequiste(s)
. Basics knowledge of control engineering
. Basic knowledge of Mathematics I, II and III
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Define control system.

Draw the open loop and closed loop control system.
Recall the transfer function.
Define block diagram.
State signal flow graph.
Quote Masons Gain formula.
7. Memorize PI controller.
8. State PD controller.
9. Define PID controller.
11. Outline time response.
12. Name the different types of test signals.
13. Define step signal.
14. Define ramp signal.
15. Define parabolic signal.
16. Describe an impulse signal.
17. Identify the order of a system.
18. State damping ratio.
19. List out the time domain specifications.
20. Define delay time.
21. Define rise time.
22. Define peak time.
23. Define peak overshoot.
24. Select the correct formula for settling time.
25. Memorize the steady state error.
26. Name the generalized error coefficients.
27. Match the time and frequency response.
28. List the frequency domain specifications.
29. Define gain margin.
30. Define phase margin.
31. Describe the Nichols chart.
32. Draw the M and N circles.
33. Recall Nichols plot.
34. Draw the polar plot for the given transfer function, G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2).
35. Quote dominant pole.
36. Match the breakaway and breaking point.
37. Describe Nyquist stability criterion.
38. Memorize the Routh stability condition.
39. Define compensation.
40. List the different types of compensators.
41. Draw the feedback compensation.
42. Draw the bode plot of lag-lead compensator.
Understand
1. Distinguish between open loop and closed loop system.
2. Discuss why negative feedback is invariably preferred in closed loop system.
3. Select the analogous electrical elements in force voltage analogy for the ele
ments of mechanical
4. Indicate the analogous electrical elements in force current analogy for the e
lements of mechanical
5. Infer servomechanism.
6. Illustrate the two major types of control system.
7. Discuss the importance of test signals.
8. Judge when a P, PI and PID controller is preferred in process.
9. Distinguish between transient and steady state responses.
10. Tell how the system is classified depending on the value of damping?
11. Show the response of a second order under damped system and mention the time
domination
specification.
12. Distinguish between type and order of a system.
13. Compute relation between static and generalized error coefficients.
14. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of static error and generalized err
or coefficients.
15. Summarize the time and frequency response analysis.
16. Express the resonant peak and resonant frequency.
17. Illustrate Bode Plot.
18. Represent the advantages of Nichols chart.

19. Match the correlation between the time and frequency response.
20. Infer how the closed loop frequency response is determined from the open loo
p frequency
response using Nichols chart.
21. Tell how closed loop frequency response is determined from open loop frequen
cy response using
M and N circles.
22. Express the necessary condition for stability.
23. Show the relation between stability and coefficient of characteristic polyno
mial.
24. Tell how the roots of characteristic equation are related to stability.
25. Predict how you will find root locus on real axis.
26. Explain asymptotes.
27. Compute the angle of asymptotes.
28. Infer centroid, how it is calculated.
29. Summarize the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback
compensation.
30. Predict the way to find the crossing point of root locus in imaginary axis.
31. Discuss the time domain specifications needed to design a control system.
32. Judge when lag / lead / lag-lead compensation is employed.
33. Indicate why compensation is necessary in feedback control system.
34. Discuss the effect of adding a pole to open loop transfer function of a syst
em.
35. Compute the transfer function of lag-lead compensator and draw its pole-zero
plots.
36. Discuss the characteristics of lag-lead compensation.
37. Match the lag, lead and lag-lead compensator.
Apply
1. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =10/(s+1)
(s+2). Calculate the
steady state error for unit step input.
2. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =25(s+4)/s
(s+0.5) (s+2).
Compute the steady state error for unit ramp input.
3. The closed loop transfer function of second order system is C(s)/R(s)= 10/s2+
6s+10. Examine the
type of damping in the system.
4. The closed loop transfer function of a second order system is given by 200/s2
+20s+200. Solve the
damping ratio and natural frequency of oscillation.
5. A second order system has a damping ratio of 0.6 and natural frequency of osc
illation is 10
rad/second. Calculate the damping frequency
6. The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback system is G(s)=20/s(s+10)
. Examine the
nature of response of the closed loop system for unit step input?
7. The damping ratio of a system is 0.75 and the natural frequency of oscillatio
n is 12 rad/sec.
Compute the peak overshoot and the peak time.
8. The damping ratio of a system is 0.6 and the natural frequency of oscillation
is 8 rad/sec. Solve the
rise time. The damping ratio and natural frequency of oscillation of a second or
der system is 0.5
and 8 rad/sec respectively. Calculate the resonant peak and resonant frequency.
9. Use the transfer function G(s)= K/sn to draw the bode plot.
10. Sketch the bode plot for G(s) = 1/(1+sT)

11. Use the transfer function G(s)= 1/(1+sT) to draw the polar plot.
12. Sketch the polar plot of G(s) = 1/[ s2(1+sT1) (1+sT2) (1+sT3)]
13. For the system represented by the following characteristic equation s4+3s3+4
s2+5s+10=0.
Examine whether the
14. Show necessary condition for stability is satisfied or not.
Analyse and Evaluate
1. Determine the transfer function of mechanical system.
2. Develop the transfer function of electrical and electromechanical systems.
3. Determine the transfer function of thermal system.
4. Analyze the transfer function of hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
5. For a given system G(s) = 10(s+1) / (s2+13s+10), how to detect steady state e
rror and error
constants?
6. Analyze the stability of the system using routh hurwitz criterion, root locus
technique or nyquist
stability criterion.
7. For a given transfer function G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2), Design the lag, lead and
lag lead networks.
Create
1. Construct Routh array and determine the stability of the system whose charact
eristics equation is
Also determine the number of roots lying on
right half of s-plane, left half of s-plane and imaginary axis.
2. Create the mathematical model of PI, PD and PID controllers.
3. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function, G(s) = K / s (1+2
s). Design a suitable
lag compensator so that phase margin is 40. and the steady state error for ramp
input is less than
or equal to 0.2.
List of Experiments
1. Estimation of transfer function of DC servo motor.
2. Determine the transfer function of AC servo motor.
3. Design and simulation of linear and nonlinear systems.
4. Analog and digital simulation of Type-0 and Type-1 system.
5. Time response analysis using MATLAB.
6. Frequency response analysis using MATLAB.
7. Performance analysis of P, PI and PID controllers.
8. Stability analysis of linear systems.
9. Compensator design using MATLAB.
. Mini Project Total: 45
Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Estimation of transfer function of DC servo motor
6
2
Determine the transfer function of AC servo motor
3
3
Design and simulation of linear and nonlinear systems
3
4
Analog and digital simulation of Type-0 and Type-1 system
6
5
Time response analysis using MATLAB
3
6
Frequency response analysis using MATLAB
6
7
Performance analysis of P, PI and PID controllers
3
8
Stability analysis of linear systems
6
9
Compensator design using MATLAB
9
10
Mini project
---
11N409 LINEAR AND DIGITAL IC LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
. To understand the characteristics and applications of op-amp
. To design and verify various digital logic circuits from gates to counter
. To design the application oriented experiments based on timer, IC 741 and IC 5
55
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO12
Course Outcomes
1. Design and test simple digital combinational circuits.
2. Design and test simple sequential circuits
3. Configure and test amplifier circuits, monostable or astable multivibrator ci
rcuits using linear ICs
4. Design and test simple A/D or D/A convertors.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Linear Integrated Circuits
. Basic knowledge of Electonics decices and circuits
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define combinational logic and sequential logic
2. List out the various types of logic code.
3. List out the key difference between synchronous and asynchronous logic circui
ts.
4. Define grey code.
5. State the function of full adder and full subtractor.
6. Define latch and flip-flop.
7. Define universal gate.
8. Describe shift registers.
9. State the ideal characteristics of op-amp.
10. Define CMRR and slew rate.
11. List out the various applications of op-amp.
12. State the basic difference between op-amp integrator and op-amp differentiat
or.
Understand
1. Explain about the parity generator and checker.
2. Extrapolate the gain equation for inverting and non-inverting amplifier.

3. Summarize the important applications of astable multivibrator.
4. Explain why astable multi-vibrator is called as free running relaxation oscil
lator?
5. Compute the delay time produced by mono-stable and astable multi-vibrator?
6. Explain about the quasi state.
7. Summarize the applications inverting and non-inverting amplifier.
8. Distinguish multiplexer and encoder.
9. Predict which is called as one shot or univibrator and why?
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Show how will you choose shift register modes for particular application?
Explain how will you identify the type of op-amp from IC code?
Show how will you design an op-amp integrator?
Compute the formula to convert binary code to grey code.
Compute the formula to convert grey to binary code.
Classify and Explain the types of ADCs
Classify and Explain the types of DACs
Explain the classification of phase detector.
Sketch the waveform of 4-bit Up-counter and down-counter.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Identify how will you evaluate the cut-off frequency of a differentiator?
2. Design an inverting amplifier with an input resistance of 2 KO, an output res
istance of 100 O and
an open circuit voltage gain of -30.
3. Design an instrumentation amplifier which has a differential voltage gain of
100 (a gain of 40 dB)
and a common-mode voltage gain of zero.
4. Design a non-inverting high-pass amplifier which has a gain of 15 and a lower
cutoff frequency of
20Hz. The input resistance to the amplifier is to be 10 kO in its pass band.
5. Infer how will you design multi-vibrator using 555 timer IC?
6. Identify how does the comparator can be used to produce a square wave?
7. Justify the reasons for using current sources in integrated circuits.
8. Analyze the Gilbert s four quadrant multiplier cell with a neat circuit diagram
. Discuss its
applications.
9. Differentiate Schmitt trigger and comparator.
10. Distinguish between dry etching & wet etching.
11. Differentiate open loop and closed loop gain of op-amp?
12. Design the monostable multivibrator using 555timer to produce pulsewidthof10
0ms.Verifythe
values of R and C from the graph.
13. Differentiate astable and monostable multivibrator.
Create
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
of
of
Design a mixed signal circuit for a specified application.

Design of 2 bit Analog to Digital Converter.
Design of 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter.
Design a temperature compensated zener-reference source.
Design a square waveform generator of frequency 100Hz and duty cycle of 75%.
Design a wideband pass filter having fl =400Hz, fh =2 KHz and pass band gain
4. Find the value
Q
of the filter.
7. Design a second order Butterworth high pass filter having lower cut-off frequ
ency 1 KHz.
8. Design inverting amplifier with a gain of -5 and an input resistance of 10Koh
m.
9. Design non inverting amplifier with a gain of 10.
10. Design a current source for generating I 0 =25A. Assume: Vcc =15V, =100.
11. Design a Widlar current source and obtain the expression for output current.
Also prove that widlar
current source has better sensitivity than constant current source.
List of Experiments
1. Design and implementation of full adder and full subtractor circuits.
2. Code converters- Grey to Binary, Binary to grey code, Parity generator and pa
rity checking using
logic gates.
3. Verification of functional tables of RS, JK, T and D flip-flops using ICs.
4. Design and implementation of 4-bit modulo synchronous and asynchronous counte
rs using FF
ICs.
5. Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO
modes using
suitableICs.
6. i) Implementation of 4:1 multiplexer & 1:4 de-multiplexer.
ii)Implementation of 4:2 encoder & 2:4 decoder using logic gates.
7. Design of astable and Mono-stable multi-vibrator using NE/SE 555 Timer.
8. Application of Op-Amp (Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier, Comparator, Int
egrator and
Differentiator).
9. Design of 2 bit Analog to Digital Converter.
10. Design of 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter.
. Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Design and implementation of full adder and full subtractor circuits
3
2
Code converters- Grey to Binary, Binary to grey code, Parity generator and parit
y checking
using logic gates
3
3
Verification of functional tables of RS, JK, T and D flip-flops using ICs
3
4
Design and implementation of 4-bit modulo synchronous and asynchronous counters

using FF
ICs
6
5
Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO mod
es
usingsuitableICs
6
6
i) Implementation of 4:1 multiplexer & 1:4 de-multiplexer
ii)Implementation of 4:2 encoder & 2:4 decoder using logic gates
6
7
Design of Astable and Mono-stable multi-vibrator using NE/SE 555 Timer
6
8
Application of Op-Amp (Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier, Comparator, Integr
ator and
Differentiator)
6
9
Design of 2 bit Analog to Digital Converter
3
10
Design of 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter
3
11
Mini project
---
11N501 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION I
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To get an adequate knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement
of industrial
parameters
. To study about the construction, characteristics and application of different
types of load cells,
torque and various velocity transducers
. To learn the working of different types of pressure and temperature transducer
s
. To provide exposure to various measuring techniques for acceleration, vibratio
n and density
. To understand, analyze and design various measurement schemes that meet the de
sired
specifications and requirements of real time processes
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Select/Apply suitable sensors for measuring Velocity, Torque, Force, Displace
ment, Acceleration,
Vibration or Density.
2. Select/Apply suitable sensors for measuring vacuum or high pressures.
3. Apply various sensors for temperature measurement.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Sensors and Transducer
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 19
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100

Remember
1. Define measurement.
2. State the features of seismic velocity transducer.
3. Define density and viscosity.
4. List the different units for pressure measurement.
5. Differentiate between gauge pressure and vacuum pressure.
6. What is dead weight tester?
7. Name the different elastic pressure transducers.
8. Define ionization
9. List out the instruments used to measure low pressure.
10. State the principle involved in thermistor.
11. List any two factors, which decide the response of thermocouple to process t
emperature.
12. Define linearization.
13. List out the five properties of a material which should be an element of a b
imetallic strip.
14. Identify the source of error in filled-system thermometers and quote its com
pensation techniques.
15. Mention any two limitations of a total radiation pyrometer.
Understand
1. Discuss about the working of magnetostrictive torque transducer.
2. Tell about photoelectric effect.
3. Illustrate the construction and working of variable reluctance accelerometer.
4. Distinguish between API (American Petroleum Institute) and Baume scale.
5. Explain about ultrasonic densitometers.
6. Indicate the different methods used for pressure measurement and explain with
example.
7. Explain the McLeod gauges used for vacuum pressure measurement and its limita
tions.
8. Discuss the principles and working of differential pressure transmitters.
9. Express the procedure to calibrate the pressure gauges.
10. Explain various types of filled in system thermometers.
11. Classify the pyrometers and explain the operation of optical pyrometer.
12. Illustrate the operation of signal conditioning circuit used for an industri
al RTD.
13. Discuss about the laws of thermocouple and infer some special techniques use
d for high
temperature measurement using thermocouple.
14. Classify the pyrometers and explain the operation of optical pyrometer.
15. Express the speed measurement process using stroboscope.
16. Distinguish between static and dynamic pressures.
17. Indicate the type of inputs required to differential pressure transducer.
18. Express the atmospheric pressure in terms of bar and kg/cm2 scales.
Apply
1. Apply the magnetostrictive effect to torque measurement and explain its opera
tion.
2. Calculate the torque developed by a motor shaft when it is running at 1500 rp
m and delivering
shaft power of 5 Horse power.
3. Sketch the functional block diagram of AD595 thermocouple signal conditioning
circuit
4. Select a piezoelectric material and produce various measuring application bas

ed on the material.
5. Generalize the procedure to measure pressure using elastic diaphragm.
6. Prepare a conversion chart for various types of temperature scales.
7. The mass and spring constant of seismic instrument (Mechanical type) is given
below. Calculate
the natural frequency and critical damping ratio. m = 0.005 kg, k = 500 N/m.
8. Change the specific gravity at 60o C into Degree API and Degree Baume scales.
9. Prepare conversion charts for various types of pressure scales.
10. Classify the mechanical instruments for measurement of pressure and explain
the process to judge
the pressure by comparing known and unknown pressures.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Are bourdon tubes also used as differential pressure gauges? Justify.
2. Identify the role of protection tubes and thermowells in temperature measurem
ent.
3. Compare various types of thermocouples in terms of their material combination
s in positive and
negative terminals, accuracy, measurement range and applications
4. Compare 3-types of load cell spring elements.
5. Determine the specific gravity of a float if it just submerges in a liquid of
density 1200 kg/m3.
6. Determine which type of transducer is used for contaminated fluid density mea
surement.
7. Can seismic instrument act as an accelerometer and vibrometer? Justify.
Create
1. Design a signal conditioning circuit for electrical method of pressure measur
ement.
2. Create a thermocouple to measure 0 to 900oC temperature by selecting suitable
metal
combinations for positive and negative legs and design a signal conditioning cir
cuit to get 1V for
maximum change in temperature. Assume the sensitivity of thermocouple =51.7V/oC.
(C)
3. Construct a piezoelectric accelerometer to provide an output voltage of 2V fo
r maximum pressure.
By assuming suitable sensitivity and crystal thickness, formulate the maximum pr
essure.(C)
4. Design a pressure transmitter to provide 0-5V for 0 -50 psi pressure variatio
ns using LVDT and
elastic type conversion elements. Sensitivity of the elastic material is 0.1mm/p
si and sensitivity of
LVDT is 1mV/mm. (C)
Unit I
Measurement of Velocity, Torque and Force
Measurement of linear velocity : moving magnet, moving coil and seismic velocity
transducer
Measurement of angular velocity
electromagnetic tachogenerators, photo electric
and variable reluctance
tachometers torque measurements using resistive, inductive, magnetostrictive and
digital transducers
measurement of force load cell
strain gauge and LVDT load cells, pneumatic and h
ydraulic load cells.
Application of load cell
9 Hours
Unit II
Measurement of Displacement, Acceleration, Vibration and Density
Measurement of linear and angular displacement
potentiometer, LVDT, piezo-electr
ic, strain gauge
accelerometers measurement of vibration
seismic instrument as an accelerometer a
nd vibrometer
density and specific gravity Baume and API(American Petroleum Institute) scales
pressure head type
densitometer float type densitometer
ultrasonic densitometer
bridge type gas den
sitometer.
Application of potentiometer
9 Hours
Unit III
Pressure Measurement
Units and definitions
standards of pressure
manometers, elastic type bourdon tub
es, diaphragm
gauges, bellow gauges
bell gauges
electrical types vacuum gauges: McLeod gauge,
pirani gauge,
thermocouple gauge, ionization gauge electrical type differential pressure trans
mitters
calibration of
pressure gauges using dead weight tester.
Bell gauges
9 Hours
Unit IV
Temperature Measurement I
Definitions and standards
techniques and classifications bimetallic thermometers
, different types of
filled in system thermometer sources of errors in filled in systems and their co
mpensation electrical
methods of temperature measurement
signal conditioning of industrial RTDs and th
eir characteristics
3
lead and 4 lead RTDs 2 wire and 4 wire transmitters
IC temperature sensor
thermi
stor, linearization,
thermowell head mounted temperature transducer.
Liquid filled system
9 Hours
Unit V
Temperature Measurement II
Thermocouples
laws of thermocouple
types of thermocouple - fabrication of indus
trial thermocouples
signal conditioning of thermocouple output
thermal block Reference(s) junctions
cold junction
compensation response of thermocouple
special techniques for measuring high temp
erature using
thermocouples radiation methods of temperature measurement radiation fundamental
s total radiation
and selective radiation pyrometers
optical pyrometer
two colour radiation pyrome
ter.
Optical pyrometer
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill Pub
lishing Company
Ltd., New Delhi, 2011
2. Donald P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2006
Reference(s)
1. R. K. Jain, Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New De
lhi, 2011
2. Ernest O. Doebelin, Measurement systems Application and Design, McGraw Hill B
ook Company,
New York, 2007
3. P. Holman, Experimental Methods for Engineers, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
York, 2011
4. B. C. Nakra and K. K. Chaudary, Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis, Tat
a McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2006
5. K.Krishnaswamy and S.Vijayachitra, Industrial Instrumentation, New age Intern
ational
Private limited, 2005
6. K. Sawhney , A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrument
ation,
DhanpatRai and Sons, New Delhi, 2011
Web Resources
. http://www.adinstruments.com
. http://www.pacontrol.com/
. http://www.digital.ni.com/
11N502 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

3 1 0 3.0
Objective(s)
.
.
.
.
.
s
To
To
To
To
To
classify signals and systems & their mathematical representation

analyze the discrete time systems
study various transformation techniques & their computation
study about filters and their design for digital implementation
study about a programmable digital signal processor and quantization effect
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcomes
1. Classify various signals and systems and understand the roles of sampling and
aliasing in digital
processing
2. Apply z-transform or Fourier transform for simple discrete time systems.
3. Design of FIR and IIR filters using various methods.
4. Explain the architecture and features of Commercial Digital Signal Processors
Prerequisite(s)
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 20
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define aliasing effect.
2. Define causal system.
3. What are the properties linear system should satisfy?
4. What is the criterion for the system posses BIBO stability?
5. Define shift invariance.
6. Differentiate energy and power signals.
7. Define Nyquist rate.
8. List the representation of discrete time signals.
9. Sketch the signal x(n) = - 2n; - 4 = n = 4.
10. Define recursive and non recursive discrete time system.
11. Mention the properties of convolution sum.
12. What are the properties of region of convergence?
13. What are the steps to obtain convolution?
14. Give the relationship between Z transform and Fourier transform.
15. State the initial value and final value theorem.
16. State parseval s theorem.

17. What is the z transform of d (n)?
18. What is the condition z transform to exist?
19. Give the relationship between Z transform and Fourier transform.
20. Distinguish between the exponential form of Fourier series and Fourier trans
form.
21. Define DFT for a sequence x (n).
22. What are =twiddle factors of the DFT?
23. Define the shifting property of DFT.
24. Give the number of complex multiplications and additions required for the di
rect computation of
N- Point DFT.
25. What is the need of the FFT algorithm?
26. State the computational requirements of DFT.
27. What is DIT-FFT algorithm?
28. What is DIF-FFT algorithm?
29. Which FFT algorithm procedure is the lowest possible level of DFT decomposit
ions?
30. Give the computations efficiency of FFT over DFT.
31. What are the applications of FFT?
32. Arrange the 8 point sequence x(n)={1,2,3,4,-1,-2,-3,-4} in bit reversed orde
r.
33. Draw the basic butterfly diagram for decimation in time algorithm.
34. Draw the basic butterfly diagram for decimation in frequency algorithm.
35. Write down the mathematical expression for FIR system.
36. What is the need and choice of windows?
37. Define phase delay and group delay.
38. What is linear phase filter?
39. What are the requirements for converting stable analog filters into stable d
igital filters?
40.
41.
42.
43.
her
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
Define bilinear transformation.

Why frequency transformation is needed?
What is warping effect? What is its effect on magnitude and phase response?
Why impulse invariant method is not preferred in the design of IIR filter ot
than low pass filter?
What are properties of the bilinear transformation?
What is meant by memory mapped register?
Give the various registers used with the ARAU.
List out the types of addressing modes.
What is immediate addressing?
Which register holds the address of the current data memory page?
What is meant by interlocked operation?
In parallel operation which type of addressing mode can be used?
Understand
1. What are the classifications of Discrete Time Systems?
2. Describe the procedure used to determine whether the sum of two periodic sign
als is periodic or
not.
3. What are major classifications of signals?
4. Distinguish static systems from dynamic systems.
5. Explain sampling can be done with an impulse function.
6. What is meant by quantization step size?
7. Explain different types of quantization error.
8. What are even and odd signals? Explain with examples.
9. When a discrete time signal is called periodic?
10. How aliasing should be avoided?
11. Explain the properties of ROC.
12. State the initial value and final value theorem.
13. State parseval s relation in Z-transform.
14. What are the different of evaluating inverse Z-transform?
15. Draw characteristic curve of DC series motor & state two applications of it
16. Draw the flow graph of an 8-point DIF FFT.
17. Draw the flow graph of an 8-point DIT FFT.
18. Describe the decimation in time FFT algorithm and Construct 8-point DFT from
two 4- point
DFTs and 4-point DFTs from 2-point DFTs.
19. Describe the decimation in frequency FFT algorithm and Construct 8-point DFT
from two 4- point
20. DFTs and 4-point DFTs from 2-point DFTs.
21. State and prove the properties of DFT.
22. Compare cascade and parallel realization of IIR systems.
23. Obtain mapping formula for the impulse invariant transformation.
24. Discuss the stability of the transformation techniques.
25. Describe Butterworth filters.
26. Describe Chebyshew filters.
27. Explain Von Neumann and Harvard architecture.
28. Explain the function of auxiliary registers in the indirect addressing mode
to point the data
memory location.
29. Give the key features of digital signal processors.
30. With suitable block diagram explain in details about TMS320 C 54 DSP process
or
memory architecture.
31. Explain any one commercial digital signal processors.
Apply
1. A system is characterized by
Is the system linear?

2. Design a digital Butterworth Filter that satisfies the following constraint u
sing Bilinear
transformation.
3. Design a digital Chebyshev filter to satisfy the constraints
4. Obtain the Cascade and parallel realization for the following system.
5. Compute the FFT for the sequence where N=8 using DIF algorithm.
6. Enumerate the various steps involved in the design of low pass digital Chebys
hew filter.
7. Write a program to use auxiliary registers in memory pointing and looping.
8. Explain the operation of TDM serial ports in P-DSPs.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Show that the energy (power) of a real-valued energy (power) signal is equal
to the sum of
energies (powers) of its even and odd components.
2. Evaluate how cyclic convolution of two periodic sequences can be obtained usi
ng DFT
techniques.
3. Analyze the properties of two-sided Z-transform and compare them with one sid
ed Z transform.
4. Prove that an FIR filter has an linear phase if the unit sample response sati
sfies the condition
h(n)= h(N-1-n) , N = 0,1,2, , N-1. Also discuss the symmetric and anti-symmetric
cases of
FIR filter
Create
1. Consider the system
a) Determine if the system is time invariant.

b) To clarify the result in part (a) assume that the signal Identify the system
is
c) Sketch the signal x(n)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Determine and sketch the signal

Sketch the signal
Determine and sketch the signal
Sketch the signal
Compare the signals .
What is your conclusion?
2. For a low pass RC network (R=1MOand C=1F). Determine the output response for n
in the
range0 = n = 3 when the input has a step response of magnitude 2V and the sampli
ng frequency
fs=50 Hz.Confirm the calculated values using the principle of discrete time conv
olution.
3. Develop a program to perform addition of two 64 bit numbers.
Unit I
Introduction
Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stable, dynamic
, recursive, time variance;
classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power; mathematic
al representation of
signals; spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization, quantization error
, Nyquist rate, aliasing effect,
Digital signal representation
Selection of sampling rate.
9 Hours
Unit II
Discrete Time System Analysis
Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation
on by z-transform,
application to discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response
tion Fourier transform
of discrete sequence
Discrete Fourier series
Soluti
Convolu
Region of convergence in z-transform

9 Hours
Unit III
Discrete Fourier Transform & Computation
DFT properties, magnitude and phase representation - Computation of DFT using FF
T algorithm
DIT &
DIF - FFT using radix 2 and radix 4 Butterfly structure
correlation techniques.
Inverse DFT using FFT algorithm
9 Hours
Unit IV
Design of Digital Filters
FIR & IIR filter realization Parallel & cascade forms. FIR design: Windowing Tec
hniques
Need and
choice of windows
Linear phase characteristics. IIR design: Analog filter design
- Butterworth and
Chebyshev approximations; digital design using impulse invariant and bilinear tr
ansformation - Warping,
prewarping Frequency transformation
FIR realization of Direct form I and II
9 Hours
Unit V
Digital Signal Processors
Introduction
Architecture
Features
ction to
Commercial Processors (TMS320CSx)
Addressing Formats
Functional modes - Introdu
Arithmetic operations using TMS320CSx

9 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algo
rithms and
Applications, PearsonEducation, New Delhi, 2013
2. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing A Computer Based Approach, Tata McGraw
Hill, New
Delhi,
2012
Reference(s)
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer and John R. Buck, Discrete Time Signal P
rocessing,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013
2. Emmanuel C Ifeachor and Barrie W Jervis, Digital Signal Processing
A Practica
l approach,
Pearson Education, 2002
3. Steven W. Smith, The Scientist and Engineer's Guide to Digital Signal Process
ing,
California
4. B.Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Program
ming
and Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013
Web Resource
1. Technical Publishing San Diego, California.(www.DSPguide.com)
11N503 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION

2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
.
.
.
.
To
To
To
To
provide an overview of Virtual instruments

bring out the overview of the software
know about the programming structure of the software
familiarize the student with the Applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
Course outcome(s)

1.
2.
3.
4.
Summarize the basics of Virtual Instrumentation (VI).

Write simple programs using LabVIEW.
Analyze operating systems and hardware aspects of the VI
Develop VI for simple applications.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of =C
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 21
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
Programming
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
ll be converted to 20.
calculated for 50 marks
Remember
1. Define Virtual Instrumentation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
State graphical system design.

Name the three palettes used in programming.
Identify the three main components of a virtual instrument.
Define modular programming.
6. State Sub VI.

7. List the different types of loops used in VI.
8. State the advantages of using loops.
9. Define an array in VI.
10. State multidimensional array.
11. Define auto-indexing.
12. Identify the difference between a Bundle and Bundle by Name functions.
13. List out the different types of 3D graphs.
14. Recall the basic difference between a waveform chart and a graph.
Understand
1. Illustrate the virtual instrumentation model and graphical system design mode
l in detail.
2. Distinguish text-based programming and graphical programming.
3. Show the block diagram of a typical embedded system software and hardware des
ign flow and
compare with stream-lined development flow with graphical system design.
4. Demonstrate how to create, modify and debug VIs using floating tool palettes?
5. Explain the importance of the toolbar buttons that appear on the block diagra
m.
6. How can a stand-alone application be created?
7. Distinguish between a shift register and a feedback node.
8. Match while loop with For loop.
9. Explain the methods of changing the value of an element in an existing cluste
r.
10. Paraphrase the importance of the basic elements of a graph.
Apply
1. Use two numeric inputs and perform add, multiply, subtract and divide operati
on.
2. Divide two numbers and find the remainder and quotient.
3. Create NOT, AND and OR gates using NAND gate and verify their truth table.
4. Discover the equivalent gray code for a given BCD.
5. Compute a sub VI to convert radians to degrees.
6. Prepare a program to find the sum of first 100 natural numbers.
7. Show a VI that generates two 1D arrays and create another array which consist
s all the elements of
the first two arrays.
8. Discover a VI to generate a sine wave using Simulate Signal Express VI.
9. Use the Scan from string function to find a part of the string in the prescri
bed format. Also display
the remaining string and offset after the scan.
10. Using the IMAQ Wind Draw function acquire a selected portion of the image
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Identify whether the given number is odd or even.
2. Design a VI that split an input string into two outputs with reference to a s
eparating character.
Find the length of the input string and reverse the string.
3. Develop a program in VI that finds whether the given number is a prime number
or not using (a) a
For Loop and (b) a While Loop.
4. Design a VI to plot a circle in the XY graph using a For Loop.

5. Using the match pattern function check whether the given expression is availa
ble in the input
string.
6. Also display the portion of the string available before the match and after t
he match, and the offset
of the string after the match.
7. Is it advisable to use two event structures inside a loop? Justify the answer
.
Create
1. Create a VI to compute full adder logic using half adder logic as subVI.
2. Construct a 2D numeric array (5X5) containing random numbers and find it tran
spose.
3. Create a VI which consists of a numeric array with even and odd elements. Sep
arate the odd and
even elements in two different arrays.
4. Design a VI to produce four lines of digital outputs and to control the digit
al I/O lines on the DAQ
device.
5. Create a VI that contains two-dimensional array of numeric controls.
Unit I
Introduction
General functional description of digital instrument
Block diagram of a Virtual
Instrument Physical
quantities and analog interfaces
Hardware and software
User Interfaces
Advantage
s of Virtual
Instruments over conventional instruments
Architecture of a Virtual Instrument a
nd a its relation to the
operating system.
Advantages of Virtual Instruments over conventional instruments
6 Hours
Unit II
Software Overview
VI Graphical user interfaces
Controls and indicators
=G programming
Labels and Te
xt Shape,
size and color
Owned and free labels
Data type, Format, Precision and representa
tion Data types
Data flow programming
Editing
Debugging and Running a Virtual Instrument Graphic
al
programming palettes and tools Front panel objects
Functions and libraries.
Data types
6 Hours
Unit III
Programming Structure
FOR Loops, WHILE Loops, CASE Structure, Formula nodes, Sequence structures
Array
s and Clusters
Array Operations Bundle
Bundle/Unbundle by name, graphs and charts String and fi
le I/O High
level and Low level file I/O s Attribute modes Local and Global variables.
Bundle/Unbundle by name
6 Hours
Unit IV
Operating System and Hardware Aspects
PC architecture, Current trends Operating system requirements, Drivers
Interface
buses PCI bus
Interface cards
Specification
Analog and Digital interfaces
Power, Speed and tim
ing considerations.
Installing Hardware, Installing drivers Configuring the hardware Addressing the
hardware in VI
Digital and Analog I/O function
Data Acquisition Buffered I/O
Real time Data Acq
uisition.
Real time Data Acquisition

6 Hours
Unit V
Applications
IMAQ - Motion Control: General Applications
Feedback devices, Motor drives Instr
ument connectivity
GPIB, Serial Communication
General, GPIB hardware & Software specifications PX1 /
PC1:
Controller and Chassis Configuration and Installation
case studies.
Instrument connectivity
6 Hours
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Garry M Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New
Delhi,
2006
Reference(s)
1. Jeffrey Travis and Jim Kring, LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical Programming mad
e Easy and
Fun, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi, 2006
2. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, Bangalore, 2011
Lab Component
1. Creating Virtual Instrumentation for simple applications
2. Programming exercises for loops and charts
3. Programming exercises for clusters and graphs.
4. Programming exercises on case and sequence structures, file Input / Output.
5. Data acquisition through Virtual Instrumentation.
6. Developing voltmeter using DAQ cards.
7. Developing signal generator using DAQ cards.
8. Simulating reactor control using Virtual Instrumentation.
9. Real time temperature control using Virtual Instrumentation.
10. Real time sequential control of any batch process
Total: 30 Hours
Total: 30 +30 Hours
1N504 PROCESS CONTROL

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To obtain the mathematical models for first order and higher order real-time s
ystems and also
understand the concept of self regulation
. To get adequate knowledge about the characteristics of various controller mode
s and controller
tuning methods
. To understand the concept of various complex control schemes
. To study about the construction, characteristics and application of different
types of actuators
. To understand how to apply the control schemes for various applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3

ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO12
Course outcome(s)

1. Model a physical process and understand the controller characteristics, selec
tion of controller
mode and control schemes.
2. Obtain optimum controller settings using various tuning methods.
3. Analyze/select final control elements for real-time systems
4. Apply complex control schemes for various, application.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Control System

. Basic knowledge of Mathematics I and II
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 22
Test II
Model Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
30
30
30
30
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. List the Objective(s) of process control.
2. Define process.
3. Outline Servo and Regulator problems.
4. Quote, why process control is needed in industries?
5. Recall interacting system and give an example.
6. Recall degree of freedom in process.
7. List the characteristics of ON-OFF controller.
8. Name the different types of control modes.
9. Label the different types of test inputs.
10. Describe the relationship between proportional band and proportional gain.
12. Name various tuning methods for getting optimum controller settings.
13. Match the feed forward and feedback control system.
14. Define averaging control.
15. Recall the undesirable effects of dead time in a process.
16. Point an actuator.
17. Define the flow capacity of a control valve.
18. Outline cavitation and flashing in control valves.
19. List the various types of valves used in flow control applications.
20. Label the different types of plugs used in pneumatic valves.
21. Name the various control schemes involved in the heat exchanger process.
22. Recall the various control schemes used in boiler drum level control.
23. Define reflux ratio.
Underst and
1. Infer the difference between manipulated variable and controlled variable.
2. Explain the self regulation.
3. Distinguish between continuous process and batch process.
4. Extrapolate the need for mathematical modeling of a process.
5. Tell how to conduct an open loop test for a process?
6. Judge when a PID controller is preferred rather than PI controller.
7. Distinguish between offset and error.
8. Select a suitable control schemes for temperature process and flow process.
9. Compute the advantage of an electronic controller when compared with pneumati
c controller.
10. Tell how the offset can be minimized with P-I controllers.
11. Judge what type of controller is preferred in the inner loop of cascade cont
rol?
12. Show how the process reaction curve can be obtained.
13. Indicate, why is it necessary to choose controller settings that satisfy bot
h gain margin and phase
margin?
14. Represent, how the feed forward controller improves the performance of a pro
cess.
15. Generalize the purpose of final control element in a process.
16. Tell when you employ a valve positioner in a control valve.
17. Discuss why an installed characteristic of a control valve is different from
inherent characteristics.
18. Express the need of I/P converter in a control system.
19. Explain the auctioneering control.
20. Predict the importance of air-fuel ratio in combustion chamber.
Apply
1. Compute the transfer function H 2 /Q for the two tank system shown in the fol
lowing
figure(Assume: Tank 1 and Tank 2 are interacting)
2. A tank operating at 50 feet head 51 lpm out flow through a valve and has a cr
oss section area of 10
square feet calculate the time constant
3. Select the optimum controller settings for the model G(s)=e -0.5s /(4s +1) us
ing process reaction
Curve Method?
4. Compute the proper Cv for a valve that must allow 150 gallons of ethyl alcoho
l per minute with a
specific gravity of 0.8 at a maximum pressure of 50 psi and the required valve s
ize
Valve Size 1 1 2 3 4 6 8
Cv 0.3 3 14 35 55 108 174 400 758
5. Use the split-range controller to a pressure control process and explain its
operation.
6. Solve the transfer function of a pneumatic valve.

7. Select the gain of proportional controller using Ziegler-Nichols method. Cons
ider a unit step
change in the set point. The process is second order with kp =5, time constant =
2, and damping
ratio=3. Assume that Gm (s)=Gf (s) =1 and apply it for interacting system?
Analyze /Evaluate
1. Develop the mathematical model of a self regulating system.
2. Analyze why two interacting capacities have more sluggish response than non-i
nteracting
capacities.
3. Select the most appropriate types of feedback controller and controller setti
ngs for any process.
4. Illustrate the Proportional, PI, PD and PID controllers.
5. Identify the most suitable control valve for any flow process.
Create
1. Create the mathematical model and implement a suitable feedback controller wi
th proper
controller setting for a two tank interacting system.
2. Design a simple PID controller to maintain the position of an inverted pendul
um vertically.
3. Derive mathematical model for coupled three tank cylindrical system
Unit I
Introduction
Need for process control
continuous and batch process
mathematical model of firs
t order level, pressure
and thermal processes higher order process interacting and non-interacting syste
ms servo and
regulator operation
self-regulation
Mathematical model of three tank system
9 Hours
Unit II
Controller Characteristics
Basic control actions characteristics of On-Off, proportional, single speed floa
ting, integral and derivative
control modes composite control modes: P+I, P+D and P+I+D control modes
response
of controller
for different types of test inputs bumpless transfer
Electronic controllers to r
ealize various control
actions
selection of control mode for different processes
typical control scheme
s for level, flow,
pressure and temperature processes.
Proportional and derivative kick
9 Hours
Unit III
Tuning of Controllers and Multi-loop Control
Optimum controller settings Evaluation criteria-IAE, ISE and ITAE
decay ratio
Tu
ning of
controllers by process reaction curve method damped oscillation method
Ziegler-N
ichol's tuning
Feed forward control - ratio control
cascaded control
averaging control
inferent
ial and split range
control.
Relay based tuning
9 Hours
Unit IV
Final Control Element
I/P and P/I converters pneumatic and electric actuators
valve positioner control
valve
characteristics of control valves
type of valves: globe, butterfly, diaphragm, b
all valves control valve
sizing cavitation and flashing in control valves. Response of control valves, el
ectric and electro
pneumatic valves
Selection of control valves
Valve body
9 Hours
Unit V
Selected Unit Operations
Distillation column
control of top and bottom product compositions reflux ratio.
Case study: control of
CSTR, control of heat exchanger, Steam boiler: drum level control and combustion
control. Piping and
Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) symbols P&ID for level and flow control loops.
Three-Element Drum Level Control System
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
George Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New De
lhi, 2012
1. Peter Harriott, Process Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New De
lhi, 30th reprint
2008
Reference(s)
1. Donald P. Eckman, Automatic Process Control, Wiley-India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
, 2011
2. Dale E. Seborg, D. A. Mellichamp and Thomas F Edgar, Process Dynamics and Con
trol, WileyIndia, 2010.
3. B. Wayne Bequette, Process Control: modelling, Design, and simulation, PHI le
arning Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2008
4. S B Thakore and B I Bhatt, Introduction to Process Engineering and Design, Ta
ta McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 30th reprint 2008
11N505 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION AND TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To make the students establish and maintain competitive advantage in the indus
trial environment
through making them capable of applying their innovative skills
. To make the students understand the basic concepts of total quality management
and appreciate its
importance in today s business environment
. To enable them to acquire required diagnostic skills and use various quality t
ools
. To familiarize the students about the quality management system
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO9
Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidiscipl
inary teams.
Course outcome(s)
1. Explain the role of creative processes in developing innovative products
2. Summarize the principles of total quality management
3. Analyze benchmark problems using TQM Tools and Quality Systems
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 23
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
30
30
30
30
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. State the need to be creative.

2. State the various techniques for creative problem solving.
3. List the steps of FMEA.
4. Define the goals of innovation.
5. Define the quality dimensions.
6. State deming s philosophy.
7. List out the 7 QC tools.
8. Define various types of quality costs.
9. State the duties of quality council.
10. Describe six sigma and its implications.
Understand
11.
12.
13.
14.
Distinguish creativity and innovation.

Explain the types of innovation and goals of innovation.
Elucidate the evolution of TQM.
Explicate the process involved in ISO 9000 implementation and certification.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Illustrate PDSA cycle.

Explain the concept of optimum quality cost.
Express Taguchi s loss function.
Explain the steps involved in bagging the deming s quality award.
Describe Juran s trilogy approach.
Demonstrate the means of implementing kaizen in an organization.
Apply/ Analyze / Evaluate

1. Point out the left and right brain functions. Explain their role in problem s
olving.
2. Analyze the various brain storming techniques.
3. Explain eight creative ideas for the improvement of quality in a field of you
r choice.
4. Outline the importance of customer / supplier relationship for a departmental
store in terms of
inspection, training, and recognition.
5. Compute the steps involved in constructing a house of quality.
6. Determine the importance of 5 S for an organization with example.
7. Analyze the role of leadership in implementing TQM
8. Explain the seven quality control tools.
9. Analyze the productivity improvement due to total productive maintenance.
10. Measure the various factors that impact TQM implementation.
Create
1. Choose any four creative techniques and explain how you do apply them to your
instrumentation
problem.
2. Explain various creative ideas for improving the automation in any instrument
ation industry.
3. Create your organization is in the business of supplying fasteners to leading
automobile
manufacturers. Your organization aspires to bag Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Aw
ard. Narrate
how you would go about achieving this.
4. Create an organization is now thinking of adopting and implementing TQM pract
ices.
5. Integrate the concepts of POKAYOKE.
6. Formulate the role of MR in ISO Certification.
7. Explain how you would go about carrying out this task, if you have been hired
as an external
consultant for this purpose?
8. Compile the concept of optimum quality cost.
9. Develop taguchi s loss function.
10. Explain the concepts of ISO:14000.
Unit I
Creativity
Concept and history of creativity, need for creativity, creative environment, st
ages of creativity process,
creativity and intelligence, creativity in various contexts, economic view of cr
eativity, measuring creativity,
fostering creativity, creative problem solving
brain storming and various techni
ques, lateral thinking.
Stages of creativity process
9 Hours
Unit II
Innovation
Definition, creativity vis--vis innovation, conceptualizing innovation, types of
innovation, sources of
innovation, goals of innovation, process of technological innovation, diffusion
of innovation, factors
contributing to successful technological innovation, failure of innovations, inn
ovation management,
measures of innovation.
Sources of innovation
9 Hours
Unit III
TQM Introduction
Definition of Quality
Dimensions of Quality
Quality Planning Quality costs
Analy
sis Techniques
for Quality Costs
Basic concepts of Total Quality Management Historical Review
Q
uality
Statements Strategic Planning, Deming Philosophy
Juran Trilogy
Crosby philosophy
, PDSA Cycle,
5S, Kaizen Obstacles to TQM Implementation.
Quality costs
9 Hours
Unit IV
TQM Principles
Principles of TQM, Leadership
, Customer
satisfaction
Concepts
Role of Senior Management
Quality Council
Customer Perception of Quality, Customer Complaints, Service Quality, Customer R

etention, Employee
Involvement
Motivation, Empowerment, Teams, Recognition and Reward, Performance
Appraisal,
Benefits, Continuous Process Improvement Supplier Partnership
Partnering, sourci
ng, Supplier
Selection, Supplier Rating, Relationship Development, Performance Measures Basic
Concepts, Strategy,
Performance Measure.
Customer satisfaction
9 Hours
Unit V
TQM Tools and Quality Systems
Benchmarking Reasons to Benchmark
Benchmarking Process, Quality Function Deploym
ent (QFD)
House of Quality, QFD Process, and Benefits FMEA
Stages of FMEA - Need for ISO 90
00 and Other
Quality Systems ISO 9000:2000 Quality System Elements, Implementation of Quality
System,
Documentation, Quality Auditing, TS 16949, ISO 14000
Concept, Requirements and B
enefits
Stages of FMEA
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Tom Kelly, The Art of Innovation, Doubleday, Random House Inc. USA, 2011
2. Managing Creativity and Innovation (Harvard Business Essentials), Harvard Bus
iness School,
2003
3. Dale H. Besterfiled, Carol Besterfiled-Michna, Glen H. Besterfiled, Mary Best
erfiled-Sacre, Total
Quality Management, Pearson Education, Inc. 2003 (Indian reprint 2006)
Reference(s)
1. Leigh L. Thompson and Hoon-Seok Choi, Creativity and Innovation in Organizati
onal Teams,
Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, USA, 2006
2. Paul E. Plsek, Creativity, Innovations and Quality, Irwin Professional, USA,
2000
3. Alan G. Robinson and Sam Stern, Corporate Creativity: How Innovation and Impr
ovement
Actually Happen, Berrett-Koehler Publishers, USA, 1998
4. James R. Evans & William M. Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality, So
uth-Western
(Thomson Learning), 2008
5. J. S. Oakland, Total Quality Management, Butterworth
Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford.
2009
6. Narayana and N. S. Sreenivasan, Quality Management Concepts and Tasks, New Ag
e
International, 2007
11N507 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY
0
0
3
1.5
Objective(s)
. To
ers
. To
ol
. To
. To
acquire knowledge about the functionality of field instruments and controll

gain the programming knowledge in virtual instrumentation for process contr
interface the Data Acquisition card with computer and process station
design and implementation of controllers for different processes
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO12
Course outcome(s)

1. Implement or calibrate final control elements or transmitter in real time.
2. Obtain closed loop response of real time systems.
3. Tune controller parameters and implement advanced control schemes
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Process control

. Basic knowledge of Control Engineering
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. List out the Objective(s) of process control.

2. Define process.
3. Outline Servo and Regulator problems.
4. Quote, why process control is needed in industries?

5. Illustrate interacting system and give an example.
6. Recall degree of freedom in process.
7. List the characteristics of ON-OFF controller.
8. Name the different types of control modes.
9. Label the different types of test inputs.
10. Describe the relationship between proportional band and proportional gain.
12. Name various tuning methods for getting optimum controller settings.
13. State ultimate gain and ultimate period.
14. Reproduce the settings recommended by Ziegler and Nichols for feedback contr
ollers.
15. List the features of simple performance criteria used in controller tuning.
16. Match the feed forward and feedback control system.
17. Define averaging control.
18. Recall the undesirable effects of dead time in a process.
19. Point an actuator.
20. Define the flow capacity of a control valve.
21. Outline cavitation and flashing in control valves.
22. List the various types of valves used in flow control applications.
23. Label the different types of plugs used in pneumatic valves.
24. Name the various control schemes involved in the heat exchanger process.
25. Recall the various control schemes used in boiler drum level control.
26. Define reflux ratio.
27. Draw the P&I diagram of butterfly control valve and various instrument lines
.
Understand
1. Infer the difference between manipulated variable and controlled variable.
2. Explain the self-regulation.
3. Distinguish between continuous process and batch process.
4. Extrapolate the need for mathematical modeling of a process.
5. Tell how to conduct an open loop test for a process?
6. Judge when a PID controller is preferred rather than PI controller.
7. Distinguish between offset and error.
8. Select a suitable control schemes for temperature process and flow process.
9. Compute the advantage of an electronic controller when compared with pneumati
c controller.
10. Tell how the offset can be minimized with P-I controllers.
11. Judge what type of controller is preferred in the inner loop of cascade cont
rol?
12. Show how the process reaction curve can be obtained.
13. Indicate, why is it necessary to choose controller settings that satisfy bot
h gain margin and phase
margin?
14. Represent, how the feed forward controller improves the performance of a pro
cess.
15. Generalize the purpose of final control element in a process.
16. Tell when you employ a valve positioner in a control valve.
17. Discuss why an installed characteristic of a control valve is different from
inherent characteristics.
19. Explain the auctioneering control.
20. Predict the importance of air-fuel ratio in combustion chamber.
Apply
1. Solve for the time domain output for any first order transfer function to a s
tep change in input.
2. Use the initial and final value theorems of Laplace transforms to determine t
he initial and final
values of process output for a unit step input change to the given transfer func
tion G(s)
=(5s+12)/(7s+4).
3. Examine the following open-loop unstable process Gp(s)=3/(-2s+1). For a PI co
ntroller, Calculate
the range of stabilizing proportional controller gains (kc) for an integral time
constant of t1=2.
4. Examine a process with the following transfer function Gp(s)=1/(s-2)(s+1). Ca
n PI controller
satisfy the necessary condition for stability of this process?
5. A PI controller is used on the second process gp(s) =1/ (2s2+3s+4). Judge the
process closed-loop
stable.
6. Consider the following process Gp(s) =2.5(-5s+1)/ (10s+1) (2s+1). For P-only
control, calculate
the range of process gain to assure closed-loop stability of this process.
7. Apply (simulate) the Tyreus Luyben parameters for PI and PID controller to the
following
process gp(s) = e-5s/ (10s+1). Compare these results with Cohen-Coon.
8. For the given system Gp(s) =15/ (s2+4.9s+0.9), Calculate the PID gains parame
ters if a closed-loop
time constant of 5 minutes is desired.
9. For the given system Gp(s) =1/ (4s+1), Calculate the PID tuning parameters.
10. A PID controller is used on the second order process Gp(s) =1/ (8s+4). Judge
the process closedloop stable.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Determine the characteristics of a self-regulating system using mathematical
model.
2. Analyze why two interacting capacities have more sluggish response than non-i
nteracting
capacities.
3. Select the most appropriate types of feedback controller and controller setti
ngs for any process.
4. Illustrate the Proportional, PI, PD and PID controllers.
5. Identify the most suitable control valve for any flow process.
Create
1. Develop mathematical model and implement a suitable feedback controller with

proper controller
setting for a two tank interacting system.
2. Identify the given process and tune the PID parameters to get the desired res
ponse.
3. Design of ON-OFF controller for a given application.
List of Experiments
1. I / P to P / I Converter & I/ P Converter Calibration
2. Closed loop response of interacting and non interacting level process station
3. Testing the valve characteristics and calibration of a control valve
4. Tuning of PID controller for a given system
5. Closed loop control of flow process with and without transportation lag.
6. Closed loop control of temperature process station
7. Closed loop control of pressure process
8. Design of on/off controller for a system
9. Implementation of cascade control scheme for level process
. Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
I / P to P / I Converter & I/ P Converter Calibration
3
2
Closed loop response of interacting and non interacting level process station
6
3
Testing the valve characteristics and calibration of a control valve
3
4
Tuning of PID controller for a given system
3
5
Closed loop control of flow process with and without transportation lag.
3
6
Closed loop control of temperature process station
6
7
Closed loop control of pressure process
3
8
Design of on/off controller for a system
6
9
Implementation of cascade control scheme for level process
6
10
Mini project
---
11N508 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERSLABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
. To study the Architecture of 8085, 8051 and PIC Microcontroller
. To study the addressing modes & instruction set of 8085, 8051 and PIC Microcon
troller
. To introduce the need & use of Interrupt structure
. To develop skill in simple program writing
. To introduce commonly used peripheral / interfacing ICs
To study simple applic
ations
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO12
Course Outcome(s)
1. Apply the code conversion, sorting and arithmetic operations using microproce
ssor.
2. Apply microcontroller for simple applications
3. Write Program and Interface PIC microcontrollers with various devices.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
. Basic knowledge of C Programming
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define processor.
2. State the timing diagram of 8086.
3. Name the addressing modes in 8086.

4. State how the data and address buses are multiplexed in an 8086 microprocesso
r.
6. Distinguish between microprocessor and microcontroller
7. Define pipeline processing.
8. Draw the interrupt structure of 8085 and 8051.
9. Outline the instruction set of 8051.
11. Match CISC and RISC.
12. Dfine a PIC Microcontroller?
13. Mmorizecross compiler.
14. Outline the purpose of stack block.
15. Dscribe the need or a cross compiler.
16. Draw the format of flag register in 8086.
17. How external memory devices can interface with 8051?
Understand
1. Indicate the pin configurations of 8086.

2. Rewrite the summary of 8085 hardware interrupts in table format.
3. Explain the operation of each instruction in the instruction set of 8086.
4. Compute the 20 bit effective address in an 8086 processor.
5. Interrelate the program counter to the data bus.
6. Express, when we say that the PIC 16 series microcontrollers are 8-bit microc
ontrollers?
7. Discuss the necessity for providing 4 banks of general purpose registers R0 t
o R7 in 8051? How can you
switch over to bank1 from bank0?
8. How 8086 interrupt occurs?
9. Give the alternate function for the port pins of port3.
10. Explain the function of the PSEN pin of 8051.
11. How is stack implemented in 8051?

12. Why PIC Microcontroller are preferred compared to other controller?
1. How will you perform the operations like arithmetic, logical, rotate and stac
k using 8086, 8051 andPIC
Microcontroller?
2. How will you transfer the data from one place to another?
3. How will you interface a microprocessor and microcontroller to a given periph
eral?
4. Differentiate microcontroller and microprocessor.
5. Compare 8051 microcontroller with PIC microcontroller.
Create
1. Design microcontroller system to control traffic signals.

2. Develop the real time clock using 8051 Microcontroller.
3. Formulate the hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system.
List of Experiments
Microprocessor Experiments (8086 Using MASM)
1. 16 bit arithmetic operation
2. Code conversion.
3. Arithmetic program to find square, LCM, and GCD.
4. Sorting.
5. Multibyte Packed BCD addition & subtraction.
Microcontroller Experiments (8051)
6. Design of Traffic Light controller.

7. Design of ADC/DAC Interface.
8. Design of Stepper motor Interface.
Microcontroller Experiments (PIC using Cross C compilers)

9. PIC Binary /BCD counter.
10. I/O Controller Interface
. Mini project
.
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
16 bit arithmetic operation
9
2
Code conversion.
6
3
Arithmetic program to find square, LCM, and GCD.
6
4
Sorting.
3
5
Multibyte Packed BCD addition & subtraction.
3
6
Design of Traffic Light controller.
3
7
Design of ADC/DAC Interface.
3
8
Design of Stepper motor Interface.
3
9
PIC Binary /BCD counter.
6
10
I/O Controller Interface.
3
11
Mini project
---
11N509 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING AND DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
. To understand the concepts of various modulation techniques
. To bridge the gap between theoretical and practical concepts
. To indicate the possible source of experimental error and discussing how it wo
uld affect output of
the experiment
. To have an in-depth knowledge of various signal processing techniques and fini
te word length
effects
. To design, implementation, and debugging of DSP algorithms
. To design and simulate multi-rate filters
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO12
Course Outcome(s)
1. Modulate the analog and digital transmission of signals
2. Use the simulation tools for the analysis of Digital signal processing concep
ts.
3. Design digital IIR and FIR filters.
Prerequisite(s)
. Baiscs of Communication Engineering
. Basics of Digital Signal Processing
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05

15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Draw the circuit diagram of Balanced Modulator for generating AM with carrier
.
2. Define critical modulation.
3. State the demerits of Square-law Modulator.
4. Define coefficient of modulation and percentage modulation for an AM system.
5. Draw the envelope of AM.
6. State Carson s rule of FM bandwidth.
7. Describe narrowband and wideband FM.
8. Define modulation index of FM and PM.
9. Define phase delay and group delay.
10. Define linear phase filter.
11. List some finite word length effects in digital filters.
12. Describe about multirate filter.
Understand
1. Explain the collector modulation method for generating AM wave with a neat ci
rcuit diagram and
waveforms.
2. Explain the high level AM transmitter with neat diagram.
3. Explain the Super-heterodyne receiver with neat diagram.
4. Discuss the need to suppress the carrier in AM wave. Write the expressions of
the DSB-SC wave
in time and frequency domain.
5. Explain Narrow band FM in detail.
6. Explain the function of auxiliary registers in the indirect addressing mode t
o point the data
memory location.
7. With suitable block diagram explain in details about TMS320 C 54 DSP processo
r memory
architecture.
8. Give two methods of generating DSB-SC.
9. Give the requirements for converting stable analog filters into stable digita
l filters.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Show different AM methods.

Explain any one commercial digital signal processor
Classify the features of digital signal processors.
Sketch AM, FM, PM waveforms.
Judge why frequency transformation is needed in communication.
Explain the process of sampling.
Explain Butterworth filters.
Explain Chebyshew filters.
Analyze
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compare different modulation techniques.

Differentiate decimation and Interpolation.
Analyze the four most common methods of pulse modulation.
Identify the properties of the bilinear transformation.
5. Outline the operation of TDM serial ports in P-DSPs.

6. Identify is warping effect. Analyze its effect on magnitude and phase respons
e.
7. Categorize Analog and digital filters.
Evaluate
1. Contrast Analog and digital filter
2. Compare decimation and Interpolation.
3. Determine the four most common methods of pulse modulation.
4. Compare Von Neumann and Harvard architecture.
5. Determine the minimum number of bits required in a PCM code for a dynamic ran
ge of 80dB.
What is the coding efficiency.
6. Assess the various steps involved in the design of low pass digital Chebyshew
filter.
Create
1. For a low pass RC network (R=1MOand C=1F). Determine the output response for n
in the
range when the input has a step response of magnitude 2V and the sampling freque
ncy
fs=50 Hz. Confirm the calculated values using the principle of discrete time con
volution.
30..n
2. Construct a program to perform addition of two 64 bit numbers.
3. Compile the dynamic range in dB for the following n-bit linear sign-magnitude
PCM codes: n=7,
8, 12, and 14.
4. Develop a program to use auxiliary registers in memory pointing and looping.
5. One input to a conventional AM modulator is a 500 kHz carrier with amplitude
of 20 V. The
second input is a 10 kHz modulating signal with amplitude of 7.5 V. Design the m
odulator and
find, (i) Frequencylimits for the upper and lower side bands, (ii) Bandwidth, (i
ii) Upper and lower
side frequencies, (iv)Modulation coefficient and percent modulation
List of Experiments
1. Analog modulation
AM/PM/FM.
2. Sampling, pulse modulation PAM / PWM / PPM / PCM.

3. Design and implementation of time division multiplexing.
4. Line coding &decoding.
5. Digital modulation
ASK, PSK, FSK.
6. Waveform Generation.
7. Design and implementation of FIR filter.
8. Design and implementation of IIR filter.
9. Design of microcontroller based Ethernet interface to control the industrial
parameters.
. Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Analog modulation
AM/PM/FM
3
2
Sampling, pulse modulation PAM / PWM / PPM / PCM
6
3
Design and implementation of time division multiplexing
3
4
Line coding &decoding
3
5
Digital modulation ASK, PSK, FSK
9
6
Waveform Generation
3
7
Design and implementation of FIR filter
6
8
Design and implementation of IIR filter
6
9
Design of microcontroller based Ethernet interface to control the industrial
parameters
6
10
Mini project
---
11N510 TECHNICAL SEMINAR I

0 0 0 1.0
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering c
ommunity
and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective
reports and
design documentation, make effective presentations and give and receive clear in
structions.
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Improve the communication skill
2. Develope technical content preparation and presentation.
3. Interact technically in an open forum.
11N601 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION II

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To study, understand and design of various types of flow meters
. To understand the different types of level measurements adopted in industrial
environment
. To acquire knowledge about the principles of humidity, moisture, viscosity and

pH measurements
. To identify, select and design a suitable measurement techniques for industria
l applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Analyze, formulate and select suitable flow meters for various flow applicati
ons.
2. Analyze and select suitable level meters for various applications.
3. Apply transducers/sensor to measure humidity, moisture and viscosity.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation I
. Basic knowledge of Sensor and Transducer
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 24
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
40
40
40
40
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
Total
100*
100*
100*
100*
Remember
1. Define mass flow rate.
2. Define discharge co-efficient.
3. Name four type of variable area flow meters.
4. State the features of coriolis mass flow meter.
5. List two types of mass flow meters.
6. State two limitations of rotameter type viscometers.
7. Outline the commonly used methods of solid flow measurement.
8. State the karman s principle.
9. Define Laser Doppler Effect.
10. List the different units for level measurement.
11. State two advantages of bubbler system.
12. List the types of level switches.
13. Name the different types of level transducers.
14. List two instruments used to measure level in boiler drum.
15. Outline the principle involved in psychrometer.
16. What is actuation depth.
17. List the four main applications of saybolt viscometer.
18. Define dew point.
19. Define absolute humidity.
20. Identify the usage of hygrometers.
Understand
1. Distinguish between orifice and venturi.

2. Tell about inferential flow meter.
3. Discuss about ultrasonic flow meter.
4. Explain the working principle of Pitot tube.
5. Discuss the working of rotameter flow transducer.
6. Discuss the installation of head flow meters.
7. Illustrate the working principle of positive displacement flow meter.
8. Express the principles involved in ultrasonic flow meter.
9. Explain the guidelines for selecting a suitable flow meter for a specific app
lication.
10. Summarize different types of solid flow measurement schemes.
11. Illustrate the operation of capacitance type hygrometer.
12. Infer the different methods used for level measurement based on measurement
range and explain
with example.
13. Explain the location correction for hydrostatic level measurement.
14. Explain the nuclear moisture gauge used for moisture measurement in solids a
nd mention
its limitations.
15. Illustrate the working principle of a commercial dew point meter.
16. Indicate the major components of rotameter type viscometer.
Apply
1. Generalize the steps to obtain the equations which relating differential pres
sure and flow rate of
variable head type devices.
2. An incompressible fluid is flowing in a 100 mm pipe under a pressure head of
1.5 kg/cm2.
Calculate the fluid velocity and volume flow rate.
3. Sketch the coriolis flow meters and explain its operation.
4. Differentiate between viscosity and consistency.
5. Examine the importance of air-purge system in industrial liquid level measure
ment.
6. Calculate the buoyancy force on an object that displaces 5 m3 of water at 20
degree Celsius.
7. Judge the application which needs only capacitive level gauge for measuring i
ts level.
8. Produce the relationship between flow rate and viscosity.
9. The absolute viscosity of a fluid under test is 1000 centipoises. The density
of the fluid is 0.8
gm/cm3.Calculate the absolute viscosity and relative viscosity.
10. A sample of wood weighed 150 kg when it was wet and weighed 125 kg after dri
ving of the
moisture by desiccation. Calculate the percentage moisture content of the wood b
efore drying.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare orifice plate and venturi tube.
2. Analyze the difficulty of using dc excitation in electromagnetic flow meter.
3. Develop a procedure to measure liquid level in a boiler drum and point out th
e difficulties
associated with such measurement.
4. Identify suitable method for continuous level sensing.
5. Classify the capacitance based level measurement schemes.
6. Point out the problems associated with resistance based level measurement.
7. Infer the effect of increase in water temperature when it is supplied to a ps
ychrometer.
8. What might happen if it is not?
9. Outline the procedure to improve the efficiency of the saybolt viscometer
10. Analyze and determine the suitable transducer for corrosive or explosive lev
el measurement.
11. Illustrate the procedure to identify the suitable transmitter/transducer for
a given application.
*Create type questions cannot be framed with this syllabus.
Unit I
Flow Meters I
Theory of fixed and variable head type flow meters
e plates, pressure
tapping and
Orifice plate
types of Orific
CD variations
Venturi tube
s pitot tube.
flow nozzle
dall tube
installation of head flow meter
Dall tube
9 Hours
Unit II
Flow Meters II
Positive displacement flow meters : constructional details and theory of recipro
cating piston, oval gear and
helix type flow meters
Inferential meter
turbine flow meter
nutating disc
rotame
ter theory and
installation
angular momentum mass flow meter
coriolis mass flow meters
thermal
mass flow meters.
Turbine flow meter
9 Hours
Unit III
Flow Meters III
Principle and constructional details of electromagnetic flow meter different typ
es of excitation schemes
used different types of ultrasonic flow meters
laser doppler anemometer
vortex s
hedding flow meter
target flow meter
solid flow rate measurement
guidelines for selection of flow m
eter.
Target flow meter
9 Hours
Unit IV
Level Measurement
Definition of level
visual indicators
float gauges: different types
level switch
es level measurement
using displacer and torque tube
bubbler tube boiler drum level measurement
hydra
step systems
electrical types of level gauges using resistance, capacitance, nuclear radiatio
n and ultrasonic sensors
measurement of level of solids
paddle wheel type - differential pressure method.
Paddle wheel type
9 Hours
Unit V
Measurement of Humidity, Moisture and Viscosity
Units and definitions
dry and wet bulb psychrometers hot wire electrode and hair
type hygrometers
dew cell electrolysis type hygrometer
commercial type dew point meter
moisture t
erms different
methods of moisture measurement
moisture measurement in granular materials, soli
d penetrable
materials like wood, web type material - capacitance type - NMR probe for moistu
re detection viscosity
measurement
different methods of measuring viscosity Saybolt viscometers
continu
ous measurement
of viscosity - rotameter for viscosity measurement.
Electrolysis type hygrometer
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill Pub
lishing Ltd., New
Delhi,2011
2. K.Krishnaswamy and S.Vijayachitra, Industrial Instrumentation, New age Intern
ational
Private limited, 2005
Reference(s)
1. R. K. Jain, Mechanical & Industrial Measurements, Khanna publishers, New Delh
i, 1999.
2. K. Sawhney and P. Sawhney, A Course on Mechanical Measurement Instrumentation
and
Control, DhanpatRai and Co, New Delhi, 2011.
3. Donald P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delh
i, 2006.
4. Alan S. Morris, Principles of Measurement and Instrumentation, Prentice Hall
of India, New
Delhi,2011.
5. B. C. Nakra and K. K. Chaudry, Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, Tat
a McGraw Hill
book Co, New Delhi, 2009.
6. B. G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers Hand Book (Measurement), Chilton Book Co,
New York
2008.
11N602 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To provide exposure to various techniques and methods of analysis that occurs

in the various
regions of the spectrum
. To learn the unique methods of chromatography
. To get an adequate knowledge about various techniques for analysis of industri
al gases
. To understand the concepts of electrodes and biosensors that has potential app
lications in medical
field, food and beverage industries
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Explain the concepts colorimetry, Spectrophotometry and chromatography.

2. Apply the various techniques used in analysis of industrial gases.
3. Summarize the concepts of pH analyzer, Conductivity analyzer, Dissolved Compo
nent analyzer,
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Radiation Techniques .
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Industrial Insturmentation I

Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 25
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define Beer Lambert s law.

2. State transmittance.
3. Define Absorbance.
4. Define column chromatography.
5. Outline retention time?
6. Describe chromatogram.
7. State spectrophotometer.
8. State pollution?
9. Name the types of pollution.
10. Outline principle involved in thermal analyzer?
11. List out the main parts of pH measurement system.
12. Name the types of oxygen analyzer?
13. State half-cell?
14. Define pH value.
15. Quote the dead time in a GM counter?
16. Label the types of mass analyzer
Understand
1. Demonstrate the schematic diagram of a UV spectrophotometer and explain its w
orking.
2. Discuss the sample preparation for solid type material in the IR spectrophoto
meter.
3. Express the principle of chromatogram and explain it.
4. Distinguish between the gas chromatography and High Pressure Liquid Chromatog
raphy (HPLC).
5. Classify the different methods used to estimate the amount of carbon monoxide
present in air with the
help of neat instrumentation setups.
6. Summarize the function of Hay s Magnetostrictive analyzer used for measurement
of oxygen in stream
of gas.
7. Discuss the principle and working of dissolved oxygen analyzer and sodium ana
lyzer.
8. Illustrate the operation of absorption meters.
9. Explain the block diagram of mass spectrometer.
10. Paraphrase the schematic diagram of a NMR spectrometer and explain the impor
tance of each
component.
Apply
1. Manipulate the Beer s law for energy absorption and concentration.
2. Explain the principle of Michelson Interferometer in FTIR spectrophotometer?
3. An open tubular column having the bore of 0.18mm and the length is 700cm, the
mobile phase is
moving at a velocity of 35cm/sec. The retention time trof the solute is 1.22 min
peak width at half
height is 0.75sec. Calculate
(a) Retention time of non-retained compound
(b) Capacity factor
(c) Number of plates
(d) Plate height
4. Explain the concepts of hydrogen sulfide in solid state sensor?
5. Show the detection of smoke in Ionization smoke detector?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the relationships between the retention time, retention volume and re
tention factor.
2. Detect the amount of sulphur dioxide presents in air?
3. Analyze the efficiency of the sodium analyzer and silica analyzer.
4. Justify hydrogen electrode is used as a primary reference electrode
Create
1. Design the different types of electrodes used for the determination of pH and
conductivity.
Unit I
Colorimetry and Spectrophotometry
Beer-Lambert s law colorimeters
basic principle of spectroscopy emission and absorp
tion of radiation
radiation sources
UV and visible spectrophotometers
single and double beam instr
uments sources
and detectors
IR spectrophotometers
attenuated total reflectance flame photomete
rs atomic absorption
spectrophotometers
sources and detectors
FTIR spectrophotometers
flame emission
photometers.
Doudle beam instruments
9 Hours
Unit II
Chromatography
Gas chromatography liquid chromatography
rinciples, types and
applications
retention volume and retention time - p
high pressure liquid chromatography
detectors
Different types of detectors in High Pressure Liquid Chromatography

9 Hours
Unit III
Gas Analyzers and Pollution Monitoring Instruments
Gas analyzer : oxygen, NOx and H2 S types, IR analyzers, thermal conductivity an
alyzers and analysis
based on ionization of gases air pollution due to carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons,
nitrogen oxides and
sulphur dioxide estimation dust and smoke measurements.
Effects of hydrocarbons
9 Hours
Unit IV
pH Conductivity and Dissolved Component Analyzer
Electrical conductivity measurement: Water purity - sulphur dioxide monitor deter
mination of pH, glass
electrodes, hydrogen electrodes, reference electrodes, selective ion electrodes,
ammonia electrodes
dissolved oxygen analyzer
sodium analyzer
silica analyzer
Applications of selective ion electrodes
9 Hours
Unit V
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance and Radiation Techniques
Nuclear radiation microwave spectroscopy NMR, ESR and EPR spectroscopy

applicati
ons mass
spectrophotometers
nuclear radiation detectors
GM counter
proportional counter s
olid state
detectors
X-ray spectroscopy detectors
diffractometers
absorption meters
detecto
rs
Introduction about nuclear radiation
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Willard, H.H., L. L. Merrit, J. A. Dean and F. L. Seattle, Instrumental Metho
ds of Analysis, CBS
Publishing Co, New York,2010
2. Robert D. Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw Hill book Co,
New York, 2006
Reference(s)
1. D. A. Skoog and D. M. West , Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Holt Sounde
r
Publication, Philadelphia, 2007
2. G. W. Ewing , Instrumental Methods of Analysis, McGraw Hill book Co, New York
, 2009
3. Mann C. K. Vickers, T.J. and W. H. Guillick, Instrumental Analysis, Harper an
d Row Publishers,
New York, 1994
4. B. G. Liptak, Process Measurement and Analysis, Chilton Book Company, New Yor
k, 1995
5. Frank A. Settle, Handbook of Instrumental Techniques for Analytical Chemistry
, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2004
11N603 VLSI DESIGN

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To
. To
. To
. To
. To
ess
introduce MOS theory / Manufacturing Technology

study inverter / stick diagram / design rules / layout diagram
study MOS / CMOS circuit design process
introduce the concepts and techniques of subsystem design
get familiarized with VHDL programming behavioral/Structural/dataflow/ proc
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Summarize the fundamental principles of VLSI design and fabrication technolog
y.
2. Analyze the MOS and CMOS circuit design process.
3. Design a subsystem using combinational logic
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Digital logic circuits
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 26
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define VLSI Design process.
2. Identify the difference between full custom and semi custom.
3. Define transconductance.
4. Name the properties of MOS and CMOS circuits.
5. Define Pull-up to Pull-down ratio of nMOS inverter.
6. Recall the uses of stick diagram.
7. Name the different MOS layers.
8. List the uses of stick diagram.
9. State the importance of design rules.
10. What is wiring capacitance?
11. Define clocked and dynamic CMOS logic.
12. Define switch logic.
13. Outline the concept of parity generator.
14. Define multiplexer.
15. State the difference between combinational and sequential logic.
16. Define packages.
17. What are the types of operators in VHDL?
18. Define test bench.
19. Identify the difference between Verilog and VHDL
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Illustrate the steps involved in VLSI design process.

Distinguish between CMOS, NMOS and PMOS.
Indicate the expression for I ds versus Vds relationships.
Explain the process involved in wafer fabrication.
Discuss the process involved in ion implantation and deposition.
Illustrate the different masks used in twin tub process.
Distinguish between nMOS design style and CMOS design style.
Show how the inverter delay affects the performance?
9. Summarize the concept of wiring capacitance.

10. Give examples for access data types used in VHDL.
11. Find the difference between Dynamic and clocked CMOS logic.
12. Indicate the different operators available in VHDL.
13. Classify the VHDL data types.
14. Explain the working of parity generator and multiplexers.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Why NMOS technology is preferred more than PMOS technology?

Explain the different layers in MOS transistor?
Show the steps involved in manufacturing of IC?
What is Twin-tub process? Why it is called so?
Explain the various etching processes used in SOI process.
How an Inversion layer is formed in MOS transistor?
Explain the operation of depletion mode MOS transistor.
Sketch the flow chart for VLSI physical design cycle.
Sketch the XILINX FPGA architecture.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Choose the suitable layout design style for ASIC IC design.
2. Derive the pull up to pull down ratio required for an NMOs inverter driven by
another NMOS
inverter.
3. Develop a VHDL program for 8 bit full adder using one bit full adder in behav
ioral modeling.
Create
1. Design and simulate a full adder circuit using VHDL Programming.
Unit I
Overview of VLSI Design Technology
The VLSI design process
Architectural design Logical design
Physical design Layou
t styles Full
custom Semi custom approaches. Basic electrical properties of MOS and CMOS circu
its - I ds versus Vds
relationships
Transconductance Pass transistor
nMOS inverter
Determination of pu
ll up to pull
down ratio for an nMOS inverter
CMOS inverter
MOS transistor circuit model.
Pass transistor
9 Hours
Unit II
VLSI Fabrication Technology
Overview of wafer fabrication

Wafer processing Oxidation
n implantation
Deposition
Silicon gate nMOS process
nwell CMOS process
b
process Silicon on insulator.
Patterning
Diffusion
pwell CMOS process
Twintu
Oxidation
9 Hours
Unit III
MOS and CMOS Circuit Design Process
MOS layers Stick diagrams
nMOS design style
CMOS design style
Design rules and l
ayout
Lambda based design rules
Contact cuts Double metal MOS process rules
CMOS lambd
a based
design rules Sheet resistance
Inverter delay Driving large capacitive loads
Wiri
ng capacitance.
Sheet resistance
9 Hours
Unit IV
Subsystem Design
Switch logic Pass transistor and transmission gates
Gate logic Inverter
Two inpu
t NAND gate
NOR gate Other forms of CMOS logic
Dynamic CMOS logic Clocked CMOS logic
CMOS dom
ain
logic Simple combinational logic design examples Parity generator
Multiplexers.
Demultiplexers
9 Hours
Io
Unit V
VHDL Programming
RTL Design
Combinational logic
Types
Operators
Packages
Sequential circuit
rograms
Test benches. (Examples: adders, counters, flip-flops, FSM, Multiplexers / Demul
tiplexers.
Operators
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. E. Eshranghian, D. A. Pucknell and S. Eshraghian, Essentials of VLSI circuits
and systems, PHI,
New Delhi, 2005
Reference(s)
1. Charles H.Roth, Fundamentals of Logic Design, Jaico Publishing House, Sixth e
dition 2009
2. N. H. Weste , Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Pearson Education, India, 2010
3. Eugene D.Fabricius, Introduction to VLSI Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990
4. Zainalatsedin Navabi, VHDL Analysis and Modelling of Digital Systems, Tata Mc
Graw Hill, 1998
5. Douglas Perry, VHDL Programming by example, Tata McGraw Hill, Sixth reprint 2
008
11N604 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To study the various components within an embedded system and their interactio
ns
. To study the techniques of interfacing between processors & peripheral device
related to
embedded system
. To enable writing of efficient programs on any dedicated processor
. To know about the basic concepts of systems programming like operating system,
assembler,
compliers etc and to understand the management task needed for developing embedd
ed system
Sub-p
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Summarize the concept of Embedded Systems and Memory Organization

Analyze the timer, counter devices and buses for device network.
Explain about the device drivers and interrupts Servicing Mechanism
Design simple embedded system using microcontroller
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Microprocessor and Microcontroller

. Basics of C programming
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 27
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define a system
2. What are the essential structural units in (a) Microprocessor (b) Embedded pr
ocessor (c)
Microcontroller (d) DSP (e) ASSP (f) ASIP?
3. What do you mean by SOC?
4. Define ROM image.
5. What do you mean by volatile and non-volatile memory?
6. What is the purpose of program counter?
7. What is the significance of DMA?
8. Distinguish between EEPROM and Flash memory.
9. Define bus.
10. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of data transfers using serial and
parallel ports.
11. What do you mean by plug and play devices?
12. Define context, interrupt latency and interrupt service deadline.
14. Classify the instruction set of 8051.
15. Define resolution and conversion time in ADC.
16. What are all the control and I/O instructions used in 8051?
Understand
1. Draw the components of embedded system hardware.
2. Explain the classification of embedded systems.
3. What are the conditions should be considered in selecting a processor for an
embedded system?
4. Explain three stage pipeline and superscalar processing.
5. Draw the I/O port diagram.
6. Explain the need of software timers.
7. Draw the interrupt structure of 8051.
9. What are all the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?
10. How to code the program and test the program?
11. How to code the program and test the program?
12. Mention the characteristics that are taken into account when interfacing a d
evice port.
13. Draw the ten ways by which the synchronous signals with the clocking informa
tion transmit from
a master device to slave device.
14. Draw the signals, clock-inputs, control bits and status flags at registers o
r memory in a hardware
timer device.
Apply
1. Write a program to perform the digital to analog conversion with square wavef
orm using 8051.
2. Generate a square wave to perform timer operation using 8051.
3. Application areas of embedded systems are telecom, missiles and satellites, c
omputer networking,
digital consumer electronics, automotive and smart cards.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. What are the techniques of power and energy management in a system?
2. What is the role of processor reset and system reset?
3. How are the queues used for a network?
4. How do you use the vector address for an interrupt source?
5. How much shall be reduction in power dissipation for a processor CMOS circuit
when voltage
reduces from 5V to 1.8V operation?
6. How do you initialize and configure a device?
7. How do you assign service priority to the multiple device drivers of a system
?
Create
1. Design
2. Design
chine.
3. Design
4. Design
5. Design
an embedded system for an adaptive cruise control system in a car.

an embedded system for a smart card and automatic chocolate vending ma
the hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system.
microcontroller system to control traffic signals.
a 4 seven segment LED display using 8051.
Unit I
Introduction to Embedded Systems
Embedded System - Processor in the System - Hardware Units - Software Embedded i
nto a System
Exemplary Embedded Systems - Embedded System-On-Chip (SOC) and in VLSI Circuit.
Exemplary Embedded Systems
9 Hours
Unit II
Processor and Memory Organization
Structural Units in a Processor Selection for an Embedded System - Memory Device
s - Memory Selection
for an Embedded System - Allocation of Memory to Program Segments and Blocks - M
emory Map of a
System - Direct Memory Access - Interfacing Processor - Memories and I/O Devices
.
Direct Memory Access
9 Hours
Unit III
Devices and Buses for Device Network
I/O Devices - Timer and Counting Devices - Serial Communication Using the I2C, C
AN - Advanced I/O
Buses between the Networked Multiple Devices - Host System or Computer Parallel
Communication
between the Networked I/O - Multiple Devices Using the ISA, PCI, PCI-X and Advan
ced Buses.
Serial communication using the I2C
9 Hours
Unit IV
Device Drivers and Interrupts Servicing Mechanism
Device Drivers - Parallel Port Device Drivers in a System - Serial Port Device D
rivers in a System - Device
Drivers for Internal Programmable Timing Devices - Context and the Periods for C
ontext-Switching Deadline and Interrupt Latency.
Deadline and Interrupt Latency
9 Hours
Unit V
Embedded System Design using Microcontrollers
Intel's series of micro-controllers - Design case study using 8051, A/D converte
rs and other peripherals
devices- Applications (Biometrics, RFID).
Instruction set
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, Tata McGraw
Hill book
Co, New Delhi, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. David E Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Addison Wesley Publishing Co, New
Delhi, 2003
2. Michael predko, MykePredho, PICmicro Micro controller Pocket Reference, McGra
w Hill book
Co, New Delhi, 2003
3. John B Peatman, Design with PIC Micro controllers, Prentice Hall of India boo
k Co, New Delhi,
2012
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidietal, 8051 Micro controller and Embedded System, Pearson E
ducation,
New Delhi, 2003
5. Jonathan W. Valvano, Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Real Time Interfacing, B
rooks cole,
2004
11N605 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To gain knowledge on different methods of power generation
. To provide clear view of the various measurements involved in power generation
plants
. To understand about the Piping and Instrumentation (P&I) diagram
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO8
and norms of
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Explain the basics of power generation and measurements used in a power plant
.
2. Analyze various control schemes used in boilers.
3. Investigate turbine control process.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation
. Basic knowledge of Transducer Engineering
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 28
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define cogeneration.
2. List out the advantages of hydro power plant.
3. List out the advantages of thermal power plant.
4. Name the various method of power generation.
5. What is meant by pulversing of coal?
6. Draw the block diagram of thermal power plant.
7. State Chain reactions.
8. Define fission process.
9. Recall the types of boilers.
10. Define piping and instrumentation diagram.
11. List the types of Radiation detector.
12. Name the different types of level sensing device.
13. Define turbine.
14. Define electrical precipitators.
15. List the types of pre-heating methods.
16. List out the parameter to be measured in deaerator control.
17. Define vibration displacement.
18. Identify the purpose of the reservoir?
Understand
1. Represent the pressure transmitting line using P&I diagram.
2. Show why float type level measurement is not suitable for boiler drum level m
easurement?
3. Explain the operation of ionization smoke detectors.
4. Elucidate the essential of vibration measurement in turbine control.
5. Give the requirements of sustain fission process.
6. Elucidate the properties of a good moderator.
7. Explain the purpose of control rods.
8. Discuss how to determine the actual speed in a stroboscope?
9. Extend the purpose of mechanical type vibration instruments .
10. Tell the need of long retractable soot blowers.
11. Indicate where we use the electrical precipitators?
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Estimate how the pollution from power plant is reduced.

Illustrate the purpose of cooling system used in a power plant.
Differentiate between Solar and Wind Power generation schemes.
Compare steam turbine and gas turbine.
Indicate the device used for current and voltage measurement in power plant.
17. Select the different parameters for failure analysis in power plant.
Apply
1. A 60MW turbo generator set has an overall efficiency of 25%. The calorific va
lue of a coal used is
24
MJ/Kg. Calculate the consumption of coal per kWh and also per day if the load fa
ctor is 30%.
2. A stage of an impulse turbine operates close to the maximum blading efficienc
y. The blades are
equiangular; the friction effects in blades may be neglected. The mean blade vel
ocity is 200 m/s
and the steam flow rate is 0.75kg/s. Compute the discharge angle at which the st
eam leaves the
blade and the diagram power.
3. A nuclear power plant is operated continually for one year producing 500MW. T
he reactor
contained
75 tonnes of 3% enriched uranium dioxide fuel. Assuming the power plant efficien
cy to be 33%
calculate the mass of U-235 consumed in kg.
4. A condenser for a steam power plant receivers 185 t/h of steam 40 deg Celsius
, 92% quality.
cooling water enters 33 deg Celsius and leaves 37 deg Celsius. The condensate le
aves at 39 deg
Celsius. The pressure inside the condenser is found to be 0.077 bar. Calculate t
he cooling water
flow required in m3/s.
Analyze / Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
Distinguish the function of thermal, nuclear and hydro power plant.

Compare the different types of boilers.
Differentiate between steam turbine and gas turbine.
Compare two element and three element drum level control.
Create
1. A steam power plant, operating with one regenerative feed water heating is ru
n at the initial steam
conditions of 35.0 bar and 440C with exhaust pressure of 0.040 bar. Steam is bled
from the
turbine for feed water heating at a pressure of 1.226 bar. Generate (1) Specific
heat consumption
(2) Thermal efficiency of the cycle (3) Economy percentage compared with the cyc
le of a simple
condensing power plant.
Unit I
Overview of power generation
Survey of methods of power generation
hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind po
wer importance of
instrumentation in power generation
thermal power plant
building blocks
combined
cycle system
combined heat and power system sub critical and supercritical boilers
Importance of instrumentation in power generation
9 Hours
Unit II
Measurements in power plants
Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow
drum level me
asurement
steam
pressure and temperature measurement turbine speed and vibration measurement
flu
e gas analyzer
fuel composition analyzer
Radiation detector
9 Hours
Unit III
Boiler control
Combustion of fuel and excess air

firing rate demand steam temperature control
ontrol of deaerator
drum level control single, two and three element control
furnace draft control
mplosion flue gas
dew point control
trimming of combustion air soot blowing
Soot blowing
9 Hours
c
i
Unit IV
Boiler control
II
Burners for liquid and solid fuels

burner management
furnace safety interlocks
c
oal pulverizer control
combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers
air/fuel ratio contro
l fluidized bed boiler
cyclone furnace
Air/fuel ratio control
9 Hours
Unit V
Control of turbine
Types of steam turbines
impulse and reaction turbines
compounding
turbine govern
ing system
speed and load control
transient speed rise
free governor mode operation automat
ic load frequency
control
turbine oil system oil pressure drop relay
oil cooling system
turbine ru
n up system Case
study.
Generation station computer
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Sam Dukelow, Control of Boilers, Instrument Society of America, 2001

2. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., Power Plant Instrumentation, PHI Learning Pv
t.Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011
Reference(s)
1. Liptak B.G., Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton Book Company, 200
5
2. Jain R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements,Khanna Publishers, New Delh
i, 2008
11N607 VLSI AND EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY

0
0
3
1.5
Objective(s)
. To design and simulate the various types of combinational and sequential circu
its
. To design and simulate microcontroller based projects
. To study the simulation and synthesis tools.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course Outcome(s)
1. Develop the models of digital circuits and simulate them for various operatio
nal requirements.
2. Implement the peripherals using 8051 micro controller.

3. Design a simple embedded system application.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of VLSI deisgn
. Basic knowledge of Embedded system
. Basic knowledge of C programming
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define Combinational Circuit.
2. Define Sequential Circuit.
3. What is a data selector?
4. What is half adder?
5. What is meant by HDL?
6. What are the classifications of sequential circuits?
7. Define Counters.
8. What are the different types of flip-flops?
9. Define Shift Register.
10. What are the types of shift registers?
11. What are the types of shift registers?
12. What is the difference between CISC and RISC?
13. Distinguish between microprocessor and microcontroller.
15. Explain the function of the PSEN pin of 8051.
16. What are the control and I/O instructions used in 8051?
17. List out the advantages and disadvantages of interrupt driven data transfer.
18. Draw the interrupt structure of 8051.
Understand
1. Compare Combinational Logic circuit and Sequential logic circuit.
2. What is the difference between Flip-flop and latch?
3. What is the sum and carry equation of a full adder circuit?
4. Why D Flip-flop is called as transparent latch?
5. Why SR Flip-flop is not used for the design of shift registers?
6. Write the VHDL code for Half Subtractor.
7. What is the use of simulation?
8. What are the differences between synchronous sequential circuit and asynchron
ous sequential
circuit?
9. Why is the Program Counter connected to the data bus?
10. Differentiate assembly language and C language.
11. What are the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?
12. What are the characteristics that are taken into account when interfacing a
device port?
13. How will you configure SCON register of 8051 microcontroller?
14. How do you select the register bank in 8051 micro-controller?
15. Can an input port and an output port have the same port address? Justify.
16. How will you configure TCON register of 8051 microcontroller?
17. Explain the memory structure of 8051 Micro-controller.
18. How will you configure IE register of 8051 microcontroller?

1. How IF, CASE, and LOOP statements can be used to control the flow?
2. How process statements are concurrent statements that delineate areas of sequ
ential statements?
3. How signal assignments are the most basic form of behavioral Modeling?
4. How ASSERTION statements can be used to check for error conditions or report
information to
the user?
5. How subtypes can add constraints to a type?
6. How packages are used to encapsulate information that is to be shared among m
ultiple design
units?
7. What is the necessity for providing 4 banks of general purpose registers R0 t
o R7 in 8051? How
can you switch over to bank1 from bank0?
8. How will you interface a microcontroller with a given peripheral device?
9. With XTAL = 11.0592 MHz, what value should be loaded into TH1 to have 9600 ba
ud rate?
10. How will you interface an 8- bit ADC with 8051 Micro-controller?
11. How is stack implemented in 8051?
12. How will you interface a 16 X 2 LCD Display using 8051 Micro-controller?
Create
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design of CPU.
Interface 8051 microcontroller with 6264 RAM.
Interface 8051 microcontroller with various peripheral devices.
Design a real time clock using 8051 Microcontroller.
List of Experiments
1. Design and simulation of Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor and Full sub
tractor.
2. Design and Implementation of Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Encoder and Decoder.
3. Design and simulation of Flip-Flop circuits.
4. Design and simulation of counters and shift registers.
5. Design of traffic light controller
6. Simulation of LED interfacing with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler. (For multip
le LEDs use
delay program)
7. Implementation of LCD display with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler.
8. Implementation of polled waiting loops in 8051.
9. Implementation of interrupt handling in 8051.
10. Design of annunciator using microcontroller.
. Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Design and simulation of Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor and Full subtra
ctor
6
2
Design and Implementation of Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Encoder and Decoder
6
3
Design and simulation of Flip-Flop circuits
3
4
Design and simulation of counters and shift registers
6
5
Design of traffic controller
3
6
Simulation of LED interfacing with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler (For multiple L
EDs use
delay program)
9
7
Implementation of LCD display with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler
3
8
Implementation of polled waiting loops in 8051
3
9
Implementation of interrupt handling in 8051
3
10
Design of annunciator using microcontroller
3
11
Mini project
---
11N608 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY

0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
. To get adequate knowledge and expertise for handling field instruments
. To understand, analyze and design various measurement schemes that meets the d
esired
specifications and requirements
. To acquire knowledge about the principles of humidity, viscosity and pH measur
ements
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome(s)
1. Measure physical quantities like level, flow, temperature, viscosity, pH and
conductivity by
selecting suitable sensing element.
2. Design the circuits to interface, interpret and analyze the measured value fo
r displaying or
controlling the physical variables
Prerequisite(s)
. Baisc knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation
. Basic knowledge of Transducer engineering
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. Define flow meters.
2. Define calibration.
3. List out the types of calibration.
4. Define torque.
5. List out the sources used in UV-visible spectrometer.
6. Define viscosity.
7. State the importance of conductivity of the solution.
8. Define pH.
9. Define humidity.
10. State the basic principle of Hygrometer.
11. What is Psychrometer.
12. Define pH.
13. Define fluidity.
Understand
1. Judge the importance Venturi tube in flow measurement.
2. Tell about is meant by discharge coefficient.
3. Discuss about the term consistency.
4. Classify the mass flow meters.
5. Select the governing equation for the viscosity measurements.
6. Predict the need for calibration.
7. Indicate the need for pH measurement in industries.
8. Express the different units used for pressure measurements.
9. Indicate different units of viscosity used in industries.
10. Judge the different methods used for thermocouple linearization.

1. Produce the steps to calibrate pressure measuring devices using dead weight t
ester.
2. Identify a sensor to measure the torque and explain the measurement process.
3. Differentiate between open and closed tank level measurement.
4. Point out the method to infer the radiation from an object.
5. Judge the importance of pressure measurements in industry.
6. Discover the principle of thermocouple.
7. Analyze the procedure to convert pressure into current.
Create
1. Construct a circuit diagram to connect field instruments to controller via a
data acquisition system
and an ammeter.
List of Experiments
. Measurement of flow rate using Orifice meter, Venturi meter and mass flow mete
rs
. Calibration of pressure gauge using Dead weight tester
. Torque and viscosity measurement.
. Interfacing of field instruments with controller.
. Measurement of humidity and vacuum.
. Level measurement using DPT (open tank and closed tank with density correction
) & non contact
sensor.
. UV
Visible spectrophotometer
. pH measurement and conductivity measurement.
. Design of cold Junction compensation circuit of Thermocouple.
. Thermocouple Linearization.
. Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
S. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Measurement of flow rate using Orifice meter, Venturi meter and mass flow meters
9
2
Calibration of pressure gauge using Dead weight tester
3
3
Torque and viscosity measurement
6
4
Interfacing of field instruments with controller
3
5
Measurement of humidity and vacuum
3
6
Level measurement using DPT (open tank and closed tank with density correction)
&
non contact sensor
6
7
UV Visible spectrophotometer
3
8
pH measurement and conductivity measurement
3
9
Design of cold Junction compensation circuit of Thermocouple
6
10
Thermocouple Linearization
3
11
Mini project
---
11N609 TECHNICAL SEMINAR II
0 0 0 1.0
Programme Outcome
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO12
Course outcomes
1. Communicate effectively.
2. Prepare and present technical contents.
3. Interact technically in an open forum.
11O701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS (Common to all branches)

3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
. To understand the basics of Micro and Macro Economics.

. To understand the methods by which Demand Forecasting, Cost Analysis, Pricing
and
Financial
. Accounting are done in the Industry.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome(s)

1. Summarize the various kinds of organizations and its legal rights and respons
ibilities
2. Analyze the relationship between demand, supply, production cost and pricing.
3. Compare the role of micro and macro economics.
Assessment pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 29
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define Economics
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Define Managerial Economics

What are the branches of Economics?
What are the two methodologies used for Investigation in Economics?
Name the other disciplines which are linked to Managerial Economics.
List the theories that explain the basic objectives of a firm.
What are the basic concepts in Decision making?
8. What are the types of decisions a manager is expected to make?

9. What are the techniques used in the process of decision making?
10. What is opportunity cost?
11. What is Demand?
12. What are the types of Demand?
13. What are the variations in the nature of Demand?
14. State the law of Demand.
15. What are the factors determining Demand?
16. Define Elasticity of Demand.
17. State the different degrees of elasticity of Demand?
18. What are the factors determining Elasticity of Demand?
19. State the Law Of Diminishing Marginal Utility.
20. What is Consumer Equilibrium?
21. List the factors effecting Demand Forecasting.
22. What methods will you use for forecasting demand for a new product?
23. Define Cost.
24. What is a semi variable cost?
25. What are fixed costs?
26. Define Short Run and Long Run costs.
27. Define Optimum Size of a Firm.
28. Define Replacement Cost and Historic Cost.
29. What is a Monopoly?
30. What is an Oligopoly?
31. What is Price Discrimination?
32. What are the reasons for Price Discrimination?
Understand
1. Explain the nature and scope of Economics.
2. Differentiate between Macro and Micro economics
3. List and explain the focus areas of Managerial economics.
4. Give reasons why Mangers aim to Maximize Sales even at the cost of a lower pr
ofit.
5. Explain the steps in the decision making process.
6. Differentiate between Mechanistic and Analytical Decision making with example
s.
7. Explain Giffens Paradox.
8. Explain with examples, exceptions to the Law of Demand.
9. Explain the nature of Demand.
10. Differentiate between Extension and Increase in Demand.
11. What is the significance of Elasticity of Demand?
12. Differentiate between Point and Arc Elasticity of Demand.
13. What are the assumptions made when talking about the Law of Diminishing Marg
inal Utility?
14. Explain the characteristics of the Indifference Curve with examples.
15. Explain the concepts of consumer s equilibrium and consumers surplus with examp
les.
16. Can Demand Forecasting principles be applied to Services? Substantiate your
answer with an
example.
17. What is the difference between Accounting Cost and Economic Cost? Explain wi
th an example.
18. Match the following type of question between Cost Concepts and their Basis o
f Distinction
19. Why is a study of Cost-Output Relationship necessary for a good Manager?
20. How is Incremental cost different from Sunk Cost?
21. Differentiate between Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition.

22. Explain the concept of a Perfect Market and its features.
23. Explain Total Revenue, Average Revenue and Marginal Revenue.
24. Distinguish between Cost and Price.
25. Explain with an appropriate diagram, the mechanism of pricing in a Perfectly
Competitive Market.
26. Explain the role of Time in price determination.
27. Under what conditions can a firm charge different prices for the same produc
ts?
28. What are the characteristic features of an oligopoly industry ?
29. What causes Oligopoly?
30. Why does a firm need to have a Pricing Policy?

31. Explain the types and features of Cost Based Pricing.
32. Explain the types and features of Demand Based Pricing.
Apply
1. Compare the merits and demerits of the Deductive Method and the Inductive Met
hod of
Investigation.
2. Explain decisions based on the degree of certainty of the outcome with exampl
es.
3. Problems involving Marginal and Incremental Costs.
4. Problems concerning Elasticity of Demand.
5. Problems using statistical methods for Demand Forecasting.
6. Problem
Calculate and plot Average Variable Cost, Average Total Cost, and Mar
ginal Cost and
find the optimal production volume.
7. Give examples of products falling under the various kinds of Competition, and
the reasons they
are able to survive n the market.
8. Give six examples of products that fall under Monopolistic Competitive pricin
g.
9. Give six examples of products that fall under Oligopolistic pricing.
10. Pick any six Consumer Items and based on your knowledge of the markets, expl
ain the pricing
method that ou think is most likely to have been followed for each of these item
s.
11. Compare the types of information that one can derive from a Balance Sheet an
d a P&L Statement.
Analyze
1. .The per-capita income of farmers in the country has to be raised by 20% this
year to prevent
their migration to cities.. Analyze this statement from the point of view of Pos
itive and Normative
Economics.
2. Decision making improves with age and experience. Discuss.
3. Do a survey of the automotive (only cars) industry and analyze the reasons an
d timing for
discounts offered from the point of view of elasticity of demand.
4. What are the methods you would adopt to forecast demand for an industrial pro
duct? Assuming
that the actual demand versus forecast is very high, what would the most likely
reason be for
failure of the forecast?
5. .Most of the cost concepts are overlapping and repetitive.. Yes or No? Substa
ntiate your
answer with reasons.
6. How would you modify a sealed bid pricing system to take care of different te
chnical
approaches by different bidders for a project for which bids are called for, giv
en that the cost
varies depending on the technical approach?
7. What are the steps you would take to control inflation?
Create
1. Create a matrix consolidating the definitions of the word .Economics. as defi

ned by the
leading Economists in the prescribed textbook. Using this define economics the w
ay you
understand it, in less than 50 words.
2. Study the price of a commodity over a period of one year and explain the poss
ible reasons
for the fluctuations from an economist s point of view.
3. You are in a job which is paying you adequately. You are called for an interv
iew for a job that
double your salary. Unfortunately you miss the only train that will take you in
time for the
interview. How will you justify the cost of taking a flight considering the cost
concepts you have
learnt.
4. Due to cancellation of an export order, you are stuck with a huge stock of je
ans of international
quality.
5. Device a pricing strategy for disposing this stock without incurring a loss,
considering that it is a
very competitive market.
6. (Question paper will contain at least 50% marks on numerical problems)
Unit - I
Introduction
Introduction to Economics, Kinds of Economic Systems, Production Possibility Fro
ntier, Opportunity
Cost, Objective of Organizations, Kinds of Organizations, Business Decision Maki
ng,
Legal rights and responsibilities of types of Organization
9 Hours
Unit
II
Demand and Supply

Functions of Demand & Supply, Law of Demand and Supply, Elasticity of Demand, De
mand Forecasting
Methods, Price Equilibrium
Role of logistics in managing supply and demand
9 Hours
Unit - III
Production and Cost
Production Function, Returns to Scale, Economies & Diseconomies of scale, Fixed
Cost, Variable Cost,
Average Costs, Cost Curves, Break Even point, Law of diminishing Marginal Utilit
y
Costing of a product during the stages of its life cycle
9 Hours
Unit - IV
Pricing & Market Structure
Components of Pricing, Methods of Pricing, Return on Investment, Payback Period,
Market Structure and
Pricing, Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Oligopoly, Monopolistic, Non price compe
tition, E-commerce.
The secure payment process in e-commerce.
9 Hours
Unit - V
Introduction to Macro Economics & Financial Accounting
National Income
ess Cycle,
GDP, Per Capita Income, Inflation, Stagflation, Deflation, Busin
Stabilization Policies, Direct Taxes, Indirect Taxes, Balance of Payment. Accoun

ting - Terminology,
Book Keeping, P&L, Balance Sheet.
Role of Central Excise and Customs
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financia
l
Accounting, TataMcGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2006
Reference (s)
1. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics
Concepts and Cases, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1981.
2. N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand.
3. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Fina
ncial
Accounting, Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.
11N702 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
.
.
.
.
To
To
To
To
provide a clear view on Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)

learn the various methods involved in automatic control and monitoring
impart knowledge about the power line automation
familiarize with the communication protocols
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO12
Course Outcome(s)
1. Develop the PLC program for various applications.
2. Identify the necessity of using Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCA
DA) for complex
projects.
3. Explain the basics about DCS and various interfaces used in DCS.
4. Compare the communication protocols.
Prerequisite(s)
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 30
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define PLC.
2. List out the advantages of PLC over relays.
3. Outline the use of Local Control Unit (LCU).
4. Mention the features of DCS.
5. List out the programming languages used in PLC.
6. Give the applications of PLC and DCS.
7. Identify the components involved in PLC.
8. Define HART.
9. Point the features and applications of SCADA.
10. Enlist the different types of timers.
11. Mention the advantages of HART.
12. Recall the edge trigger.
13. List the applications of HART transmitter.
14. Define topology.
15. State the numerical limits for typical timers and counters.
16. What does DCS system consist of?
17. List the advantages of SCADA.
18. What are the rules addressed for operating a communication system?
19. Define protocol.
20. Describe the basic requirements of communication protocol.
Understand
1. Elucidate the trade-offs between relays and PLC for control applications.
2. Explain why a stop button must be normally closed and a start button must be
a normally open.
3. Express the following ladder logic and justify what will happen if it is used
?
4.
5.
6.
7.
Give a concise description of a PLC.

Discuss Programming timers and counters.
Describe the programming languages used in PLCs.
Express the necessity of reset instructions for all timers and counters.
Apply
1. Examine where can be PLC used in the place of relays?
2. In the figure below, will the power for the output on the first rung normally
in ON state or OFF
state?
Would the output on the second rung normally is ON state or OFF state?
3. Convert the following flow chart to ladder logic.
4. In dangerous processes it is common to use two palm buttons that require a op

erator to use both
hands to start a process (this keeps hands out of presses, etc.). To develop thi
s there are two inputs
that must be turned on within 0.25s of each other before a machine cycle may beg
in.
5. If a counter goes below the bottom limit which counter bit will turn on?
6. Explain any two real time applications of DCS and SCADA in detail.
7. PLC is preferred more than DCS, Defend.
8. Demonstrate the bottle filling system using PLC.
9. How are the program control instructions, math instructions and sequencer ins
tructions used to
execute certain functions in PLC and SCADA?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. A conveyor is run by switching ON or OFF a motor. We are positioning parts on
the conveyor
with an optical detector. When the optical sensor goes on, we want to Wait 1.5 s
econds, and then
stop the conveyor. After a delay of 2 seconds the conveyor will start again. We
need to use a start
and stop button - a light should be on when the system is active.
2. Formulate the relation between single loop controller and multiloop controlle
r.
3. Distinguish the concept of interoperability and interchangeability.
4. In what way the TCP/IP protocol is differed from other protocols?
5. Differentiate PROFI bus and MOD bus.
6. Compare timers and counters.
7. Distinguish positive and negative edge trigger.
8. Differentiate between DCS and SCADA.
9. Compare the address capability of different protocols.
10. Ladder logic outputs are coils. Justify.
11. Distinguish between PLC and SCADA automation software.
Create
1. Create a simple program that will use one timer to flash a light. The light s
hould be on for 1.0
seconds and off for 0.5 seconds. Do not include start or stop buttons.
2. Design a digital PID using PLC for temperature process.
3. Invent ladder logic that uses a timer and counter to measure a time of 50 day
s
Unit I
Programmable Logic Controller
Components of PLC
Evolution of PLCs
modules
Programming languages
Ladder diagram
mers
Architecture of PLC
Discrete and analog I/O
Function block diagram (FBD)
Programming ti
andCounters
Math instructions
9 Hours
Unit II
PLC SCADA and its Applications
Instructions in PLC
Program control instructions, math instructions, data manipu
lation Instructions,
sequencer and shift register instructions
Case studies in PLC. Introduction to S
CADA components of
SCADA
block diagram
features of SCADA
Instruction list
9 Hours
Unit III
Distributed Control System
DCS
es
Various Architectures
Comparison
Local control unit
Process interfacing issu
Communication facilities
9 Hours
Unit IV
Interfaces in DCS
Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces Displays
Engi
neering interfaces
Low level and high level engineering interfaces
Factors to be considered in sele
cting DCS Case studies
in DCS
Displays
9 Hours
Unit V
Communication Protocols
Introduction to communication protocols- TCP/IP protocol- HART communicator prot
ocol
media access
protocol- data link control protocol
Wireless communication(Ip56, Ip58) LAN
PROF
I bus Mod bus
CAN bus- field bus: introduction general field bus architecture
basic requiremen
ts of field bus standard
field bus topology
interoperability
interchangeability
RS232
9 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. F.D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, Third edi
tion, 2010
2. Michael P. Lukas, Distributed Control Systems: Their Evaluation and Design, V
an Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986
3. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Practical data communications for inst
rumentation and
control, Newnes/Elsevier, 2003
Reference(s)
1. K. L.S. Sharma, Overview of Industrial Process Automation, Elsevier, 2011
2. John W Webb and Ronald A Resis, Programmable Logic Controller, Prentice Hall
of India Pvt.
Ltd., New Delhi, 2009
3. Benjamin C Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice Hall of India,2007
11N703 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To get adequate knowledge about enhanced control strategies and enhancements i

n PID
controllers
. To understand the concept of computing the future output of a plant based on a

vailable data and
proposed control action
. To impart knowledge about multi-loop, multivariable, batch control schemes and
their control
strategies
. To familiarize with the issues and controlling methods in workable plant wide
control
. To get adequate knowledge about stability of digital system and design of digi
tal controllers
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO12
Course Outcome(s)

1.
2.
3.
4.
Analyze the various advanced control schemes

Investigate the need for multi-loop and multivariable control systems
Identify the role of batch control and plant wide control
Design digital controller for simple systems.
Prerequisite(s)
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 31
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
Total
100*
100*
100*
100*
be calculated for marks
Remember
1. Define feedback control.
2. List out the conditions for stability of feedback control systems.
3. Recall the functions of selective control.
4. Recognize the override control in virtual instrumentation software.
5. Define fuzzy logic controller.
6. Point the need of adaptive control.
7. List out the cause for anti-reset windup.
8. Draw the block diagram of model predictive control.
9. Define gain scheduling.
10. State the available design techniques for the design of feedback controller.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Define model predictive controller.

State the difficulties in controlling a MIMO system.
Quote the advantage of reference trajectory.
State any two methods for enhanced single loop control strategies.
List out the four advantages of MPC.
Name the parameters to be specified in order to design an MPC system.
17. Define linear regression
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
em.
24.
25.
Point the model predictive control law.

Recognize the elements in MPC.
Define centralized multivariable control system.
State the stability theorem related to multi-loop control system.
State the properties of Relative Gain Array(RGA).
List out the properties of the state transition matrix of discrete time syst
List the strategies for reducing control loop interaction.
State the various operating levels of batch control system.
Understand
1. Show the block diagram of feedback control systems.
2. Indicate a flowchart for performing stability analysis of a non-linear proces
s model.
3. Paraphrase problem with anti-reset windup.
4. Judge whether transfer function be derived for a nonlinear system.
5. Infer the strengths and weaknesses of a feedback control system.
6. Illustrate the need for gain scheduling and adaptive control schemes in proce
ss control.
7. Extrapolate the need for parameter estimation in a process control.
8. Explain the Objective(s) of model based predictive control.
9. Indicate the significance of eigen values and eigen vectors?
10. Interrelate function between linear regression and least square methods.
11. Summarize the effects of process interaction and loop interaction?
12. Demonstrate the method to calculate relative gain.
13. Interrelate the controlled variable and the manipulated variable in a multiloop control scheme.
14. Indicate how to identify the subsets of MVs and CVs of a multi-loop system.
15. Paraphrasethe tuning method of two interacting loops separately and retain t
he stability of the
overall process.
16. Judge why the stability cannot be grounded for the overall control system wh
ere both loops are
closed.
17. Demonstrate the effects when inputs are coupled to the outputs with negative
relative gains.
18. Summarize the benefits of decoupling control scheme.
19. Explain .Drive and wait..
20. Interpret rapid thermal processing.
21. Illustrate the effects of recycle control.
22. Extrapolate how to incorporate the safety in plant and control system design
.
23. Illustrate the effects of dead time in a process. How to overcome this?
24. Interpret how to design a digital controller for a given process.
Apply
1. Find the dynamic response of a first order lag system with time constant tp =
0.5 and static gain Kp
=1 to (a)a unit impulse input change,(b)a unit step change (c)a sinusoidal input
change of sin0.5t.
Examine the behavior of the output after long time (t .infinity) for each of the
input changes
above.
2. Consider a first order system with tp = 30 sec and Kp =1. Initially, the syst
em is at steady state.
Then the input changes is given linearly with time: m(t)=t. Produce an expressio
n that shows how
the output changes with respect to time for the given input.
3. Judge whether second order system is equivalent to two first order systems in
series?
4. Consider a feedback control system with the following transfer functions.
Examine the stability if a proportional controller is used (Gc =Kc ).
5. Consider a process that can be described by the transfer function matrix
Assume that two proportional feedback controllers are to be used so that G c1 =K

c1 and Gc2
=Kc2 . Calculate the values of Kc1 and Kc2 that result in closed-loop stability
for both the 1-1/2-2
and 1-2/2-1 configurations.
6. Consider a process that can be described by the transfer function matrix
Manipulate the RGA approach to determine the recommended controller pairing base
d on steady
state consideration. Judge whether dynamic configuration suggest the same pairin
g?
7. Examine the interaction among the loops of a distillation column.
8. A 2x2 process has the steady state gain matrix
Calculate determinant, RGA, eigen values and singular values of K. Use K12 = 0 a
s the base case;
then recalculate the matrix properties for a small change, K12 = 0.1sec
9. Examinea continuous time transfer function
Convert the continuous time model into discrete time model (Assume N=1, T=0.4).
10. Judge whether given system is stable. Sampled data control systems represent
ed by the following
characteristic equation using Jury s stability test6Z2-2Z+1=0
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Consider the level control system implemented with a computer whose inputs an
d outputs are
calibrated in terms of full range (100%). The tank is 1 m in diameter and the va
lve on the exit line
act as a linear resistance with R= 6.37min/m2. The level transmitter has a span
of 0.5 m and an
output range of 0 to 100%. The flow characteristic of the equal percentage contr
ol valve is related
to the fraction of lift by the relation f =. The air-to-open valve receives a 3
to 15 psi
signal from an I/P converter, which in turn, receives a 0 to 100% signal from th
e computer
implemented proportional controller. When the control valve is fully open (=1),
the flow rate
through the valve is 0.2 m3/min. At the nominal operating condition, the control
valve is half open
(=0.5). Detect the closed-loop response to a unit step change in the set point f
or three values of
the controller gain: Kc=1, 2 and 5.
.1)30(..
.
2. Consider a feedback control system with the following transfer functions Gc=K
c, . Judge whether
the closed-loop system produces unstable response if
controller gain Kc is too large. 1s1G
15s1GG
12s1Gmdpv.
.
.
..
.
.
3. Flow control loops are usually fast compared to other loops, and so they can
be considered to be at
steady state (essentially). In this case, Integral control is recommended. Judge
whether for Gd=
Gp=Kp, the integral control provides satisfactory control for both set point cha
nge and disturbance.
4. Why do we claim that there are a large number of control configurations for a
MIMO process?
Determine the number of alternative control loop configuration for a process wit
h N controlled
variables and M manipulations, where M>N.
5. A process has a transfer function matrix
..
.
.
.
.
..
.
.
.
.
..
...
110s6e
112s3e
18s2e
14s5e)(3s-3s-4s-5ssGp
Develop expressions for the ideal de-couplers and indicate how they can be simpl
ified based on
practical considerations.
6. Consider a process that consists of a liquid chemical tank with two level ind
icators, a heater, inlet
pump, outlet pump and two valves. Assume that we want to perform the following s
equence of
operations:
a) Start the sequence by pressing a button S
b) Fill the tank with a liquid by opening valve V1 and turning ON the pump P1 un
til the upper
level L1 is reached.
c) Heat the liquid until the temperature is greater than TH. The heating can sta
rt as soon as the
liquid level above the lower limits L0.
d) Empty the liquid by opening valve V2 and turning ON pump P2 until the lower l
evel L0 is
reached.
e) Close the valves and go to step (a) and wait for a new sequence to start.
Develop information flow diagram, sequence function chart and ladder diagram for
above
sequence process
7. Illustrate how to design a digital controller for any given process.
Unit I
Introduction
Brief review of dynamic behaviour of processes, single-loop feedback control sys
tems, stability analysis
and design offeedback control systems
Enhanced single loop control strategies
se
lective
control/override systems, nonlinear control systems, adaptive control systems PI
D enhancements: antireset windup, auto-tuning, gain scheduling and self tuning
Time delay compensation
9 Hours
Unit II
Model based control systems
Parameter estimation using linear regression and least squares state space and t
ransfer function
representations andtheir inter relationships Internal model control preliminarie
s and model predictive
control
model predictive control elements and algorithms commercial model predic
tive control
schemes
case study: distillation column control.
Prediction for SISO models
9 Hours
Unit III
Multi-loop and Multivariable Control Systems
Process interaction and control loop interaction, pairing of controlled and mani
pulated variables
selection of manipulated variables and controlled variables
tuning of multi-loop
PID control systems
decoupling and multivariable control strategies
strategy for reducing control lo
op interaction
centralized MVC systems. Case study: control of mixing tank using multivariable
control concept.
Singular value analysis
9 Hours
Unit IV
Batch Control and Plant wide control
Batch control systems: control during the batch
run-to-run control batch schedul
ing and hierarchy. Plant
widecontrol issues steady state and dynamic effects of recycle control and optimi
zation hierarchy plant
wide control examples: MPN and HDA process
interaction of plant design and contr
ol system design.
case study: HDA process (Toluene hydrodealkylation process)
Sequential and logic control
9 Hours
Unit V
Digital Controllers
State space representation of discrete data systems
modified z-transform - stabi
lity of discrete data system
Jury s stability test
digital PID
position and velocity form Deadbeat algorithm
Da
hlin s algorithm
Kalman s algorithm pole placement controller
dead time compensation
Smith predicto
r algorithm.
Canonical form for discrete time system
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Process Dynamics and C
ontrol, John
Wiley &sons, 2010
2. B. Wayne Bequette, Process Control: modelling, Design, and simulation, PHI le
arning Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi,2008
3. E. F. Camacho, C. Bordons, Eduardo F. Camacho,Model Predictive Control in the
Process
Industry, Springer, 2007
Reference(s)
1. M. Chidambaram, Computer Control of Processes, Narosa publishing house, 2010
2. Thomas E. Marlin, Marlin Thomas, Process Control: Designing Processes And Con
trol Systems
for DynamicPerformance, McGraw Hill Publication, 2000
3. LennartLjung, Ellen J. Ljung, System Identification: Theory for the user, Pre
ntice Hall, 1999
4. Pradeep B. Deshpande, Raymond H. Ash, Computer Process Control With Advanced
Control
Applications, Instrument Society of America, 1988
5. Ray Ogunnaike, Babatunde A. Ogunnaike, W. Harmon Ray, Process Dynamics, Model
ing, And
Control, Oxford University Press, 1994
11N704 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To gain adequate knowledge on human physiology and working of bio potential el
ectrodes
. To understand the role of instrumentation in bio medical engineering field
. To get ample knowledge on ECG, EEG, EMG and ERG
. To analyze parameters of medical imaging and its measurements
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Course outcomes(s)
1. Analyze about human physiology and bio potential electrodes.
2. Compare the electro
physiological, blood flow and non
electrical parameter me
asurements
3. Interpret the concepts of medical imaging, blood cell counting, assisting and
therapeutic devices.
Prerequisite(s)
. Basic knowledge of biology taught in higher secondary school
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 32
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define cell structure.
2. Define depolarization of a cell.
3. State a cell.
4. State the principle fluid medium in cell.
5. Describe the bio signal frequency range for various sections of the human bod
y.
6. Define electrode potential.
7. Describe the working of sodium pump.
8. Name the principle ions responsible for action potential.
9. Define electrodes.
10. List the electrodes that have high input impedance.
11. Define micro-electrode and where is it used?
12. Describe about ventricular fibrillation?
13. State the sensitivity rate of ECG.
14. List the characteristics of ECG preamplifier.
15. List out the important parts of an ECG recorder.
16. List the lead configurations used in ECG.
17. State einthoven triangle.
18. Point the frequency range of ECG signals.
19. List the two types of electrodes used for ECG recording.
20. List the ranges of frequency and voltage related to EEG.
21. Describe the salient features of needle electrodes.
22. State EEG.
23. Describe about 10-20 electrode system in EEG.
24. Define EMG.
25. List the clinical uses of EMG instrument.
26. Name the machine that is used to find epilepsy.
27. State why AC magnetic fields are used in electromagnetic blood flow meters.
28. Define cardiac pacemaker.
29. Name the normal pH value of the blood.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
Define cardiac output.

Mention the basic NMR components.
Name the use of superconducting magnets in the MRI systems.
Name the imaging system having more non-invasive character.
Define residual volume.
State stroke volume.
Define tidal volume.
Describe the most abundant negative ions in our body.
Understand
1. Describe the characteristics of resting potential and action potential in the
cell.
2. Explain the origin of different heart sounds.
3. Explicate the cardio pulmonary blood circulation system.
4. Explain the depolarization and repolarization of heart muscle with reference
to ECG wave form.
5. Describe 10-20 electrode systems used in EEG.
6. Explain the analysis of EEG signal.
7. Describe the recording setup used in EMG.
8. Discuss measurement of blood pressure and possible errors due to trauma or ot
her psychological
effects on the patient.
9. Discuss the principle and working of electromagnetic blood flow meters.
10. Explain the working of X-ray machine.
11. Elucidate the operation of ultrasonic imaging systems.
12. Explain Computer Tomography.
13. Explain the infrared thermo graphic instrumentation with suitable diagram.
14. Discuss shortwave diathermy, microwave diathermy and ultrasonic diathermy.
15. Describe the various medical thermo graphic techniques and their merits and
demerits.
Apply
1. The ECG of a patient is being recorded using the three standard frontal plane
leads. Judge If the
cardiac vector is oriented at an angle of 45 degrees to Lead I and has a magnitu
de of 3mV, what
are the voltages seen on Leads I, II and III?
2. A patient has a cardiac output of 4 liters/min, a heart rate of 86 beats per
minute and a blood
volume of 5 liters. Calculate the stroke volume and the mean circulation time. C
alculate When is
the mean blood velocity in the aorta (in feet per second) when the vessel has a
diameter of 30mm?
3. In the standard 12-lead ECG recording system, compute how many electrodes are
required to be
attached to a human subject for recording any one of the unipolar chest lead sig
nals?
4. Sketch the working of an ECG machine with a neat block diagram.
5. Compute the ultrasonic imaging system (M-mode) with a suitable diagram.
6. Compute the function of ventricular asynchronous pacemaker and ventricular sy

nchronous
pacemaker.
7. Classify the body organ having the highest attenuation of ultrasound.
8. Classify the applications of biotelemetry.
9. Classify out the merits of medical thermography.
10. Classify the typical EMG signal range
Analyze / Evaluate
1. By using which type of electrode the hydrogen ion concentration of the blood
is easily
determined?
2. Distinguish between metallic microelectrode and non-metallic microelectrode.
3. Analyze the different types of heart sounds.
4. For perfect lock, what should be the phase relation between the incoming sign
al and VCO output
signal?
5. On what parameters does the free running frequency of VCO depend on?
6. Outline the various electro surgery techniques used in diathermy unit.
7. Analyze the essentials that a coupling medium like olive oil or special jelly
are essential in
ultrasonic imaging system?
8. Justify the following statement: MRI is superior to other imaging systems.

9. A certain patient monitoring unit has an input amplifier with a CMRR of 1, 00
,000:1 at 60 Hz. At
other frequencies, CMRR is 1000:1. Do you consider these ratios adequate for the
monitoring the
ECG? Explain.
10. Point the medical name of low blood pressure.
Create
1. Design a coronary-care hospital suite. Show the all rooms in a layout plan. I
llustrate all your
instrumentation systems by block diagrams.
2. Volume of air expired and inspired during each respiratory cycle varies from
0.5 to 3.9 litres
during exercise, what is this value called and what does it mean?
3. A person has a total lung capacity of 5.95 litres. If the volume of air left
in the lungs at the end of
maximal expiration is 1.19 liters, what is his vital capacity?
4. Construct an adder circuit using op-amp to get the output expression as V0 =
- (0.1V1+V2+10V3)
where V1, V2 and V3 are the inputs.
5. Construct the patient monitoring system.
6. Explain the CAT scanner.
7. State the nernst equation with an explanation.
8. Construct the biotelemetry system.
9. Explain the importance of counting RBC, WBC and platelets.
10. Elucidate the factors specified in designing a bio-medical instrumentation s
ystem.
Unit I
Human Physiology and Bio Potential Electrodes
action and resting potential nervous system: functiona
Cell and their structures
l organisation of the
nervous system, structure of nervous system, neurons, synapse
transmitters and n
eural communication
cardiovascular system basic components of a biomedical system
different types of
electrodes sensors
used in biomedicine
selection criteria for transducers and electrodes
electrical
safety grounding and
isolation
Macro shocks
9 Hours
Unit II
Electro
ECG
EEG
Physiological and Blood Flow Measurement

EMG
ERG
lead system and recording methods
typical waveforms
electromagne
tic
and ultrasonic blood flow meters
Recording set up of ECG
9 Hours
Unit III
Non
Electrical Parameter Measurement
Measurement of blood pressure

blood flow cardiac output
cardiac rate heart sound
measurement of
gas volume
flow rate of CO 2 and O2 in exhaust air
pH of blood
ESR and GSR measu
rements
pH of blood
9 Hours
Unit IV
Medical Imaging Parameter Measurements and Blood Cell Counting
X- RAY machine Computer Tomography

Magnetic Resonance Imaging system
ultra sonog
raphy
endoscopy bio-telemetry
manual and automatic counting of RBC, WBC and platelets
bio-telemetry
9 Hours
Unit V
Assisting and Therapeutic Devices
Cardiac pacemakers defibrillators - ventilators
muscle stimulators
chine
dialysers limb prosthetics orthotics
elements of audio and visual aids
orthotics
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
heart lung ma
Textbook(s)
1. R.S.Khandpur, Hand Book of Bio-Medical instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill publ
ishing
company Ltd., 2007
2. J.G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design, John Wiley and
Sons, New York,
2010
Reference(s)
1. Leslie Cromwell, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement, Tata McGraw Hill
, 2007
2. G. Well, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2011
11N707 DESIGN PROJECT LABORATORY
0
0
3
1.5
Objective(s)
. To obtain adequate knowledge in design of various signal conditioning circuits
, instrumentation
systems, controller and control valve
Program Outcome(s)
PO1

entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome(s)
1. Implement the Variable frequency drive and HMI for real time process.
2. Design of simple transmitter circuit using sensor/transducers and amplifiers.
3. Calibrate final control elements or transmitter.
4. Perform panel wiring, documentation of instrumentation projects and developme
nt of P&I for
simple process.
Prerequisite(s)

Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
10
15
15
20
Record
10
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
What is mean by piping and instrumentation diagram?

What is holding current in SCR?
List out the three types of variable frequency driver.
Define control valve sizing.
What are the different types of orifice plate?
What is the principle operation of Rotameter?
Mention the four main parts of the control valve.
What is the level of the voltage between the input terminals of an op-amp?
List out the ideal characteristics of op-amp.
10.
11.
12.
13.
List out the types of controllers.

Define RTD.
List out the types of active filters.
Mention the elements needed for control panel wiring.
Understand
1. When do we need P&I diagram?
2. Why inherent characteristics of control valve should considered while selecti
on of control valve?
3. What are the different .turn on. methods of SCR?
4. What is firing angle?
5. When do we need a controller in a system?
6. Why orifice plate is not preferred for measuring flow of dirty fluids?
7. What is the difference output voltage of any signals applied to the input ter
minals of an op-amp?
8. Why RTD is named as PT-100?
9. Where do we need active filters?
10. How to read control panel wiring?
11. Why do we need report for an industrial project?
Apply
11. An op-amp has an open-loop gain of 100,000 and a cutoff frequency of 40 Hz.
Find the open-loop
gain at a frequency of 30 Hz.
12. An orifice plate flow meter has been selected for a maximum flow rate of 2 5
00 kg/h. The flow
meter has a published accuracy of 2% of actual flow. For a flow of 700 kg/h, over
what range of
flow will accuracy be maintained?
13. Determine the temperature of the RTD, given a measured voltage of -59.7 mill
ivolts between test
points C and D in this circuit. Assume a 100 O RTD with a = 0.00392.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare resistance temperature detector and thermocouple.
2. How will you identify the type of op-amp from IC code?
3. Differentiate between normally open type and air to open type control valves?
4. Differentiate the function low pass filter and high pass filter.
Create
1. Design control panel wiring diagram for a heat exchanger process
2. Design an transmitter resistance temperature detector whose temperature range
is 0
150 degree
celcius.
List of Experiments
1. Development of P&I diagram for a heat exchanger process.

2. Control panel design & wiring
3. Implementation of Variable Frequency Drive circuit for motor speed control.
4. Design of instrumentation amplifier
5. Preparation of documentation of instrumentation project and project schedulin
g for the above case
study. (Process flow sheet, instrument index sheet and instrument specifications
sheet, job
scheduling, installation procedures and safety regulations)
6. Configuring Human Machine Interface for a given application
7. Control valve sizing
8. Design an orifice plate for a typical application
9. Design of temperature transducer
10. Design of P, PI and PID controllers using operational amplifier
. Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Development of P&I diagram for a heat exchanger process.

3
2
Control panel design & wiring
6
3
Implementation of Variable Frequency Drive circuit for motor speed control.
6
4
Design of instrumentation amplifier
3
5
Preparation of documentation of instrumentation project and project scheduling f
or the
above case study. (Process flow sheet, instrument index sheet and instrument
specifications sheet, job scheduling, installation procedures and safety regulat
ions)
3
6
Configuring Human Machine Interface for a given application
3
7
Control valve sizing
6
8
Design an orifice plate for a typical application
3
9
Design of temperature transducer
3
10
Design of P, PI and PID controllers using operational amplifier
6
11
Mini project
---
11N708 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY

0
0
3
1.5
Objective(s)
. To obtain practical knowledge in advanced controllers like Programming Logic C
ontroller (PLC)
and Distributed Control System (DCS)
. To get exposure in implementing advance controllers for various analog and dig
ital applications
. To design discrete controller for a transfer function model
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4

search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO11
and
s and in
PO12
Course outcome(s)

1. Design digital controller for simple systems.
2. Implement PLC/HMI/SCADA based control scheme to real time process
3. Implement DCS based control scheme to real time process
Prerequestie(s)
. Basic knowledge of Advanced process control
Assessment Pattern
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation
05
05
10
10
15
20
Record
05
15
15
Total
50
50
Remember
1. State deadbeat algorithm.
2. State the theoretical properties required for a digital control algorithm.
3. State dahlin algorithm.
4. List out the effects of Proportional-reset controller.

5. Name the features of a digital PID controller.
6. Quote the cause for proportional kick.
7. List out the different types of PID architecture.
8. Define Programmable logic controller.
9. List out the modes of operations in PLC.
10. Define robustness of a digital control algorithm.
11. List out the sequence of operations carried in PLC programming.
12. Point the effects of ON/OFF controller.
13. Identify effects of transportation lag.
14. List out the conditions for drawing the ladder logic.
15. Define DDC.
16. Define single closed loop system.
17. Recall the advantages of Distributed Control System (DCS).
18. Define the Local Control Unit (LCU)?
19. List out the significance of DCS.
20. Label the basic blocks of DCS.
Understand
1. Illustrate how you design a digital controller for a given process.
2. Infer the effects of dead time in a process.
3. Paraphrase the strengths and weaknesses of a feedback control system.
4. Interpolate the method to remove integral windup.
6. Explain why redundancy controller needed in DCS.
7. Illustrate the criteria to choose the PLC for a particular application.
8. Represent the function of engineering interface in PLC.
9. Write the operation of local control unit in PLC.
10. Explain the need for interlock.
11. Summarize the function of redundant communication links in communication net
work.
12. Explain the cause of ringing effect in process control.
13. Interpret the significance of modified Z transform.
14. Illustrate the methods to calculate the scan time of a PLC.
15. Infer the need for model predictive control for a non linear process.
Apply
1. Solve the initial and final values of process output for a unit step input ch
ange to the given transfer
function (5s+12)/(7s+4) using the initial and final value theorems of Laplace tr
ansforms.
2. Discover the gain of PID controller proportional gains (kc) for an integral t
ime constant of t1=2 for
the given open-loop unstable process gp(s)=3/(-2s+1)..
3. Judge PI controller satisfy the necessary condition for stability of the give
n with the following
transfer function gp(s)=1/(s-2)(s+1).
4. Feedback control system with the following transfer functions.
. Examine the stability if a proportional controller is used
(Gc=Kc).
1G
1KG KGmpppvv.
.
..
s.
5. Compute the ladder diagram for a PLC that will perform each of the following
function when a
NC push button is pressed.
i. Switch a pilot light on
ii. De-energise a solenoid
iii. Start a motor running
iv. Sound a horn
6. A PI controller is used on the second process gp(s) =1/ (2s2+3s+4). Examine t
he stability of the
given system.
7. Consider the following process gp(s) =2.5(-5s+1)/ (10s+1) (2s+1). Identify th
e process gain to
assure closed-loop stability of this process.
8. Compute a PLC ladder program which converts the measurement of temperature in
i. Fahrenheit to Celsius
ii. Fahrenheit to Celsius
9. Compute a PLC ladder program for an automatic ON/OFF controller with differen
tial gap 1% of
set point.
10. A PID controller is used on the second process gp(s) =1/ (8s+4). Examine the
stability of the
system.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Differentiate hybrid system architecture and central computer system architec

ture.
2. Compare DCS architecture with centralized computer system architecture.
3. Contrast the performance of the P, PI and PID controller for a second order s
ystem.
4. Differentiate the function of Series PID and Parallel PID architecture.
Create
1. Design ladder diagram to control level in four tank coupled system

2. Design and implement Interlocks for bottle filling system using DCS
List of Experiments
1. Simulation of second order system with and without dead time using discretiza
tion method and
Runge- Kutta method.
2. Control of Elevator and Vending machine for health drink using PLC.
3. Development of Human Machine Interface using any SCADA package.
4. Design of Dead beat / Dahlin algorithms.
5. Level and flow control using PLC.
6. Pressure and flow control using DCS.
7. Creating an analog
open loop & Digital loop using DCS
8. Feed forward with feedback control for temperature control process.
9. Configuring DCS- System for given application.
10. Creating interlock logic in DCS.
. Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No.
Experiment
Hours
1
Simulation of second order system with and without dead time using discretizatio
n method
and Runge Kutta method
3
2
Control of Elevator and Vending machine for health drink using PLC
6
3
Development of Human Machine Interface using any SCADA package
6
4
Design of Dead beat / Dahlin algorithms
3
5
Level and flow control using PLC

3
6
Pressure and flow control using DCS.
3
7
Creating an analog
open loop & Digital loop using DCS
6
8
Feed forward with feedback control for temperature control process
3
9
Configuring DCS- System for given application
6
10
Creating interlock logic in DCS
6
11
Mini project
---
11N709 PROJECT WORK I

0 0 0 3.0
Program outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
PO12
Course outcome(s)
1. Analyze real-time problems with industry and faculty for formulating a framew
ork.
2. Apply engineering and management principles to one s own project work
3. Perform effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse te
ams, and in
multidisciplinary settings.
11O801 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS (Common to all branches)

2 0 0 2.0
Objective(s)
. To study the basic issues in Professional Ethics.
. To appreciate the rights of others and to instill moral, social values and loy
alty.
. To enable the student in their engineering profession who explore the ethical
issues in
technological society.
Program Outcomes (PO s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO8
and norms of
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
Course Outcome(s)

1. Summarize the basic principle of ethics, effective interpersonal, teamwork an
d leadership skills
2. Develop confidence for self learning and continuous learning
3. Practice professional ethics
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New version)
Test I 33
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
30
30
30
30
2
Understand
30
40
40
40
3
Apply
40
30
30
30
4
Analyze/Evaluate
5
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination wil
l be converted to
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Define Human Values.

What are Morals and Values?
What do you mean by Civic virtue and Respect for others?
Write the various meanings of .Spirituality.?
List four different types of Virtues.
Mention different Human values.
What is meant by moral autonomy?
8. Classify the types of inquiry.

9. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
10. List the levels of moral development suggested by Kohlberg.
11. What do you understand by self-interest and ethical egoism?
12. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
13. What are the three virtues of religion?.
14. What are the professional responsibilities?
15. What is meant by .Informed consent. when bringing an engineering product to
market?
16. What is engineering experimentation?
17. What are the different roles and functions of .Code of Ethics.?
18. What are the Limitations of .Code of Ethics.?
19. Name some of the engineering societies which published .codes of ethics..
20. What is meant by a disaster?
Understand
1. Which are the practical skills that will help to produce effective independen
t thought about moral
issues?
2. Why does engineering have to be viewed as an experimental process?
3. Why isn t engineering possible to follow a random selection in product design?
4. Why is the .code of ethics. important for engineers in their profession?
5. What does the Balanced Outlook on Law stress in directing engineering practic
e?
6. Are the engineers responsible to educate the public for safe operation of the
equipment? How?
7. What kind of responsibility should the engineer have to avoid mistakes that m
ay lead to accident
due to the design of their product?
8. What is the use of knowledge of risk acceptance to engineers?
9. Why is Environmental Ethics so important to create environmental awareness to
the general
public?
10. Why do the engineers refuse to do war works sometimes?
Apply
1. How does the consideration of engineering as a social experimentation help to
keep a sense of
autonomous
2. participation is a person s work?
3. How does the .code of ethics. provide discipline among the engineers?
4. How would you classify the space shuttle Challenger case accident?
5. How does the manufacturer understand the risk in a product catalog or manual?
6. How does the knowledge of uncertainties in design help the engineers to acces
s the risk of a
product?
7. How can the quantifiable losses in social welfare resulting from a fatality b
e estimated?
Give some examples.
8. How does the engineer act to safeguard the public from risk?
Unit I
Human Values
Morals, Values and Ethics
Integrity
pect for Others
Living Peacefully
Caring Sharing
Commitment Empathy
Self-Confidence
Character
Work Ethic
Honesty
Service Learning
Courage
Civic Virtue
Valuing Time
Co-operation
Spirituality in business
6 Hours
Unit II
Engineering Ethics
Senses of 'Engineering Ethics' Variety of moral issues
Types of inquiry
Moral au
tonomy Kohlberg's
theory Gilligan's theory
Consensus and controversy
Models of Professional Roles
Theories about
right action
Self-interest
6 Hours
Uses of ethical theories
Res
Unit III
Engineering as Social Experimentation
Engineering as experimentation
Engineers as responsible experimenters
Codes of e
thics A balanced
outlook on law The Challenger case study
Bhopal Gas Tragedy
The Three Mile Islan
d and Chernobyl
case studies Safety aspects in Nuclear Power plants
6 Hours
Unit IV
Responsibilities and Rights
Fundamental Rights, Responsibilities and Duties of Indian Citizens Collegiality
and loyalty
Respect for authority
Collective bargaining
Confidentiality
Conflicts of interes
t Occupational crime
Professional rights Employee rights
Discrimination
Right to Information Act
6Hours
Unit V
Global Issues
Multinational corporations Environmental ethics and Environmental Protection Act
Computer ethics
Engineers as managers
Consulting engineers Engineers as expert witnesses and adv
isors
Moral
leadership Sample code of ethics like IETE, ASME, ASCE, IEEE, Institution of Eng
ineers (India), Indian
Institute of Materials Management Weapons development
6 Hours
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. Govindarajan, S. Natarajan and V. S. Senthil Kumar, Engineering Ethics, PH

I Learning
Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2012.
References (s)
1. Charles D. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, Pearson Education/ Prentice Hall
of India ,
New Jersey,
2004.
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, Ethics in Engineering, Tata McGraw Hil
l Publishing
Company Pvt Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Protchard and Michael J. Rabins, Engineering Et
hics
Concepts
and
Cases, Wadsworth Thompson Learning, United States, 2005.
4. http://www.slideworld.org/slidestag.aspx/human-values-and- Professional-ethic
s
5. www.mne.psu.edu/lamancusa/ProdDiss/Misc/ethics.ppt
11N804 PROJECT WORK II

0 0 0 12.0
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
PO12
dent and lifelong learning..
Course outcome(s)
1. Provide solution to engineering problem using engineering tools.

2. Prepare necessary documentation for the project work.
3. Present the technical content about the work carried out.
11O10B BASIC ENGLISH I*34

*Subject to continuous assessment
3 00 3.0
Objective(s)
. To offer students the basics of the English Language in a graded manner.
. To promote efficiency in English Language by offering extensive opportunities
for the
development of four language skills (LSRW) within the classroom.
. To give an intense focus on improving and increasing vocabulary.
. To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice a
nd exercises.
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome(s)
1. Converse in English with more confidence.
Prerequisite(s)
. Knowledge of English taught in High School
Module
Vocabulary/ Grammar
Skills Sets
Skill Sets
1
Basic words- 12 most used words in
English, usage and pronunciation
Starting a conversation and
talking about what one does
Sentence construction
bolstered by mother
tongue
2
Basic words- 20 oft used words, usage
and pronunciation
Analysing an action plan
Creating and presenting
one s own action plan
3
Basic words with a focus on spelling
Discriminative listening
Informal conversation
4
Basic words- 10 oft used words, usage
and pronunciation
Content listening and

Intonation
Reading comprehension
5
Tutorial
Unit I
Unit II
Module
Vocabulary/ Grammar
Skills Sets
Skill Sets
6
Basic words + greetings to be used at
different times of the day
Formal conversation
Intonation to be used in
formal address
7
Last 28 of the 100 most used words
Informal conversation
between equals
Reading practice and peer
learning
8
Using the 14 target words to form
bigger words
Informal dialogues using
contracted forms
Guided speaking- talking
to peers using contracted

forms
9
Palindromes, greetings- good luck,
festivals
Placing a word within its
context- culling out meaning
Offering congratulations
10
Tutorial
Unit III
Module
Vocabulary/ Grammar
Skills Sets
Skill Sets
11
Homophones
Formal and informal
methods of selfintroduction
Let s Talk is a group activity
that gives them some important
pointers of speech
12
Homophone partners, matching
words with their meanings
Contracted forms of the
be verbs, =ve and =s
Translating English sentences
to Tamil
13
Briefcase words- finding

smaller words from a big word
Formal and informal ways
of introducing others
Team work- speaking activity
involving group work, soft
skills
14
Compound words and
pronunciation pointers
Giving personal details
about oneself
Using the lexicon
15
Tutorial
Unit IV
Module
Vocabulary/ Grammar
Skills Sets
Skill Sets
16
Proper and common nouns
Asking for personal
information and details
Pronunciation pointers- an
informal introduction to
the IPA
17
Pronouns
Telephone skills and etiquette
Reading aloud and
comprehension
18
Abstract and common nouns
Dealing with a wrong number
Reading practice and
comprehension
19
Group names of animals, adjectives
Taking and leaving messages
on the telephone
Pronunciation pointers
20
Tutorial
Unit V
Module
Vocabulary/ Grammar
Skills Sets
Skill Sets
21
Determiners
Interrupting a conversation
politely- formal and informal
Pair work reading
comprehension
22
Conjugation of the verb =to be - positive
and negative forms
Thanking and responding to
thanks
Comprehension questions
that test scanning,
skimming and deep
reading
23
Am/is/are questions
Giving instructions and
seeking clarifications
Small group activity that
develops dialogue writing
24
Present continuous tense-form and usage
Making inquiries on the
telephone
Finishing sentences with
appropriate verbs
25
Tutorial
Unit VI
Module
Vocabulary/ Grammar
Skills Sets
Skill Sets
26
Words with silent =b
Present continuous questions
Calling for help in an
emergency
Dialogue writing
27
Words with silent =c
Simple present tense- form and usage
Making requests and
responding to them politely
Identifying elements of
grammar in text extract
28
Simple present tense- rules
Describing people
Guided writing
29
Words with silent =g
Questions in the simple present tense
Describing places
Filling in the blanks with
correct markers of tense

30
Tutorial
Total:45 Hours
Resources
1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.
11O10C COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH *35

* Subject to continuous assessment
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To equip students with effective speaking and listening skills in English
. To help the students develop speaking skills in Business English
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome(s)
1. Develop the fluency and language competence of learners of Business English a
t the lower
intermediate level.
Unit I
Grammar and Vocabulary
Vocabulary for describing different company structures and company hierarchy
ctice using wh
Pra
questions; there is / there are, Definitions of Quality, Vocabulary of quality m

anagement
Using nouns
and adjectives to form group nouns Phrases for offering and accepting help and i
nvitations Telephone
terms
Verb tenses
Questions and responses
Conditionals Gap Filling Exercises.
9 Hours
Unit II
Listening
Business Presentation
Conversation between old friends; introducing a stranger A
Quality Manager
talks about his work Conversation between acquaintances
Sales talk at a sports e
quipment stand Small
talk among colleagues
A tour of a factory in Italy Lunch in the factory canteen
A meeting to improve
the efficiency of internal communication A phone conversation arranging to meet
A credit card
salesman talks to the bank A conversation between business acquaintances - A man
agement meeting
about a recent merger
A conversation about a town, a country and its people.
9 Hours
Unit III
Speaking
Pronunciation Practice Describing organizations - A company presentation
Practici
ng of conversation
starters and closers with friends and strangers Practice of simple language and
step by
step procedures
to describe complex ideas
Explaining visual information
The language of increase
and decrease applied
to graphs and bar charts - Presenting a work related graph
Making a telephone ca
ll A sports
equipment buyer and a manufacturer s sales representative talk business
Entertaini
ng a visitor in your
country A short marketing meeting
Negotiating to meet around a busy schedule Pai
rs or small groups
discuss the implications of problems at an electronics factory Finding out all y
ou can about a partner
Chairing and holding meetings
Pairwork on questions and answers about places and
people.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reading
Signalling the structure of a presentation
introducing, sequencing and concludin
g a talk - Explaining
concepts and ideas The pattern of phone call conversations
Giving, getting and c
hecking information
Common Business phrases
Giving encouragement: phrases for positive feedback; mor
e emphatic
adjectives and adverbs Giving facts and explaining functions and processes
Askin
g for and clarifying
information
How to state your point, agree and disagree
Practice of frequency, q
uantity and number A short marketing meeting Suggesting and agreeing times and places Phrases for t
he Chairperson
People at work: their emotions, skills and attitudes.
9 Hours
Unit V
Writing
Making conditions using the present and future conditional Phrases for stalling
for time - Common
telephone phrases and responses - Business Communication
Calling for Quotation
L
etter asking for
Clarification
Transcoding
Rearranging the sentences
Cloze
Explaining visual info
rmation
Explaining concepts and ideas
Giving, getting and checking information Business
description
Informal negotiations.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Jeremy Comfort, Pamela Rogerson, Trish Stott, and Derek Utley, Speaking Effec
tively
Developing Speaking Skills for Business English, Cambridge University Press, Cam
bridge, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. Brook-Hart Guy, BEC VANTAGE: BUSINESS BENCHMARK Upper-Intermediate
Student s
Book, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Aruna Koneru, Professional Communication, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited,
New Delhi, 2008.
3. P. Kiranmai Dutt, Geetha Rajeevan and CLN Prakash, A Course in Communication
Skills,
Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Krishna Mohan Balaji, Advanced Communicative English, Tata McGraw-hill Educat
ion Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2009.
11O20B BASIC ENGLISH II*36
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To promote fluency even downplaying accuracy
. To give room for a tacit acquisition of Basic English Grammar through ample li
stening, reading
and writing inputs with direct theory wherever relevant
. To specifically focus on speaking and conversation skills with an aim to incre
ase speaking
confidence
. To nurture in students the capacity to express themselves lucidly and articula
te their thoughts and
impressions on a wide gamut of topics both through speech and writing
. To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering rigorous practice and exerci
ses
. To correct common mistakes and to teach self-assessment techniques
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome(s)
1. Communicate better with improved fluency, vocabulary and pronunciation.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of English I
Unit I
Module
Vocabulary/ Grammar
Skills Sets
Skill Sets
31
Difference between present

continuous and simple
present tense.
Calling for help in an
emergency
Reporting an eventjournalistic style
32
Verbs =have
and =have got
Describing animals
Asking for and giving
directions
33
Simple past tense
Inviting people, accepting
and declining invitations
Self- enquiry and offering
one s opinion on a given topic.
34
Spelling rules & table of
irregular verbs
Refusing an invitation
Reading and practicing prewritten dialogues
35
Tutorial
Unit II
36
Questions and the negative form
of the simple past tense
Apologizing and
responding to an
apology
(Reading) conversation
practice
37
Asking questions in the simple
past tense
Reading comprehension
Seeking, granting and refusing
permission
38
Past continuous tense
Paying compliments and
responding to them
Pair work: writing dialogues
and presenting them
39
Difference between simple past
and past continuous- when and
where to use each
Describing daily
routines
Reading and comprehension
skills
40
Tutorial
Unit III
41
Simple future tense
Talking about the
weather
Making plans- applying
grammar theory to written work
42
Simple future tense- more aspects,
possessive pronouns
Talking about
possessions
Opening up and expressing one s
emotions
43
Future continuous
Talking about current
activities
Listening comprehension
44
Revision of future tense- simple and
continuous forms, prepositions used
with time and date
Asking for the time
and date
Discussion- analyzing and
debating a given topic
45
Tutorial
Unit IV
46
Articles a/an
Writing, speaking and
presentation skills
Transcribing dictation
47
Singular- Plural (usage of a/an)
Reading practiceindependent and shared
reading
Comprehension logical
analysis, process analysis and
subjective expression
48
Countable and uncountable
nouns- a/an and some
Listening
comprehension
Vocabulary: using context
tools to decipher meaning
49
Articles- the
Sequencing sentences in
a paragraph
Listening to a poem being
recited, answer questions on
it and practice reciting the
same
50
Tutorial
Unit V
51
Articles- the: usage and
avoidance
Speaking: sharing stories
about family, village/town,
childhood, etc. 10 students
Listening: comprehend and
follow multiple step instructions
read out by the Teacher
52
avoidance with like and hate
childhood, etc.- 10 students
Reading: make inferences from the
story about the plot, setting and
characters
53
avoidance with names of
places
childhood, etc.- 10 students
Comprehension passage
54
This/ that/ these and those
Writing a noticeannouncement
Speaking: Debate
55
Tutorial
Unit VI
56
One and ones
Collaborative
learning- problem
solving
Writing short answers to
questions based on reading
57
Capitalization and punctuation
Controlled writing
Listen to a story and respond
to its main elements
58
Syntax and sentence constructionrearrange jumbled sentences
Guided writing
Listen to a poem and discuss
its elements
59
Cloze
Free writing
Frame simple yet purposeful
questions about a given
passage
60
Tutorial
Total:45+15 Hours
Resources
1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.
11O20C ADVANCED COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH *37

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
.
.
.
.
To
To
To
To
take part in a discussion in an effective manner

listen to an explanation and respond
write a formal communication
read company literature or any document
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of the course, the student will able to
1. Skim and scan texts like job adverts
2. Read business articles for specific information
3. Deduce the structure of a text
Prerequestie(s)
Knowledge of Communicative English
Unit I
Grammar and Vocabulary
Comparison of adjectives and adverbs
tenses
simple and complex questions countab
le/ uncountable
nouns, -ing forms and infinitives
conditionals comparing and contrasting ideas
m
odal verbs while
and whereas for contrasting ideas
passives used to, articles, reported speech, r
elative pronouns and
expressing cause and result
workplace-related vocabulary.
9 Hours
Unit II
Listening
Prediction - the ability to identify information ability to spell and write numb
ers correctly
ability to
infer, understand gist, topic, context, and function, and recognize communicativ
e functions ( complaining,
greeting, apologizing, etc.) ability to follow a longer listening task and inter
pret what the speakers say.
9 Hours
Unit III
Speaking
The ability to talk about oneself and perform functions such as agreeing and dis
agreeing ability to express
opinions, agree, disagree, compare and contrast ideas and reach a decision in a
discussion appropriate use
of stress, rhythm, intonation and clear individual speech sounds - take an activ
e part in the development of
the discourse - turn-taking and sustain the interaction by initiating and respon
ding appropriately.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reading
The ability to skim and scan business articles for specific details and informat
ion To understand the
meaning and the structure of the text at word, phrase, sentence, and paragraph l
evel ability to read in
detail and interpret opinions and ideas
to develop one s understanding and knowled
ge of collocations
ability to identify and correct errors in texts.
9 Hours
Unit V
Writing
The ability to write concisely, communicate the correct content and write using
the correct register
ability to write requests, instructions, explanations, and ask for information b
y using the correct format in
business correspondences like charts, memo, note, email, letter, fax, report, pr
oposal understanding
formal and informal styles
responding to written or graphic input.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book
1. Brook-Hart, Guy, Business Benchmark: Upper Intermediate
ge
University Press, New Delhi, 2006.
Student s Book, Cambrid
Reference(s)
1. Whitby, Norman, Bulats Edition: Business Benchmark, Pre-Intermediate to Inter
mediate
Student s Book, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Cambridge Examinations Publishing, Cambridge BEC Vantage
Cambridge
University Press, UK, 2005.
Self-study Edition,
11O20G GERMAN *38

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To help students acquire the basics of the German language
. To teach them how to converse in German in various occasions
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome
. Familiar with the basics of the German language and start conversing in German
.
Unit I
Grammar & Vocabulary
Introduction to German language: Alphabets, Numbers
Nouns - Pronouns Verbs and C
onjugations definite and indefinite article - Negation - Working with Dictionary Nominative
- Accusative and dative

case
propositions - adjectives - modal auxiliaries - Imperative case - Possessiv
e articles.
9 Hours
Unit II
Listening
Listening to CD supplied with the books, paying special attention to pronunciati
on: Includes all lessons in
the book
Greetings - talking about name
country
studies
nationalities - ordering
in restaurants travel office - Interaction with correction of pronunciation.
9 Hours
Unit III
Speaking
Speaking about oneself - about family studies - questions and answers - dialogue
and group conversation
on topics in Textbook(s) - talks on chosen topics.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reading
Reading lessons and exercises in the class - pronunciation exercises: Alphabet n

ame country
people
profession family
shopping travel
numbers
friends
restaurant studies - festival
9 Hours
Unit V
Writing
Alphabets
numbers - words and sentences - Exercises in the books - control exerc
ises - writing on
chosen topics such as one self family
studies - country.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Grundkurs DEUTSCH A Short Modern German Grammar Workbook and Glossary, VERLAG
FUR DEUTSCH, Munichen, 2007.
2. Grundkurs, DEUTSCH Lehrbuch Hueber Munichen, 2007.
Reference(s)
1. Cassel Language Guides

German: Christine Eckhard
Black & Ruth Whittle, Contin
uum,
London / New York, 1992.
2. Kursbuch and Arbeitsbuch, TANGRAM AKTUELL 1 DEUTSCH ALS FREMDSPRACHE,
NIVEAUSTUFE AI/1, Deutschland, Goyal Publishers & Distributers Pvt. Ltd., New De
lhi, 2005.
3. Langenscheidt Eurodictionary German English / English
German, Goyal Publisher
s &
Distributers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
1O20J JAPANESE*39
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To help students acquire the basics of Japanese language
. To teach them how to converse in Japanese in various occasions
. To teach the students the Japanese cultural facets and social etiquettes
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome
. familiar with the basics of Japanese language and start conversing in Japanese
.
Unit I
Introduction to Japanese - Japanese script - Pronunciation of Japanese (Hiragana
) - Long vowels Pronunciation of in,tsu,ga - Letters combined with ya,yu,yo - Daily Greetings an
d Expressions Numerals. N1 wa N2 des - N1 wa N2 ja arimasen - S ka - N1mo - N1 no N2 .san - Ka
nji Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers) - Phonetic and semantic resemblances
between Tamil and
Japanese
9 Hours
Unit II
Introduction - Kore - Sore - are - Kono N1 - Sono N1 - ano N1 - so des - so ja a
rimasen - S1 ka - S2 ka N1 no N1 - so des ka koko - soko - asoko - kochira - sochira - achira - N1 wa N2
(Place) des dhoko-N1
no N2 - Kanji-10 - ima .ji fun des - Introduction of verb - V mas - V masen - V mash
itha - V masen
deshitha - N1(Time) ne V - N1 kara N2 des - N1 tho N2 / S ne Kanji-10 - Technica

l Japanese Vocabulary
(25 Numbers)
Dictionary Usage.
9 Hours
Unit III
- N1(Place) ye ikimas - ki mas - kayerimasu - Dhoko ye mo ikimasen - ikimasendhe
shitha - N1(vehicle) de
ikimasu - kimasu - kayerimasu - N1(Personal or Animal) tho V ithsu - S yo. - N1
wo V (Transitive) - N1
wo shimus - Nani wo shimasu ka - Nan & Nani - N1(Place) de V - V masen ka - V ma
sho - Oo . Kanji10 , N1( tool - means ) de V - . Word / Sentence . wa go nan des ka - N1( Person
) ne agemus - N1(
Person ) ne moraimus - mo V shimashitha - , Kanji-10 Japanese Typewriting using
JWPCE Software,
Technical Japanese Vocabulary (25 Numbers)
9 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Adjectives - N1 wa na adj des. N1 wa ii adj des - na adj na N1 ii adj ii N1 - Thothemo amari - N1 wa dho des ka - N1 wa dhonna N2 des ka - S1 ka S2
dhore - N1 ga arima
su - wakarimasu N1 ga suki masu - N1 ga kiraimasu - jozu des - hetha des - dhonna N1 - Usages of
yoku - dhaithai thakusan - sukoshi - amari - zenzen - S1 kara S2 - dhoshithe, N1 ga arimasu - im
asu - N1(Place) ne N2 ga
arimasu - iimasu - N1 wa N2(Place) ne arimasu - iimasu - N1(Person,Place,or Thin
g ) no N2 (Position) N1 ya N2, Kanji-10 - Japanese Dictionary usage using JWPCE Software, Technical J
apanese Vocabulary
(25 Numbers)
9 Hours
Unit V
Saying Numbers , Counter Suffixes , Usages of Quantifiers -Interrogatives - Dhon
o kurai - gurai
Quantifier- (Period ) ne .kai V - Quantifier dhake / N1 dhake Kanji - Past tense
of Noun sentences and
na Adjective sentences - Past tense of ii-adj sentences - N1 wa N2 yori adj des
- N1 tho N2 tho Dhochira ga
adj des ka and its answering method - N1 [ no naka ] de {nani/dhoko/dhare/ithsu}
ga ichiban adj des ka answering -N1 ga hoshi des - V1 mas form dhake mas - N1 (Place ) ye V masu form
ne iki masu/ki
masu/kayeri masu - N1 ne V/N1 wo V - Dhoko ka - Nani ka
gojumo - Technical Japan
ese Vocabulary
(25 Numbers)
9Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook(s)1-1, Goyal Publishers and D
istributors Pvt.
Ltd., Delhi, 2007.
2. Japanese for Everyone: Elementary Main Textbook(s) 1-2, Goyal Publishers and
Distributors Pvt.
Ltd., Delhi, 2007.
Reference(s)
Software
1. Nihongo Shogo-1
2. Nihongo Shogo-2
3. JWPCE Software
Websites
1. www.japaneselifestyle.com
2. www.learn-japanese.info/
3. www.kanjisite.com/
4. www.learn-hiragana-katakana.com/typing-hiragana-characters/
11O20F FRENCH *40

3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To help students acquire the basics of French language
. To teach them how to converse in French in various occasions
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome

. familiar with the basics of French language and start conversing in French.
Unit I
Alphabet Franais (alphabets) - Les accents franais (the accents in French) aigu
ave circonflexe
trma - cdille - crire son nom dans le franais (spelling one s name in French)
gr
9 Hours
Unit II
Les noms de jours de la semaine (Days of the week) - Les noms de mois de l'anne (
Months) - numro 1
100 (numbers 1 to 100)
9 Hours
Unit III
Moyens de transport (transport) - noms de professions (professions) - noms d'end
roits communs (places) nationalits (nationalities)
9 Hours
Unit IV
Pronoms (pronouns) - Noms communs masculins et de femme (common masculine and fe
minine nouns) Verbes communs (common verbs)
9 Hours
Unit V
Prsentation - mme (Introducing Oneself) - narration de son nom - l'endroit o on vit
- son ge - date de
naissance - sa profession - numro de tlphone - adresse (name - where one lives
age
- date of birth
profession - telephone number and address) - Narration du temps (tellling the ti
me)
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Angela Wilkes, French for Beginners, Usborne Language Guides, Usborne Publish
ing Ltd., Ohio,
1987.
Reference(s)
1. Ann Topping, Beginners French Reader, Natl Textbook(s) Co, 1975.
2. Stanley Applebaum, First French Reader, Dover Publications, 1998.
3. Max Bellancourt, Cours de Franais, London: Linguaphone, 2000.
Software
1. Franais Linguaphone, Linguaphone Institute Ltd., London, 2000.
2. Franais I. Harrisonburg: The Rosetta Stone: Fairfield Language Technologies, 2
001.
11O20H HINDI*41
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
. To help students acquire the basics of Hindi
. To teach them how to converse in Hindi on various occasions
. To help learners acquire the ability to understand a simple technical text in
Hindi
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcomes
. familiar with the basics of Hindi language and start conversing in Hindi.
Unit I
Hindi Alphabet
Introduction - Vowels - Consonants - Plosives - Fricatives - Nasal sounds - Vowe
l Signs - Chandra
Bindu&Visarg -Table of Alphabet -Vocabulary.
9 Hours
Unit II
Nouns
Genders (Masculine & Feminine Nouns ending in
Reading
Exercises.
a,.,i, u,u )- Masculine & Feminine
9 Hours
Unit III
Pronouns and Tenses
Categories of Pronouns - Personal Pronouns - Second person (you & honorific) - D
efinite & Indefinite
pronouns - Relative pronouns - Present tense - Past tense - Future tense - Asser
tive & Negative Sentences Interrogative Sentences.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Classified Vocabulary
Parts of body
s Seasons Professions.
Relatives
Spices
Eatables
Fruit & Vegetables - Clothes - Direction
9 Hours
Unit V
Speaking
Model Sentences
Speaking practice for various occasions.
9 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B. R. Kishore, Self Hindi Teacher for Non-Hindi Speaking People, Vee Kumar Pu
blications (P)
Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.
Reference(s)
1. Syed, PrayojanMulak Hindi, RahamathullahVaniPrakasan, New Delhi, 2002.
2. Ramdev, VyakaranPradeep, SaraswathiPrakasan, Varanasi, 2004.
11N001 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
.
.
.
.
To acquire knowledge about fiber

To be recognized with industrial
To impart a good knowledge about
To identify and describe various
applications
optics and its propagation

applications of fibers
lasers
fiber optic imaging and optoelectronic sensor
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO5
modern
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will able to:
1. Summarize the properties and industrial applications of optical fibers.
2. Explain fundamentals and industrial applications of lasers.
3. Identify the medical applications of the hologram .
Prerequestie(s)
. Basic knowledge of Engineering Physics and Physics in higher secondary school
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 42
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. List out the major measurement standards organizations.
2. Define acceptance angle.
3. List out the major measurement instruments used in the fiber optic and optoel
ectronic fields.
4. List out the functional requirements of a LASER.
5. Define critical angle and numerical aperture as related to fibers.
6. List out the general areas where energy or information can be lost in a fiber
optic data link.
7. Define the following units of measurement used in optics: energy, flux, incid
ence and intensity.
8. Mention the advantages of LASER over LED.
9. What is the principle used in the working of fibers as light guide?
10. What is reflection noise?
11. Define holography.
12. What is hologram?
Understand
1. Describe the characteristics and importance of total internal reflection to f
iber optics.
2. Explain the characteristics of LASER light.
3. Summarize and compute the major dB and power losses in a fiber optic communic
ation system.
4. Calculate pulse dispersion in step-index fiber.
5. Explain the concepts of SNR and bit error rate.
6. Describe the characteristics of light.
7. Explain the operation, characteristics and relative merits of major light emi
tter and detector types.
8. Draw and explain the different types of fiber splicing techniques.
9. Explain the material processing steps.
10. Draw and explain different configurations of optical fiber.
Apply
1. Estimate the number of photons emitted per second from a laser that puts out
one watt of power
and also state clearly the assumptions made.
2. Explain the applications of Holographic interferometry.
3. Find the core radius for a single mode fiber at an operating wavelength=1300n
m with n (core)
=1.505 and n(cladding)=1.502.
4. Find the cut-off wavelength for a SI fiber to exhibit SM operation when the c
ore refractive index
and radius are 1.46 and 4.5 m respectively with the relative index difference bei
ng 0.25%.
5. Calculate the waveguide dispersion at 1320nm for single mode fiber with core
and cladding of
9nm and125nm, n1=1.48 and n2=0.22.
6. Given silicon Avalanche Photo Diode has a quantum efficiency of 65% at a wave
length of
900nm.If
0.5 MW of optical power produces a multiplied photocurrent 10 A, find the multipl
ication factor
M.
7. Derive the expression for Signal to Noise Ratio of a photo detector.
8. Calculate the responsivity of a detector with quantum efficiency of 10% at 80

0 nm.
9. Calculate the transit time for a silicon photodiode of saturation velocity of
105ms-1 and of 5m
depletion layer thickness.
10. Two multimode step index fibers have Numerical Aperture of 0.2 and 0.4 respe
ctively and both
have the same core refractive index which is 1.48. Estimate the insertion loss a
t a joint in each
fiber caused by a 50 angular misalignment of the fiber core axes. It may be assu
med that the
medium between the fibers in air.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Identify and describe the major fiber optic data network systems.
2. Contrast and compare repeaters, regenerators and optical amplifiers.
3. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of each type of fiber for given appl
ications.
4. Differentiate radiometric and photometric systems for measuring light.
5. Classify the optical fiber sensors.
6. A single mode fiber has beat length of 8 cm at 1300nm.Find the modal birefrin
gence.
7. Differentiate between LED and LASER diode.
8. Why does the attenuation limit curve slope downwards to the right?
9. Differentiate index mode laser and guided mode laser.
10. The specifications of the light sources are converted to equivalent rise tim
e in rise time budget.
Why?
Create
1. Predict the reaction of light rays to the following optical components: Mirro
rs, lenses, and prisms.
2. Determine the instruments which are used when taking fiber optic and optoelec
tronic
measurements.
3. Calculate the power requirements of laser for material processing.
4. Compute the range of quantum efficiency of an InGa. As PIN diode in the wavel
ength range
between 1200 nm and 1600 nm if the responsivity of the diode is specified to be
more than 0.6
A/W in the required wavelength region. Use the necessary physical constants list
ed. Speed of
light in vacuum =3 108 m/s, Electron charge =1.602 10-19, C Planck s constant =6.6
256 1034 J-S, Boltzmann s constant =1.38 10-23 J/K and Band gap energy of Gas = 1.15 eV
at 300K
5. Estimate the losses encountered while coupling power from a source to a fiber
due to mismatch in
their numerical apertures and surface areas.
Unit I
Optical Fibers and their Properties

Theory and classification of fiber optics: principles of light propagation throu
gh a fiber - different types of
fibers and their properties
relative merits and demerits fiber optics production
and components
technology of preformed fabrication
fiber drawing
material consideration loss an
d bandwidth limiting
mechanism
mechanical and thermal characteristics fabrications of multi-component
glass fibers
light
sources for fiber optics photo detectors
source coupling, splicing and connector
s
Photo detectors
9 Hours
Unit II
Industrial Application of Optical Fibers
Fiber optics sensors: fiber optics communication and instrument system
advantage
of optical
communication
different types of modulators
detectors
fiber optic communication
set up application
in instrumentation: optical fiber sensors, classification of sensor types
pressu
re sensors electric and
magnetic field sensors based on polarization effects
Pressure sensors
9 Hours
Unit III
Laser Fundamentals
Fundamental characteristics of lasers: laser rate equation
three level system four level system properties of laser beams
laser modes - resonator configuration
Q- switching and
mode locking - cavity
dumping - simple frequency operation types of lasers: gas lasers, solid state la
sers, liquid lasers and
semiconductor lasers
Gas lasers
9 Hours
Unit IV
Industrial Application of Lasers
Lasers for measurement of distance and length, velocity, acceleration, atmospher
ic effects, sonic boom,
pollutants, current and voltage
material processing: laser heating, melting, scr
ibing, splicing, welding and
trimming of materials removal and vaporization calculation of power requirements
of laser for material
processing
Removal and vaporization
9 Hours
Unit V
Hologram and Medical Applications
Holography: basic principle, methods holographic interferometry and application,
holography for nondestructive testing
holographic components medical applications of lasers, laser
and tissue interactive
laser instruments for surgery, removal of tumors of vocal cards, brain surgery,
plastic surgery, gynecology
and oncology
Holographic components
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. J.M. Senior, Optical Fiber Communication
Principles and Practice, Prentice Ha
ll of India, 2010
2. John F. Ready, Industrial Applications of Lasers, Academic Press, 2012
Reference(s)
1. G. Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, McGraw Hill, 2010

2. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, Introduction to Opto Electronics, Prentice Hall of
India, 2009
3. Donald J. Sterling, Technicians Guide to Fiber Optics, Delmar publisher, 2009
4. M. Arumugam, Optical Fiber Communication and Sensors, Anuradha Agencies, 2010
5. Monte Ross, Laser Applications, McGraw Hill, 2006
6. Mr. Gupta, Fiber Optics Communication, Prentice Hall of India, 2009
11N002 ADVANCED CONTROL ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To generate an optimal knowledge about design of PI, PD and PID controllers and
feedback compensators
. To familiarize state space system theory and analysis
. To provide a solution to state equations and to study various computational al
gorithms
. To understand the nonlinear system and to develop a control scheme
. To acquire an excellent knowledge in computer control of systems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO7
ronmental
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Control Engineering
. Basics of Mathematics I,II, III
Course outcome(s)
. Design controller/compensator for simple systems .
. Represent simple systems in the form of state equations and provide a solution
for them .
. Obtain describing functions and analyze the stability of nonlinear system.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 43
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
30
30
30
30
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define compensation.
2. Define feedback compensation.
3. State lag compensation.
4. State lead compensation.
5. Describe lag-lead compensation.
6. Define P, PI -controller and its characteristics.
7. State PID-controller and its effect on system performance.
8. List the disadvantage in rate feedback and how it is eliminated.
9. Name the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback compe
nsation.
10. List the advantages of state space analysis.
11. Match state and state variable.
12. Identify the state model of nth order system.
13. Define state diagram.
14. State phase variables.
15. Name the drawbacks in transfer function model analysis.
16. List the basic elements used to construct the state diagram.
17. Name the advantages of state space modelling using physical variable.
18. List the advantage and the disadvantage in canonical form of state model.
19. Recall the properties of state transition matrix.
20. Define the characteristic equation of a matrix.
Understand
1. Distinguish between series compensation and feedback compensation.
2. Discuss when lag/lead/lag-lead compensation is employed.
3. Tell the effect of adding a pole to open loop transfer function of a system.
4. Discuss the effect of adding a zero to open loop transfer function of a syste
m.
5. Summarize the effects of PI/PD/PID controllers on system performance.
6. Explain the relation between Fm and . in lead compensator.
7. Represent the block diagram of state model.
8. Represent the signal flow graph of state model.
9. Distinguish between homogenous and non-homogenous state equation.
10. Illustrate the different methods available for computing eAt .
11. Summarize state transition matrix and explain how it is related to state of
a system.
12. Explain the properties of the state transition matrix of discrete time syste
m.
13. Tell how the eigenvectors are calculated, when the eigen values are distinct
?
14. Give the steps for computing state transition matrix eAt Cayley-Hamilton the
orem.
15. Estimate the transformed canonical state model of a system.
16. Judge how you will find the transformation matrix, Pc for transforming the s
tate model to
controllable canonical form.
17. Express the block diagram of a system with state feedback.
18. Summarize the observable phase variable form of state model.
19. Distinguish between phase plane and describing function methods of analysis.
20. Discuss the limitations of analyzing nonlinear systems by describing functio
n and phase plane
methods.
21. Match the describing function of dead zone and saturation nonlinearity.
22. Explain how you will determine the stable and unstable limit cycles using ph
ase portrait.
Apply
1. Examine the dominant pole Sd for unity feedback system having maximum peak ov
ershoot Mp <
12% and settling time ts < 3 sec for 2% error.
2. Calculate the derivative constant for a given system with Sd = -1.6+j1.2 and
G(Sd) = 2.96.-240,.
3. A discrete time system is described by the difference equation, Y (k+2) +3Y (
k+1) +5Y (k) =U
(k). Calculate the transfer function of the system.
4. The state model of a discrete time system is given by X(k+1)=AX(k)+BU(k),
Y(k)=CX(k)+DU(k). Examine its transfer function.
5. The transfer function of a system is given by Y(s)/U(s) =10/ (4sP2P+2s+1).Cal
culate the
differential equation governing the system.
6. The response of the system is, y = ax+b dx/dt .Compute the system is linear o
r nonlinear.
7. A system has a non linear element with describing function Kn= (1/X) .-45 in
cascade with,
G(j.) =10 2/j. (1+j0.5.). Calculate the limit cycle of the system.
8. Explain the architecture of a Distributed Control System (DCS) with a neat sk
etch and discuss the
functioning of its various parts.

1. Outline the steps involved in the design of feedback compensators and PD, PI
and PID controllers.
2. Develop the state model in phase variable form and canonical form for a given
transfer function.
3. Determine a feedback controller through pole placement for a completely contr
ollable and
observable system.
4. Determine the describing function of saturation nonlinearity, dead zone non l
inearity, dead zone
and saturation nonlinearity and relay with dead zone and hysteresis.
5. Design the state model of armature controlled DC motor and draw the state dia
gram.
6. The state model of a system is given by = + [u] and y= [1
0 0] .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
321XXX
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
320032100
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
321XXX
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
020
Determine whether the system is completely controllable and observable.
7. Analyze the canonical state model of the system, whose transfer function is
.
)4)(3)(2(
)5(2)(
...
.
.
sssssT
Create
1. Create the root locus of the system whose open loop transfer function is G(s)
=K/[s(s+2) (s+4)].
Find the value of K so that the damping ratio of the closed loop system is 0.5.
2. Develop the program for the impact of the sensitivity and coordinated movemen
t under a certain
direction creating a sensing and simulation program by impact of sensitivity.
3. Generate a ladder logic program for bottle filling system.
4. Derive the describing function of Dead-Zone and Saturation nonlinearity.
Unit I
Controller Design
Feedback compensators
Proportional Derivat
System performance and specifications
ive (PD),
Proportional Integral (PI) and PID controllers Characteristics, Design
Manual an
d automatic tuningMulti modal approach
Multi modal approach
9 Hours
Unit II
State Space System Theory
Concept of State, state variable and state model State model of linear system
St
ate space representation
using physical variables, phase variables, canonical variables Decomposition of
transfer functions Direct decomposition, cascade decomposition and parallel decomposition - Transfo
rming general state
model into canonical model Derivation of transfer function matrix
State space representation using canonical variables
9 Hours
Unit III
Solution of State Equation
State transition matrix and its properties
Computation using Laplace transform
method, canonical
transformation method, Cayley Hamilton method Controllability and Observability
of systems Pole
placement by state feed back
Observer systems
Properties of State transition matrix
9 Hours
Unit IV
Phase plane analysis & Describing function
Concept of phase analysis - Phase portraits-singular points
Symmetry in phase p
lane portraitsConstructing Phase Portraits- Phase plane analysis - isocline method, Delta meth
od-Existence of limit
cycles. Describing function fundamentals- Definitions-Assumptions-Computing desc
ribing functionsNyquist criterion and its extension-Existence of limit cycles-Stability of limit
cycles.
Existence of limit cycles
9 Hours
Unit V
Lyapunov Stability
Lyapunov direct method, positive definite functions and lyapunov functions, inva
riant set theorems,
lyapunov analysis of linear time invariant systems, the variable gradient method
, performance analysis,
existence of Lyapunov functions.
Existence of Lyapunov functions
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010

2. Hassan K.Khail, Nonlinear systems, Prentice Hall, 2009
Reference(s)
1. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International
Publishers, New
Delhi, 2010
2. Richard C. Dorf and Rober H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Educatio
n, New Delhi,
2010
3. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2012
4. Alberto Isidori, Non linear Control systems, Springer Verlag, , 2000
5. J.J.E.Slotine and W.Li Applied, Nonlinear control, Prentice Hall, 1998
6. R. Marino and P. Tomei, Nonlinear control design - Geometric, Adaptive and Ro
bust, Prentice
Hall,1995
11N003 OPERATING SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To understand the fundamental concepts of operating systems such as processes,
threads, files,
semaphores, etc.,
. To know the development of application programs in an operating system environ
ment
. To understand the principles of concurrency and synchronization and apply them
to write correct
concurrent programs
. To understand the basic resource management techniques in an operating system
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Computer Science
Course Outcomes

.
.
n
.
Explain the basics of operating systems .

Summarize the resource allocation and difficulties in resource allocation by a
operating system
Compare with different operating systems
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 44
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. List the advantages of Multiprogramming.
2. Define shell.
3. Recall Time-sharing systems.
4. List the various disk-scheduling algorithms.
5. Describe swap space resides.
6. Define: Virtual memory.
7. Describe hard disk and mention its purpose.
8. When will page fault occur?
9. Mention the purpose of paging the page tables.
10. State paging.
11. Define IPC.
12. Which phenomenon occurs when the processor spends most of its time in swappi
ng pages, rather
than executing them?
13. List the system calls used for process management.
14. How are devices represented in UNIX?
Understand
1. Differentiate symmetric and asymmetric multiprocessing.
2. Summarize "multi-programming".
3. Explain "online" system.
4. Differentiate between platform and environment.
5. Give an example of an operational environment when the system would have to b
e both multiprogramming and on-line system.
6. Differentiate paging and swapping.
7. Illustrate Safe State and what is its use in deadlock avoidance?
8. Associate some scheduling algorithms that could result in starvation.
9. Compare and contrast the free space and swap space management.
10. Compare paging with segmentation with respect to the amount of memory requir
ed by the address
translation structures in order to convert virtual addresses to physical address
es.
11. Differentiate between user mode and kernel mode.
Apply
1. Suppose that a disk drive has 5000 cylinders, numbered 0 to 4999. The drive i
s currently serving a
request at cylinder 143, and the previous request was at cylinder 125. The queue
of pending
requests, in FIFO order is 86, 1470, 913, 1774, 948, 1509, 1022, 1750, 130. Star
ting from the
current head position, compute the total distance (in cylinders) that the disk a
rm moves to satisfy
all the pending requests for each of the following disk-scheduling algorithms.
2. Suppose the head of moving-head disk with 200 tracks, numbered 0 to 199 is cu
rrently serving a
request at track 143 and has just finished a request at track 125. if the queue
of requests is kept in
the FIFO order 86, 147, 91, 177, 94, 150, 100, 175, and 130. Compute total head
movement to
satisfy these requests for the following disk scheduling algorithms.
3. Under what circumstances do page faults occur? Explain the actions taken by t
he operating system
when a page fault occurs.
4. Consider a paging system with the page table stored in memory.
a. If a memory reference takes 200 nanoseconds, how long does a paged memory ref
erence
take?
b. If we add associative registers, and 75 percent of all page-table Reference(s
) are found in
the associative registers, what is the effective memory reference time? (Assume
that
finding a page- table entry in the associative registers takes zero time, if the
entry is
there.)
5. Assume we have a demand-paged memory. The page table is held in registers. It
takes 8
milliseconds to service a page fault if an empty page is available or the replac
ed page is not
modified and 20 milliseconds if the replaced page is modified. Memory access tim
e is 100
nanoseconds. Assume that the page to be replaced is modified 70 percent of the t
ime. Discover the
maximum acceptable page-fault rate for an effective access time of no more than
200
nanoseconds.
6. Assume that 80 percent of the accesses are in the associative memory and that
, of the remaining,
10 percent (or 2 percent of the total) cause page faults. Examine effective memo
ry access time.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. A user program can disturb the normal operations of a system. Analyze.
2. Identify the procedure for memory protection.
3. Sometimes segmentation and paging combined into one scheme. Justify.
4. What problems could occur if a system allowed a file system to be mounted sim
ultaneously at
more than one location?
5. Why must the bit map for file allocation be kept on mass storage rather than
in main memory?
6. If a system has 128 MB RAM and 1 GB hard Disk, and a process decides to use i
ts fully allotted
Virtual Memory 2^32 - 2GB = 2 GB, how is it practically possible? But this works
in all
machines. How?
7. Judge multithreaded solution using multiple user-level threads achieve better
performance
on a multiprocessor system than on a single-processor system.
8. A certain computer provides its users with a virtual-memory space of 232 byte
s. The computer has
218 bytes of physical memory. The virtual memory is implemented by paging, and t
he page size is
4096 bytes. A user process generates the virtual address 11123456. Explain how t
he system
establishes the corresponding physical location. Distinguish between software an
d hardware
operations.
Create
1. Explain the situation under which the most frequently used page-replacement a
lgorithm generates
fewer page faults than the least recently used page replacement algorithm.
2. Create your own shell that completes the following problem: Ask the user thei
r name, Compare it
to your name and Give a reply.
3. How would you remove a semaphore / shared memory whose owner processes have d
ied?
4. Develop an environment to see the data of a Unix Hard Disk from the Windows O
S.
Unit I
Introduction
Introduction to operating system concepts: multitasking, multiprogramming, multi
user and multithreading
types of operating systems: batch operating system, time-sharing systems, distri
buted OS, network OS,
real time OS
various operating system service
architecture system calls
Multithreading
9 Hours
Unit II
Process Management
Process concept
process scheduling operation on processes
CPU scheduling criteri
a
scheduling algorithms: First Come First Serve (FCFS), Shortest Job First (SJF),
Priority Scheduling, Round
Robin (RR), Multilevel Queue Scheduling
Round Robin Scheduling
9 Hours
Unit III
Memory Management
Logical and physical address space
swapping
contiguous memory allocation non-con
tiguous memory
allocation paging and segmentation techniques
segmentation with paging virtual m
emory
management Demand paging and page replacement Algorithms
Demand Segmentation
Contiguous memory allocation
9 Hours
Unit IV
File Systems, Process Synchronization and Deadlocks
Different types of files and their access methods
directory structure
various al
location methods: disk
scheduling and management and its associated algorithms Introduction to distribu
ted file system
Critical Section Problems
Semaphores: methods for handling deadlocks, deadlock p
revention,
avoidance and detection, deadlock recovery
Introduction to distributed file system
9 Hours
Unit V
I/O Systems, UNIX Systems and Windows
I/O Hardware Application I/O interface
Kernel
Transforming I/O requests
nce Issues
UNIX system call for processes and file systems management
shell interpreter
dows architecture
overview windows file systems
Performance Issues
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Performa
Win
Textbook(s)
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Greg Gagne and Peter Galvin, Applied Operating System C
oncepts, John
Wiley & sons, Singapore, 2003
Reference(s)
1. D. Dhamdhere, Operating Systems
A concept based Approach, Tata McGraw Hill, N
ew Delhi,
2012
2. William Stallings, Operating Systems, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2009
3. Ruth A. Watson, Introduction to Operating Systems and Networks, prentice Hall
, New Delhi, 2008
4. Harvey M. Deltel, Paul J. Deltel, David R. Choffnes, Operating Systems, Prent
ice Hall, New
Delhi, 2004
5. Jean Bacon and Tim Harris, Operating Systems, Addison Wesley, New Delhi, 2003
6. Mukesh Singhal and Niranjan shivaratri, Advanced concepts in Operating System
s, Tata McGraw
Hill, 2011
11N004 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To develop an understanding of electromagnetic-field fundamentals by emphasizi

ng mathematical,
analytical rigidity and physical conceptual reasoning
. To analyze engineering systems based on electrostatic fields, steady electric
currents and magneto
static fields in arbitrary material media
. To apply vector calculus to solve a large variety of static field problems
. To study Maxwell s equations and use these equations to solve time-varying field
problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Engineering physics and physics in higher secondary
Course outcome(s)
. Summarize the fundamentals of Electrostatics and Magnetostatics.
. Analyze the concept of Electrodynamic fields.
. Apply the concept of electromagnetic theory in electromagnetic waves.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 45
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
internal assessment
Remember
1. Define self inductance.
2. Define mutual inductance.
3. State coulomb s law.
4. Define electric field intensity.
5. Define line integral and surface integral.
6. State curl of a vector and its property.
7. List the applications of Gauss law.
8. Identify the significant feature of wave propagation in an imperfect dielectr
ic?
9. Define divergence.
10. State Gauss law for electric fields.
11. State Faraday s law.
Understand
1. Indicate the relationship between the unit vector for spherical and Cartesian
coordinate system,
spherical and cylindrical coordinate system.
2. Express Laplace equation in cylindrical and in Cartesian coordinate system.
3. Can a static magnetic field exist in a good conductor?
4. Predict when the wave is incident obliquely over dielectric-dielectric bounda

ry?
5.
6.
7.
8.
Discuss the methods

Show the expression
Distinguish between
Distinguish between
to be used to eliminate the eddy current losses.

for potential between two spherical shells.
solenoid and toroid.
conduction and displacement currents.
Apply
1. Explain reflection by a perfect dielectric when a wave is incident normally o
n a perfect conductor.
2. Explain Faradays and Lenz s law of induction.
3. Compute the relation between field theory and circuit theory for an RLC serie
s circuit.
4. Explain reflection by a perfect dielectric when a wave is incident normally o
n a perfect dielectric
and derive expression for reflection coefficient.
5. Compute the general Electromagnetic wave equation.
6. Derive all the Maxwell s equations.
7. Solve an expression for energy and energy density in a magnetic field.
8. Compute the magnetic boundary relations.
9. Calculate the magnetic flux density at a point Z on the axis of a circular lo
op of radius =a that
carries a direct current I.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Point out the situations does we mostly use method of moments. What does the
accuracy depend
in evaluating the fields by using the method of moments?
2. Identify the conditions in which the field intensity be solenoidal and irrota
tional.
3. Analyze the capacitance of a capacitor storing 1J with 500 V applied.
4. Defend hysteresis. Draw the hysteresis loop.
5. Develop the expression for the torque experienced by a current carrying loop,
placed in a magnetic
field?
6. Four positive charges of 10-9 C each are situated in the XY plane at points (
0, 0) (0, 1) (1, 0) and
(1, 1).
7. Determine the electric field intensity and potential at (1/2, 1/2).
8. Determine the force per meter length between two long parallel wires A and B
separated by 5cm
in air and carrying currents of 40A in the same direction.
9. A circular disc of radius =a m is charged with a charge density of s C/m .Poin
t out the electric
field intensity at a point =h m from the disc along its axis.
10. Given a electric field E = (6y/x2) x + 6/x y + 5 z. Determine the potential
difference V AB given
A(7,2,1) and B( 4,1,2)
11. Analyze the forces /length between two long straight parallel conductors car
rying a current of 10A
in the same direction. A distance of 0.2m separates the conductors. Also find th
e force/length
when the conductors carry currents in opposite directions.
12. Two conducting concentric spherical shells with radii a and b are at potenti
als V 0 and 0
respectively.
13. Determine the capacitance of the capacitor.
14. Determine the magnetic field intensity at a distance =h m above an infinite s
traight wire carrying a
steady current I.
15. Water has much greater dielectric constant than mica. Justify.
Create
1. Formulate at which condition is Gauss's law especially useful in determining
the electric field
intensity of a charge distribution?
2. A fixed voltage is applied across a parallel plate capacitor. Does electric f
lux density depend on
the .
3. of the medium? Explain.
4. Transform a vector given into cylindrical co ordinates.
Unit I
Introduction
Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields
e systems divergence
theorem Stoke s theorem
vector fields
different co-ordinat
Vector fields
9 Hours
Unit II
Electrostatics
Coulomb s law
electric field intensity field due to point and continuous charges
G
auss s law and
application
electrical potential electric field and equipotential plots
electric
field in free space,
conductors and dielectric dielectric polarization
electric field in multiple die
lectrics boundary
conditions Poisson s and Laplace s equations capacitance
energy density
dielectric s
trength
energy density
9 Hours
Unit III
Magnetostatics
Lorentz law of force, magnetic field intensity Biot-Savart law - Ampere s law
magn
etic field due to
straight conductors, circular loop and infinite sheet magnetic flux density (B)
B in free space, conductor
and magnetic materials magnetization
magnetic field in multiple media
boundary c
onditions scalar
and vector potential magnetic force
torque inductance
energy density magnetic ci
rcuits
Torque
9 Hours
Unit IV
Electrodynamic Fields
Faraday s laws
induced EMF
static and dynamic EMF
Maxwell s equations (differential
and
integral forms)
displacement current relation between field theory and circuit t
heory
Rlation between field theory and circuit theory
9 Hours
Unit V
Electromagnetic Waves
Generation of EM waves
Electro Magnetic Wave equations
wave parameters: velocity
, intrinsic
impedance, propagation constant
waves in free space, conductors, lossy and lossl
ess dielectrics skin
depth Poynting vector
plane wave reflection
Plane wave reflection
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. K.A. Gangadhar, Field Theory, Khanna Publishers, 2009
Reference(s)
1. John D. Kraus, Electromagnetics, McGraw Hill book Co., New York, 2005
2. William H. Hayt, Engineering Electromagnetics, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New
Delhi 2011
3. Joseph A. Edminister, Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics, Schaum Series,
Tata McGraw
Hill book Co, New Delhi, 2010
11N005 MECHATRONICS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To know about combination of electronics and mechanical concepts
. To know about real time applications in mechatronics
. To impart a technical knowledge in stages of designing in mechatronics
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Sensor and Transducer

. Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Course Outcome(s)

. Compare the different types of sensors, transducers and actuators.
. Obtain mathematical model of simple systems and configure control strategies/c
ontroller for them
. Design simple mechatronic systems.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 46
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
What is Mechatronics? Give four examples.

State the applications of servo system.
What are the elements present in the Mechatronics?
List the advantages of mechatronics design over traditional design.
5. Identify the different mechatronics systems used in automobiles.

6. What is the working principle of an eddy current proximity sensor?
7. What is meant by sensors? Give some examples
8. List out a few electrical actuators.
9. What is open loop and closed loop system?
10. Suggest suitable actuator for robot arm joint and justify
11. List out the basic elements of closed loop system.
12. Differentiate the analogue and digital control systems.
13. What is settling time and rising time?
14. What is the purpose of signal conditioning?
15. List out the process of signal conditioning.
16. Define CMRR.
17. Define sampling theorem.
18. What is meant by aliasing?
19. Draw the R-2R ladder network.
20. Mention the types of analog to digital converter.
21. Describe various elements of measurement system with the help of a block dia
gram.
22. What is meant by hysteresis error of a transducer?
23. Derive the equation for a translational mechanical system model with spring
and mass.
24. What is the difference between instrumentation amplifier and difference ampl
ifier ?
25. What is switch bounce?
26. What is smart sensor?
27. Draw the pin connection of IC 741.
28. Write the function of accumulator register.
29. Draw the block diagram of the pre and post-processing of measurement data
30. Define: transducer.
31. List out the classification of sensors.
32. What is non- inverting amplifier?
33. Define: basic principles of measurements
34. Identify the sensor, signal conditioner and display elements in the Bourdon
pressure gauge.
35. List the factors to be considered for the selection of microcontroller.
36. What do you mean by electronic counter?
37. Draw the ladder rungs to represent two switches are normally open and both h
ave to be closed for
a motor to operate.
38. Define hydraulics.
39. What is a fluid power system?
40. What is meant by wait state?
41. What is meant by polling?
42. Mention any four statements in problem definition of mechatronics system des
ign.
43. What are the various movements of robots?
44. Define mechatronics and sketch the representation of mechatronics system
45. What are the factors to be considered for selecting solenoids?
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Explain
Explain
Discuss
Explain
What is
briefly about evolution of Mechatronics

the roll of sensors and actuators in a servo system
the Sensors used temperature and current measurement.
the concept of digital control with example
the necessity of information technology in Mechatronics?
6. Explain briefly about advanced approaches in Mechatronics.

7. Explain the different types of encoders.
8. What are the parameters used for selecting displacement and Proximity sensor.
9. Describe
10. Discuss
11. Explain
12. Explain
13. Briefly
the principle and function of CRO with neat sketch.

about applications of Operational amplifiers.
the difference between open loop and closed loop system
the various types of data display
explain about Resistive transducer and its types.
14. Briefly explain the mechatronics system components.

15. What are the basic elements of a closed loop system? Explain.
16. Explain the use of microcontroller for a house hold application.
17. Write a program to divide 8-bit numbers and to store the result in memory ag
ain by
Microprocessor using 8085.
18. Discuss the working of microprocessor controlled traffic signal system.
19. Explain the architecture of a PLC and explain about its elements
20. Create a ladder diagram for the following application: A pneumatic system wi
th Double-solenoid
21. valves controls two double acting cylinder A and B. the sequence of cylinder
operations are as
follows: cylinder A extends followed by cylinder B extending, then the cylinder
B retracts and
finally the cycle is completed by the cylinder a retracting and Explain the logi
c of the PLC circuit
used.
22. Design a pick and place robot using mechatronics elements and explain about
the robot control
23. With necessary diagrams, explain the automatic car parking system.
24. Explain the construction and working of tachogenerator.
25. What is the transduction principle and explain at least five effects to whic
h transduction can be
attributed.
26. Compare the traditional design and mechatronics design with suitable example
.
27. Briefly explain how data handling is carried out in PLC.
28. What is meant by internal relays?
Apply
1. What is the non-linearity error, as a percentage of full range, produced when
a 1kO potentiometer
has a load of 10kO and is at one-third of its maximum displacement?
2. What will be the change in resistance of an electrical resistance strain gaug
e with a gauge factor of
2.1 and resistance 50O if it is subject to strain of 0.001?
3. A platinum resistance temperature detector has a resistance of 100O at 0C, 138
.50O at 100C and
4. 175.83O at 200C. What will be the non-linearity error at 100C if the detector i
s assumed to have
a linear relationship between 0 and 200C?
5. Design an operational amplifier circuit that can be used to produce an output
that ranges from 0-5v
when the input goes from 0 to 100mV.
6. An inverting amplifier has an input resistance 0f 2kO. Determine the feedback
resistance needed
to give a voltage gain of 100.
7. Design of summing amplifier circuit that can be used to produce an output tha
t ranges from -1 to 5V When the input goes from 0 to 100mV.
8. Differential amplifier is to have a voltage gain of 100. What will be the fee
dback resistance
required if the input resistance are both 1kO.
9. What is the resolution of an ADC with a word length of 12 bits and an analogu
e signal input range
of 100V?
10. A sensor gives a maximum analogue output of 5V. What word length is required
for an ADC if
there is to be a resolution of 10mV?
11. Design a pneumatic valve circuit to give the sequence A+, followed by B+ and
then
simultaneously followed by A- and B-.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. How will you identify the sensor, signal conditioner and display element in t
he measurement
system of mercury in glass thermometer and a bourdon pressure gauge?
2. How will you calculate common mode rejection ratio of differential amplifier?
3. How will you calculate the resolution of A to D converter?
4. How will you calculate flow rate of stem movement?
5. How will you calculate step angle for hybrid stepper motor?
Create
1. Design a digital thermometer system which will display temperatures between 0
to 99C. You
might like to consider a solution based on the use of a microprocessor with RAM
and ROM chip
or microcontroller solution.
2. Design a system involving a PLC for the placing on a conveyor belt of boxes i
n batches of four.
Unit I
Sensors and Transducers
Introduction to Mechatronics systems
measurement systems
control systems micropro
cessor based
controllers
sensors and transducers
performance terminology
sensors for displace
ment, position and
proximity; velocity, motion, force, fluid pressure, liquid flow, liquid level, t
emperature, light sensors
selection of sensors
Traditional design of mechatronics systems, basic elements of closed loop system
9 Hours
Unit II
Actuation Systems
Pneumatic and hydraulic systems
directional control valves rotary actuators mech
anical actuation
systems
cams gear trains
ratchet and pawl
belt and chain drives
bearings. electr
ical actuation
systems mechanical switches
solid state switches solenoids
construction and work
ing principle of dc
and ac motors
speed control of ac and dc drives, stepper motors-switching circui
tries for stepper motor
ac & dc servo motors
Servo and proportional control valves, rack- and- pinion and the screw-and-nut s
ystems
9 Hours
Unit III
System Models and Controllers
Building blocks of mechanical, electrical, fluid and thermal systems, rotational
transnational systems,
electromechanical systems
hydraulic
mechanical systems continuous and discrete p
rocess controllers
control mode
two-step mode proportional mode
derivative mode
integral mode
PID co
ntrollers
digital controllers
velocity control adaptive control
digital logic control
micr
o processors control
Mathematical model of electrical, mechanical and thermal systems
9 Hours
Unit IV
Programmable Logic Controllers
Programmable logic controllers

basic structure
input/output processing programmin
g mnemonics
timers, internal relays and counters shift registers master and jump controls
dat
a handling analogs
input / output
selection of a PLC
Applications: CNC machines, moulding, die cast
ing
Auxiliary relay, operation of different types of PLC
9 Hours
Unit V
Design of Mechatronics System
Stages in designing Mechatronics systems traditional and mechatronic design -pos
sible design solutions.
Case studies of Mechatronics systems- pick and place robot- autonomous mobile ro
bot-wireless
surveillance balloon- engine management system- automatic car park barrier
Elements of mechatronics systems
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. W. Bolton , Mechatronics, Pearson education, 2003
2. Smaili A and F. Mrad, Mechatronics integrated technologies for intelligent ma
chines,
Oxford university press, 2008
Reference(s)
1. R.K. Rajput, A Textbook(s) of Mechatronics , S. Chand & Co, 2007
2. Michael B. Histand and David G. Alciatore, Introduction to Mechatronics and M
easurement
Systems , McGraw-Hill International edition, 2007.
3. D. A. Bradley, D. Dawson, N.C. Buru and A.J. Loade, Mechatronics, Chapman and
Hall, 2008
4. Dan Necsulesu, Mechatronics, Pearson Education Asia, 2013
5. Lawrence J. Kamm, Understanding Electro Mechanical Engineering: An Introducti
on to
Mechatronics, Prentice
Hall of India Pvt., Ltd., 2000
6. Nitaigour Premchand Mahadik, Mechatronics, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing Compan

y Ltd, 2009
11N006 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To learn hydraulic fluid / Pneumatic air fundamentals including generation and
distribution.
. To understand working principles, operation of hydraulic and pneumatic compone
nts.
. To expose to various techniques of circuit building in pneumatics.
. Have exposure to diagnose / troubleshoot Hydraulic pneumatic, electropneumatic
circuits.
. To know about the ladder logic diagram to programmable logic control of fluid
power system.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Physics in higher secondary

. Basics of Fluid and Solid Mechanics
Course Outcome(s)

. Explain the basic concepts of fluid power theory and fluid conditioning .
. Distinguish between hydraulic and Pneumatic System Components .
. Design simple hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 47
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to 20 and Model Examinati
Remember
1. Define the term fluid power.
2. Name three basic methods of transmitting power?
3. Define the term mass density.
4. Define the term absolute viscosity and kinematic viscosity.

5. Define surface tension, capillarity.
6. What is oxidation stability?
7. What are fluid power symbols?
8. State Pascal s law.
9. State the continuity equation.

10. What are the various energy losses occur when liquid flows through a pipe?
11. What is the function of pump?
12. What do you mean by slip?
13. What is pump cavitation?
14. Define volumetric efficiency.
15. Define Mechanical efficiency.
16. What is overall efficiency of pump?
17. What is the function of hydraulic actuator?
18. What are the types of hydraulic cylinder?
19. What is the function of a Hydraulic motor?
20. Name the basic types of rotary actuators?
21. What is the function of direction control valve?
22. What is check valve? What are its functions?
23. What is pressure control valve?
24. What is flow control valve?
25. What is sequence valve?
26. What is the function of an accumulator?
27. Define the term intensifier ratio.
28. What is the use of pressure switch?
29. List the various types of accumulator.
30. What are limit switches?
31. What do you meant by electrical relay?
32. What is the purpose of a timer?
33. Define pneumatics.
34. State Boyle s law, Charles law.
35. What is the function of air filter?
36. What do you mean by FRL unit?
37. What is the function of pneumatic actuator?
38. What do you meant by sequencing of cylinders?
39. What is hydropneumatic circuit?

40. What is servo system?
41. What are servo valves?
42. What is the function of servo amplifier?
43. What is fluidics?
44. State the coanda effect.
45. What is PLC?
46. What are the fluid sensors?
47. What is meant by contact sensing?
Understand
1. What is the fundamental difference between Hydraulics and pneumatics?

2. State the effect of temperature and pressure on viscosity of liquids?
3. What is the difference between the force and pressure?
4. Differentiate between the laminar and turbulent flow?
5. Where the hydrodynamic displacements pumps are employed? Why?
6. Which pump-external gear, internal gear, screw vane and piston
east noise? Why?
generates the l
7. Why are centrifugal pumps not preferred for fliud power application?
8. Why are double acting cylinders known as differential cylinders?
9. Which hydraulic motor is generally the most efficient? Why?
10. State the difference between the hydraulic motor and hydraulic pump?
11. When do you prefer poppet type hydraulic valves?
12. Distinguish between a pressure control valve and pressure relief valve?
13. Why is pressure measurement considered as a crucial process in the hydraulic
system?
14. For what type of application, you would prefer to use pneumatic systems rath
er than hydraulic system?
15. Why are mufflers used in pneumatic system?
16. Why is extension stroke faster than the retraction stroke in a regenerative
circuit?
17. What is the difference between an OR Gate and an EXCLUSIVE
OR Gate?
18. Where the fluidics control system preferred than other control system?
19. If a pump is delivering insufficient oil what are the possible causes and al
so give remedies for them?
20. What will you do to reduce /prevent excessive heating of oil in a hydraulic
system?
Apply/Evaluate
1. To investigate a hydraulic and pneumatic system

Requirements: Two syringes of equal size.
A plastic tube of about 10 cm that will fit tightly over the opening of both sy
ringes.
Draw out the plunger (piston) of one syringe and push in the plunger of the othe
r syringe. Connect the two
syringes by means of the plastic tube.
Push in the plunger of one syringe. Draw that plunger out again.
2.
For the Hydraulic System shown, following data are given:

Pump is adding 5 hp (3730 W) to fluid
Pump flow is 0.001896 m3/s
Pipe has 0.0254 m inside dia
Sp. Gravity of oil = 0.9
Kinematic viscosity of oil is 100 CS
Elevation difference between station 1 & 2 is 6.096 m
Pipe lengths: 1 ft = 0.305 m, 4 ft = 1.22 m, 16 ft = 4.88 m
Find pressure available at inlet to hydraulic motor. The pressure at the oil top
surface level in the hydraulic
tank is atmospheric (01 MPa).
Create
1. The feed system of a press could be operated either manually or automatically
with the following
preconditions.
. The press tool should be in position.
. The work piece must be clamped.
. No part of the operator s body should be in the working area.
2. Design a schematic circuit which will operate one spring return cylinder from
any one of three identical
valves.
3. Design a schematic circuit that requires the operator to push one of two butt
ons that in turn shifts a
detented, two position, and four-way valve. The valve is air-piloted in both di
rections and operates a
double acting cylinder.
4. Design and Assemble an .Automatic Cam Cycling. circuit.
Unit I
Fluid Power Systems and Fundamentals
Introduction to fluid power, Advantages of fluid power, Application of fluid pow
er system. Types of fluid
power systems, Properties of hydraulic fluids
General types of fluids
Fluid powe
r symbols. Basics of
Hydraulics-Applications of Pascals Law- Laminar and Turbulent flow Reynold s numbe
r Darcy s
equation Losses in pipe, valves and fittings.
Properties of hydraulic fluids
9 Hours
Unit II
Hydraulic System and Components
Sources of Hydraulic Power: Pumping theory
Pump classification
Gear pump, Vane P
ump, piston
pump, construction and working of pumps
pump performance Variable displacement p
umps. Fluid
Power Actuators: Linear hydraulic actuators
Types of hydraulic cylinders Single
acting, Double acting
special cylinders like tandem, Rodless, Telescopic, Cushioning mechanism, Constr
uction of double acting
cylinder, Rotary actuators Fluid motors, Gear, Vane and Piston motors.
Pump classification
9 Hours
Unit III
Design of Hydraulic circuits.
Construction of Control Components : Direction control valve
3/2 way valve
4/2 w
ay valve Shuttle
valve
check valve
pressure control valve pressure reducing valve, sequence valve
, Flow control valve
Fixed and adjustable, electrical control solenoid valves, Relays. Accumulators a
nd Intensifiers: Types of
accumulators
Accumulators circuits, sizing of accumulators, Intensifier
Applicat
ions of Intensifier
Intensifier circuit.
Applications of Intensifier
9 Hours
Unit IV
Pneumatic System and components
Pneumatic Components: Properties of air
Compressors
Filter, Regulator, and Lubri
cator Unit Air
control valves, Quick exhaust valves, and pneumatic actuators. Fluid Power Circu
it Design, Speed control

circuits, synchronizing circuit, Penumo hydraulic circuit, Sequential circuit de
sign for simple applications
using cascade method.
Properties of air
9 Hours
Unit V
Design of Pneumatic Circuits
Introduction to PLC - ladder diagrams, PLC applications in fluid power control.
Fluid power circuits
Failure and Trouble shooting. Fluidics
Introduction to fluidic devices, simple c
ircuits. Servo systems
Hydro Mechanical servo systems, Electro-hydraulic servo systems and proportional
valves.
Application of PLC
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education New Delhi,
2006
Reference(s)
1. S.R. Majumdar, Oil Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
2. James L Johnson, Introduction to Fluid Power, Delmar Thomson Learning, 2003.
3. S.R. Majumdar, Pneumatic systems
, 2008.
Principles and maintenance, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Andrew Parr, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Jaico Publishing House, 2006.

5. Illangov Soundarrajan, Introduction to Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Prentice ha
ll of India,
2007.
Websites
1. www.hydraulicspneumatics.com
2. www.hydraulics-pneumatics-engineering.com
3. www.mekanizmalar.com/menu_pneumatic.html
11N007 MICROPROCESSOR BASED SYSTEM DESIGN

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To develop a vast knowledge in system design
. To know about frame work of programming in systems
. To acquire a real time control in systems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Course outcome(s)
. Classify the need for microprocessor based system design and its framework.
. Identify the microprocessor resources and analyze real time control for simple
applications.
. Analyze the software building blocks.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 48
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
What is the Need for Microprocessor based design?

What is a Microprocessor?
What is a PCI bus?
What is a watchdog timer?
Define ADC and DAC.
Name different addressing modes of 8086 with atleast one example of each mode
.
7. What is the function of the following instructions (i) JCXZ (ii) Lock Prefix
(iii) Bound (iv) ESC
8. List the five software interrupt instructions of the microprocessor and expla
in each one.
9. What roll is played by the PCI interface?
10. What is an interrupt?

11. What is big-endian and little-endian?
12. What is an assembler?
Understand
1. With the help of block diagram explain the concept of shared-bus operation.
2. Discuss the two hardware interrupts in 8086/8088 microprocessors.
3. Why we need watchdog timers?
4. Describe in detail the software interrupts available in INTEL family. How int
errupts are executed
in real and protected mode.
5. Explain the following Directives (i) PUBLIC (ii) EXTRN (iii) MODEL (iv) PROC
6. How real mode interrupts are different from protected mode interrupts?
7. Explain the operation of the protected mode Interrupt
8. How memory Paging is used for memory addressing?
9. Explain the different modes of operation of 8254 Timer using relevant wavefor
ms.
Apply
1. Write instructions to do the following operation.
(i) Subtract the data, stored 10 words after the location addressed by SI, from
DX .
(ii) Rotate all the bits of AL left three places.
(iii) ADD BX with DX and save the result in BX.
(iv) Add CX to the data stored at memory location WELL.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium based on their data bus width,
Address bus
width and memory size.
2. Explain the necessity of decoding when memory device is attached to a micropr
ocessor? With neat
diagram indicate how a simple NAND gate decoder is used to select a 2716 EPROM m
emory
component for memory locations FF800H-FFFFFH.
Create
1. Write a program in assembly language to find the largest of n numbers stored
in the memory.
Unit I
Introduction
Need for microprocessor based design
Design cycle
em hardware
design and software design
system integration.
dimensions of the design probl
Design cycle
9 Hours
Unit II
Microprocessor Resources
Family members bus widths program and data memory parallel ports
verters
reset
circuitry watchdog timers power down considerations.
D/A and A/D con
D/A and A/D converters

9 Hours
Unit III
Real-Time Control
Interrupt structures programmable timers
ty and interval
constraints
real-time clock
latency
interrupt
densi
Latency
9 Hours
Unit IV
Programming Framework
CPU registers
emblers
Instruction sets
9 Hours
structure
addressing modes
instruction sets
assembly languages
ass
Unit V
Software Building Blocks
Queues
tables and strings program organization
micro processor expansion method
s I/O hardware
alternatives
development tools
Motorola and Intel micro processors details
Development tools
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book
1. Michael Slater,Microprocessor based design: A Comprehensive Guide to Effectiv
e Hardware
Design, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi 2004
Reference(s)
1. John, B. Peatman, Design with Micro controllers, McGraw Hill International Lt
d, New York 2002
2. S.Eralan and A.Ahluwalia, Programming and Interfacing the 8051 micro controll
er,
Addison Wesley,New York 2012
3. Intel Manual on 16 bit-embedded controllers, 1991
4. Motorola manual on 8 and 16 bit micro controllers
11N008 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To equip the students with the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion
. To study the stability analysis of digital control system
. To model systems in the time domain and design feedback controllers based on v
arious algorithms
. To know about the compensators in digital controllers
. To model or to identify a discrete-time system with a linear input-output rela
tion
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Digital Logic Circuits
. Basics of Advance process control
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will able to:
. Analyze the digital control system performances.
. Represent simple systems in the form of state equations and provide a solution
for them.
. Design a compensator/controller for a simple system .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 49
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define sampling theorem.
2. Name the types of sampling process.
3. State quantization?
4. Recall zero order hold?
5. List the advantages of digital control system?
6. Label the limitations of digital control system?
7. Quote the equation for frequency response of first order hold.
8. List the advantages of digital PID controllers.
9. Quote the equation for digital PID controller?
10. Describe the significance of integral controller?
11. Quote the relationship between S and Z plane.
12. List the types of stability analysis of digital control system.
13. Point out the necessary condition for stability by Jury/s stability test?
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Outline the sufficient condition for stability by Jury/s stability test?

Recall state space analysis?
List the advantages of state space approach.
Match state of the system and state variables.
Define state vector.
Define state trajectory and Give the state model of the given system.
Identify the solutions of discrete time equations.
Describe the methods of determining state transition matrix?
Quote the transformation of state variables?
List the types of discretization.
Define Euler s approximation.
Define Eigen values and Eigen vectors.
Understand
1. Show the symbolic representation of a ZOH and FOH.
2. Predict the transfer function of zero order hold device.
3. Explain sampling theorem.
4. Compute the pulse transfer function of digital PID controller. Also design pr
ocedure of PID
controller.
5. Explain methods of analog to digital conversion.
6. Express the different types of sampling operation? Explain each of them.
7. Explain the weighted resistor digital to analog converter.
8. Explain the condition satisfied for reconstruction of sampled signal into con
tinuous signal.
9. Explain the principle operation of digital to analog conversion.
10. State and explain Jury s stability.
11. Explain procedure for obtaining the pulse transfer function of cascaded elem
ents.
12. Summarize the design procedure of digital controller through bilinear transf
ormation.
13. Explain procedure for obtaining the pulse transfer function of closed loop s
ystem.
14. Explain the procedure root locus techniques for digital system.
15. Demonstrate the steps to transformation from classical form to state-space r
epresentation cascaded
elements.
16. Compute state transition matrix by Laplace transform.
Apply
1. Explain the theorem required to satisfy to recover the signal e(t) from the s
amples e*(t).
2. The discrete time signal x(n)=6.35cos(p /10)n is quantized with a resolution
(a) .=0.1 or .=0.02.
Judge many bits are required in the A/D converter in each case?
3. Compute the pulse transfer function of two cascaded systems, each described b
y the difference
equation y (k) = 0.5y (k-1) + r(k).
4. Using Jury s stability criterion calculate the range of K, for which the charac
teristic equation z 3 +
Kz 2 + 1.5Kz - (K + 1) = 0 is the closed loop stable.
5. Graph root locus in the z-plane for the system shown in Figure for 0< K <8. C
onsider the
sampling period T = 4 sec.
6. Compute a state space representation of the system given in Figure. The sampl
ing period T is 1
sec. Also obtain the state transition matrix.
7. The block diagram of a digital control system is shown in the figure. Sketch
a compensator D(z) to
meet the following specifications:
(a) Velocity error constant, Kv= 4 Sec.,
(b) Phase margin= 400 and
(c) Band width =1.5 rad. /sec
8. Calculate the state model for the following difference equation. Also find it
s state transition matrix.
y(k+2) + 3y(k+1) + 2y(k) = 5u(k+1) + 3u(k).
9. Consider a discrete linear discrete - data control system, whose input - outp
ut relation is described
by the difference equation y (k+2) +2y (k+1) +y (k) =u (k+1) +u (k). Compute the
following
canonical models.
i. Observable canonical form.
ii. Controllable canonical form.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. A sampler and ZOH are now introduced in the forward loop (Figure 3). Relate t
he stability of the
sampled-data system via bilinear transformation and justify the stable linear co
ntinuous time
system becomes unstable upon the introduction of a sampler and ZOH.
2. Consider a control system that has the open-loop transfer function
For this system design a phase-lag-lead controller. Such that the compensated sy
stem has a steady
state error of less than 4% and a phase margin greater than 500.
3. The open loop transfer function of a unity - feedback digital control system
is given as
Detect the root loci of the system for 0< K <8. Indicate all important informati
on on the
root loci.
Create
1. A block diagram of a digital control system is shown in Figure 6. Design a PI

D controller D(z), to
eliminate the steady-state error due to a step input and simultaneously realizin
g a good transient
response, and the ramp-error constant Kv should equal 5.
2. Drive the necessary condition for the digital control system
3. The pulse transfer function of digital control systems is given by
Create a various state space representation for the system. Find the complete s
olution to a unit step
Input and assume that, the initial conditions are zero.
Unit I
Digital Control System
Digital control system
sample and hold
analog to digital converter
digital to an
alog converter
quantizing and quantizing error
sampling process frequency response of zero orde
r hold first order
hold PI, PD controllers
digital PID
Selection of sampling rate
9 Hours
Unit II
Response of Discrete System
Pulse transfer function of cascaded elements, closed loop systems characteristi
c equation relationship
between s-plane and z-plane poles
unit step response of digital control system s
tability of discrete
system Jury s stability test
Root locus technique for digital system
Impulse response of digital control system
9 Hours
Unit III
State Space Representation
State variable formulation of discrete system
decomposition of discrete transfe
r function direct
decomposition
cascade decomposition and parallel decomposition solution of state
equation by
recursive method state transition matrix and its properties
State space representation of transfer function
9 Hours
Unit IV
Solution of State Equation
Solution of discrete time state equation
evaluation of state transition matrix
transfer function matrix
Discretisation of continuous time system - Solution of discrete time state equat
ion by Cayley
Hamilton theorem
9 Hours
Unit V
Compensation Techniques
Compensation by continuous network
main technique
of designing D(z)
compensation by digital computer
Designing D (z) based on time domain specifications

9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
frequency do
Textbook(s)
1. M. Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Tata McGraw Hill Publis
hing Company
Ltd, New Delhi, 2012
Reference(s)
1. K. Ogata, Discrete time control system, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi 201
1
2. I.J. Nagarath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New age International
P.Ltd, New Delhi
2011
11N009 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To understand the various error controlling techniques in data communication n
etworks
. To learn the functions of different protocols
. To understand internet, email and its uses in modern communication
. To identify different components of data communication network
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Communication engineering

. Basics of Computer science
Course Outcome(s)

. Summarize the data communication networks, data link protocols and error handl
ing techniques
. Explain the switching and network types
. Analyze the functions of different protocols and their layers .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 50
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100

Remember
1. Name the layers of OSI does the encryption/decryption process.
2. Identify which OSI layer is responsible for binary transmission, cable specif
ication and physical
aspects of network communication.
3. Define PDU.
4. Label the types of flow control techniques that can be implemented in a netwo
rk.
5. Point the purpose of the preamble in Ethernet frame.
6. Outline the IEEE 802.2 standard represent in Ethernet technologies.
7. Describe token pass in a token bus.
8. List the two functions of a router.
9. State the default port number for SMTP.
10. Point the purpose of HTTP protocol.
Understand
1. Demonstrate network topology which has a central device that brings all the s
ignals together.
2. Distinguish Simplex, Half Duplex and Full Duplex transmission line modes.
3. Illustrate the error detection and correction methods designed for single bit
detection or correction.
4. Represent the two features that make switches preferable to hubs in Ethernetbased network.
5. Indicate the incorrect VRC bit.
6. Distinguish between packet switching and circuit switching.
7. Classify the three WAN devices found in the cloud.
8. Paraphrase the two advantages of CIDR provided to a network.
9. Predict the primary disadvantage of telnet, when compared to SSH.
10. Express the port numbers included in the TCP header of a segment.
Apply
1. An 8-PSK system has an incoming data stream at 2400 bps. Compute the symbol r
ate of the
transmitter?
2. A data link between the head office of a financial organization and one of it
s branches
runs continuously at 2.048 Mbps. Between the hours of 0900 and 1700 it is noted
that there are
295 bits received in error. Calculate the bit error rate.
3. Demonstrate how the Hamming code is used to correct a single-bit error in the
data stream.
4. Sketch which type of switching network is followed by internet.
5. Show which type of switching that provides a constant bandwidth for the compl
ete duration of a
message transfer.
6. When a collision occurs in a network using CSMA/CD, examine the hosts respond
after the back
off period has expired?
7. A network is configured with the IP, IPX and AppleTalk protocols. Manipulate
routing protocol
is recommended for this network.

8. Judge what metric does the RIP routing protocol consider being infinity.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Classify the type of transmission mode of a telephone system.
2. Distinguish between connection-oriented transmission and connectionless trans
mission.
3. Point out which type of media is immune to EMI and RFI.
4. Contrast an analog signal with a digital signal.
5. Illustrate the two conclusions drawn when multiple errors detected in a trans
mission line.
6. A routing issue has occurred in you internetwork. Outline which type of devic
es should be
examined to isolate this error.
7. Analyze the usage of loop back address.
Create
1. In LAN installations where potential electrical hazards or electromagnetic in
terference may be
present, design type of media is recommended for backbone cabling.
2. A network administrator is required to use media in the network that can run
up to 100 meters in
cable length without using repeaters. The chosen media must be inexpensive and e
asily installed.
The installation will be in a pre-existing building with limited cabling space.
Design type of media
would best meet this requirement.
3. Create the CRC-4 character for the following message using a .divisor. consta
nt of 10011:
1100 0110 1011 01
4. Design, construct and verify the operation of a parity generator circuit. The
circuit allows selection
of even or odd parity and indicates when a parity error occurs. Another option f
or the circuit is to
operate with a choice of 7- or 8-bit data inputs.
5. A PC cannot connect to any remote websites, ping its default gateway or ping
a printer that is
functioning properly on the location segment. Explain the action will verify tha
t the TCP/IP stack
is functioning correctly on this PC?
Unit I
Data Communication
an overview
Introduction: Networks, protocols and standards, standards organizations

line co
nfigurations topology
categories of networks
inter networks
OSI model: functions of the layers encodin
g and modulation
digital-to-digital conversion
analog-to-digital conversion digital-to-analog con
version
analog-toanalog conversion
transmission modes transmission media: guided media, unguided
media
transmission impairment
performance
Standards organizations
9 Hours
Unit II
Error Control and Data Link Protocols
Error detection and correction: Types of errors
eck (VRC)
Longitudinal
detection
Vertical Redundancy Ch
Redundancy Check (LRC) Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)

check sum
error correction
single bit
error correction data link control: line discipline, flow control, error control
data link protocols:
asynchronous protocols, synchronous protocols, character oriented protocols, bit
oriented protocols
link
access procedures
Single bit error correction

9 Hours
Unit III
Switching and Networks
Switching: Circuit switching, packet switching, message switching
Ethernet token
bus
token ring
FDDI
MAN: IEEE 802.6
eater,
bridge, switch, router and gateway
SMDS
LAN: IEEE 802
networking and internetworking devices: rep
Message switching
9 Hours
Unit IV
X.25, Frame Relay, ATM and SONET/ SDH
X.25: X.25 Layers
Frame relay: Introduction, frame relay operation, frame relay
layers congestion
control
leaky bucket algorithm traffic control
ATM: design goals, ATM architectu
re, ATM layers and
ATM applications SONET/SDH: synchronous transport signals, physical configuratio
n, SONET layers
and applications
Traffic control
9 Hours
Unit V
Network, Transport and Application Layers
Routing algorithms: distance vector routing, link state routing
l suite: overview of
TCP/IP
TCP / IP protoco
network layers: addressing, subnetting

application layer: Domain Name System (DN
S), telnet, File
Transfer Protocol (FTP), Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), Simple Mail Tran
sfer Protocol (SMTP) and
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Overview of TCP/IP
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking, McGraw Hill Higher Ed
ucation,
New Delhi, 2013
Reference(s)
1. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, Pearson Education, New De
lhi, 2013
2. Andrew Tannenbaum.S, and David Wetherall.J, Computer Networks, Pearson Educat
ion, New
Delhi, 2012
3. Douglas E. Comer, Internetworking with TCP/IP Volume 1, Prentice Hall of Indi
a, 2006
11N010 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To obtain the switching characteristic of different types of power semi-conduc
tor devices
. To determine the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of cont
rolled rectifiers
. To apply switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulato
rs
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Electric circuit analysis
. Basics of Electron Devices and Circuits
. Basics of Electronics
Course Outcome(s)
. Distinguish between the principle operation of power semi-conductor devices .
. Analyze the operating principle of rectifiers, choppers, cycloconverters, and
inverters.
. Identify the drives for various control applications .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 51
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What is meant by rectification and inversion mode?
2. Define commutation.
3. What is free wheeling diode? List the advantages of the same.
4. Mention the disadvantages of power converters.
5. Define firing angle of SCR.
6. What are the advantage and disadvantage of PWM control?
7. State the applications of UPS.
8. List the different types of PWM control.
9. What is meant by extinction angle?
10. What is the difference between ON-OFF control and phase controls?
11. Give an expression for the RMS output voltage of single phase full wave ac v
oltage controller
with RL load.
12. What is a Cycloconverter? Give its applications?
13. Write output voltage relation of single phase full converter. Also draw its
variation with firing
angle..
14. What is dual converter? Mention its uses
15. What is the effect of inductive load in the performance of a three phase bri
dge rectifier?
16. What is the effect of freewheeling diode in converters?
17. How rectification and inversion are possible in phase controlled thyristor c
onverter?
18. What are the control strategies of chopper?
19. What is the purpose of connecting diode in antiparallel with thyristors in i
nverters?
20. What is reverse recovery time? Draw the V-I characteristic s of SCR and mark t
he holding current
and latching current in the characteristic.
21. What are the advantages and disadvantages of a buck-boost regulator?
22. Distinguish step down and step up converters.
23. Define modulation index of PWM. What is its use?
Understand
1. Explain the' switching characteristics of MOSFET.
2. What do you mean by snubber circuit? Draw and explain the function of each co
mponent.
3. Describe the structure of a TRIAC with relevant diagram and symbol. Explain t
he different
operating modes of TRIAC with its V-I characteristics. Also discuss its advantag
e and
disadvantage.
4. Explain the need of series and parallel operation of SCRs. Also explain their
operation with V-I
characteristics and string efficiency.
5. Explain the construction and operation of SCR. Also explain V-I characteristi
cs.
6. Explain the construction and operation of IGBT and explain V-I characteristic
s.
7. Discuss the effect of source inductance on the performance of a single phase
fully controlled
converter, indicating clearly the conduction of various thyristors during one cy
cle.
8. Explain the operation of single phase dual converter.
9. Explain the operation of single phase semi converter and derive expressions f
or its average and
rms output voltages.
10. Explain the operation of single phase fully controlled rectifier with R, RL
load.
11. Explain the operation of single phase half controlled rectifier with R load.
12. Derive the expressions for harmonic factor, displacement factor and power fa
ctor in a single phase
full converter from the fundamental principle.
13. Discuss the effect of source inductance on the performance of a three phase
fully controlled
converter, indicating clearly the conduction of various thyristors during one cy
cle.
14. For a single phase uncontrolled rectifier feeding a resistive load, draw the
waveforms of source
voltage and output voltage Describe the working with reference to waveforms draw
n.
15. Explain the principle of basic chopper circuit with relevant voltage and cur
rent waveforms. Also
explain the various control strategies used to get the variation in the output v
oltage.
16. Classify the basic topologies of switching regulators and explain the operat
ion of buck regulator
with continuous load current using suitable waveforms.
17. With neat diagram and waveforms, explain three phase voltage source inverter
, using SCR
operating in180 degree conduction mode. Also, obtain the expression for rms valu
e of output
voltage.
18. Explain sinusoidal pulse width modulation as used in PWM inverters.
19. Explain the operation of current source inverter.
20. Draw the phase voltage and line voltage waveforms on the assumption that eac
h thyristor conducts
for 20C. Indicate the firing sequence also.
21. Explain with waveforms the principle of working of 1- phase to 1- phase step
up and step down
cycloconverter. List the factors that affect the performance of cyclo-converters
.
22. Explain with waveforms the principle of working of 3- phase to 3- phase cycl
oconverter.
23. With aid of circuit diagram and waveform explain the operation of
a. Single phase unidirectional controller
b. Single phase bidirectional controller. Derive the expressions for their rms o
utput voltage.
Apply
1. Why SCRs are required to be connected in parallel? What are the problems asso
ciated with
parallel connection of SCRs? How they are eliminated?
2. A single-phase full converter is supplied from 230 V, 50 Hz, The load consist
s of R = 10 O and a
large inductance so render the load current constant. For a firing angle delay 0
determine
(1) Average output voltage (2) Average output current
(2) Average and rms values of thyristor currents (4) The power factor.
1. A single phase half controlled thyristor converter is connected to a load of

a 5O resistance, 1H
inductance and 10V emf. Compute the average load voltage and average load curren
t assuming
continuous current operation for a triggering angle 45. Estimate the input power
factor if the
load current can be assumed to be constant. The supply voltage is 230V, 50Hz.
2. The full wave controlled bridge rectifier has an ac input of 120V rms at 60Hz
and a 20O load
resistor.
The delay angle is 40. Determine the average current in the loads, the power abso
rbed by the
load and the input power factor.
3. A resistive load of 10O is connected through a half wave SCR circuit to 220V,
50Hz, single phase
source. Calculate the power delivered to the load for a firing angle of 60.find a
lso the value of
input power factor.
4. A dc chopper is turned on for 30sec and off 10sec. i) duty cycle ii) chopping f
requency.
A dc chopper of input voltage 200V remains on for 25msec and off for 10msec. Det
ermine the
average voltage which appears the load.
5. A dc chopper circuit is operating on TRC principle at a frequency of 2KHz on
a 220V dc supply.
If the load voltage is 170V, compute the conduction and blocking period of thyri
stor each cycle.
6. A step up chopper is used to deliver load voltage of 500V from a 200V dc sour
ce. If the blocking
period of the thyristor is 80s, compute the required pulse width.
7. A step up chopper has input voltage of 220V and output voltage of 660V. If th
e non-conducting
time of thyristor is 100sec. compute the pulse width of output voltage. If the pu
lse width is
halved for a constant frequency operation, find the new output voltage.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare 120 and 180 modes.
2. Distinguish between half controlled and fully controlled converter circuits.
3. How is 12 pulse converters formed from 6pulse converters?
4. Why thyristor are not preferred for inverters?
5. How the thyristor inverters are classified?
6. How the output frequency is varied in the care of an inverter.
7. Compare VSI and CSI.
8. Compare single PWM over multiple pulse width modulation technique.
9. Which of the pulse width modulation scheme gives better quality of voltage an
d current?
10. Compare SPWM over MPWM technique.
Create
1. Generation firing pulse for single inverter and converter using TMS320F247/TM
S320F812.
Unit
Power Semi-Conductor Devices

Construction, Operation, Characteristics of Power Diode
DIAC- SCR - TRIAC
Power
transistor,
MOSFET and IGBT Ratings of SCR Series parallel operation of SCR, di/dt & dv/dt p
rotection.
Construction, Operation, Characteristics of Power transistor
9 Hours
Unit
II
Controlled Rectifiers
Single Phase and Three phase uncontrolled converter with R load
Single Phase and
Three phase half and
fully controlled converters with R, RL, RLE Load Single phase and Three phase du
al converter operation
Effect of source inductance
Sepic, Lou, pi, T converters
9 Hours
Unit
III
Choppers and cycloconverters

Principle of chopper operations-control strategies
Step up and step down chopper
Buck and boost
switched mode regulators
cycloconverters , Single phase cycloconverters
Operation four quadrant chopper
9 Hours
Unit
IV
Inverters
Single phase and three phase (both 1200 mode and 1800 mode) inverters
PWM techni
ques: Sinusoidal
PWM modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM Current source inverters
Voltage so
urce inverter
UPS.
Harmonics elimination technique
9 Hours
Unit
Drives
Introduction to DC drives- AC drives-Frequency control
otor drives- Position
control- Servo drives- applications
Vector control- Stepper m
Servo drives- applications

9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Muhammad H. Rashid, .Power Electronics

ntice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2004.
Circuits, Devices & Applications., Pre
Reference(s)
1. Singh. M.D & Khanchandani, K.B .Power Electronics. Tata McGraw Hill Publishin
g Co. Ltd.,
NewDelhi, 2007.
2. Bhimbra. Dr.P.S., .Power Electronics. Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
3. Ned Mohan, Tore.M.Undeland, William.P.Robbins, .Power Electronics:ConvertersA
pplications
and Design., Wiley India, New Delhi, 2009.
Web Resources
1. http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses/Webcoursecontents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Power%20Ele
ctronics/New_index1.html
11N011 INSTRUMENTATION IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To understand the operations of petroleum refineries
. To realize the distillation column process
. To understand the controlling concepts of major unit of refineries like distil
lation column,
reactor,drier, heat exchangers, etc.,
. To be acquainted with the safety measures in petroleum industries
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Prerequesties(s)
. Basics of Industrial Instrumentation
. Basics of sensor and transducer

. Basics of process control
Course Outcome(s)
. Explain the petroleum exploration and refining process .
. Compare the various chemical reactors and control applications in industries .
. Summarize the importance of heat exchange system and safety instrumentation.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 52
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
20.The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly i
nternal assessment will
Remember
1. Define Petrochemical-cum-refinery complex.
2. List the types of heat exchangers.
3. Define flooding.
4. Define coking.
5. Define is zener barrier.
6. Recall thermal conversion process.
7. Define Pour point.
8. State degrees of freedom.
9. Define intrinsic safety.
10. List out the important commercial products obtained from petroleum.
Understand
1. Express the petroleum exploration techniques.
2. Mention the impurities in crude oil.
3. Give examples for Petroleum products.
4. Rewrite the use of steam in distillation column.
5. Distinguish Atmospheric and vaccum distillation process.
6. Summarize an enriching section in a distillation column.
7. Predict how the pressure control is achieved in reactors?
8. Show the factors that affect the stability of the column operation.
9. Illustrate the reflux rate control in distillation column.
10. Draw the P&I diagram of atmospheric distillation column.
11. Infer the temperature control in chemical reactors.
12. Explain the different types of evaporators.
13. Summarize the hazardous and non-hazardous areas in petrochemical industries.
Apply
1. How does crude oil fractioned into the light hydrocarbons, gasoline component
s and middle
distillates and it can be marketed?
2. Examine the petroleum recovery process.
3. Explain the basic principle behind the stripping and enriching sections of di
stillation column. List
the various products obtained using distillation.
4. Sketch the P&I diagram for atmospheric and vacuum distillation column process
.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the relation between internal and external reflux ratio of a distilla
tion column in a
petrochemical industry.
2. Compare the different driers, heat exchangers and evaporators.
3. Differentiate batch dryers and continuous dryers.
4. Outline the uses of dryers in petroleum industries.

5. Distinguish continuous and batch dryers.
Create
1. Create a statistical report on petroleum consumption in India.
2. Create a list of oil refineries in India and create a data sheet about capaci
ty of oil production.
Unit I
Introduction
Petroleum exploration, production and refining
ption of petroleum
products in India constituents of crude oil.
Diesel fuels
9 Hours
refining capacity in India
consum
Unit II
Application in Industries
Introduction to P & I diagram atmospheric distillation of crude oil with P&I diag
ram vacuum distillation
process
thermal conversion process control of distillation column
temperature co
ntrol process
control feed control reflux control
reboiler control
Stability of column operation
9 Hours
Unit III
Reactors Process Control
Control of chemical reactors: temperature control, pressure control
ryers batch dryers
atmospheric and vacuum dryers
continuous dryers
control of d
Vacuum dryers
9 Hours
Unit IV
Heat Exchange System
Control of heat exchangers and evaporators variables and degrees of freedom
liqu
id to liquid heat
exchangers steam heaters
condensers
reboiler and vaporizers
cascade control
forward control
evaporators: types of evaporators
Condensers
9 Hours
Unit V
Safety Instrumentation
Hazardous and non-hazardous area
urization techniques
zener barrier
classification of zone 0, zone 1 & zone 2
Non-hazardous area
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book
1. Ram Prasad, Petroleum Refining Technology, Khanna Publishers Ltd, New Delhi,
2000
press
feed
Reference(s)
1. Jens G. Balchen and Kenneth I. Mumme, Process control: structures and applica
tions, Blackie
Academic & Professional, 1995
2. B.G. Liptak, Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton Book Company, New
York,1973
3. M. Considine and S.D. Ross, Handbook of Applied Instrumentation, McGraw Hill
book Co, New
York,2006
4. B.G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers Handbook Volume II, 2003
11N012 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To provide the basics of neural networks and fuzzy logic
. To expose the concepts of feed forward and feedback neural networks
. To train about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems
. To apply neural networks and fuzzy systems to model and solve complicated prac
tical problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Prerequestie(s)
. Bascis of Mathematics taught in higher secondary school

. Basics of Mathematics I and II
Course Outcome(s)

. Interpret the concept of artificial neural network and their control applicati
ons.
. Explain the concept of fuzzy set theory and its architectures.
. Apply fuzzy logic controller for simple applications.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 53
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What are the three basic elements of a neuron model?
2. What is called defuzzification?
3. Mention the types of defuzzification.
4. What are the applications of neural networks?
5. Name some of the multilayer neural network.
6. Mention the advantages of the Back propagation algorithm.
7. List out some of the applications of the fuzzy logic controllers in real time
world.
8. Mention the few properties of fuzzy sets.
9. What are the various applications of fuzzy logic?
10. What are the different types of learning rules?
11. Draw AND function neuron and OR function neuron and state its output.
12. What is Hebbian learning rule?
13. What is Linguistic variable?
Understand
1. Demonstrate the simplified model of an artificial neuron.
2. Illustrate the training and classification of continuous perception with an e
xample.
3. Demonstrate back propagation algorithm with your own training sets, and expla
in.
4. Explain the operations of dendrite, soma and axon in the biological neuron.
5. Elucidate briefly about the perceptron multilayer network with its algorithm.
6. Explicate the steps in designing a fuzzy control system.
7. Explicate the defuzzification methods.
8. Discuss the fuzzy rule for home heating system.
9. Explain the operation of the fuzzy logic control with the process inference b
lock.
Apply
1.
.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Give similarities and dissimilarities between Fuzzy logic and neural networks
Why is modeling a blood pressure control difficult?
Discuss the techniques involved in pattern recognition.
Infer the role of knowledge based systems.
Judge the necessity of fuzzy databases and explain.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Differentiate feed-forward and feed-back neural network.
2. Differentiate supervised and unsupervised learning.
3. Compare Fuzzy sets and Crisp sets.
4. How does ANN resemble brain?
5. Analyze the goal of inverted pendulum.
6. Compare single layer perceptron classifier and multi-layer perceptron classif
ier.
Create
1. Assume that the vertices of a three-dimensional bipolar binary cube are used
to represent eight
states of recurrent neural network with three bipolar binary neurons. The equili
brium states are p =
[- 1 - 1 - 1] and q = [1 1 1]. Sketch the desirable state transitions between th
e vertices.
2. Construct Fuzzy logic control of blood pressure during Anesthesia.
3. Design a Hopfield network for 4 bit bipolar patterns. The patterns are 1st sa
mple S1 = [1 1 -1 1], 2nd sample S2 = [-1 1 -1 1], 3rd sample S3 = [-1 -1 -1 1]. Find the weight m
atrix and the
energy for the three input samples. Determine the pattern to which sample S = [1 1 -1 -1]
associates.
4. Compose the following two relations R1 and R2 by using the Max-Min compositio
n, Max.Product
composition and Max. Average composition.
Unit I
Artificial Neural Network
Introduction
biological neuron and their artificial models
neuron modeling
learn
ing rules
types of
neural networks
single layer multi layer feed forward network
back propagation l
earning factors
Types of neural networks

9 Hours
Unit II
Neural Networks in Control Applications
Feedback networks
Hopfield networks
applications of neural networks
tification
artificial neuro controller for inverted pendulum.
process iden
Feedback networks
9 Hours
Unit III
Fuzzy Logic Systems
Classical sets
fuzzy sets
ication if-then
rules.
fuzzy operation
fuzzy relations
fuzzification
defuzzif
Classical sets
9 Hours
Unit IV
Fuzzy Logic Control
Membership function knowledge base
data base
rule base
zzy logic
controller: Mamdani and Sugeno-Takagi architecture.
Rule base
9 Hours
decision-making logic
fu
Unit V
Applications
Fuzzy controller for inverted pendulum, image processing, blood pressure during
anesthesia
introduction
to neuro-fuzzy controllers.
Introduction to Neuro-fuzzy controllers
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Jacek M. Zurada, Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico Publishing
House, New
Delhi,2006
2. John Yen, Reza Langari, Fuzzy logic Intelligence, control and Information, Pe
arson
Education,1999
Reference(s)
1. H.J. Zimmerman., Fuzzy Set Theory-and its Applications, Kluwer Academic Publi
shers, New
Delhi 2006
2. B. Kosko, Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New
Delhi 2009
3. B. Yagnanarayanan, Artificial Neural Networks, Prentice Hall of India Ltd .,N
ew Delhi.2012
4. G.J. Klir and T.A. Folger, Fuzzy Sets, Uncertainty and Information, PrenticeHall of India Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2009
5. Driankov and Hellendroon, Introduction to Fuzzy Control, Narosa Publishers, N
ew Delhi 2010
6. Shehu S. Farinwata, Dimitar P. Filev and Reza Langari, Fuzzy Control Synthesi
s and Analysis,
John Wiley and Sons Ltd, New York 2000
11N013 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To know about the origin and types of robotics and its stabilization
. To develop a clear idea about hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives
. To develop an optimal knowledge about machine interface in applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
Prerequestie(s)
. Baiscs of Control engineering

. Basics of Mathematics I, II
Course outcome(s)
. Summarize the history of industrial robots and the anatomy, features and appli
cations of a typical
robot
. Identify the actuator, sensor, control scheme and gripper of a typical robot a
pplication.
. Apply homogenous transformation to obtain the forward and inverse kinematics o
f simple robot
manipulators.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 54
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define Robot.
2. Recall the parts of robot.
3. Name the different types of actuators used for robots.
4. Define robot vision.
5. Define Asimov s laws of robotics.
6. State degree of freedom of a robot.
7. Define trajectory.
8. State inverse kinematics.
9. Describe the working principle of tactile sensor.
10. Identify the method to determine the torque of a motor.
11. Recall the use of manipulator in robotic arm.
12. Name the different types of manipulators.
13. List out the type of grippers.
14. Define end effector.
15. Define jacobian principle.
16. Reproduce the applications of robots.
17. Name the different sensor used in robots.
18. Define Hill climbing technique.
Understand
1. Classify the industrial robots.
2. Tell where the servo control robots are used.
3. Compute the degree of freedom of robot.
4. Demonstrate at which condition the robot is dynamically unstable.
5. Estimate the reason for a robot may over rule the Asimov s law.
6. Express a robotic application where hydraulic actuators get failed.
7. Compute the gearing ratio of a motor.
8. Show the need of laser sensor in detecting object in robotic arm.
9. Interpret how a trajectory is determined.
10. Tell the criteria to select the manipulator.
11. Classify the different applications of robot?
12. Illustrate the factor decides the shape of the end effector.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Infer the need for force control over the manipulator.

Discuss the factors to be considered while designing a robotic arm.
Explain how the solutions are obtained for an inverse kinematic problem.
Tell the application of jacobian principle.
Tell the uses of robotic arm.
Differentiate fixed automation and flexible automation.
Apply
1. The co-ordinate of a point is {2, 2, 0} with respect to a movable Cartesian f
rame OUVW.
Compute the coordinates of the point with respect to the fixed Cartesian frame
OXYZ if the
movable frame is obtained by a rotation of 60 about the Z axis followed by a tra
nslation of 5 units
along the rotated V axis.
2. A large Cartesian coordinate robot has one orthogonal side with a total range
of 30in. One of the
specifications on the robot is that it has a maximum control resolution of 0.010
in. on this particular
axis. Manipulate the number of bits of storage capacity which the robot s control
memory must
possess to provide this level of precision.
3. A stepper motor is used to drive a linear axis of a robot. The motor is conne
cted to a screwed shaft
having a single start thread of pitch 2.5 mm. The resolution desired for the con
trolled motion is 0.5
mm. Compute: i) Step angles that are required on the motor to obtain the resolut
ion. ii) Pulse rate
required to drive the axis if the velocity is 80 mm/s.
4. A certain dc servomotor used to actuate a robot joint torque constant of 2.5i

n lb/A, and a voltage
constant of 15V/Kr/min. The armature resistance =3.0 ohm. At a particular moment
during the
robot cycle, the joint is not moving and a voltage of 30V is applied to the moto
r. Calculate the
torque of the motor immediately after the voltage is applied.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Distinguish the functions of stepper motor and DC motor drives for a robot.
2. Compare and contrast the end-effectors from the view-point of their functions
.
3. Develop a set of dynamic equations for a single prismatic joint working again
st gravity
using Lagrangian.
4. Compare Fiber optic, Laser and Proximity sensor.
Create
1. R-R-R manipulator is at initial position (50, 90,-50) degrees. It is required

to move to (130, 0, 0)
degrees. Assume that the joints have maximum absolute acceleration / deceleratio
n of (50, 100,
150) degree / sec2 and maximum velocities of (20, 40, 50) degree/sec. Design arm
of the robot
for above specification.
Unit I
Basic Concepts
Brief history -types of robot
ons - design and control
issues- various manipulators
technology - robot classifications and specificati

sensors - work cell - programming languages
Types of Robot
9 Hours
Unit II
Actuators and Sensors
Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives
determination of HP of motor and gearin
g ratio
servo motor
variable speed arrangements
machine vision ranging sensors: acoustic, magnetic,
eddy current type
laser and fiber optic sensor tactile sensors
Laser and Fiber optic sensor
9 Hours
Unit III
Grippers and Mathematical representation of robot
Various types of grippers
design considerations of grippers
tical
representation of Robots - Position and orientation
end effectors
mathema
End effectors
9 Hours
Unit IV
Kinematics and Path Planning
Homogeneous transformation - various joints - representation using the Denavit H
attenberg parameters degrees of freedom - direct kinematics - inverse kinematics
Various joints
9 Hours
Unit V
Case Studies
PID control scheme selection of a robot
uring application
PUMA 560 & SCARA robots
robots in manufacturing and non-manufact
Selection of a robot
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. R. K. Mittal and I. J. Nagrath, Robotics and Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New D
elhi, 2007
2. R.D. Klafter, T.A. Chimielewski, M. Negin, Robotic Engineering
An integrated
approach,
Prentice Hall of India New Delhi, 2008
Reference(s)
1. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third edition,
Pearson Education,
2009
2. S.R. Deb, Robotics technology and flexible Automation, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
3. R.D. Klafter, T.A. Chimielewski, M. Negin, Robotic Engineering An integrated
approach,
Prentice Hall of India New Delhi, 2008
4. P.J .Mc Kerrow , Introduction to Robotics, Addison Wesley, USA, 2011
11N014 ADAPTIVE CONTROL

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To gain a technical knowledge about adaptive control scheme

. To develop a clear view on gain scheduling techniques
. To apply the basic knowledge of control engineering in adaptive control techni
ques
. To impart knowledge on various tuning and controlling methods for non linear s
ystems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Control engineering

. Basics of Mathematics I, II
Course Outcome(s)

. Summarize the basic concepts of adaptation and perturbation controllers .
. Analyze the self tuning regulators and model reference adaptive systems .
. Apply gain scheduling controllers for simple systems .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 55
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. State the principle difference between adaptive control system and convention
al closed loop
control system.
2. What is adaptive controller?
3. Define Indices of Performance (IP) used in adaptive control system.
4. List out the methods normally used for identification of system parameter.
5. Mention the effects of measurement delay in an identification process.
6. State the salient features of Model Reference Adaptive Systems (MRAS).
7. Define performance index.
8. Define quasi linearization process.
9. Mention the features of Self Tuning Regulators.
10. What is the effect of cancellation of process zero in indirect self-tuner?
11. State the Lypunov's stability theorem.
Understand
1. Draw the block diagram of an IP measurement scheme and explain its importance
in an Adaptive
Control System.
2. Explain the process of adaptive control in terms of three major functions.
3. Discuss in general the difficulties encountered in non-linear identification.
Explain the
pseudorandom binary sequence method of system identification.
4. Elaborate on minimum-degree pole placement method for design of adaptive cont
rollers. Give the
Algorithm using the above method to obtain the Self Tuning Regulator (STR).
5. Give a relationship between various stochastic self tuning regulators.
6. Explain the procedure to obtain a model reference adaptive controller using M
IT rule.
7. Design a MRAS controller for a first order system by Lyapunov method, and als
o state the
conditions to be met to ensure parameter convergence.
8. Discuss the stability problem of sinusoidal perturbation adaptive controller.
9. Discuss the applications of gain scheduling with suitable example.
10. Explain the relationship between MRAS and Self Tuning Regulator (STR).
11. Highlight the salient features of different auto-tuning techniques. Write an
explanatory note on
different aspects of an industrial adaptive controller.
12. Explain the concept of adaptive control.
13. Discuss how to make an MRAS based on the gradient approach.

14. Explain the concept of BIBO stability and discuss how the small gain theorem
is useful to evaluate
the same.
15. Explain the design algorithm of MRAS using Lyapunov theory.
16. Distinguish between explicit and implicit Self Tuning Regulators.
17. Explain the pole placement of Self Tuning Regulators.
18. Explain the generalized minimum-variance method for design of self-tuning co
ntroller
19. Demonstrate the adaptive control method using in steepest descent algorithm.
20. Explain the self-oscillating adaptive systems with help of block diagram.
Apply
1. Consider the process G(s) = s(s+a), where =a is an unknown parameter. Assume t
hat the desired
closed loop system is G m =2s2+2s+2. Derive the continuous-time indirect self-tu
ning algorithms
for the given system.
2. Design of gain scheduling controllers for a nonlinear transformation of secon
d order systems.
3. How will you determine the adaptation gain by using MIT rule?
4. Adaptive controller is preferred for dynamic process. Justify.
5. Derive the expression for MRAC and Lyapunov stability theorem.
6. How the MRAC and Lyapunov stability theorem is used in system identification?
7. Compare the various adaptive schemes.
8. How the pole placement design is used in self tuning regulator?
9. Design a pole placement controller for a system with dead time.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Formulate the relation between direct self tuning regulators and linear quadr
atic self tuning
regulators.
2. In what way the instability is introduced in perturbation system?
3. For a nonlinear system, how to establish the adaptive control algorithm in or
der to make the stable
system?
Create
1. Design the Model Reference Adaptive Control algorithm (MRAC) for the nonlinea
r or slow
process (eg: temperature).
2. Design the controller for the system G(s) = G1(s) G2(s), where G1 (s) = bs+a,
G2 (s) = cs+d in
which a and b are unknown parameters and c and d are known.
Unit I
Introduction to Adaptive Control
Development of adaptive control problem
role of index performance (IP) in adapti
ve systems
development of IP measurement process model
identification by cross correlation
synthesis techniques
for flat spectrum pseudo random signals quasi linearization
impulse response exp
ansion identification
using matched filter
adaptive control using steepest descent
Development of IP measurement process model
9 Hours
Unit II
Perturbation Systems
Single and multi-dimensional adaptive systems
stability analysis of sinusoidal p
erturbation adaptive
controllers - formulation of signal synthesis system
Multi-dimensional adaptive systems
9 Hours
Unit III
Self Tuning Regulators (STR)
Introduction pole placement design
indirect self tuning regulators
continuous ti
me self tuners direct
self tuning regulators
linear quadratic self tuning regulators
adaptive predicti
ve control
Direct self tuning regulators
9 Hours
Unit IV
Model Reference Adaptive Systems
The MIT rule
determination of adaptation gain
ry BIBO
stability
applications of adaptive control
design of MRAS using Lyapunov theo
Applications of adaptive control

9 Hours
Unit V
Gain Scheduling
Gain scheduling principle
design of gain scheduling controllers
nonlinear transf
ormations of second
order systems applications of gain scheduling
case studies ABB adaptive controll
ers SATT control
ECA40
Applications of gain scheduling
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book
1. Karl J. Astrom and Bjorn Wittenmark, Adaptive control, Pearson education inc,
New Delhi, 2008
Reference(s)
1. Kumpathi S. Narendra, Romeo Ortega and Peder Dorator, Advances in Adaptive co
ntrol, IEEE
press, New Jersey 2005
2. Petros A. Loannov and Jing Sun, Robust Adaptive Control, Prentice Hall Inc 20
12
11N015 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEM

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To acquire a knowledge about fabrication process in MEMS
. To know about various etching techniques in micromachining
. To have a knowledge about applications in micromachining techniques
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Engieering physics

. Basics of Engineering chemistry
Course Outcome(s)

. Classify the fabrication methods and materials used in MEMS .
. Identify the application of MEMS in sensor and actuator.
. Explain the uses of micromachining, polymer and optical MEMS .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 56
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define MEMS.
2. State sensor.
3. Define micro fabrication.
4. Define stress and strain.
5. Describe the function of actuators.
6. Memorize the significance of comb drives capacitive actuator.
7. Define thermistor.
8. Describe the working function thermocouple.
9. Draw the micro technology subfields
10. Explain piezoelectric effect.
11. List out the types of flow sensors.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Define inertia.
Define pressure sensor.
Discuss about the acoustic sensor.
Recall micromachining process.
Define plasma etching.
Define DRIE.
Draw the various types of beams and their deflected shapes.
State PDMS.
Define LCP.
Understand
1. Express the factors should be considered for selecting the tactile sensor.
2. Illustrate the materials and interfaces in a schematic microstructure.
3. Discuss the lithographic patterning process.
4. Express the equation that would quantify the electrical field between two lar
ge parallel plates.
5. Explain the assembly of 3D MEMS.
6. Summarize the fabrication process for a dual-valve unpowered micro flow syste
m using parylene
as structural layer.
7. Elucidate the different types of etching process.
8. Compute the equation for the voltage difference between two parallel plates.
9. Explain the need of optical MEMS.
10. Show the process for fabricating micro fluid channels using PDMS.
Apply
1. Interpolate the Structural tests using a MEMS Acoustic Emission Sensor.
2. Examine the traffic flow control using surface acoustic wave sensors.
3. Use optical sensors for Pipeline implementation.
4. Explain the MEMS application in pavement condition monitoring.

5. Discover the application of MEMS in consumer electronic products.
Analyze / Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Point out the role of magnetic actuators.

Outline the use of MEMS mirror chips in projection screen TVs.
Measure the speed of the car using MEMS accelerometer.
Determine how airbags systems are triggered using MEMS accelerometer chip?
Compare electrostatic sensors and piezoresistive sensors.
Create
1. Design
aterials,
2. Make a
3. Design
4. Invent
and carry out experiments requiring the assembly of custom fixtures, m

etc.
modeling of thermal type micro flow sensors using MEMS process.
of heartbeat measuring transducer.
a model of an Analog Devices ADXL202 and be able to explain how a MEMS
accelerometer works.
Unit I
Introduction
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS - Energy Domains and Transducers - Sensors and
Actuators Introduction to Microfabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes - New Materials
- Review of Electrical
and Mechanical concepts in MEMS - Stress and strain analysis - Flexural beam ben
ding - Torsional
deflection
Stress and strain analysis
9Hours
Unit II
Sensors and Actuators-I
Electrostatic sensors - Parallel plate capacitors - Applications - Interdigitate
d Finger capacitor - Comb drive
devices - Thermal Sensing and Actuation - Thermal expansion - Thermal couples Thermal resistors Applications - Magnetic Actuators - Micromagnetic components - Case studies of M
EMS in magnetic
actuators
Parallel plate capacitors
9 Hours
Unit III
Sensors and Actuators-II
Piezoresistive sensors - Piezoresistive sensor materials - Stress analysis of me
chanical elements
Applications to Inertia, Pressure, Tactile and Flow sensors - Piezoelectric sens
ors and actuators piezoelectric effects - piezoelectric materials - Applications to Inertia , Acou
stic, Tactile and Flow sensors
micropumps
Stress analysis of mechanical elements
9 Hours
Unit IV
Micromachining
Silicon Anisotropic Etching - Anisotrophic Wet Etching - Dry Etching of Silicon
- Plasma Etching
Deep
Reaction Ion Etching (DRIE) - Isotropic Wet Etching - Gas Phase Etchants - Case
studies - Basic surface
micromachining processes - Structural and Sacrificial Materials - Acceleration o
f sacrificial Etch - Striction
and Antistriction methods - Assembly of 3D MEMS - Foundry process
Foundry process
9 Hours
Unit V
Polymer and Optical MEMS
Polymers in MEMS - Polyimide - SU-8 - Liquid Crystal Polymer (LCP) - PDMS - PMMA
- Parylene Fluorocarbon - Application to Acceleration, Pressure, Flow and Tactile sensors Optical MEMS - Lenses
and Mirrors - Actuators for Active Optical MEMS
Lenses and Mirrors
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Chang Liu, Foundations of MEMS, Pearson Education Inc., 2011
2. James J.Allen, Micro electro mechanical system design, CRC Press published in
2005
Reference(s)
1. Nadim Maluf, An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design, Artec
h House, 2004
2. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, The MEMS Handbook, CRC press Baco Raton, 2005
3. Tai Ran Hsu, MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw Hill, N
ew Delhi,
2008
4. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay k. varadan and Osama O.Awadelkarim, Micro sensors ME
MS and smart
devices, John Wiley & son LTD, 2002
11N016 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To realize the energy sources and energy consumption in the world

. To get an adequate knowledge about the energy conservation techniques of vario
us sources
. To familiarize tidal power plants, geothermal power plants, biogas plants, mag
neto hydro
dynamic(MHD) power generation
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of

PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO7
ronmental
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Engineering physics and physics taught in higher secondary school
Course Outcomes

. Summarize the scenario of energy consumption and energy availability in India/
World.
. Analyze the solar and wind energy systems and their applications.
. Examine the Bio, magneto hydro dynamic, tides and wave energy systems.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 57
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
30
30
30
30
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze / Evaluate
20
20
20
20
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
20.The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly i
nternal assessment will
becalculated for 50 marks
Remember
1. Define diffused radiation.

2. State various forms of ocean energy resources.
3. Name the bio energy conversion process.
4. Define staggering.
5. Define the term Yaw control, pitch control and teethering control.
6. Outline the use of a propeller.
7. Define tracking.
8. Point the composition of a typical biogas.
9. Identify the use of hot rock geothermal source.
10. Define fuel cell.
Understand
1. Give the need for developing new energy technologies.

2. Mention the need of sun tracking for line focus and point focus collectors.
3. Illustrate the angle of incidence for a solar beam radiation?
4. Indicate the thermal storage preferred in solar power plant.
5. Describe the components of Horizontal axis wind turbine.
6. Extend the various principle routes of Biomass energy conversion to useful en
ergy.
7. Distinguish between fixed dome type and floating dome type biogas plant.
8. Describe a small biogas plant. Explain the process of anaerobic digestion.
9. Explain the principle of solar pond.
10. Discuss the types of geothermal fluids and their temperature range.
Apply
1. The incident beam of sunlight has power density of 0.7kW/m2 in the direction
of the beam. The
angle of incidence . is 60.Calculate the power collected by the surface having to
tal flat area of
100m2.
2. A wind turbine has a rotor diameter of 15m.The wind speed is 7m/s .Assume nor
mal temperature
and air pressure. Energy utilization factor is 0.7.Efficiency of WTG unit is 33
%.Calculate the
power delivered.
3. Examine why geothermal energy has not been in commercial use in India.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the various types of collectors used in solar and thermal power plant
.
2. Illustrate how can solar energy utilized to improve the thermal efficiency an
d reduce the
consumption of fuels in a combined cycle power plant?
3. Compare between the biomass energy resources and fossil fuels.

4. Justify solar PV systems are likely to replace solar thermal system.
Create
1. A horizontal shaft, propeller type wind turbine is located in area having fol
lowing wind
characteristics:
speed of wind 10m/s at 1 atm and 15C. Find the i) Air density, ii) Total power de
nsity in wind
stream,
iii) Total power from a wind turbine of 120 m dia.
2. Draw a cross section of earth and indicate the geothermal reserves.
Unit I
Introduction
Trends in energy consumption
world and Indian energy scenario
energy sources and
their availability,
economics and efficiency energy consumption pattern and growth rate in India
nee
d to develop new
energy technologies
Energy sources: solar, wind, geothermal
9 Hours
Unit II
Solar Energy and Applications
Solar thermal electric conversion: principle of solar thermal power generation l
ow and medium
temperature systems
Stirling cycle Brayton cycle
photo-voltaic energy conversion
: solar radiation and
measurement
solar cells and their characterization influence of insulation and t
emperature PV arrays
electrical storage with batteries
power conditioning schemes: DC power condition
ing converters
maximum power point tracking algorithms
AC power conditioners
line commutated th
yristor inverters
synchronized operation with grid supply
stand-alone inverter
DC power conditioning converters
9 Hours
Unit III
Wind Energy Systems

Basic principle of wind energy conversion
nature of wind power and energy from t
he wind
components of Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) types of WTG
squirrel cage and doubly
fed induction
generators field excited and permanent magnet synchronous generators - generator
control load control
performance measures
efficiency
Load control
9 Hours
Unit IV
Bio Energy & MHD Energy Conversion Systems
Energy from bio-mass biogas plants
various types
industrial wastes
municipal was
te burning
plants
types of co-generation processes
principle of Magneto Hydro Dynamic (MHD)
power generation
types
Industrial wastes
9 Hours
Unit V
Miscellaneous Sources
Energy from tides and waves
working principles of tidal power plants geothermal
energy working
principle of geothermal power plants
principle of operation of solar ponds
fuel
cells
Polarization in fuel cells

9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rao.S and Parulekar, Energy Technology
tional,
KhannaPublishers, New Delhi, 2005
Non Conventional, Renewable and Conven
Reference(s)
1. Mukund R. Patel, Wind and Solar Power Systems, CRC Press LLC, New York, 2005
2. Rai. G.D., Non Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 200
5
3. Garg H.P. and Prakash J., Solar Energy
Fundamentals & Applications, Tata McGr
aw Hill book
Co, 2007
11N017 OPTIMAL CONTROL

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
.
.
.
.
.
To
To
To
To
To
realize the concepts of optimality and its control

develop a vast knowledge about dynamic programming and its principles
develop t technical concise about various regulator problems
understand the concept of dynamic programming and it s methods
study the various methods Iterative Numerical Techniques and it s problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Mathematics I, II and III

. Basics of Numerical methods
Course Outcome(s)
.
s
.
.
Solve simple problems using the concept of optimality and calculus of variable
.
Explain the concept of pontryagin s minimum principle and dynamic programming
Design optimal controller for simple problem.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 58
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create*
Total
100
100
100
100
ll be converted to 20.
calculated for 50 marks
Remember
1. Define is optimal control.
2. Define the concept of optimality
3. List out the types of optical control problem.
4. Recall finite dimensional optimization.
5. Name the types of finite dimensional optimization.
6. State Fermat s principle in optics.
7. Define the Dirichlet s principle.
8. Point the Weierstrass condition.
9. Define approximate control law.
10. Define classical optimal control theory.
11. List out the objective of optimal control problem.
12. Define domain.
13. Point the equation for the principle of additivity.
14. Define state vector in optimal control.
15. Recall closeness of function.
16. List out the use of fundamental theorem.
17. Point the necessary conditions for optimal control.
18. List out the equations for fixed final time.
19. Define reachable state.
20. Define minimum control effect.
21. Define Pontryagin s Minimum Principle.
22. Mention additional necessary conditions for optimality.
23. Define bonded control.
24. Define optimal control law.
25. Point the equation for H-J.
26. Name the observations have to be considered in the H-J equation.
27. State the Lagrange multipliers.
28. List out the applications of H-J equation.
29. Point the use of Lagrange multipliers.
30. Define equality constraints.
31. Define the principle of optimality.
32. Mention the application of the principle of optimality.
33. Define interpolation
34. Define embedding principle.
35. List out the basic equation for dynamic programming.
36. List out the important characteristics of dynamic programming.
37. Define direct enumeration.
38. State grid point.
39. Name the modifications for fixed end point problems.
40. Define modified performance index.
41. Define reduced differential equation.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Interpret the reason for adapting optimal control.

Classify the optimal control problem.
Name the end point control in optimal control.
Paraphrase the constraints faced in optimization.
Interpret the fundamental concept involved in calculus of variations.
Classify theorem used in calculus of variations.
Discuss the functions involved in several independent functions.
Represent the derivation for simplest variational problem.
9. Indicate the necessary conditions for optimal control.

10. Illustrate about the process plant using linear regulator problem.
11. Distinguish between dependent and independent variations.
12. Illustrate the necessity of Pontryagin s Minimum Principle.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Predict the point in the line y 1 + y 2 =5 that is nearest the origin.

Distinguish between Dynamic Programming and Pontryagin s Minimum Principle.
Paraphrase the dynamic programming applied to a routing problem.
Interpret the need of interpolation.
Realize the optimal control policy for continuous time system.
Distinguish between dynamic programming and direct Enumeration.
Explain the characteristics of dynamic programming solution.
Summarize the computational procedure for solving optimal control problems.
Paraphrase the analytical results for discrete linear regulator problems.
Illustrate two point boundary value problems.
Infer the equation for Hamilton-Jacob-Bellman.
Illustrate state variable approach state regulator problem.
Express the equation for continuous stirred tank.
Distinguish between Embedding principle and optimality principle.
Distinguish between Continuous time systems, discrete system.
Indicate the methods involved in steepest descend.
Apply
1. Consider a two point boundary value problem in which the initial and final st
ate values are
specified. Manipulate the iteration equation that would be used to solve this pr
oblem by the
method of variation of extremals.
2. Manipulate the optimal control law for transferring the system
from an arbitrary initial state to the origin in minimum time. The admissible co
ntrols are
constraints by
3. Using the gradient projection algorithum, Calculate the value of Y that satis
fies the constraints y 1
=0, y 2 >=0, 2y 1 +5y 2 >=6, y 1 +y 2 >=2 and minimizes f(y) = y1 + 2y2 .
4. Use the gradient projection to find the point y* where f(y) = y1 +2y2 +3y3 ha
s its maximum value.
The variables y 1 , y2 and y 3 are required to satisfy the constraints y 1 >=0,
y 2 >=0, y 3 >=0, y
1 y 2 y 3 +1>=0, y 1 + y 2
y 3 >=0, y 1 2 y 2 >=0.
5. Determine the extremals for the functional
which have only one corner and that the boundary conditions are x(0)=0, x(1)=2.
6. Calculate value of the point on the given curve
that minimizes the function
7. F is the differentiable function of n variables defined on the domain D. If q

* is an interior point of
D and f(D*) is a relative extremum, Examine whether differential of f must be ze
ro at the point q*.
8. Using the calculus find the point in three dimensional Euclidean space that s
atisfies the constraints
y1 + y2 +y3 =5
y2+y
2+y = 9
9. Manipulate the optimal control law for transferring the system
10. Consider the system X i (t)=a i x i (t) + b i u(t) with u(t ) <=1.0, bi=0 fo
r i=1,2,...,n. Determine
the initial state for which there is no time-optimal control to reach the origin
.

1. Determine the relationship between dynamic programming and the minimum princi
ple?
2. Illustrate steepest descent method for multi criteria optimization?
3. Identify the various effects of initial guesses in continuous stirred-tank ch
emical reactor by the
method of steepest descent method.
4. Point out the application of the principle of optimality to decision making.
5. In a chemical mixing process the amount of dye v(t) to be maintained at M ft
3
(i).What would you suggest as a performance measure to be minimized? (During one
day
interval.)
(ii) Determine a set of physically realistic state and control constraints.
(Where M is flow rate and v is volume at time t)
Unit I
Concept of Optimality
Optimal control problem variable end point problem
Types of optimal
Introduction
control problems
Calculus of variations fixed end point problem Variations are independent and de
pendent
Types of optimal control
9 Hours
Unit II
Calculus of Variable
Finding functional maxima and minima Numerical examples
imization
with constraints By equality constraints
By equality constraints
9 Hours
Unit III
Pontryagin s Minimum Principle
Minimum time problem
Opt
Pontryagin minimum Principle

Method of constraints Lagrange multipliers
function Modified
performance index Hamilton Jacobi approach
Hamilton
Hamilton Jacobi approach

9 Hours
Unit IV
Dynamic Programming
The embedding principle
The optimality principle Basic equation of dynamic progr
amming Optimal
control problem
State variable approach state regulator problem
Continuous time
system, discrete
system
Continuous time system, discrete system
9 Hours
Unit V
Iterative Numerical Techniques
Method of steepest descend Numerical examples
The state regulator problem
ation of optimal
control policy for continuous time system Infinite time regulator problem
Realiz
Infinite time regulator problem

9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book
1. B. Sarkar, Control System Design
w Delhi, 1998
The Optimal Approach, Wheeler Publishing, Ne
Reference(s)
1. Donald E. Kirk, Optimal Control Theory
An introduction, Pearson Education, 20
12
2. Kemin Zbou, J.C. Doyle, Robust & Optimal Control, Pearson Education, 2013
3. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, New Age International
P.Ltd, New
Delhi, 2011
11N018 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To understand the fundamentals of digital image processing and its formation
. To get adequate knowledge about image transforms, image enhancement, image res
toration, etc.,
. To provide exposure on image coding techniques
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
Prerequetie(s)
. Basics of Mathematics I, II and III
. Basics of Computer science
Course Outcome(s)
. Summarize the fundamentals of digital image processing .
. Solve the problems in image transforms and image enhancement .
. Analyze the image restoration and image encoding techniques .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I 59
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
10
10
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze / Evaluate
40
40
40
40
5
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
State image processing?

Define sampling and quantization.
Define pixels.
Quote Hadamard transform?
Define translation and periodicity.
6. Define histogram.
7. Match high pass filtering with low pass filtering?
8. State image shaping?

9. Define image restoration.
10. Point out the inverse filtering
11. State Differential Pulse Code Modulation?
Understand
1. Explain the image formation in the eye, brightness adaptation and discriminat
ion.
2. Discuss the mechanics of filtering in spatial domain.
3. Illustrate the smoothing linear filters and order-static filters.
4. Express the properties of two dimensional Fourier transforms.
5. Summarize the Hadamard transform and discrete cosine transform.
6. Compute the DFT for the following sequence {2, 3, 4, 4} and find its Fourier
spectrum.
7. Explain the types of degradation models.
8. Illustrate the unconstrained and constrained restorations.
9. Discuss the different types of encoding techniques.
10. Explain with examples how Huffman encoding process reduces coding redundancy
.
Apply
bit image of size 5x5 and get the outp
1. Apply the process of histogram to an 8
ut image that has
the specified histogram.
2. Explain the basic relationship and distance measures between the pixels in a
digital image.
3. Sketch the frequency components of Fourier transform with the spatial variati
on in the gray levels
of the image?
4. Produce a technique for updating the median as the center of the neighborhood
is moved from
pixel to pixel?
5. Explain how the image get enhanced using low pass and high pass filtering tec
hniques?
6. Examine the contra harmonic filter which is effective in salt and pepper nois
e when Q is negative?
7. Sketch the filter which gives poor results when the wrong polarity is chosen
for Q?
8. Discover a general procedure for converting a gray-coded number to its binary
equivalent for
9. 0111010100111?
10. Produce Huffman codes for a three-symbol source?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the relation between spatial domain and the frequency domain.
2. Determine the quantization step sizes of the sub bands for a JPEG 2000 encode
d image in which
implicit quantization is used and 8 bits are allotted to the mantissa and expone
nt of the 2LL sub
band.
3. Design a single intensity transformation function for spreading the intensiti
es of an image so the
lowest intensity is 0 and the highest is L-1.
4. Can variable-length coding procedures be used to compress a histogram equaliz
ed image with 2n
intensity levels? Justify
5. Consider an 8-pixel line of intensity data, {108, 139, 135, 244, 172, 173, 56
, 99}. If it is uniformly
quantized with 4-bit accuracy, Detect the rms error and rms signal-to-noise rati
os for the quantized
data.
6. Develop a procedure for computing the median of an n x n neighborhood and pro
pose a technique
for updating the median as the center of the neighborhood is moved from pixel to
pixel.
7. Consider a checkerboard image in which each square is 1 x 1 mm. Assuming that
the image
extends infinitely in both coordinate direction, Measure the minimum sampling ra
te required to
avoid aliasing?
Create
1. Design the methods for updating the histogram used in the enhancement techniq
ues.
Unit I
Digital Image Fundamentals
Elements of a digital image processing system
structure of the human eye image f
ormation and contrast
sensitivity
sampling and quantization
neighbors of a pixel distance measures
pho
tographic film
structure and exposure linear scanner
video camera image processing applications
Linear scanner
9 Hours
Unit II
Image Transforms
Introduction to Fourier transform
DFT
properties of two dimensional FT separabil
ity, translation,
periodicity, rotation, average value FFT algorithm
Walish transform
Hadamard tra
nsform discrete
cosine transform
Discrete cosine transform
9 Hours
Unit III
Image Enhancement
Definition
spatial domain methods
frequency domain methods
n techniques
neighborhood averaging
median filtering
low pass filtering
images
image
shaping by differentiation and high passes filtering
Median filtering
histogram modificatio
averaging of multiple
9 Hours
Unit IV
Image Restoration
Definition degradation model
discrete formulation
circulant matrices block circu
lant matrices
effect of diagnolization of circulant matrices unconstrained and constrained res
torations
inverse
filtering Wiener filter
restoration in spatial domain.
Block circulant matrices
9 Hours
Unit V
Image Encoding
Objective and subjective fidelity criteria

izer coder
differential encoding
run length encoding
iterion differential
pulse code modulation.
basic encoding process
mapping
quant
image encoding relative to fidelity cr
Differential pulse code modulation

9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson Educ
ation New
Delhi 2011
2. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, PHI / Pearson Educati
on New Delhi
2003
Reference(s)
1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, Digital Image Processing using Matlab,
Pearson
Education New Delhi 2009
2. Pratt, Digital Image Processing, John Wiley and Sons. USA 2011
11O008 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR AND MANAGEMENT

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To enable the students to understand the perspectives of management.

. To give an insight about the functions of management like planning, organizing
, staffing, leading,
controlling.
. To familiarize the students with organizational culture and help them to manag
e change.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8

and norms of
Course Outcome(s)
Select the best alternative by proper Decision making.
1. Classify the various kinds of organization.
2. Apply the leadership qualities in various fields
3. Understand the principles involved in the management to analyze the organizat
ional behavior.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model Examination.
Semester
End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define management.
2. List the functions of managers.
3. What do you mean by policy?
4. What is staffing?
5. State the functions of attitude.
6. What is group dynamics?
7. Differentiate Strong from Weak cultures.
8. What is the role of change agent?
Understand
1. Describe the Evaluation of management.
2. Explain patterns of management Analysis.
3. Discuss the Planning Process.
4. Explain the process of formulating career strategy of an employee.
5. Compare and contrast Maslow s and Herzberg s motivation theory.
6. Describe the personality attributes influencing Organizational Behaviour.
7. Predict the problems involved in creating and sustaining an organizational cu
lture.
8. Explain organization development intervention strategies.
Analyze / apply
1. If you were the chief executive officer of a large corporation, how would you
=institutionalize ethics in
the
organization?
2. .Formal organization is the intentional structure of roles and informal organ
ization is a network of
personal and social relations.. Comment.
3. Design a performance appraisal matrix for a production Engineer.
4. Many other disciplines have contributed to the discipline of Organizational B
ehaviour. Justify.
5. Validate why values are important in understanding behaviour of people.

6. High cohesiveness in a group leads to higher group productivity. Comment.
7. Construct a proforma for studying the satisfaction level of employees as infl
uenced by the culture
of the organization.
8. Illustrate with an example, why change is an ongoing activity in an organizat
ion.
Evaluate / Create
1. Develop an advertisement for .The Hindu. opportunity column inviting applicat
ion from potential
candidates for the post of Director
Information Technology.
2. Your boss has got the impression that .satisfied workers are productive worke
rs. and has asked
you to study this out. In this regard.
3. Prepare a short report with your recommendations for your boss, based on your
study.
Create
1. Create product and product design ideas by searching for consumer needs and s
creening the
various alternatives
Unit I
Management Overview
Management - Definition, nature and purpose, Evolution of management, patterns o
f management
Analysis, Functions of managers, management and society - Operation in a plurali
stic society,
Social
responsibility of managers.
Ethics in managing
9 Hours
Unit II
Management Functions - I
Planning: Objective(s), Types, Steps, Process, policies. Organizing - Nature and
purpose,
Decentralization. Staffing - Selection, performance appraisal, career strategy.
Departmentation, Line and staff
9 Hours
Unit III
Management Functions-II
Leading - Behavioral models, Creativity and innovation. Motivation theories. Lead
ership - Ingredients
of Leadership, Styles. Communication. Controlling
control Techniques.
Human Factor in managing
9 Hours
Unit IV
Organizational Behaviour
Meaning and importance of Organizational Behaviour, challenges and opportunities
for
Organizational Behaviour, Attitudes Job satisfaction, personality and values. Pe
rception, Groups and
Teams
Conflict management.
9 Hours
Unit V
Organizational culture and Dynamics
Organizational Culture Definition, Functions, creating and sustaining culture, c
reating an Ethical
Organizational culture. Organizational change
forces for change, managing change
, change agents,
resistance to change, approaches to managing organizational change,
Organizational Development in intervention.
9 Hours
Total : 45 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. Herold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, Essentials of Management, Mc Graw Hill, New
Delhi, 2010.
Reference(s)
1. Robbins, Judge, Sanghi, Organizational Behaviour, Pearson, 2009
2. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009
11O0PA NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
.
.
.
r
To impart knowledge on nanoscience and technology.

To create an awareness on the nanomaterials.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with nanomaterials and thei
applications.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
. Summarize the behavior of nanomaterials, quantum phenomena and the limitations
of basic
physical laws at the nano scale level.
. Explain important mechanisms involved in the of synthesis and functionalizatio
n of nanostructured materials.
. Identify the origin of size effects to control the properties of nanomaterials
.
. Apply knowledge for modern and future engineering applications of nanomaterial
s.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define nanoscale.
2. Give the differences between nano and thin materials.
3. Give the usage of nanomaterials in medical field.
4. What are the techniques used to find properties of materials?
5. What are the day-to-day life applications of nanomaterials?
6. What do you mean by total energy of the system?
7. What do you mean by top down and bottom up approach?
8. How physical properties vary while converting the material into nano size?
9. What is SWCNT and MWCNT?
10. What are the applications of CNT?
11. Mention the general characterization techniques of nanomaterials.
12. How electron microscopy differ from scanning electron microscopy?
13. Define diffraction.
14. Write the different diffraction techniques to analyse the properties of nano
materials.
15. What is meant by surface analysis of nanomaterials?
16. What are quantum dots?
17. Write the importance of self assembly technique.
18. What is organic FET?
19. State the principle of LED.
20. Why nanomaterials are used as energy storage device?
21. Write the bio medical applications of nanomaterials.
22. List the advantages of nanomaterials as compared to bulk materials.
23. Which is having high efficiency among injection and quantum cascade laser?
24.
25.
26.
27.
Write the uses of FET.

What is nano magnet?
Mention the applications of nanomagnets in industries.
Write the advantages of nano robot in medical field.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
How the nano dimension particle varies with bulk one?

Explain the different classifications of nanostructures.
Elucidate the significance of MWCNT over SWCNT.
Explain structural, electrical, mechanical properties of nanoscale materials.
5. What are the applications of CNT?

6. Why the electrical properties are more important as compared to other propert
ies of
nanomaterials?
7. How nanomaterials are produced by machining process?
8. Give the importance of vapor phase deposition method for the production of na
nomaterials.
9. Explain the sol-gel technique of nanomaterial production.
10. How the nanomaterials are analyzed in scanning electron microscopic techniqu
e?
11. Elucidate how nanomaterials are produced by template method?
12. List the general classifications of characterization methods of nanomaterial
s.
13. Explain how FTIR is used to analyze the bonding in nanomaterials?
14. Why the TEM is widely used than SEM? Explain.
15. What are the advantages and disadvantages of TEM?
16. Explain the quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures.
17. Explain the different fabrication techniques of nanoscale materials.
18. Explicate in which way thermally annealed quantum well technique is better t
han epitaxial growth
technique?
19. Explain the electro statically induced quantum dots and quantum wire techniq
ue.
20. Why semi conducting nano material is more important than other nanomaterials
?
21. What are the advantages of nanomagnetic materials?
22. How nanomaterials are used in organic FET?
23. Why the organic LEDs are manufactured from nanomaterials?
24. How nanomaterials are used in quantum cascade laser?
25. Why nano photo voltaic fuel cells are used?
26. Explain the bio medical applications of nanodevices.
Apply
1. Clarify the effects of nanometer length scale of particles.
2. Give the reason for the effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties.
3. Explain how the size of the particle will effect on their mechanical and stru
ctural properties of the
material?
4. Why sol gel method is used widely to synthesis nanomaterials?
5. Templating method is better than physical vapor deposition method to synthesi

s nanomaterials.
Why?
6. Why ordering of the nano system is more important? Give reason.
7. Explain how nanomaterials are characterized by imaging techniques?
8. Why diffraction techniques are used to characterize the nanomaterials?
9. Explain how nanomaterials are analyzed by transmission electron microscope?
10. Clarify the differences between self-assembly and self-organization.
11. Explain how organic light emitting diode overcomes the drawback of LCD?
12. How we can use CNT as a storage device in battery?
13. Why nanomaterials are used in optical memory devices?
14. How we can store nano particles?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Distinguish between SWCNT and MWCNT.
2. Compare organic FET and organic LED.
3. Why nano structured particles are found in potential applications?
4. Give the relation between properties and applications of nano particles.

5. Explain with relevant example about the synthesize of nano structured materia
ls employing selfassembly and template based methods.
6. Analyze the relation between magnetic and nanomaterials.
Unit I
Nano Scale Materials
Introduction-classification of nanostructures, nanoscale architecture
effects of
the nanometer length
scale changes to the system total energy, changes to the system structures effect
of nanoscale
dimensions on various properties structural, thermal, chemical, mechanical, magn
etic, optical and
electronic properties.
Differences between bulk and nanomaterials and their physical properties.
9 Hours
Unit II
Nanomaterials Synthesis Methods
Fabrication methods
top down processes milling, litho graphics, machining proces
s bottom-up
process
vapor phase deposition methods, plasma-assisted deposition process, coll
oidal and solgel
methods methods for templating the growth of nanomaterials ordering of nanosyste
ms, self-assembly
and self-organization.
Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit III
Nano Characterization Techniques
General classification of characterization methods analytical and imaging techni
ques microscopy
techniques - electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission ele
ctron microscopy, atomic
force microscopy
diffraction techniques
spectroscopy techniques-X-ray spectrosco
py.
Electrical properties of nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Inorganic Semiconductor Nanostructures
Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures - quantum wells, quantum wir
es, quantum dots,
super lattices fabrication techniques requirements, epitaxial growth, lithography
and etching,
electrostatically induced dots and wires, quantum well width fluctuations, therm
ally annealed quantum
wells and self-assembly techniques .
Quantum efficiency of semiconductor nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit V
Nano devices and Applications
Organic FET- principle, description, requirements, integrated circuits- organic
LED s
basic processes,
carrier injection, excitons, optimization - organic photovoltaic cells- carbon n
ano tubes- structure, synthesis
and electronic properties -applications- fuel cells- nano motors -bio nano parti
cles-nano
objects.
Applications of nano materials in biological field.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Techn
ology, John
Wiley and Sons Ltd, 2005.
2. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology
, McGraw
Hill Education (India) Ltd, 2007.
3. Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology, Kluwer publishers, 2002.
4. B. Wang, Drug Delivery: Principles and Applications,Wiley Interscience 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nanost
ructuring
Techniques, Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.2004.
2. William Goddard, Donald .W.Brenner, Handbook of Nano Science Engineering and
Technology,
CRC Press, 2004.
3. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, 2004.
4. Charles P Poole, Frank J Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley an
d Sons, 2003.
5. Mark Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next
Big Idea, Prentice
Hall, 2003.
11O0PB LASER TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To impart knowledge on laser principles.
. To create expertise on the applications of laser in various engineering fields
.
. At the end of the course the students are familiar with generation and applica
tions of laser in
various engineering fields.
Programme Outcome
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
. Summarize the principle, theory, operations and types of laser.
. Invrstigate the various techniques involved in the laser materials and the per
formance of laser.
. Apply different types of lasers for day to day applications.
. Interpret the applications of lasers towards industrial and medical fields.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
.The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examinatio
n will be converted to 20.
Remember
1. What is a laser? How the basic laser action is achieved?
2. Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3. What is population inversion?
4. Mention the important characteristics of laser.
5. How four level laser is more efficient than the three level laser?
6. What is a resonant cavity?
7. What role does an optical resonant cavity play in a laser?
8. What are the host materials for solid lasers?
9. Mention the different techniques involved in lasers.
10. Define atmospheric effect.
11. How will you measure the distance using laser?
12. What is the basic principle behind the holography?
13. Mention the medical applications of lasers.
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Write the conditions needed for laser action.

What is meant by pumping of atoms?
How optical excitation occurs in three level lasers?
What is the principle of laser action?
Compare the activator and host materials for solid lasers.
Distinguish between Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques.
How will you determine the velocity of laser source?
List the applications of laser in welding and cutting.
Why laser is called as non-material knife?
Apply
1. The first line of the principal series of sodium is the D line at 580 nm. Thi
s corresponds to a
transition from the first excited state (3p) to the ground state (3s). What is t
he energy in electron
volts of the first excited state?
2. What is the ratio of the stimulated emission and spontaneous emission at a te
mperature of 250oC
for the sodium D line?
3. Calculate the threshold condition for the ruby laser in which the appropriate
parameters are as
follows: .o =4.3x 1014 Hz; ..o=1.5x1011 Hz; no= 1.76; tsp= 4.3x10-3 s;tphoton=6x
10-9s.
4. A He-Ne laser emits light at a wavelength of 632.8 nm and has an output power
of 2.3mW. How
many photons are emitted in each minute by this laser when operating?
5. Calculate the wavelength of emission from a GaAs semiconductor laser whose ba
nd gap energy is
1.44 eV.
Analyze
1. Why laser beam should be monochromatic?

2. How the population inversion happening in lasers?
3. Write the reaction for eximer laser action.
4. Which method is used to achieve population inversion in a dye laser?
5. Why we cannot use ordinary light source for LIDAR?
6. How the optical disk data storage plays a vital role in computer memory stora
ges?
Evaluate
1. The life time of the excited state (2p) for spontaneous emission is 1.6x 10-9
s. The energy
difference between the excited state (2p) and the ground state (2s) is 10.2eV. F
ind the value of
stimulated emission coefficient during a transition from an excited state (2p) t
o the ground state.
2. A laser beam can be focused on an area equal to the square of its wavelength
(.2). For a He-Ne
laser, . = 6328.. If the laser radiates energy at the rate of 1mW, find the inte
nsity of the focused
beam.
3. Transition occurs between a metastable state E3 and an energy state E2 just a
bove the ground state.
If emission is at 1.1m and E2= 0.4x10-19J, find the energy of the E3 state.
Unit I
Laser fundamentals
Introduction - principle - spontaneous emission - stimulated emission - populati
on inversion-Pumping
mechanisms - characteristics. Types of lasers principle, construction, working, e
nergy level diagram and
applications of dye laser chemical laser excimer laser.
Laser action.
9 Hours
Unit II
Threshold condition
Einstein coefficients A and B
e of laser action laser
oscillations resonant cavity
spontaneous life time
light amplification
principl
modes of a laser.
Conditions involved in laser production.

9 Hours
Unit III
Laser materials
Activator and host materials for solid lasers - growth techniques for solid lase
r materials - Bridgman and
Stock-Berger technique advantages and disadvantages - Czochralski and Kyropoulou
s techniques
merits and demerits.
Techniques of producing laser.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Laser in science
Introduction harmonic generation
stimulated raman emission
nd ether drift
rotation of the earth
photon statistics.
self focusing
laser a
Applications of Laser in ranging

9 Hours
Unit V
Laser in industry
Introduction
Applications in material processing: laser welding
hole drilling
la
ser cutting
laser
tracking Lidar
laser in medicine.
Applications of Laser in sensors.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. K.Thiyagarajan and A.K.Ghatak, LASER:Theory and applications. Macmillan India

Limited,
2000.
2. M. N. Avadhanulu, An Introduction To Lasers Theory And Applications,S. Chand
Publisher, 2001.
Reference(s)
1. K.P.R.Nair, Atoms, Molecules and Lasers, Narosa Publishing House, 2009.

2. K. R. Nambiar,Lasers: Principles Types And Applications , New Age Internation
al Publications,
2006.
3. AlphanSennaroglu, Solid-State Lasers and Applications,CRC Press, 2006
4. Bela A Lengyel, Introduction to Laser Physics, John Wiley and Sons, 1966.
11O0PC Electro Optic Materials
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To impart knowledge on electro-optic materials.
. To develop fundamental understanding of various electro-optic materials in com
munication.
Programme Outcome
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
.
.
.
.
Summarize the mechanism involved in the laser action.

Explain birefringence and optical property of the materials.
Classify the special optical properties of the opto electronic systems.
Design electro optic modulators for day to day applications.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Define laser action.

Give the properties of LASER.
Differentiate between stimulated and spontaneous emissions.
Define continuous and discrete time signals.
Define anisotropic media.
What is an acoustic optic effect?
Define a liquid crystal.
Mention the different types of polarizing devices.
9. Give examples for direct and indirect band gap materials.

10. Highlight the usage of a NLO material.
Understand
1. How the population inversion state in laser is achieved?
2. Give examples for continuous and discrete time signals.
3. Elucidate the importance of coherence in laser action.
4. Why birefringence property in an optical material is formed?
5. In which effect KDP crystal is working?
6. How the codirectional coupling occurs?
7. List out the conditions in which the NLO property of a material emerges.
8. What is the purpose of switching to quantum mechanics from classical mechanic
s?
9. Why we prefer LCD displays rather than CRT displays?
10. What are the advantages of injection laser diode?
Apply
1. Find the intensity of a laser beam of 10mW power and having a diameter of 1.
3 mm. Assume the
intensity to be uniform across the beam. Given: P=10mW, d= 1.3 mm.
2. Discuss the three level pumping scheme for laser action.
3. Why is the optical resonator required in lasers?
4. Where can we find the practical applications of wave plates?
5. How to elevate the contrast ratio in display devices which uses in the nemat
ic structures?
6. Non linearity in glasses occurs. Justify the argument.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compare ordinary and laser light properties.

Differentiate wave refractive index and ray refractive index.
Differentiate longitudinal and transverse electro optic effects.
Bring out the importance of electro optic devices.
Unit I
Basics of Lasers
Introduction
Einstein coefficients
laser beam characteristics
spontaneous and st
imulated emission
population inversion - light amplification threshold condition
laser rate equati
ons two level laser
three level laser mode selection transverse mode
longitudinal mode.
Spatial and temporal coherence.
9 Hours
Unit II
Wave Propagation in Anisotropic Media
Introduction
double refraction
polarization devices - Nicol prism
rism retardation
plates Soleil Babinet compensator
Plane waves in anisotropic media
ve index - ray
refractive index - ray velocity surface
index ellipsoid.
Glan-Thomson p
wave refracti
Optical activity.
9 Hours
Unit III
Electro Optic Effect
Introduction KDP crystals
longitudinal mode
phase modulation amplitude modulatio
n transverse
mode. Acousto-optic effect
small Bragg angle diffraction
large Bragg angle diffr
action codirectional
coupling contradirectional coupling - applications.
Modulators.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Non Linear Optics
Introduction
self focusing phenomenon
second harmonic generation phase matching
birefringent
phase matching quasi phase matching
frequency mixing. Semiconductors measurement
of third order
optical non-linearities in semiconductors.
Frequency doubling nature of materials.
9 Hours
Unit V
Electro Optic Devices
Introduction
light emitting diode
direct and indirect band gap materials homo ju
nction hetero
junction advantages
disadvantages
applications. Injection laser diode
characteri
stics advantages
disadvantages. Liquid crystal displays
dynamic scattering
field effect advantage
s disadvantages.
Optoelectronic devices.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical electronics, Cambridge University Pre
ss, 7th reprint
2006.
2. B. Somanathan Nair, Electronic devices and applications, Prentice - Hall of I
ndia private limited,
2010.
3. Frank L. Pedrotti, S. J. Leno S. Pedrotti and Leno M. Pedrotti, Introduction
to optics, Pearson
Prentice Hall, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. Ji - ping Huang and K.M.Yu, New Non Linear Optical Materials, Nova, Science P
ublishers, 2007.
2. J .D. Wright, Molecular crystals, Cambridge university press, 2nd edition, 19
95.
3. R .W. Munn (Ed) and C. N. Ironsid, Molecular crystals, Blackie Academic & Pro
fessional,
Glassgow, 1993.
11O0PD VACUUM SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To impart a sound knowledge on the vacuum science.
. To develop the necessary background to perform projects involving vacuum and d
eposition
techniques.
. At the end of the course the students are familiar with the various vacuum dep
osition technologies
employed in the various engineering fields.
Programme Outcome
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
. Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, computer programming and engineering.
. Summarize the fundamentals of vacuum technology.
. Analyze the various measuring instruments in order to measure vacuum.
. Compare the components used for generating low and ultra high vacuum.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. Define the term mean free path.
2. Give the pressure ranges of low and medium vacuum.
3. State Avogadro s law.

4. List out the assumptions of kinetic theory.
5. What are the types of pump used to create vacuum?
6. What are the gauges that are used to measure the vacuum?
7. Name the direct reading gauges and indirect reading gauges.
8. Name the operation limits of penning gauge.
9. Name the ultra high vacuum gauges.
10. List out the methods of leak detection.
11. Give the importance of baffles and traps.
12. Mention the gauges that can measure ultra high vacuum.
13. Define throughput.
14. Give the Ohm s law of vacuum technology.
15. Name the sorbent materials that have widespread use in vacuum production.
Understand
1. How will you measure the pumping speed in a vacuum unit?
2. How will you seal the substance outside to maintain high vacuum?
3. Why does constant volume method have the disadvantage in measuring the pumpin
g speed?
4. Differentiate between the pirani gauge and penning gauge.
5. Differentiate the primary gauges from secondary gauges.
6. How is the pumping speed measured?
7. How does a rotary pump produce a low pressure?
8. Derive the relation between the effective pumping speed and conductance of th
e evacuation pipe.
9. Explain the designing of UHV evacuation systems.
10. How are the vacuum surfaces cleaned?
Apply
1. How will you deposit the material from the plasma etching method?
2. Why is cold cathode ionization gauges preferred to hot cathode gauges?
3. Explain the applications of turbomolecular pump.
4. A vacuum chamber has a volume of 100 litres and an operating gas load of 7.5
x 10-5 torr-lites/sec.
The desired operating pressure is 7.5 x 10-8 Torr. Connections between the chamb
er and diffusion
pump and the diffusion pump and rotary pump are to meet good design practice (as
sume
SE/SD=1/5). Calculate the pumping speed at the chamber, the minimum connecting p
ipe
conductance and the minimum speed required for the backing pump together with th
e minimum
diffusion pump speed required to meet these requirements.
5. Surface to volume ratio plays a major role in pumping systems. Why?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Why is the diffusion pump widely used in scientific instruments?
2. Oil diffusion pump system can be used as a high vacuum pumping system. Why?
3. Compare real and virtual leaks.
Unit I
Vacuum Systems
Introduction
units of vacuum
kinetic aspects of gases in a vacuum chamber physi
cal parameters at
low pressures
classification of vacuum ranges
gas flow at low pressures
throughp
ut and pumping
speed flow rate and conductance.
Evacuation rate
out gassing
gas flow
turbulent flow.
9 Hours
Unit II
Production of Vacuum
Classification of vacuum pumps rotary vane pumps
roots blowers
diffusion pumps
m
olecular drag
and turbo-molecular pumps
sorption pumps gettering and ion pumping
cryopumping m
easurement of
pumping speed.
Noble pumps for inert gases.
9 Hours
Unit III
Pressure Measurement
Classification of gauges
ges Hot
cathode ionization gauges
enning gauge
magnetron gauge.
mechanical gauges
McLeod gauge
Bayard - Alpert gauge
Measurement problems in partial pressure analysis.

9 Hours
thermal conductivity gau
cold cathode ionization gauges
Unit IV
Vacuum Materials and Leak Detection
Sources of gases and vapours
materials for vacuum system
ves traps and
baffles
leak detection pressure test
spark-coil test
auges
halogen leak
detector mass-spectrometric leak detector.
Special design considerations
h.
glass to metal seals
vacuum seals
vacuum val
leak testing using vacuum g
high voltage metal feedthroug
9 Hours
Unit V
Applications of Vacuum Systems
Design considerations
vacuum system for surface analysis
based coating units for thin film deposition

ess chemical vapor
deposition - metallurgical applications.
Plasma etching
pulsed vapour deposition
space simulators
thermal evaporation
vacuum
sputtering proc
PE chemical vapour deposition.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rao V.V, Ghosh T.B, Chopra K.L, Vacuum science and technology., Allied Publish
ers Limited,
2005.
2. Dorothy M. Hoffman, John H. Thomas, Bawa Singh, Handbook of Vacuum science and
technology ,
Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 1997.

Reference(s)
1.David M. Hata, Introduction to vacuum technology , Pearson Printice Hall, 2007.
2.John F. O'Hanlon,
3.Chambers.A,
A user s guide to vacuum technology., John Wiley & Sons, 2003.
Modern vacuum physics , Chapman & Hall, CRC Press, 2005.
11O0PE SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To improve knowledge on semiconducting materials.
. To develop the necessary understanding of semiconducting materials and their a
pplications.
. At the end of the course the students are familiar with various semiconducting
materials and their
applications
Programme Outcome
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
. Summarize the mechanism involved in semiconductors..
. Implement the features of transistors for day to day applications.
. Design semiconducting devices for industrial applications.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test 1.
Test 2.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
20
20
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
15
15
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
.The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examinatio
n will be converted to 20.
Remember
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
What properties are desirable in semiconductors?

Explain the Kronig-Penny model.
Define drift current density.
What is meant by breakdown?
Explain the minority carrier distribution in p-n junction diode.
Define temperature effect.
What is the basic principle of bipolar junction transistor?
Define current crowding.
9. What are optoelectronic devices?

10. Describe the operation of a laser diode.
Understand
1. How does conductivity of a semiconductor change with rise in its temperature?
2. How does the thickness of the depletion layer in a p-n junction vary with inc
rease in reverse bias?
3. How does the energy gap in an intrinsic semiconductor vary, when doped with a
pentavalent
impurity?
4. Explain the mobility effects on carrier density.
5. What do you understand by the term .holes. in a semiconductor? Explain how th
ey move under
the influence of electric field.
6. What is the a.c response of the p-n diode?
7. How the solar cell is functioning?
Apply
1. In general what is the relation between density of states and energy?

2. What is meant by the term, doping of an intrinsic semiconductor?
3. Give the ratio of the number of holes and the number of conduction electrons
in an intrinsic
semiconductor.
4. Write the function of base region of a bipolar junction transistor.
5. Sketch the energy bands of a forward-biased degenerately doped pn junction an
d indicate how
population inversion occurs.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. What types of charge-carriers are there in a n-type semi conductor?
2. What are the disadvantages of using laser diode?
3. What are the defect levels in semiconductors?
4. Consider an optical cavity. If N>>1, show that the wavelength separation betw
een two adjacent
resonant modes is ..=.2/2L.
Unit I
Properties of Semiconductor
Energy bands
allowed and forbidden energy bands
Kronig Penny model electrical co
nductivity in
solids based on energy bands - band model
electron effective mass
concept of hol
es in semiconductor
density of states extension to semiconductors.
k-space diagram.
9 Hours
Unit II
Carrier Transport Properties
Carrier drift drift current density
mobility effects on carrier density
conducti
vity in semiconductor
carrier transport by diffusion diffusion current density
total current density
b
reakdown phenomena
avalanche breakdown.
Graded Impurity Distribution.
9 Hours
Unit III
P-N Junction Diode
Qualitative description of charge flow in p-n junction
boundary condition
minori
ty carrier distribution
ideal p-n junction current temperature effects
applications
the turn on transien
t and turn off transient.
Charge storage and diode Transients.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Bipolar Junction Transistor
Introduction to basic principle of operation
the modes of operation
amplificatio
n minority carrier
distribution in forward active mode
non-ideal effects
base with modulation high
injection emitter
band gap narrowing current clouding
breakdown voltage
voltage in open emitter co
nfiguration and
open base configuration
Frequency Limitations.
9Hours
Unit V
Opto Electronic Devices
Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient electron ho
le pair generation - solar
cell homo junction and heterojunction - Photo transistor
laser diode, the optica
l cavity, optical
absorption, loss and gain - threshold current.
Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Donald A Neamen, Semiconductor physics and devices , Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
2. Albert Malvino,David JBafes, Electronic Principles , Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
Reference(s)
1. Kevin F Brennan, The Physics of Semiconductors, Cambridge University Press, 1
999.
2. MichealShur, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Prentice Hall of India, 1999.
3. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics Physics and Technology, McGraw H
ill Co., 1998.
11O0YA POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of polymer science, c
hemistry of
polymers and its processing.
. To make understand the principles and applications of advanced polymer materia
ls.
. Knowledge and application of different polymers and its processing.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
. Summarize the of principles of polymer chemistry and mechanism of polymerizati
on
reactions.
. Compare the polymerization techniques.
. Apply the contextual knowledge of polymer additives and polymer processing in
industrial
application.
Assessment pattern
S.No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I.
Test II.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
will be calculated for 50 marks.
Remember
1. What properties are desirable in semiconductors?

2. Explain the Kronig-Penny model.
3. Define drift current density.
4. What is meant by breakdown?
5. Explain the minority carrier distribution in p-n junction diode.
6. Define temperature effect.
7. What is the basic principle of bipolar junction transistor?
8. Define current crowding.
9. What are optoelectronic devices?
10. Describe the operation of a laser diode.
Understand
1. How does conductivity of a semiconductor change with rise in its temperature?
2. How does the thickness of the depletion layer in a p-n junction vary with inc
rease in reverse bias?
3. How does the energy gap in an intrinsic semiconductor vary, when doped with a
pentavalent
impurity?
4. Explain the mobility effects on carrier density.
5. What do you understand by the term .holes. in a semiconductor? Explain how th
ey move under
the influence of electric field.
6. What is the a.c response of the p-n diode?
7. How the solar cell is functioning?
Apply
6. In general what is the relation between density of states and energy?

7. What is meant by the term, doping of an intrinsic semiconductor?
8. Give the ratio of the number of holes and the number of conduction electrons
in an intrinsic
semiconductor.
9. Write the function of base region of a bipolar junction transistor.
10. Sketch the energy bands of a forward-biased degenerately doped pn junction a
nd indicate how
population inversion occurs.
Analyze/ Evaluate
5. What types of charge-carriers are there in a n-type semi conductor?
6. What are the disadvantages of using laser diode?
7. What are the defect levels in semiconductors?
8. Consider an optical cavity. If N>>1, show that the wavelength separation betw
een two adjacent
resonant modes is ..=.2/2L.
Unit I
Principles of Polymer Science
Polymerization reactions - types
examples - degree of polymerization and average
molecular weights.
Thermoplastics and thermosetting resins - examples. Electrical - mechanical - th
ermal properties related to
chemical structure. Insulating materials - polymer alloys - composites.
Importance of glass transition temperature.
9 Hours
Unit II
Polymerization Mechanism
Addition polymerization - free radical mechanism - cationic and anionic polymeri
zation - copolymerization
- condensation polymerization nylon 6,6, ring opening polymerization nylon 6, coor
dination
polymerization -. Preparation, properties and industrial applications of polysty
rene and bakelite.
Application of industrial polymers.
9 Hours
Unit III
Polymerization Techniques
Homogeneous and heterogeneous polymerization bulk polymerization- PMMA,PVC, solu
tion
polymerization - polyacrylic acid, suspension polymerization-preparation of ion
exchange resins, emulsion
polymerization-synthetic rubber. Melt solution and interfacial polycondensation.
Salient features,
advantages and disadvantages of bulk and emulsion polymerization.
Preparation of biodegradable polymers.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Additives for Polymers

Moulding constituents-fillers, plasticizers, lubricants, anti-aging additives, a
ntioxidants, antiozonants, UV
stabilizers, flame retardants, colorants, blow agents, crosslinking agents -func
tions-significance with
suitable examples and applications in industrial processing.
Ecofriendly sustainable additives.
9 Hours
Unit V
Polymer Processing
Compression
injection - extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting - calendering
. Thermoforming and
vacuum formed polystyrene, foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning - melt, dry and
wet spinning.
Composite fabrication - hand-layup - filament winding and pultrusion.
Application of fibre reinforced plastics.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New
Age
International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Lt
d., 2005.
Reference(s)
1. F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2
007.
2. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002.
3. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 200
4.
4. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Nelson Thornes Ltd.,
2002.
11O0YB ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To make students understand the concept and working of different types of batt
eries and to
analyze batteries used in electric vehicles.
. To make students learn about the concept of fuel cells, its types and to relat
e the factors of energy
and environment.
. Students develop the skill of analyzing various energy storing devices and fue
l cells at the end of
the semester.
Programme Outcome
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome(s)
. Compare the various energy storing devices.
. Analyze the working of different types of primary and secondary batteries.
. Apply the knowledge for development of eco friendly energy sources.
Assessment Pattern
S.No.
Bloom s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I.
Test II.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
10
10
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
30
30
30
30
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
will be calculated for 50 marks.
Remember
1. What are dry cells?
2. What are alkaline batteries?
3. State Ohms law.
4. Write the functions of ultra-capacitor.
5. Is lead acid battery thermodynamically reversible cell?
6. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
7. Name the electrolyte present in the Li battery.
8. Mention the role of heart pacemaker in cardiology.
9. Classify the types of fuel cell.
10. Differentiate between diode and electrode.
11. What is meant by redox reaction?
12. What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell?
13. Name the factors which are affecting the efficiency of fuel cell.
14. What are eco-friendly cell?
Understand
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
How do you assess the life cycle of fuel cells?

What is the role of impurities in photovoltaic cells?
How do you convert the chemical energy into electrical energy?
Suggest any two secondary storage devices for automobiles.
What types of cells are used in space applications?
Construct the alkaline fuel cell.
How do you harvest the energy from tides?
What are natural geysers?
Differentiate between photo electrochemical and photovoltaic cells.
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What are passive solar heat collectors?

What are active solar heat collectors?
Lithium battery is the cell of future - Justify.
Write the anodic reaction and cathodic reactions of NICAD battery.
Is the dry cell follows thermodynamic reversibility rule?
What types of vehicles typically use methanol?
What are the economic impacts of using hybrid electric vehicles?
Analyze / Evaluate
1.
ke
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
How does a fuel cell differ from traditional methods of energy generation (li
batteries)?
What are the feedstocks can be used to make biodiesel?
What is DuPont s experience in fuel cells?
How the biomass is converted into biofuel?
What are the effects of gasoline and ethanol emissions on the environment?
What are the effects of diesel and biodiesel emissions on the environment?
How do you obtain ethanol from lignocellulosic biomass?
What is meant by green technology?
Unit I
Batteries
Characteristics - voltage, current, capacity, electricity storage density, power
, discharge rate, cycle life,
energy efficiency, shelf life. Primary batteries- zinc-carbon, magnesium, alkali
ne, manganous dioxide,
mercuric oxide, silver oxide batteries-Recycling/Safe disposal of used cells.
Document the various batteries and its characteristics used in mobile phones and
lap tops.
9 Hours
Unit II
Batteries for Electric Vehicles
Secondary batteries- Introduction, cell reactions, cell representations and appl
ications- lead acid, nickelcadmium and lithium ion batteries - rechargeable zinc alkaline battery. Reserve
batteries: Zinc-silver oxide,
lithium anode cell, photogalvanic cells. Battery specifications for cars and aut
omobiles.
Development of batteries for satellites.
9 Hours
Unit III
Types of Fuel Cells
Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, working principle, co
mponents, applications and
environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells,
phosphoric acid, solid oxide,
molten carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells.
Fuel cells for space applications.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Hydrogen as a Fuel
Sources of hydrogen
production of hydrogen- electrolysis- photo catalytic water
splitting biomass
pyrolysis -gas clean up
methods of hydrogen storage- high pressurized gas -liqui
d hydrogen type -metal
hydride hydrogen as engine fuel
features, application of hydrogen technologies i
n the futurelimitations.
Cryogenic fuels.
9 Hours
Unit V
Energy and Environment
Future prospects-renewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels
economy of h
ydrogen energy life
cycle assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: Energy conversion devices, p
hotovoltaic and photo
electrochemical cells
photo biochemical conversion cell.
Bio-fuels from natural resources.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications

, University Press,
India, 2006.
2. F. Barbir, PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice,Elsevier, Burlington, MA, 2005
.
3. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of
Chemistry, 2001.
Reference(s)
1. M. A. Christopher Brett, Electrochemistry: Principles, Methods and Applicatio

ns, Oxford
University, 2004.
2. J. S. Newman and K. E. Thomas-Alyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken,
NJ, 2004.
3. G. Hoogers, Fuel Cell Handbook, CRC, Boca Raton, FL, 2003.
4. Lindon David, Handbook of Batteries, McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. H. A. Kiehne , Battery Technology Hand Book,. Expert Verlag , Renningen Malsh
eim, 2003.
11O0YC CHEMISTRY OF NANOMATERIALS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of nanochemistry incl

uding synthesis.
. To make students understand the principles and applications of nanomaterials.
. Knowledge about the characterization and applications of nanomaterials.
Programme Outcome
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome(s)

. Explain the fundamentals of nanoscience and technology .
. Acquire comprehensive knowledge in the synthetic methods for the nanoparticles
preparation .
. Get strong foundation in the properties of nanoparticles which give contextual
knowledge for their
higher research programmes .
Assessment Pattern
S.No.
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I.
Test II.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100

Remember
1. What do you mean by nano?
2. Define nanotechnology.
3. Define nanoscience.
4. Define top down and bottom up approach.
5. Define nanostructured material. Classify nanomaterials and give examples for
them.
6. List any four day to day commercial applications of nanotechnology.
7. Write down any four challenges that are faced by researchers in nanotechnolog
y.
8. Define carbon nanotube.
9. Define bucky ball.
10. Define nanocomposite. What are the types of nanocomposites?
11. List any four material characterization techniques.
12. List any four bottom up approaches for the synthesis of nanopowders.
13. What is biomimetic approach?
14. Explain Feynman s statement.
15. What is the dimension of quantum dot?
16. Explain the principle behind lithography.
17. Mention the different types of lithography.
18. What is meant by photolithography?
19. Explain the principle behind vapour phase deposition.
20. What is meant by chemical vapour deposition?
21. Explain sputtering.
22. What is meant by plasma enhanced CVD?
23. What is meant by bubblers?
24. Explain the principle behind MOVPE.
25. What are colloids?
26. What is nanosafety?
27. What is meant by surface induced effect?
28. How are nanomaterials defined?
29. What are the uses of nanoparticles in consumer products?
Understand
1. What is the difference between nanoscience and nanotechnology?
2. When and where Feynman delivered his lecture on nanotechnology and what is th
e name of his
classical lecture?
3. What are the induced effects due to increase in surface area of nanoparticles
?
4. What are the advantages and disadvantages in mechanical synthesis of nanopowd
ers?
5. What are the characteristics of nanoparticles that should be possesed by any
fabrication technique?
6. On what principle mechanical milling is based on?
7. How is LPE used to obtain nanowire or nanorods?
8. How is the template used to obtain nanowire or nanorods?
9. What is the role of nanotechnology in water purification?
10. Differentiate self-assembly from self-organisation.
11. How nanoparticles are stored?
12. List the important physical and chemical properties of nanomaterials?
13. How are nanomaterials detected and analysed?
14. How are nanomaterials prepared for biological testing?
15. What are the physical and chemical properties of nanoparticles?
16. How are nanoparticles formed?

17. Discuss the health effects of nanoparticles?
Apply
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Why do we want nanotechnology in our life?

What is the role of nanotechnology in medicinal field?
Expand AFM.
What is the grain size range of nanostructure materials?
Differentiate top-down from bottom-up approach needed for nanosynthesis.
Why do nanostructured particles find potential applications?
How nanostructured particles are used in health applications?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare the relative merits of chemical, physical, biological and hybrid meth
ods for the
preparation of nanomaterials.
2. Compare the relative merits of the usage of photons and particles in lithogra
phy.
3. Differentiate glow discharge from RF sputtering.
4. How can we reduce/save our energy resources by using nanotechnology?
5. What is the relation between properties and applications of nanoparticles?
6. What is the current status of nanoscience and nanotechnology?
7. What are the potential harmful effects of nanoparticles?
Unit I
Nanoworld
Introduction
History of nanomaterials
concepts of nanomaterials
size and confine
ment effects
nanoscience
nanotechnology Moor s law. Properties
electronic, optical, magnetic, t
hermal,
mechanical and electrochemical properties. Nanobiotechnology molecular motors
op
tical tweezers.
First industrial revolution to the nano revolution.
9 Hours
Unit II
Synthesis of Nanoparticles
Introduction hydrolysis-oxidation - thermolysis
metathesis - solvothermal method
s. Sonochemistry:
nanometals - powders of metallic nanoparticles - metallic colloids and alloys polymer metal composites metallic oxides - rare earth oxides - mesoporous materials - mixed oxides. Sono
electrochemistry nanocrystalline materials. Microwave heating - microwave synthesis of nanometall
ic particles.
Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials.

9 Hours
Unit III
Types and Functionalization of Nanomaterials
Polymer nanoparticles, micro, meso and nanoporous materials. Organic
inorganic h
ybrids, zeolites,
nanocomposites, self-assembled monolayers, semiconductor quantum dots, nanofibre
s, supramolecular
nanostructures. functionalization of nanomaterials stabilization methods. Reacti
vity of .-functional
groups on ligand shells.
Implications of nanoscience and nanotechnology on society.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Physical and Chemical Characterization
Electron microscopes: scanning electron microscope (SEM)
transmission electron m
icroscope (TEM)
atomic force microscope (AFM): working principle instrumentation
applications. U
V-visible
spectroscopy: principle
instrumentation (block diagram only) applications. FT-IR
spectroscopy:
introduction instrumentation (block diagram only)
applications merits and demerit
s.
Nanoscience and technology research institution.
9 Hours
Unit V
Applications of Nanomaterials
Nanocatalysis, colorants and pigments, self-cleaning
lotus effect, anti-reflecti
ve coatings, antibacterial
coatings, photocatalysis, nanofilters for air and water purifiers. Thermal insul
ation
aerogels, smart
sunglasses and transparent conducting oxides molecular sieves
nanosponges.
Harnessing nanotechnology for economic and social development.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. C N R Rao, Nanoworld An Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology, Jawaharla

l Nehru
centre for advanced scientific research, Bangalore, India, 2010.
2. C N R Rao, A Muller and A K Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthes
is, Properties
and Applications, Vol. 1 & 2, John-Wiley and Sons, 2005.
3. T Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology
, 1st Edn., Tata
Mcgraw Hill publishing company, 2007.
Reference(s)
1. Geoffrey A Ozin, Andr C Arsenault , Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nano
materials,
Royal Society of Chemistry, 2009.
2. G B Sergeev, Nanochemistry, 1st Edn.,Elsevier, 2006.
3. S Chen, Functional Nanomaterials: A Chemistry and Engineering Perspective (Na
nostructure
Science And Technology), Springer,2010.
4. Yury Gogotsi, Nanomaterials Handbook, Taylor and Francis group, USA, 2006.
11O0YD CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
. To impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism.
. To make students understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosio
n testing and
monitoring.
. Students acquire the basic knowledge about corrosion and its control.
Programme Outcome
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome(s)
. Explain the fundamentals of corrosion science and technology.
. Identify, formulate and solve corrosion based problems .
. Summarize the procedure for designing of engineering products with corrosion p
rotective
mode.
. Get strong foundations in the analytical part of corrosion science which give
contextual
knowledge to their higher research programmes
Assessment Pattern
S.No.
Bloom s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I.
Test II.
Model
Examination.
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
25
25
15
15
2
Understand
25
25
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
20
20
20
20
5
Evaluate
10
10
20
20
6
Create
Total
100
100
100
100
Remember
1. What is corrosion? What are the types of corrosion?
2. Define dry corrosion. Explain the mechanism.
3. Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion.
4. What are the units to measure corrosion rate?
5. Galvanic corrosion. Discuss.
6. Describe the Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their limitations.
7. List out the different forms of corrosion. Explain.
8. What are inhibitors?
9. Explain the mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation and its types.
10. Write the working principle of Tafel polarization techniques.
11. How polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion prod
ucts?
12. Define cathodic protection. List its types.
13. What are non-electrochemical and electrochemical methods of corrosion testin
g and monitoring?
14. What is Tafel linear polarization?
Understand
1. Explain why corrosion rate of metal is faster in aqueous solution than atmosp
here air?
2. What are the factors influencing the corrosion rate? Explain.
3. Discuss the Pilling-Bedworth rule.
4. Differentiate between electrochemical and dry corrosion.
5. How inhibitors are used to protect the corrosion rate of the metal? Explain.
6. What are consequences of Pilling-Bedworth ratio?
7. List the difference between filliform corrosion and pitting corrosion.
Apply
1. Compare the effects of corrosion products.
2. Why pitting corrosion is localized corrosion? Explain.
3. Describe alternatives to protective coatings.
4. Identify different forms of corrosion in the metal surface.
5. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals.
6. What are the measures to be taken to reduce corrosion fatiques?
7. What are the major implications of enhanced techniques of corrosion product a
nalysis?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. List reasons why it is important to study of corrosion.
2. How Tafel polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion
products?
3. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals?
Unit I
Introduction to Corrosion
Importance and cost of corrosion
spontaneity of corrosion
passivation - importan
ce of corrosion
prevention in various industries - the direct and indirect loss of corrosion- ga
lvanic corrosion: area
relationship in both active and passive states of metals - Pilling Bed worth rat
io and its consequences - units
of corrosion rate - mdd and mpy - importance of pitting factor - Pourbaix digram
s of Mg, Al and Fe and
their advantages and disadvantages.
Corrosion of metals by other gases.
9 Hours
Unit II
Forms of Corrosion
Different forms of corrosion - uniform corrosion-galvanic corrosion, crevice cor
rosion, pitting corrosion,
intergranular corrosion, selective leaching, erosion corrosion, stress corrosion
- high temperature oxidation,
kinetics of protective film formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion.
Industrial boiler corrosion, cathodic and anodic inhibitors
9 Hours
Unit III
Mechanisms of Corrosion
Hydrogen embrittlement- cracking, corrosion fatigue - filliform corrosion, frett

ing damage and microbes
induced corrosion. Mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation - thick layer
and thin layer - insitu
corrosion scale analysis.
Analyze the rust formation in mild steel using weight loss method
9 Hours
Unit IV
Cathodic and Anodic Protection Engineering
Fundamentals of cathodic protection - types of cathodic protection systems and a
nodes. Life time
calculations - rectifier selection. Stray current corrosion problems and its pre
vention. Coating for various
cathodic protection system and their assessment- inhibitors - corrosion of steel
s. Anodic protection-Design
for corrosion control.
Role of paints and pigments to protect the corrosive environment
9 Hours
Unit V
Corrosion Testing and Monitoring
Corrosion testing and monitoring - electrochemical methods of polarization- Tafe
l extrapolation
polarization, linear polarization, impedance techniques-Weight loss method - sus
ceptibility test
testing for
intergranular susceptibility and stress corrosion.
Analyze the instruments for monitoring the corrosion.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Zaki Ahmad, Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control, Elsevi
er Science and
Technology Books, 2006.
2. R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An I
ntroduction to
Corrosion Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Science, 2008.
3. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. ASM Hand Book, Vol. 13, Corrosion, ASM International, 2005.
2. Pierre R. Roberge, Hand Book of Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill, New York,
2000.
3. Denny A. Jones, Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice Hall Inc., 2
004.
4. A.W. Peabody, Control of Pipeline Corrosion, NACE International, Houston, 200
1.
11O001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I

3 0 0 3.0
Course Objective(s)
. To gain knowledge on basics of Entrepreneurship
. To gain knowledge of business entity, source of capital and financially evalua
te the project
. To gain knowledge on production and manufacturing system.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome(s)
1. Develop the entrepreneurial thinking .
2. Acquire Innovative ideas and understand the legal aspects to develop business
3. Understand the finance and cash flow for planning operations
Assessment pattern
S. No.
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
20
20
20
20
2
Understand
20
20
20
20
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
10
10
5
Evaluate
20
20
20
20
6
Create
10
10
10
10
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Mod
el Examination will
be converted to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based
on assignments.
Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
Remember
1. What is entrepreneurship?
2. What are the factors that motivate people to go into business?
3. Define a small-scale industry.
4. Define tiny industry.
5. Who is an intrapreneur?
6. State functions of SISI.
7. What is serial entrepreneur?
8. What is Technopreneurship?
9. What is reversal method?
10. What is brainstorming?
11. What do you mean by term business idea?
12. Mention any two schemes Indian government provides to the development of ent
repreneurship.
13. What is a project report?
14. What is project scheduling?
15. Mention any four techniques available for project scheduling.
16. What is contract act?
17. Define MOU.
18. What are al the types of sources of finance for an entrepreneur?
19. Mention any five external sources of finance to an entrepreneur.
20. Classify the financial needs of an organization.
21. What is short term finance?
22. What is return on capital?
23. What is capital budgeting?
24. What is product design?
25. What is quality council?
26. What is inventory?
27. What is lean manufacturing?
Understand
1. Why is entrepreneurship important of growth of a nation?
2. Mention the essential quality required for someone to be an entrepreneur.
3. Why is motivational theories important for an entrepreneur?
4. How is network analysis helpful to the development of an entrepreneur?
5. Mention the essential requirements for a virtual capital.
6. How under-capitalization affects an entrepreneur.
7. Differentiate proprietorship and partnership.
8. Mention the causes of dissolution of a firm.
9. How important is the support of IDBI to an entrepreneur?
10. What are the salient features of New Small Enterprise Policy, 1991?
11. Why scheduling is very important for a production design?
Apply / Evaluate
1. If you want to become as an entrepreneur, what will be your idea?
2. Select any one of the creative idea generation method and suggest an innovati
on that you can
implement in your business.
3. Write a short notes on various legal aspects that you have to consider to run
you business.
4. How will you generate you capital and other financial supports?
5. In case of getting enough financial support, plan your business and plot the
various stages using
any of the tools or techniques.
Create
1. Draft a sample project report for your business.
2. Do a network analysis using PERT and CPM for your business plan.
3. Write a brief report to apply to a financial organization for seeking financi
al support to your
business.
Unit I
Basics of Entrepreneurship
Entrepreneurship Competence, Entrepreneurship as a career, Intrapreneurship, Soc
ial entrepreneurship,
Serial entrepreneurship (Cases), Technopreneurship.
Entrepreneurial Motivation
6 Hours
Unit II
Generation of Ideas
Creativity and Innovation (Cases), Lateral thinking, Generation of alternatives
(Cases), Fractionation,
Reversal Method, Brain storming
Utilization of Patent Databases
8 Hours
Unit III
Legal Aspects of Business
Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act, Negotiable Instruments
Promissory Note, Bills a
nd Cheques,
Partnership, Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Companies Act
Kinds, Formation
, Memorandum of
Association, Articles of Association (Cases).
Business Plan Writing
10 Hours
Unit IV
Business Finance
Project evaluation and investment criteria (Cases), Sources of finance, Financia
l statements, Break even
analysis, Cash flow analysis.
Calculation of Return on Investment
11 Hours
Unit V
Operations Management
Importance Functions Deciding on the production system
Facility decisions: Plant
location, Plant
Layout (Cases), Capacity requirement planning Inventory management (Cases) Lean
manufacturing.
Project Planning
10 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. Donald F. kuratko, Entrepreneurship

cengage
learnng, USA, 2009.
Theory, Process & Practice, South western
References
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New D

elhi, 2005.
2. Prasanna Chandra, Projects
Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation and
Reviews, Tata
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006.
4. Norman Gaither and Greg Frazier, Operations Management, Thomson Learning Inc,
2007.
5. Edward De Bono, Lateral Thinking, Penguin Books, 1990.
6. http://www.enterweb.org
7. http://www.internationalentrepreneurship.com/asia_entrepreneur/India_entrepre
neur.asp
8. http://indiakellogg.wordpress.com
11O002 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT II

3 0 0 3.0
Course Objective(s)
. Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services
. Handle the human resources and taxation
. Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a bus
iness plan.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO9
inary teams.
PO10
ommunity
reports and
structions.
PO11
and
s and in
PO12
Course Outcome
1. Understand the marketing and human resource management to enhance the busines
s.
2. Classify various business taxation
3. Understand the government support for business plan preparation
Assessment pattern
S. No.
Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1
Remember
30
30
30
30
2
Understand
30
30
25
25
3
Apply
20
20
20
20
4
Analyze
10
10
10
10
5
Evaluate
10
10
10
10
6
Create
--05
05
Total
100
100
100
100
The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Mo
del Examination will
be converted to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based
on assignments.
Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
Remember
1. Who are Fabian Entrepreneur?
2. Explain the Views on Schumpeter on Entrepreneurship?
3. Mention the three functions of NSIC?
4. Narrate the role of IDBI in the development of Entrepreneurship?
5. What are Project COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs)?
6. What are the stages in a Project Lifecycle?
7. Give the meaning of Feasibility Report?
8. Explain the objective of Entrepreneurial Training?
9. What is Motivating Training?
10. Who is a Small Scale Entrepreneur?
11. How to develop Rural Entrepreneur?
12. What are the Social Problems of Women Entrepreneur?
13. Differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship.
14. What are the types of entrepreneurs?
15. Explain the various qualities of entrepreneur.
16. Briefly explain the different merchant castes in India.
17. What is entrepreneurship training?
18. Discuss any three programmes supporting women entrepreneurs.
19. Write a note on the role of NISIET.
20. What are the challenges and opportunities available in SSI's?
Understand
1. Narrate any six differences between a Manager and an Entrepreneur?
2. Explain briefly various types of Entrepreneur?
3. What are the elements of EDP?
4. What is the role played the commercial banks in the development of Entreprene
ur?
5. How would you Classify Projects?
6. What are the stages in project Formulation?
7. What are the target groups of EDP?
8. What are the major problems faced by Small Entrepreneur?
9. What are the problems & prospects for women entrepreneur in India?
Apply / Evalute
1. Describe the various functions performed by Entrepreneurs?

2. Explain the role of different agencies in the development of Entrepreneur?
3. Discuss the criteria for selecting a particular project?
4. Describe the role of Entrepreneur in the Development of Country?
5. Define business idea. Elaborate the problems and opportunities for an entrepr
eneur.
6. Elaborate the schemes offered by Commercial banks for development of entrepre
neurship.
7. Explain the significant role played by DIC & SISI for the development of entr
epreneurship.
8. Design a short Entrepreneurship development programme for farmer
9. Discuss the role and importance of the following institutions in promoting, t

raining and developing
entrepreneurs in India:
Create
1. All economy is the effect for which entrepreneurship is the cause"-Discuss.
2. Review the entrepreneurial growth by the communities of south India.
3. What are the problems of Women entrepreneurs and discuss the ways to overcome
these
barriers?
4. Discuss the importance of small scale industries in India.
5. Critically examine the growth and development of ancillarisation in India.
6. Discuss the various sources and collection of credit information of entrepren
eurs.
7. Briefly explain the recommendation and policy implication for survival of SME
's.
8. Discuss the role of the Government both at the Central and State level in mot
ivating and
developing entrepreneurship in India.
9. .Developing countries like India need imitative entrepreneurs rather than inn
ovative
entrepreneurs.. Do you agree? Justify your answer with examples.
10. What are the reasons of very few women becoming entrepreneurs in a developin
g country like
India? Whether Indian women entrepreneurs have now made an impact and shown that
they too
can contribute in economic development of the country? Discuss with examples.
11. Discuss the .Culture of Entrepreneurship. and its role in economic developme
nt of a nation. What
factors contribute to nurturing such a culture?
Unit I
Marketing Management
Formulating Marketing strategies, The marketing plan, Deciding on the marketing
mix (Cases), Interactive
marketing, Marketing through social networks, Below the line marketing, Internat
ional marketing - Modes
of Entry, Strategies (Cases).
Five P's of marketing, SSI Policy Statement
10 Hours
Unit II
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Developmen
t, HRIS, Factories
Act 1948 (an over view)
Global Trends in Human Resource Management
10 Hours
Unit III
Business Taxation
Direct taxation
Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Profes
sional tax (Cases).
Indirect taxation Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST(
Cases)
Recent Trends for a Troubled Tax, professional tax slab
8 Hours
Unit IV
Government Support
Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute and Agenci
es, State Level Institutions,
Financial Institution
Global Entrepreneurship Monitor, Excise Exemption Scheme
7 Hours
Unit V
Business Plan Preparation
Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Produ
ction plan, HR plan, Market
survey and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, S
WOT analysis.
Small Industry Cluster Development Programme, National Equity Fund Scheme
10 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. S. S. Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005
2. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
3. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management
Text and Cases, Tata
McGrawHill, 2007
4. P. C. Jain, Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, Ne
w Delhi, 2002
5. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006
6. http://niesbud.nic.in/agencies.htm
7. http://www.planware.org/businessplan.htm
8. http://www.nenonline.org
9. www.forbes.com/managing
10. www.bizplanprep.com
11. http://business.gov.in/enterprises/govt_support.php
11N0XA COMMISSIONING OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To impart necessary knowledge in commissioning of various control system
. To understand the concepts of commissioning protocols
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO5
modern
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8

and norms of
PO12
Course Outcome
1. Apply the knowledge to commission a simple realtime control system
Introduction to commissioning- need for commissioning- commissioning fundamental

s-quality assurance
program- DDC validation- DDC system- benefits and impacts- commissioning team- c
ommissioning agentcommissioning protocol - initialization requirements - test equipment - function
al tests
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Mary S. Nardone, Direct Digital Control Systems: Application, Commissioning,

Kluwer academic
publishers, 2000
2. http://www.ci.seattle.wa.us/light/conserve/business/bdgcoma/cv6_bcam.html
3. http://www.energy.iastate.edu/ddc_online/intro/index.html
11N0XB HOOKUP DIAGRAM

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To give basic knowledge in obtaining the hookup diagram for different transmit
ters
. To design and implementation of hookup diagram concepts for different applicat
ions
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome
1. Design and implement the hookup diagram concepts for different applications.
Material selection for Installation

Hookup diagram for pressure transmitters: st
eam, gas and liquid
pressure transmitters -Hookup diagram for Level transmitter, calculation for lev
el and pressure transmitters
Hookup diagram for flow transmitters: steam, gas and liquid flow transmitters- I
nstallation of vortex and
magnetic flow meter -Hookup diagram for Temperature Transmitter
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Hook-up Designs for Steam & Fluid Systems, Spirax Sacro, Inc., 2004.
11N0XC INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To acquire basic concepts in artificial intelligence

. To provide basic set of search algorithms
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation

PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e

sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern
PO12
Course Outcome
1. Apply artificial intelligence to engineering proreblems
Introduction- intelligent agents

problem solving: solving problem by searching,
informed search and
exploration, constraint satisfaction
knowledge and reasoning: logical agents, fi
rst order logic, inference in
first order logic, knowledge representation
Uncertainty knowledge and knowledge:
uncertainty,
probabilistic reasoning Learning: Learning from observation, knowledge learning,
statistical learning
methods, reinforcement learning
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig , Artificial Intelligence- A modern Approach, Pe
arson Prentice Hall,

2009
11N0XD NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEMS

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To provide basics of neural network and fuzzy logic
. To apply neural networks and fuzzy systems to model and solve complicated prac
tical problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
synthesis of
PO5
modern

PO12
Course Outcome
1. Design neural and fuzzy logic controller for various real time applications.
Basic concepts of fuzzy logic - fuzzy if then rules: two types of fuzzy rules, f
uzzy rule based model for
function approximation, fuzzy mapping rules
fuzzy rule-based models: Mamdani mod
el, TSK model
fuzzy logic in control engineering. Introduction to neural network - simple neur
al nets for pattern
classification: hebbnet, perceptron, adaline- neural network based on competitio
n: fixed-weight competitive
nets, kohonen self-organizing maps adaptive resonance theory: introduction, ART1
backpropogation
neural network
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. John Yen, Reza Langari, Fuzzy logic
Intelligence, control and information, Pe
arson Education
and Kindersley Publishing Inc., 2007
2. Laurence Fausett, Fundamentals of neural networks
architecture, algorithms an
d
application,Pearson Education and Kindersley Publishing Inc., 2008
11N0XE COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION
0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To acquire the basic knowledge about serial communication protocol
. To understand the concepts of CAN and Ethernet communication protocols
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO12
Course Outcome
1. Classify the communication protocols used in real time industrial networks
Allen Bradley (DF1 (Micrologix, PLC5, SLC500))

Animatics (SmartMotor)
Baldor (Ba
ldor Serial)
CTRTU (CTRTU protocol dll and help file)
Danfoss (VLT5000 Series)
Emerson Contro
l Techniques
(CTRTU) Eurotherm (Eurotherm 590/590+, 635)
Flowmax 400i GE FANUC (Series 90 (SN
P) )
Generic (Modbus Master, GPS (NMEA), Modbus TCP/IP)
Horner (CsCAN)
IMO (G7) Mitsu
bishi
(ASeries, FX Series) Omron C Series- PM Control (ECmotor)
Siemens (PPI, USS) Tos
hiba
(Computer Link, Tosvert)

CAN open-DE vicenet J1939
Future)
Modbus TCP/IP
FTP
ASCII TCP/IP HTTP
EGD.
Total: 15 Hours
CsCAN
Ethernet IP
EtherCAT (In
Textbook(s)
1. Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, John Park, Practical Data Communications for Inst
rumentation
and Control, Newnes An imprint of Elsevier publication, 2003.
2. Deon Reynders, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Practical Industrial Data Communic
ations: Best
Practice Techniques, Newnes An imprint of Elsevier publication, 2005.
11N0XF INDUSTRIAL SAFETY STANDARDS FOR INSTRUMENTATION PRODUCTS
0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To acquire basic concepts of instrumentation in food, petro chemical and conti

nuous process
industries
. To provide an awareness on the different safety standards
Program Outcome(s)
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO11

and
s and in
PO12
Course Outcome
CO.1 Apply industrial safety standards for commissioning instruments
Introduction to instrumentation involved in food industry / petrochemical indust

ry /continuous process
industry - Different standard requirements for safety products - Hazardous envir
onment and
instrumentation - Protection methods for instrumentation electronics - Wiring an
d installation best practices
- Reliability and standby requirements for instrumentation - Industrial case stu
dies and examples
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff, Practical Guide To Industrial Safety, Marcel Dekke

r, Inc, 2006
2. Walt Boyes, Instrumentation Reference Book, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2008
11N0XG EMBEDDED SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT USING PIC MICROCONTROLLERS

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To impart necessary knowledge in Embedded systems and PIC

. To understand the concepts of PIC Microcontrollers and its Industrial applicat
ions
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO7
ronmental
PO12
Course Outcome
CO.1 Develop programme in PIC microcontroller
Introduction to PIC Microcontrollers

=C Programming for PIC - PIC Development Too
ls - LED and
LCD Interface and programs - Serial communication - Analog interfacing - Sensor
interfacing - Advanced
PIC Project - Working with SD card - USB bus interface and programming - CAN bus
interface and
programming - Multi-tasking and Real-Time Operating Systems
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Martin Bates, "Interfacing PIC Microcontrollers", Elsevier 2010

2. Martin Bates, PIC Microcontrollers An Introduction to Microelectronics, Elsev
ier 2012
3. http://www.microchip.com/pagehandler/en-us/products/wireless/applications/hom
eindustrial.html
11N0XH DETAILED INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To acquire basic knowledge in understanding the piping and instrumentation dia

grams
. To understand the standards used in industry for different applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcome
CO.1 Develop documentation report for the control and instrumentation project
Process flow diagrams - P&ID concepts - Standards and symbols - Indications on P

&ID - Conventions in
P&ID - Instrumentation standards - API - IEC - ISA - Selection and sizing of ins
truments - Selection and
sizing of valves - Project management
Total: 15 Hours
References(s)
1. Instrumentation symbols and identification - ISA 5.1, International Society o

f Automation
2. Process Measurement Instrumentation - API RP 551, International Society of Au
tomation
11NOXI VALVE DESIGN AND ENGINEERING

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To do sizing calculation for control valves

. To prepare a data sheet for control valve and on/off valve
Program Outcome(s)
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO7
ronmental
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome
CO.1 Design of various control valve for the industrial application
Definition & Purpose - Control valve : Basic types - Major parts of control valv
e - Valve characteristics Key terms of valves - Selection of body material & Trim material - End connectio
ns - Control valve
accessories - Noise in control valve - Cavitation & Flashing - Selection of cont
rol valves - Control valve
accessories - Installation - Overhauling - Leakage class - Simple calculation fo
r control valve using ISA
75.01- Preparation of Data sheets - On/Off valves - Valve types - Solenoid valve
s and types - Pneumatic
and Hydraulic Schemes using SOV - Valve accessories - Actuator sizing for On/Off
valves - Volume tanksPartial stroke testing - Fire safe for On/ Off valves
Total: 20 Hours
References(s)
1. D.Bauman, Control Valve Primer, International society of Automation, 2008

2. Philip Skousen, Valve Handbook, McGraw-Hill publications, 2011
3. Brian Nesbitt, Handbook of Valves and Actuators: Valves Manual International,
Elsevier, 2011
11NOXJ EMBEDDED SYSTEMS IN INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To understand the relationship between basic electronic components and embedde

d system
. To analyse the digital system design
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO12
Course Outcome
CO.1 Develop embedded system for control and instrumentation application
Basic Electrical Components: Resistors, Inductors and Capacitors - Basic Electro

nic Components: Diode,
Transistor, ICs - Common Electric and Electronic Components: Transformers, Volta
ge regulators,
Optocoupler, MOSFET and IGBT - Foundations: Basics - Sketch: Microcontrollers: D
igital pins - Analog
input pins - PWM - Programming technique - FPGA controller: Introduction, I/O co
nfigurations and PC
interfacing - VHDL an overview - Programming methods - Interface with MATLAB - A
n overview of DSP
controller - An overview of dSPACE controller
Total: 20 hours
11N0XK ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS IN INDUSTRIES

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To understand the role of an instrumentation engineers in energy conservation

. To acquire an awareness on EMS 14000 / EMS 50000 standards
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO7
ronmental
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome
CO.1 Apply energy management techniques for the system
Need for energy conservation in manufacturing / process industries - Role of ins

trumentation engineer in
energy conservation programme - Practical case studies on development of instrum

entation and control for
energy management programme - Energy measurement - Data logging methods - Modbus
, Can Bus &
Ethernet protocols - Hands on training in development of an energy management sy
stem with LabVIEW
Total: 15 Hours
11N0XL DESIGN OF LOW COST AUTOMATION FOR INDUSTRIES

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To impart necessary knowledge in designing and building a Low cost automation

controls in
manufacturing and process industries
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO4
search
d synthesis of
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome
CO.1 Design of low cost automation for the system
Introduction to manufacturing and process industries - Need for automation - Nee

d for low cost automation
-Automation system development methodologies - Interoperability in automation pr
oducts - OLE / OPC
Standards - Testing and validation of automation systems - Introduction to facto
ry acceptance test - Hands
on Designing an low cost SCADA with LABVIEW
Total: 15 Hours
11O0PF SOLAR CELLS
0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. To gain knowledge about the solar radiation and solar cells
. To implement the application of solar cells
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO11
and
s and in
Course Outcome
1. Understand various solar cells to generate renewable energy
Solar cell: Introduction - fundamentals of photoelectric conversion: charge exci

tation, conduction,
separation and collection. Design of solar cell: generation of photo voltage I-V
equation of solar cell
solar cell characteristics optical properties
antireflection coating light trapp
ing.
Types of solar cell
Si solar cells Ga As solar cells
thin film solar cells
fabri
cation techniques - dye
sensitized solar cells (DSSC)
operation and properties. Organic solar cell schem
atic representation and
material properties - flexible solar cells - quantum dot solar cells principle a
nd operation - hybrid solar
cells. Commercial and emerging photovoltaic (PV) technologies
thermo photovoltai
cs (TPV).Case study:
Generation of solar power in solar power plants.
Total: 15 Hours
Reference(s)
1. Chetan Singh Solanki, Solar Photovoltaics: Fundamentals, Technologies and App
lications, PHI
Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2012.
2. Adrian Kitai Principles of solar cells, LEDs and diodes: The role of the PN j
unction, WileyBlackwell, 2011.
3. Tom Markvart and Luis Castaner, Solar Cells: Materials, Manufacture and Opera
tion, Elsevier,
2010.
4. P. Wurfel, Physics of Solar Cells - From Principles to New Concepts, Springer
, 2005.
11O0YE POLYMER ELECTRONICS

0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
. Students will gain knowledge about types of polymer electronics and their spec
ific physical and
chemical properties.
. Graduates will become familiar with the methods of preparation and characteriz
ation of specific
physical properties of conducting polymers.
. The current state of theory and modeling of polymer electronics will be presen
ted. At the end of
the course, students will have enough understanding of the main concepts in poly
mer electronic
chemistry and physics to allow them read and understand the most important resea
rch papers in
this field.
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3

ation and
e
sues.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Explain the basic concepts of the polymer electronics.
2. Summarize the chemistry behind polymer processing.
3. Analyze semiconductor and optical properties of polymers.
Conducting Polymers: Introduction

need of conducting polymers (CPs)
methods of s
ynthesis of CPs:
chemical synthesis electrochemical synthesis template synthesis. Properties of co
nducting polymers,
structure
property relationship
types of conducting polymers examples of CPs
pol
yaniline,
polypyrrole
polythiophene.
Liquid crystalline polymers: Optical properties of cholesteric and chiral nemati
cs liquid crystal displays
optical fibre materials.
Analytical Techniques for Characterization of CPs: Impedance spectroscopy
Fourie
r transform
infrared spectroscopy, thermal methods of analysis thermo gravimetric analysis
di
fferential scanning
colorimetry four probe method.
Applications Lithium polymer battery light emitting diodes
lymer solar
cells.
Total: 15 Hours
gas sensors
biosensors po
Reference(s)
1. Skotheim A. Terje, John Reynolds, Handbook of Conducting Polymers, Volume 2,
3rd Edition,
CRC Press, 2007.
2. V. R. Gowariker, N. V. Viswanathan, Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Ag
e International
(P) Ltd., Publishers, 2005.
3. A. M. Donald, A. H. Windle, S. Hanna, Liquid crystalline polymers, Cambridge
University
Press, 2006.
11N0RA RELIABILITY AND SAFETY ENGINEERING

3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
. To study about the sources and effects of hazardous materials
. To get basic knowledge about various safety measuring techniques
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and

ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course the students will be able to:

1. Summarize the concepts of reliability and safety engineering .
2. Select the safety instruments for given application
UNIT I
Safety in Process Plants
Hazards analysis - Energy source
Release of hazardous materials
Fires
Types of f
ires Fire
extinguishers
types and handling. Personal protective equipments Types
Helmets
R
espirator
Air
purification Chemical protective clothing
gloves for heat
electricity and chemic
al Eye stakes
Ear
marks Industrial Hygiene Principles
Health and safety Ergonomics
9 hours
UNIT II
High Pressure Operations
Pressure vessels Storage
der high pressure
Materials of construction
torage Testing of
such chemicals
9 hours
Handling
Transportation
Storage of liquids and gases un
safety precautions. Explosive chemicals
handling and s
UNIT III
Hazards in Industries
Engineering control of hazards and accidents due to fire explosion and natural c
auses in the Industries
Thermal power plant Atomic power plant mining industries
Fertilizers
petroleum r
efinery
Guide
lines for setting standards for safe equipments and safe operation in the above
industries
9 hours
UNIT IV
Safety Education
Types of organization
d Principles and
methods
Training
Safety committee
Safety councils
Safety education
First ai
9 hours
UNIT V
Industrial Safety Acts
Legal aspects of Industrial safety Safety measures in factories act
llution control acts for
water air and land child labour and women employee acts
Mines act
9 hours
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s)
1. EURO Journals of Scientific and Research
2. IJRRSE (International Journal of Research and Reviews in Computing Engineerin
g
3. Ammerican Association of Chemicals
11N0RB PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION

3
0
0
po
Objective(s)
. To acquire basic knowledge in piping and instrumentation diagram
. To enable students to design piping and instrumentation diagram for different
application
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
Course Outcomes

1. Explain the concepts piping and instrumentation
2. Design piping and instrumentation for given application
UNIT I
Introduction
The P and I diagram: symbols and layout
d function symbols
equipment representation
loop diagram
tagging conventions
line an
9 hours
UNIT II
Pumps
Pump selection
pressure drop in pipelines
characteristics
curves for centrifugal pumps
system curve
er shaft seals
power requirements for pumping liquids

net positive suction head
pump and oth
9 hours
UNIT III
Mechanical design of piping system
Wall thickness: pipe schedule pipe supports
pipe fittings
pipe stressing layout
and design pipe size
selection
examples: Basic neutralizer control system, basic column control, batc
h reactor control system,
continuous feed and recycle tank
9 hours
UNIT IV
Process design of flow meters
Process design of fluid moving devices flow meters
process design of orifice met
er process design of
rotameter
two phase flow troubleshooting of fluid flow system
9 hours
UNIT V
Operator graphics
Display of alarm conditions
dynamic elements
e monitoring
process graphic data interfaces
9 hours
Total: 45 Hours
dynamos
displays
process performanc
Textbook(s)
1. Terrence L. Blevins, Mark Nixon, Control Loop Foundation: Batch and Continuou
s Processes,
ISA, 2011.
2. R. K. Sinnott, John Metcalfe Coulson, John Francis Richardson, Chemical engin
eering design,
Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, 2005
Reference
1. S.B Thakore, B.I Bhatt, Introduction to Process Engineering and Design,Tata M
cGraw-Hill, 2007
11N0RC NANOSENSORS
3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
. To learn the design, fabrication and testing of numerous nanosensors for gas,
liquid and biosensing applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of sensors and Transducers
Course Outcome(s)
1. Identify the most appropriate nanosensors for specified applications
2. Understand the underlying sensing phenomena used in nanosensors
3. Evaluate and interpret the information presented by nanosensors
Unit I
Introduction
Nanoscale Science and Technology - Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology
and Engineering Classifications of nanostructured materials - nano particles - quantum dots, nan
owires - Ultra-thinfilms Multilayered materials. Length Scales involved and effect on properties: Mechani
cal, Electronic, Optical,
Magnetic and Thermal properties.
9 hours
Unit II
Preparation Methods
Bottom-up Synthesis-Top-down Approach: Precipitation, Mechanical Milling, Colloi
dal routes, Selfassembly, Vapour phase deposition, MOCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Molecular Bea
m Epitaxy, Atomic
Layer Epitaxy, MOMBE.
9 hours
Unit III
Nanosensors I
Electron Tunneling Displacement Nanosensor
Nanometer Scale Displacement Sensing
by Single Electron
Transistor - Piezo resistive and Piezoelectric Displacement Nanosensors - Optica
l Displacement
Nanosensor - Tunnel Effect Accelerometer - Silicon Nanowire Accelerometer
9 hours
Unit IV
Nanosensors II
Nanoscale Thermocouple formed by Tungsten and Platinum Nanosize strips - Silicon
nanowire
Temperature Nano sensors: Resistors and Diode Structures - Ratiometric fluoresce
nt Nano particles for
Temperature Sensing - Nanogap Pirani Gauge.
9 hours
Unit V
Nanosensors III
Nanosensors based on Surface-enhanced Raman Scattering Fiber-Optic nanosensors Nanograting-based
optical accelerometer - Fluorescent pH-Sensitive Nanosensors - Disadvantages of
optical fiber and
fluorescent nanosensors for living cell Studies.
9 hours
45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Vinod Kumar Khanna,.Nanosensors: Physical, Chemical, and Biological., CRC Pre
ss, 2011.
2. N John Dinardo, .Nanoscale charecterisation of surfaces & Interfaces., 2nd ed
ition, Weinheim
Cambridge, Wiley-VCH, 2000
3. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammearata, eds., .Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properti
es and
Applications., Institute of Physics Publishing, Bristol and Philadelphia, 2000.
Reference(s)
1. K. Goser, P. Glosekotter and J. Dienstuhl, .Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems-F
rom Transistors
to Molecular Quantum Devices., Springer, 2004.
2. Herve Rigneault, Jean-Michel Lourtioz, Claude Delalande, Ariel Levenson, .Nan
ophotonics.,
ISTE.
3. W.R.Fahrner, .Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics
Materials, Devices and Measu
rement
Techniques. Springer, 2006.
11N0RD AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS

3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
. To learn the fundamentals of automobile engineering, automotive applications o
f all types of
sensors and actuators systems.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1
entation
PO2
les of
PO3
ation and
e
sues.
PO6
ety, legal and
ineering practice.
PO7
ronmental
PO8
and norms of
Prerequestie(s)
. Basics of Electronics
. Basics of Sensor and Transducers
Course Outcome(s)

1. Explain the procedure to design key components of sensors and actuators
2. Summarize vehicle Control System applications .
3. Identify and select hardware and software requirements for an automotive cont
rol applications.
Unit I
Automotive Fundamentals
Introduction
use of electronics in automotive
Automotive physical configuration
Sensors and
actuators: Airflow rate sensor Engine crank shaft angular position sensor
Engine
speed sensor Timing
sensor for ignition and fuel delivery
Throttle angle sensor
Temperature sensors
Sensors for feedback
control Automotive engine control actuators.
9 Hours
Unit II
Ignition Systems
Ignition fundamental - Electronic ignition
ignition Direct
ignition Spark plugs.
Programmed ignition
Distributor less
9 Hours
Unit III
Digital Engine Control Systems
Digital Engine Control Features - Open-Loop Control
Electronic
Suspension System Electronic Steering Control.
9 Hours
Electronic Ignition Control
Unit IV
Automotive Monitoring Systems
Fuel Quantity Measurement
Coolant Temperature Measurement
nt Screen
and window system
Door locking and vehicle security
Oil Pressure Measureme
9 Hours
Unit V
Cruise Controlsystems
Typical Cruise Control System
Speed Response Curves
Digital Cruise Control
e Control
Electronics
Stepper Motor Based Actuator Antilock braking System
9 Hours
45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. William B.Ribbens, "Understanding Automotive Electronics", Fifth Edition, But
terworth,
Heinemann Woburn, 2009.
2. Tom Denton, .Automobile Electrical and Electronic Systems., Elsevier publicat
ion, 2004.
Reference(s)
1. Uwe Kiencke and Lars Nielson, "Automotive Control Systems for Engine, Driveli
ne and Vehicle",
Second Edition. Springer, 2005.
2. Tom Weather Jr and Cl and C.Hunter, "Automotive Computers and Control System"
, Prentice Hall
Inc., New Jersey, 2007.
3. Young A.P. and Griffths,L., "Automobile Electrical Equipment", English Langua
ge Book Society
and New Press, 2005.
4. V.A.W.Hillier, "Fundamentals of Automotive Electronics"-Second Edition, Nelso
n Thomes ltd,
United Kingdom, 2001.
Cruis

Eiesyllabus

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Eiesyllabus

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

B.E.

(ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION

BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Grade and ISO 9001:20

SATHYAMANGALAM-638401 Erode District Tamilnadu

Programme Educational Objective(s)

After quite-a-few years of graduation, the EIE graduates would

Mapping of PEOs and POs

B.E. ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech

. Common for all branches of B.E/B.Tech except CSE and BT

PO1, PO2, PO3,

* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech

Vacuum Science and Deposition Techniques

ONE CREDIT COURSES1.

PHYSICS ONE CREDIT COURSE

CHEMISTRY ONE CREDIT COURSE

LabVIEW graphical system design software

Distributed Control System

Advance in industrial automation

PLC and SCADA

Instrumentation System Design

Modeling and Simulation of Non-Linear Systems

. Classes to be conducted for 15 hours duration

11O101 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I

As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to

Knowledge of Mathematics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of T

10. Use Laplace Transform to evaluate, dtttet

4. Find the circle of curvature of at xy...,44aa..

11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

At the end of the course, the student will be able to

Knowledge of Physics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tamil

Acoustics and Ultrasonics

Carbon nano tubes and applications. 9 Hours

11O103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

Knowledge of Chemistry of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tam

Distinguish between hardness and alkalinity.

Characterization of your campus water.

1. P. C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications., New

11O105 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

What are the classifications of stones?

9. Define bearing of a line.

Define leveling & state its Objective(s).

What are the qualities of good building stone?

7. What is the difference between a plan and a map?

6. Explain the method of construction of cement concrete flooring.

Summarize the basic terminology used in computer programming.

Basic Knowledge in Computer Science.

4. Describe the general structure of a C program.

1. Distinguish while loop with do

2. Defend the advantages of using Macro?

6. Write a program to generate the pay slip of an employee using Structure.

Distinguish while loop and for loop.

Compare the keywords

=break and =continue .

D.M.Ritchie and B.W.Kernighan, C Programming Language, PHI, 2007

11N107 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

. To understand the concepts of DC circuit elements, circuit laws and network re

1. Four resistors of 2 O, 3 O, 4 O, 5 O respectively are connected in parallel.

2. A resistance R is connected in series with a parallel circuit comprising two

5. Calculate current through 20O resistance (Figure 2) by using Thevenin s theorem

7. Judge the superposition theorem to calculate the current through 5 O resistan

8. Three resistors 25 O, 50 O and 75 O are connected in star. Examine the equiva